Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPhase 3 Bid Packages Project Manual Book 1~- --- - ,..~..,,~-~.~----- - --.-.~..o._ ~ r a ~~ BUETOW AND ASSOCIATES INC AN ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES COMPANY 2344 Rice Strast 8uit• 210 St. Paul, Mlnnasota 66115 Phase Three -Bid Packages Project Manual m Book 1 THE CITY O~ C®LUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 825 41st Avenue NE ' - Columbia Heights, Minnesota 55421 1 OWNER ' City of Columbia Heights -City Hall 590 40th Avenue Northeast I Columbia Heights, Minnesota 55421 ARCHITECT Buetow and Associates, Inc. ' 2345 Rice Street, Suite 210 St. Paul,~Minnesota 55113 Telephone 651 483-6701 ' CONSTRUCTION MANAGER EDS Builders, Inc. ' 404 A Saint Croix Trail North Lakeland, Minnesota 55043' Telephone 651 436-2426 ' BID TIME 10:00 AM CDT BID DATE Tuesday December 2, 2008 BID PLACE Council Chambers Columbia Heights City Hall ' ISSUED FOR BID October 30, 2008 Buetow Project Number 0806 ' tel 881 483-8701 fax 851 483-2674 www.buetowarchitecta.com ' DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00002 -PROJECT DIRECTORY -BID PACKAGE 8 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER OWNER ' City of Columbia Heights 590 40'~ Avenue Northeast Columbia Heights, MN 55421 ' Phone: 763-706-3600 Fax: 763-706-3601 ' ARCHITECT Buetow and Associates, Inc. ' 2345 Rice Street, Suite 210 St. Paul, MN 55113 Attn: David Dlds ' Phone: 651-483-6701 Fax: 651-483-2574 CONSTRUCTION MANGER E D S Builders, Inc. 404A Saint Croix Trail North ' Lakeland, MN 55043 Attn: Earl (Doc) Smith ' Phone: 651-436-2426 Fax: 651-436-3918 CIVIL ENGINEER Larson Engineering 3524 Lahore Road ' White Bear Lake.. MN 55110-5126 AtM: Eric Meyer Phone: 651-481 9120 ' Fax: 651-481-9201 STRUCTURAL E~NEER Winkler Structural Engineering 10300 Winter Place Eden Prairie, MN 55347 ' Attn: Ronn Winkler, P.E. Phone: 952-941-4825 Fax: 952-941-9546 i 1 00002-1 1 DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CQNTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION OOQ08 -CERTIFICATION -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1 hereby certify that these Specifications were prepared by me or under my direct ' supervision and that I am a duly. licensed Architect/Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. 1 ~. David P. Id , AIA 23541 ~d ~ ~$ •• Architect License Number D e ' BUETOWANDASSOCIATES, INC. Rorin A. Winkler, PE 15938 ~~~~'<a~' Structural Engineer License Number Date ' WIN~KLER STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING ' es D. Dun~evy 19922 l~ ~ ~ +~ ~,Aechat~icaS Engineer l,~cense Number bate ' ~ & E ENC~INEERII~Q, INC. ' David v1r. Hler~errrart 13727 ..~.~ Elec~r'ical Engineer License Number Date 1 IUi & E ENGiNEER~~1G, IND. 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00005 -TABLE OF CONTENT'S -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA IiEIGSTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER BOOK ONE CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY PAGES DIVISION 0 - BIDDINGAND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00002 00003 PROJECT DIRECTORY CERTIFICATION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ' 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00110 SUPPLEMENTAL/SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200 PROPOSAL SECTION 00210 MILESTONE SCHEDULE ' 00220 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 00300 BID DIVISION INDEX AND DESCRIPTIONS 00400 00500 SAMPLE PROPOSAL FORM CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 00600 PRE-CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SUBMITTALS 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00810 SUPPLEMENTAL/SPECIAL CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS ' 00820 ADDITIONAL ARTICLES TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 00830 PREVAILING WAGE DIRECTIVE 00850 INDEX OF DRAWINGS -SEE PLANS ' 00900 CODE REVIEW SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION l -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01025 CONSTRUCTION AND CHANGE DOCUMENTS 01030 ALTERNATES 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01050 01060 LAYOUT AND MEASUREMENTS PERMITS, INSPECTION, AND LICENSING FEES 01061 OFF-SITE DISPOSAL 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS ' 01300 SUBMITTALS 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01513 DEWATERING 01520 SAFETY ' 01545 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK 01570 TRAFFIC, ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY PROTECTION 01580 PROJECT SIGNS ' 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01610 ACCESS, DELIVERY AND STORAGE 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 DUMPSTERS, CLEAN-UP, CLEANING AND FINAL CLEAN-UP 01720 RECORD DOCUMENTS ' DIVISION 04 -MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 00005-1 DIVISION OS -METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055100 METAL STAIRS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055300 METAL GRATINGS DIVISION 06 -WOOD. PLf1STICS. AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 066116 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS 075113 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075423 THERMO PLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SHEET METAL WARRANTY 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPEMNGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083436 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS ~~(~84113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ~b85113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085619 PASS WINDOWS 086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087113 AUTOMATIC DOOR A~Eibr C1~~ ~ ~7d 087163 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE 088100 GLASS GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FIMSHES 092119 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 TILING 095100 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 096700 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 096816 SHEET CARPETING 099000 PAINTING AND COATINGS ~dc~~l iiliglo~ 00005-2 1 ' URETHANE FLOORING DIVISION 1 D -SPECIALTIES 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102213 'WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ' 102226 102613 'OPERABLE PARTITIONS CORNER GUARDS 102813 :TOILET ACCESSORIES 102815 DETENTION TOILET ACCESSORIES 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 105113 METAL LOCKERS 105116 WOOD LOCKERS 105700 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES 107500 FLAGPOLES ' DMSION 1l - EOUIPMENT 111900 DETENTION EQUIPMENT 1 1 1 DIVISION l2 - FURMSHINGS 122113 HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 124813 ENTRANCE MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING ELEVATOR 142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS BOOK TWO CONTENTS DIVISION 1 S -PLUMBING. MECHANICAL 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15200 NOISE, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 15250 INSULATION 15310 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15350 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 15401 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 15405 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEM 15406 RAINWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM 15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15501 FIRE PROTECTION 15601 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM 15702 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 15766 INFRARED HEATERS 15801 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM 15825 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS 15826 GEOTHERMAL GROUND LOOP DESIGN-BUILD SPECIFICATION 15830 AIR HANDLING UNITS 15840 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 15901 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM (DDC) 15920 GAS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 15950 ELECTRICAL WIRING 15975 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 00005-3 Division 16 -Electrical 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16140 WIItING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS 16452 GROUNDING 16461 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16470 PANELBOARDS 16475 FUSES 16476 DLSCONNECT SWITCHES 16478 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16495 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16500 LIGHTING 16621 PACKAGID ENGINE GENERATORS 16740 VOICE AND DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 16800 SYSTEMS 16915 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT Division 17 Security. Voice and Date. Television 17050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 17721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 17724 SECURITY 17741 VOICE AND DATA CABLING SYSTEMS 17770 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 17780 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEMS 17781 TELEVISION SYSTEMS END OF SECTION 00005-4 1 DMSION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 00010 -ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER Sealed bids for the Columbia Heights Public Safety Building will be received by the City of Columbia Heights, at 590 40'~ Avenue Northeast, Columbia Heights, MN 55421 until ' 2:00 p.m. on Tuesday, December 2, 2008, at which time they will be opened and read publicly in Council Chambers, Room 219. Bids received after this time and datie will be returned unopened. The Owner will not accept faxed proposals. This Bid Package will consist of a separate sealed bid for the folkwving Bid Divisions: Bid Division Bid_Division Title ' CH3-04-1 Masonry CH3-05-1 Miscellaneous Metals CH3-07-1 Roof System CH3-08-1 Apparatus Bay Doors, Garage Doors, Overhead Doors, Sectional Doors CH3-08-2 Aluminum Entrances, Storefront, Glass and Glazing, Aluminum Windows t CH3-09-1 Wood, Plastics and Composites, Rough Carpentry, Finish Carpentry, Interior Architectural Woodwrork, Solid Surface Fabrications, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Flush Wood Doors, Access Doors and Frames, Detention Doors and Frames, Door Hardware, Tubular Skylights, Metal Lockers, Wood Lockers, Toilet Compartments, Toilet Akxessories, Wire Mesh Partitions, Corner ' Guards, Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, Fire Extinguishers, Flag Poles, Unft Skylights, Tubular Skylights, Specialties, Detention Equipment, Horizontal Louver Blinds, Entrance Mats and Frames CH3-09-2 Gypsum Board Systems and Metal Framing CH3-09-3 Porcelain Tile CH3-09~ Resilient Flooring, Carpet ~ CH3-09~ Specialty Floor$ ' CH3-09-6 Acoustic Ceilings CH3-09-7 Painting CH3-14-1 Hydraulic Elevator CH3-15-1 Plumbing CH3-15 2 Mechanical, Temperature Control, Balancng CH3-15-3 CH3-15~ Geothermal Drilling and Piping Fire Protection System CH3-16-1 Electrical, Fire Alarm, Security, Voice and Data, Television ' Bidding documents prepared by Buetow and Assocates, Inc. will be available for public . inspection on or about October 30, 2008. Bidding documents will be at the job site office of the Construction Manager, $25 41 ~ Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN; at the office of ' the City of Columbia Heights, 590 40~' Avenue Northeast, Columbia Heights, MN; the McGraw Hill Construction Plan Room, Minneapolis; Reed Construction Data; and the Builders Exchanges of Minneapolis, St. Paul, Duluth, Rochester, Altoona, and LaCrosse, ' and on-line at www.ersdigftaf.com. 00010-1 Bidders may obtain a set of bidding documents by contacting Engineering Repro Services at (763) 694-5900. Plan deposits and mailing fees are to be sent to ERS at 3005 Ranchview Lane North, Plymouth, MN 55447. Refundable plan deposit of $50.00 per set made payable to the City of Columbia Heights. Mailing fees are to be paid direct to Engineering Repro Services under separate check. There will be a Pre-Bid Meeting held on Thursday, November 13, 2008 at 10:00 a.m. at the Site construction trailer, bring hard hats and safety vests. In case of rain the meeting will be held at City Hall, 590 40~' Avenue NE, Columbia Heights, MN. Ail bidders are encouraged to attend. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of five peroent (596) of the bid or in the form of a certified check; cashiers Bieck or corporate surety bond, payable to the City of Columbia Heights, as a guarantee that if the proposal is accepted, the bidder will execwte the contract and file the required bonds within ten (10) days after notice of award of contrail. The bid division(s) being bid is (are) to be identified on the outside of the envelope. The successful bidder will be required to famish and pay for a satisfactory Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond in the final sum of the full amount of the contract as awarded and provide a Certificate of Insurance. The City of Columbia Heights reserves the right to retain the bid security of the three lowest bidders for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days subsequent to the opening of bids. The City of Columbia Heights reserves the right to rejeil any or all bids or to waive any informalities in the bidding and further reserves the right to award the contrail in a manner which is in the best interest of the City of Columbia Heights. END OF SECTION 0000-2 1 ' DIVISIQN 0 ~ BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00100 - INStRUCTION TO BIDDERS -BID PACKAGE S COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER The lnstn~ctions to Bidders is AIA Document A701, issued by the American Institute of ' Architects, 1997 ~ition. 1 END OF SECTION 00100-1 1 ' : Document A701'" -1997 . Instructions to Bidders ' 1'orthsbNawing PROJECT: (Name and location or address): Colnmbia Heights Public Safety Center 825 41st Avenue Northeast ' Columbia Heights, MN 55421 THE OWNER: (Name and address): ' City of Columbia Heights, Individual 59040th Avenue Northeast Columbia Heights, MN 55421 ' THE ARCHRECT: (Name and address Bnetow and Associates 2345 Rice Street ' Suite 210 St. Paul, MN 55113 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 . BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS S BIDDB~IG DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS B POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this doaurrent has added informaton needed for Its completlan. The author may also have revved the text of the original AIA standard form. An Ad~dons mid vetetr~-rs f3spvrtthat notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form lard ~ available from the author and should be revletred. A verUcat Ihre in the tail margin of thls document indkstes where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted tram the odgirlal AIA text This document has important legal corrsequerxxte. Consultallon with an altamey Is enoou~ed with respect to Its cmripletion or modi(icatian. AU1 Document A781'~' - ta97. Ccpyripht ©1970.1974;1978,1997 and 1997 by The Amerkerr Institute of Ardtllede. All rights resarwd. wAnttlNti: This AU1° Docurnsnt le protected b7- U.B. Gopyrlpht law and hrtpnagonal 7lreatles. Urmulhorteed reproduc9on ar dlstr~uNon of this AIA° Dacranent, or any poraorr of It, may result In aevera dvN and crhrrlnat psradtlee, and wal be praeetxaad to the mardmtan extent posslbts under the Iaw. lltle ~ document was pmdixed by AIA eo[hrara at 11:11!5 on 07M812008 under Order Na1000081084 1 which eaptres on 7M 51L00B. and b rrot for resale. flap Notes: (9 87 9078 81 91 ARTICLE 1 DEFINRIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or levitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid foray and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Cotmrau~ac, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications a~ all Addenda issued priatr to execution of the Contract. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Constntction, AIA Document A?Al, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addends are written ~ graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. § 1~L A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Docimnents as the base, to which Work maybe added or from which Work may be deleted fa sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.B An Altaloate Bid (air Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid m be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the ca:respoitding change in the Waudr, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an e~umt stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurum~t for materials, equipment cur seu; vices or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Doatments. § 1.6 A Bidder is a person oar entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requitements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 ASub-bidder is a peu~on or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment cur labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 21 The Bidder by making a Bid iepresatts that: § 21.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation rehttes to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid c~itcurretttty or ptreseatly under constriction. § Z.1.Z The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 21.3 The Bidder has visited the site, became familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be perfa~rmed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. § 2.1A The, Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without excepticn. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 CORES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain compk~e sus atF the Bidding Doctmnears from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement cur Imritation m Bid in the member and far the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within tat days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit A Bidder receivirtg a Contract award may main the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. AIA~ocumsM ATOM -1997. t:opyrlpht O 1970,1974,1978,1997 and 1997 by The American Instltute of Architects. All rlphts reaerwd. wAFNaNO: This AIA DocianeM Is prdaeted by U.S. Copyrlphl Law and InMmatlonal Troatles. Unautlwrlaed reproduction or distribution of Ihis AIA° Doasneny or any portlon of If, rray nsua In asvere civil and crlmbml psmltlea, and will be proescittsd to the mardmum extent possible urrNr the law. This document was produced by AW soflwere at 11:126 an 07H6/2006 ursier Order No.1000861084 1 which e~lres on 7/1512009, and b not for resale. User Notes: (8678078619) ' § 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued din~ctly to Subfiidders unless specifically coffered in the Advertisement a Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instrlrctions to bidders. ' § 3.13 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. ' § 3.1 r4 The Owner and Architect may nulloe copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. § 32 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 8.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concmrentiy or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is ' submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. § 8.2.2 Bidders and Stib-bidders requiring clarification or ir~etation of the Bidding Documents shall mare a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date far receipt of Bids. § 3.T.3 Intrrpr+emtions, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretatiotas, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding. ' and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 83 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.8.1 Tlm materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required ' function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been ' received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Stich requests shall include the name of the material or equipment far which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Wodc, including changes in the work of ' other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. ' § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. II 1 § 8.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for is the Contract § 3.4 ADDENDA § 8.~.i Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing ofl-ice to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. § 8.~2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspcction wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that § 3.4.3 Addends will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 8A~4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidden has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall ac>atowledge their receipt in the Bid. AIA Docslnsnt A701re -1987. CopyrlpM®1870,1974,1978,1997 and 1987 by The Amsricen Ire~IWle of Anctdtecla. All Nphts reaerwd. WARNING: This AIA° Oocumsrd Is protsolsd bl- U.S. Oopyrlgld L.srr and hrmrrntlorrol Ttesties. Uneulharlmd reproduotlon ar distrlbutlan of ffiN AIA° uocument, or any patlon of It. rruty resua M severe dull and ahnNNti pensltlss, and wlll be prasculed to the sssdnssn sxrsnt possllNe under the law. 7Tds document was produced by AIA soRaiare at 11:12:55 on 07/1812009 under Order Na100099~1094_t sfilch e~l-es on 7N5I2D08, and hz not for resale. Uasr NoMs: (3978078819) ARTICLE 4 BroaNa PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents, § 4.12 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in anon-erasable medium. §4.1.3 Sums shaD be expressed in both words and figures. In comae of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall § 4.1.4 Interlit>eations, alterations and eaasan;s must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. Tf ~ change in the Base Bid is required. ewer `No Change." §4x1.6 Whei+e two or mare Bida far designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, static the Bidder's refusal bu accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall maloe no additional stipulations on the bid farm nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal farm of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to peaform within the jurisdidian of the Warlc. Bach copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder bo a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incozprnatian and have the oorparabe seal affixed. A Bid sd~rniitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. § 42 ero s~uRRY § 42.1 Each Bid shaII be accompanied by a bid security in the fmm and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to famish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 62. § 1.22 if a surety band is required, it shall be wtittea on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided is the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall a~x oo the bond a certified and cnaent Dopy of the power of attorney. § 42.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security a'f Bidders to whom an award is being oo~nsidered untt7 either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids maybe withdrawn ar (c) all Bids have been rojectad. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF Bros § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party recxiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. if the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEAL,ED BID ENCI.oSBD" ~ the face thereof. § 1 r32 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior bo the time and date far receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be teturrred unopened. § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. §4.34 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile a~ other electrmrically transmitted bids will not be considered. § 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WRHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated dme period following the time and date desigttaeed for the receipt of Bide, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. alA~ ocurretrt Arot~ - itaer. • t arc, Tara, care,188Y and isa~ by The /1mer~an instlhrte rn ~uctdtech. ai Warn: nnsrYed. wanano: lids ~Y P~Do GYM sswraMcrlmMal k~lerrreaorwt'Metlas. Unaulhortred raproduclbn a dlstribullan of this AIA~ Docunsn~ ~ 4 panottlaa, and w01 be prosegrted to the merdevum extsm posetWe under ttre bx. 7)Ya document was produced by AIA aoflware at 11:12:55 on W/1e/2,008 under Order Pb.10009640e4 1 which ergrlres on 7/1512008, and is not for resale. User Notts: (e87e07861~ ' § 4Aw2 Prim to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified m withdrawn by notice to the party n~eiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the ' signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time- stamped by the receiving party on m before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amomit of the original Bid. ' §4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated fm the receipt of Bids provided that they are then folly in conformance with these Instnrctions to Bidders. §4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ' ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.10PENMIG OF BIDS ' At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement m Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and wiII be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. ' § 52 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shaD have the right to reject any m all Bids. A Bid not aocannpanied by a requred bid security m by other data required by the Bidding Docmnents, m a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. ' § 5.5 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the nsquirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. ' The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid n~ived and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. t §5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order m combination, unless otherwise spocifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates aceepted ' ART~LE 6 POST-BID II~ORNUITION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S alALIF1CATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's lZualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously ' required and submitt~ as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCWL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than ' seven days prim to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have bcen made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder wiIl not be required to execute the Agreement betwcen the Owner and Contractor. ' § 6.5 SUBMITTALS § 6.5.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulates in the Bidding Documents, aver notification of selection fm the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: ' .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufactw~eas, products, and the suppliers of principal items m systems of materials and equipment proposed fm the Wmk; and 1 names of pennons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials m equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed fm the principal portions of the Wodc. § 6.5.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and respoosibr7ity of the persons m entities proposed to fiunish area perform the work described in the Biasing Al ~Do~nt A701"'-1997. Capyripht O 1970,1974, 7978,1997 and 1~7 by The American InstlgRa of Mchi[ec~. All NpMs rowrwd.~ ARNINQ: 'tha AlA Doaanant M protected by U.S. Cepyrtpht law and trNwnstlorrol Trearlea. Unautlrormad npraductlon or dlstr~uaon of tlrb AIA Document, or an7 Portion of Ir, may remora M nvara o1v11 and crrrrNrsl perrrutles, end wal bs prancuted to Nre maxhnua.odene poadbls under the law. Thls document was prodrroed by AIA aoriarer~e at 11:t2~5 on o7narzaoa under Order No.t000961094_t whNeh expims on 7n51Z009, and la rex br resale. Iher Nolan: (9879078619) § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Arcltect wt7l notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation. has reasonable objection to a Person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder easy, at the Bidder's option, (1) arithdraw the Bid err (2) submit an acceptable substitute person err entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid at Alternate Bid to mover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may aocxpt the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal err disquali5c~tion, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Pennons and entities Proposed by the Bidder and tD whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Worn for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written oonseat of the Owner and Ardtitect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the famishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the coat of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources. changes in cost will be adjusted sa provided in the Contact Doclmnents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF 80ND3 § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the requin~ bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is W be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.Z Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Perfornoance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contracx Stirm. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on err after the date of the C~ttac~t. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorneyan-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the sunyty to'affix thereto a cerUified and clttz+ent SPY of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document A101, Stattdard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment rs a Stipulated Sum. nu Docansrn a7o1+• -1997. topytr~trt m /970,197 t ere, tsar mrd reel by 77ra Anrerirarr tnstaute of Ardrteaa. na riptns reaerwd wnnttttNa: Tut. AIA• Document is protected h1- U.S. Copyrlpht taw and hrtenretlanel TY'eaaee. Umrrtlrorlasd rspradcrctlan err dhtrWutton or thls AIA• DooumerM. err arty portlan of It, may resua in severe civil end crlmhrat psnaltles, and wet bs prosecuted to the maslmren axEenR poaelbls under ttrs taw. Thb documers rats produced by AY1 aoRwatre ffi 11:12:55 on 07/iB/200e under Order No.1000a6'IOe4_t rdtlch exptras an 7/1517009, and b rot for resale. User Notes: (397907861 1 ' DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00110 - SUPPLEMENTAUSPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ' BID PACKAGE S -COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS AMEND, SUBTRACT OR ADD TO THE INSTRUCTION TO ' BIDDERS AIA_DOCUMENT A 701. 1997 EDITION. ARTICLE 1 ' 1. DEFINITIONS ' 1.2 In the first line change the word "A201" to A201/CMa'. 1.10 Add a new paragraph: ' "A Bid Division is a unit of work to be performed by a contractor and his subcontractors which forms part of the total project. The term Bid Division should not be confused with the term Technical Division. Basically, the Technical ' Division specfies quality and performance, the Bid Division denotes work scope." 1.11 Add a new paragraph: ' " A Bid Division Description is a written description Of the scope of work to be performed by a bidder in a specific Bid Division." ' AR ICLE 3 ' 3. BIDD ING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies ' 3.1.3 Insert the words ", Construction Manager after the wont "Owner" in the first line. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents. ' 3.2.2 Delete the period at the end of the paragraph and continue the sentence as follows: "... or make verbal request to the Architect at the Pre~Bid Meeting." ' 3.3 Substitutions ' 3.3.1 Add the following: "VVltere several materials are specified under the same heading, selection shall ' be at the option of the Bidder. Where materials or product are specified acxompanied with the phrase "Approved Substihrtfon", or similar verbiage, the B'~dder may submit materials or products for approval in accordance with Subpan~graph 3.3.2.° ' 3.3.2 In the second line change the word "ten" to "seven working". ' 3.4 Addenda. 00110-1 3.4.3 Delete this paragraph. 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Preparation of Bids 4.1.1 Delete the remainder of sentence after the wore! "forms" and add the following words "provided by the Construction Manager." 4.1.2 Delete this paragraph. 4.1.7 Delete the words "copy of the' after the first word "Each". Delete the first two words in the third sentence "Each copy. ARTICLE 6 6.1 POST BID INFORMATION 6.1 Contractor's Quaycation Statement Insert the words "Construction Manager or" prior to the v~rord "Architect" in the first line. 6.3 Submittals 6.3.1 In the second line, replace the word "Architect" with Construction Manager". Delete the colon after the wont °vrriting", and add the following: `All Pnr-Contract Performance Submittals as speafied in Section 00600°. Delete items .1, .2, and .3 from this paragraph. 6.3.2 Insert the words "Construction Manager'" prior to the word °Architect" in the first line. 6.3.3 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with °Prior to the award of the Contract, the Construction Manager will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner, Construction Manager, or Arohitect, after due investigation,' has reasonable and substantial objection to any person or entity on such list, and refuses in whiting to accept such persons or organization. The bidder may, at their option, (1) withdraw the bid; (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity at no change in cost; (3) submit an acceptable substitute pen3on or entity with an adjustment in the Bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution". H.3.4 Insert the words ", Construction Manager" after the word "Owner" in the first line. Insert the words ", Construction Manager" after the word "Owner" in the third line. A TtCLE 7 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond Requirements 00110-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7.1.3 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with "The sureties shall be authorized and licensed to conduct surety business in the state in which the Project is located, and the sureties and any reinsuring companies shall be listed in the current Department of the Treasury Circular No. 570 with an undenn~riting limitation equal to or greater than the Contract Sum " 7,1.4 Add a new paragraph: "The Owner reserves the right to waive bonds on contracts' ARTICLE 8 S. t=ORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR In the second line change the wont °A101' to A101/CMa'. END OF SECTION 00110-3 ' DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00200 -PROPOSAL SECTION -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.0 ATTENTION ALL BIDDERS ' A. This is a Construction Management Project. There is no General Contractor. All contractors on this Project are considered prime contractors. The Owner will award separate contracts for all Bid Divisions ' involved in the Project. The Project will be administered by the Construction Manager. ' 2.0 BID DIVISION UNIT A. Although each Bid Division irnolves an obvious and recognizable segment of "cornentional" subcontracting, multiple contract performance requires that adjustments be made to permit the completion of a bid division as a construction unit. Each contractor is to review the total scope of their responsibilities with respect to the work of their division and provide for same in their proposal. 3.0 BID DIVISION DESCRIPTION A. For clarfication purposes the scope of the work involved in each Bid ' Division is defined in three categories: '"EXCLUDED", "INCLUDED", and "ALSO INCLUDED". B. Information provided under the heading "EXCLUDED" is for the purpose of ' noting a pant of beginning and/or to eliminate fringe involvements that might be Inadvertently included in the scope of the work. Information under this heading is not always required to deflne a Bid Division. C. 1 INCLUDED items are the obvious and/or conventional work scope of a Bid Division. " " " D. Information under ALSO INCLUDED points out the "uncorwentional and/or less obvious items of work included in the Bid Division, as well as the fringe involvements that could inadvertently be missed in evaluating the scope of the work. Information under this heading is not always required to define a Bid Division. ' 4.0 MANDATORY INTERFACES A. The scope of each contractors work is defined in the description of their Bid Division. Each contractor shall familiarize themsehres with the requirements of those Bid Divisions that interface with their own. They shall consider the fact that their work follows the work of another contractor and that still another contractor will interface with the work of their Bid Division and the intent is to produce a complete and finished construction Project. 5.0 PRE-BID MEETING A. A Pre-Bid Meeting with interested bidders shall be held after documents have been sent out and before the bid date. The purpose of the meeting ' is to familiarize bidders with the project. The Owner, Architect, Engineers, and Constructioh Manager shall be in attendance. The schedule of the ' 00200-1 meeting will be sent out by the Construction Manager. Bidders are urged to attend. 6.0 BIDDING AND AWARD A. All bidders must submit their proposal on the form provided. Failure to do so may jeopardize the offerers chances of receiving an award. B. There is no limit as to the number of Bid Divisions any one contractor can bid. However, each contractor is requested to eater a figure for each and every bid division they are bidding, which may be a consideration for award in that division. Space is provided in the Proposal Form to accommodate combined proposals, if any contractor bidding more than one division wishes to be considered on this aRemate basis. C. The award of ail Bid Divisions will be based on the dollar value of the proposal, the qualifications of the contractor and ability to perform. Bidders are cautioned to fill in ail blanks on the pages of the proposal they are submitting by noting "N/A" in those blanks not applicable to their particular proposal. 7.0 ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF BIDS A. The bidder by submitting their bid: 1) acknowledges the right of the Owner to accept or reject any and all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received, 2) acknowledges the right of the Owner to accept any combination of Bid Divisions the Owner desires, and 3) represents that they will accept award, regardless of who the other Bid Division contractors may be. 8.0 MILESTONE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. A milestone construction schedule for the Project has been developed by the Construction Manager. Each bidder is required to review the milestone dates indicated therein and to either endorse or amend them within the context of the portion(s) they are bidding. A space is provided on the Proposal Form for specific endorsement or amendment. B. The milestone dates as endorsed and/or amended by the successful bidders and accepted by the Owner will be used as the basis for a Construction Schedule by which the project will be bulb. C. The affect of any amendment to the schedule shall be considered when selecting a contractor for performance of the work due to the fact that time is of the essence to the Owner. Bidders are obligated to comment on the milestone dates if, in their opinion, they do not realistically depict the time interval for performance of the work in their bid division(s). END OF SECTION 00200-2 1 1 1 DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQiTIREMENTS SECTION 00210 - MILESTONE~SCHEDULE -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER The Milestone Schedule indicates completion dates for significant activities during the construction period. Completion of an activity is considered to be attained when the Work of subsequent activities can proceed in accordance with their scheduled dates. During the construction period, a Construction Schedule will be collectively developed and updated from current information and input from Contractors. The Construction Schedule will detail contractor performance responsibilities between project milestones. ' ACTMTY DESCRIPTION Phase 1 and 2 Earthwork is 90% complete. ' The office~rst floor Precast will be completed December 1, 2008 Lower leve will be enclosed the week of December 15, 2008 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 Phase 3 Temporary Electrical Basement Lower Level Rough in Plumbing Lower Level Rough in Electrical Masonry Office Space Bearing Masonry Apparatus Bay Bearing Office Structural Steel Roof Precast Roof Concrete Office Roofing Office First Floor Concrete Apparatus Bay Joist & Deck Apparatus Bay Roofing Interior Framing Finishes START DATE WEEK OF END OF SECTION 00210-1 December 8, 2008 December 15, 2008 December 15, 2008 December 15, 2008 February 2, 2009 February 2, 2009 February 9, 2009 February 16, 2009 February 16, 2009 February 2009 March 9, 2009 March 2009 March 2009 April -August 2009 1 ' DNISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00220 - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. A geotechnical exploration was previously conducted by Braun Intertec Corporation and is available for review at the City of Columbia Heights Office. ' 1.02 USE OF DATA A. This report is provided for the Engineers use in design and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. The report is not a warranty of ' subsurfaoE conditions. No responsibility is assumed by the Architect, Construction 11Aanager or the Owner for subsoil quality or conditions. B. Bidders should visit the site and acquaint themselves with all existing conditions. Prior to bidding, Bidders may make their own subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves as to site and subsurface conditions, but all such investigations shall ' be performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Owner. 1.03 OWNER'S TESTING AGENCY A. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing firm. This testing firm will take random soil compactbn tests prior to placement of concrete slabs and footings. They will also do compressive testing on concrete cylinders prepared by the Contractor. All special inspection testing by Owners consultant. ' B. Owner testing agency will not be responsible for testing or verifying proper soil compaction for each individual Contractor. Proper execwtion of the work is the Contractors responsibility. C. Any extra or additional testing as a result of the Contractor failing to have his work acceptable at the time of the original testing, shall be home by the responsible ' Contractor. D. Reference Section 01400 Quality Control for speafic testing requirements. END OF SECTION ' oo2zo-1 Braun gdeMe Caponelion Phone. 65 1 487 3245 1826 Buerkle Road Fmc 651.487.1812 Saint Pouf, MN SS 110 Web: browunbdec.com September 12, 2008 Mr. Earl "Doc"' Smith EDS Builders 404A Saint Croix Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 Addendum 1 to Geotechnical Evaluation Columbia Heights Publ'IC Safety Building 41~ Avenue Northeast Columbia Heights, Minnesota Dear Mr. Smith: Project SP-0i3-01291B This letter serves as Addendum 1 to our Geotechnical Evaluation Report for this project, dated May 12, 2008. This Addendum addresses increasing the allowable soil bearing capacity from 3,000 to 4,000 psf. Background in our Geotechnical Evaluation Report, we recommended a maximum allowable bearing capadty of 3,000 pounds per square foot. Structural bads were not finalized when we wrote our geotechnical report, so we assumed a maximum column load of 500 kips and maximum wall load of 10 kips per linear New information According to Mr. Ronn Wtnkier, the~structural engineer for this project, the maximum column load for this project will be about 420 kips, with most of the column loads around 350 kips or less. Mr. Winkler also reported that the wall loads will range from about 6 to 10 kips per linear foot. Recommendations Based on the provided structural loads and the soil conditions observed during construction, it is our opinion that the allowable bearing capacity for this project can be increased to 4,000 psf, while maintaining settlement limits of about 1 inch or less of total settlement and about ~ to'r4 inch of differential settlement between columns and perimeter footings. This addendum should be attached to and considered a part of our original Geotechnical Evaluation Report. With the exception of any results or rewmmendations changed by this Addendum, the information contained in our Geotechnical Evaluation Report remains unchanged. ___..________._..-'---"---'--... ... /x..1..1..,.«.... CA...........l.......L .L.._.._L .__.-__ _._~ .._._.. EDS Builders Project SP-08-01291E September 12, 2008 Page 2 If you have any questions about this Addendum, please contact Steve Martin at 651.487.7Q26. Sincerely, BRAUN INTERTEC CORPORATION Professional Certification: ` i hereby certify that this plan, specification or report , was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional under the laws of the State of Minne g~~Gq~~ ~~ ~~~~: ~ . Steven B. Martin, PE = PROFESSIONAL:: w , ' ~ML~ER t Senior Engineer ! License Number: 41271 ~''• 4tS71 .•p~a.~. ~l~.•~ ....••' Marts L. Jenkins, PE Senior Engineer Attachments: , c: Mr. Kevin Hansen, City of Columbia Heights Mr. David Olds, Buetow and Associates , Mr. Ronn Winkler, WlnklerStructural Addendum ' ~~ . I NTE RTEC I' Geotechnical Evaluation Report Public Safety Building 41 ~ Avenue NE Cdumbla Heights. Minnesota PrePar+ad for City of Columbia Heishts Professi~rai Certification: I hereby certify that this plan, specif'~cation, or report was prepan:d by me or under my direct supervision and that 1 am a duly Lioer~sed Professio~~~rrgineei under the laws of the State of Minoan i:?~i. _ ~~~ Steven B. Marlin, PE Associate Principal L'u;ertse Number: 41271 May 12, 2008 Protect SP-08~ i'1291 Braun Intertec Corporatbn ~.. qg9 * a~0 ~ ? x• :+ BRAIN INTERTEC May 12, 2008 Mr. Kevin Hansen City of Columbia Heights 590 40a' Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Re: Geotechnical Evaluation Public Safety Building 41°t Avenue NE Columbia Heights, Minnesota Dear Mr. Hansen: &aen httertae Corporatbn Phone: 651.487.3245 1 B26 Buerkls Road Far. 651487.1812 Saint Pad, MN 55110 Web: bnauninlertecaom Project SP-08-01291 We are pleased to present this Geotechnical Evaluation Report for the Columbia Heights Public Safety Building. A summary of our results, and a summary of our recommendations in light of the geotechnical issues influencing design and construction, is presented below. More detailed information and recommendations follow. Summary of Results We completed thirteen standard penetration borings as part of our evaluation. Borings ST-1, ST-2 and ST-3 initially encountered pavements. The pavement section was approximatey 12 to 14 inches thick (3 to 4 inches of bituminous and 8 to 11 inches of.aggregate base) at each boring location. Existing flit was encountered below the pavement materials at the boring locations. The existing fill extended ~ depths of between about 1 to 20 feet. Having penetrated the pavement and existing fill, glacial till was encountered at ail boring locations. The glacial till was encountered to various depths between 7'f to 25 feet. However, pockets of glacial outwash were also encountered in Borings ST-12 and ST-13. The outwash encountered to termination depth at both locations. Groundwater was not observed as our soil borings were advanced. Based on the moisture contents of the geologk: materials encountered, it appears that groundwater was below the depths explored. Summary of Recommendations The geotechnical issues influencing design of foundations and slabs appear to consist of the follow items: 1) Existing fill was noted to be locally loose or soft in the footprint of the old school building. Uncontrolled fill will induce settlement under structural and traffic loads within the building footprint and pavement areas espedaily at Boring ST-4 where the existing till extends relatively deep, 2) I_ocaly soft glacial soils may also be encountered during excavation, and 3) Clayey soils when wet can become increasingly difficult to work with, causing rutting and overall general weakening of the soil under construction traffic. Based on discussions and regarding these Issues, we developed recommendations, provided in the attached Geotechical Evaluation Report. Remarks ~t RAID NI I NTE RTEC Celebrating 50 years of growth through sen+ice and trust City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 2 Thank you ~ making Braun iMertec your geotechnical consultant for this protect. If you have questions about this report, or if there are other serves that we can provide in support of our work to date. please call Sarah Mattes at 651.487.7090. . Sirtoerely, BRAUN INTERTEC CORPORATION ~~""~" ` ~ Sarah A. Mattes Staff Engineer ~~~ Steven B. Martin. PE Associate Prindpal c: Mr. Doc Smith, EDS Builders Mr. David Olds, Buet~nr and Associates Cieotedxdcal Report s Rau N INTERTEC 1 Description a B. C. D. Table of Contents ~e Introductbn .........................................................................................................................1 A.1. Project Description .................................................................................................1 A.2. Purpose ..................................................................................................................1 A.3. Background Information and Reference Documents ............................................ .1 A.4. Site Conditions .................................:..................................................................... 2 A.S. Scope of Servioes .................................................................................................. 2 AS.a. Reconnaissance ................................................................................ 2 A.5.b. Staking and Surveying .......................................................................2 A.S.c. Subsurface Expioration ...................................................................... 2 Results ...............................................................................................................................3 B.1. Exploratbn Logs .................................................................................................... 3 B.1.a. Log of Boring Sheets ......................................................................... 3 B.1.b. Geologic Origins ................................................................................... 3 B.2. Geologtc ProfUe ..................................................................................................... . 3 B.2.a. Pavement Materials ........................................................................... 4 B.2.b. Existing Fdl .........................................................................................4 B.2.c. Glacial Soils ....................................................................................... a B.2.d. Inferred Geologic Material Properties ................................................4 B.2.e. Groundwater ..........................:........................................................... 5 B.3. Laboratory Test Results ......................................................................................... 5 Basis for Recommendations ............................................................................................... 5 C.1. Design Details ........................................................................................................ 5 C.1.a. Building Structure Loads ................................................................... 5 C.1.b. Pavements and Traffic Loads ............................................................ 8 C.1.c. Anticipated Grade Chart~s ............................................................... 8 C.1.d. Settfi~ng Pond ..................................................................................... 6 C.1.e. Precautions Regarding Changed Information ................................... 8 C.2. Design and Construction Considerations ............................................................... 8 Reoommendations .............................................................................................................. 7 D.1. Building Subgrade Preparation .............................................................................. 7 D.1.a. Exc~vations ........::............................................................................. 7 D.1 .b. Excavation Support ........................................................................... 8 D.1.c. Selecting Excavation Backfill and Additional Required Fill .......:........ 8 D.1.d. Placement and Compaction of Backfill and FAI ............:.................... 9 D.2. Spread Footings ..................................................................................................... 9 D2.a. Embedment Depth ............................................................................. 9 D.2.b. Net Avowable Bearing Pressure ........................................................ 9 D.2.c. Settlement ..........................................................................................9 D.3. Below Grade Walls .............................................................................................. 10 D.3.a. Drainage Control .................................. ..................................... .... 10 D.3.b. Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill ........................... 10 D.3.c. Configuring and Resisting Lateral Loads ......................................... 10 D.4. Interior Slabs ........................................................................................................ 11 D.4.a. Subgrade Modulus .......................................................................... 11 D.4.b. Moisture Vapor Protection ............................................................... 11 BRAi~N INTERTEC Table of Contents {Continued) D.S. Exterior Slabs ....................................................................................................... 12 D.B. Pavements ........................................................................................................... 12 D.B.a. Pavement Subgrade Preparation .................................................... 12 D.B.b. Subgrade ProoF-Roll ........................................................................ 13 D.B.c. Design Sections ............................................................................... 13 D.B.d. Materials and Compactlon ................................................................. 13 . D.B.e. Subgrade Drainage ............................................................................ 14 D.7. Utilities ................................................................................................................. 14 D.7.a Subgrade Stab~ization ...... ............................................. -...... 14 . D.7b. Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill ........................... 14 D.B. Settling Pond ........................................................................................................ 14 D.9. Construction Quality Contrd ......................................................................:......... 14 D.9.a. Excavation Observatlons ................................................................. 14 D.9.b. Materials Testing ............................................................................. 14 D.9.c. Pavement Subgrade Proof-Roll ....................................................... 15 D.9.d. Cold Weather Precautions .............................................................. 15 E. Procedures ........................................................................................................................ 15 E.1. Exploratory Borings .............................................................................................. 15 E.2. Material Classification and Testlng .................................................. ............... .... 15 E.2.a. Visual and Manual Classific:ation ..................................................... 15 E.2.b. l..aboratory Testing ........................................................................ 16 E.3. Groundwater Measurements ............................................................................... 18 F. C~ualiflcations ............................:........................................................................................ 16 F.1. Variations in Subsurface Conditions .................................................................... 18 F,1.a. Material Strata ..... ......................................................................... 16 . F.1.b. Groundwater Levels ........................................................................ 16 F.2. Conttnuityof Professional Responsibillty ............................................................. 17 F.2.a. Plan Review ..................................................................................... 17 F.2.b. Construction Observations and Testlng ........................................... 17 F.3. Use of Report ....................................................................................................... 17 F.4. Standard of Care .................................................................................................. 17 Append'a Boring Location Sketch Log of Boring Sheets Desortptive Terminology 1 ii 1 1 1 saauN INTERTEC ~i. q~ 1 * 1 ~p ~ ~ .~ seAUN INTERTEC A. Introduction A.1. Project Description Braun Inlarlee Corporation 1826 Buerltle Rood Soinl FOoul MN 55110 Phone: 651.487.3245 Fox: 651.487.1812 Web: bnwninierleccam This Geotechnical Evaluation Report addresses tfle construction of the proposed Columbia Heights Public Safety Building. The scope of the project is shown in the site plan provided by Buetow and Associates in the Appendix. A.2. Purpose The purpose of our geotechnical evaluation per the RFP provided by EDS Builders, dated March 26, 2008: ^ characterize subsurface conditions within the proposed Public Safety Building, ^ provide recommendations for the preparation of the subgrades for support of foundations, slabs, pavements and utilitles, ^ provide recommendations for paving thicknesses at concrete, light-duty bituminous, medium-duty bituminous and heavy-duty bituminous, ^ provide recommendations for slab thicknesses at interior offices, apparetus bay and parking garage, ^ provide recommendations for exterior stoops, ^ provide soil analysis to 15 feet within proposed settling pond. A.3. Background Information and Reference Documents To facilitate our evaluation, we were provided with or reviewed the following information or documents: ^ Site plan provided by Buetow and Associates ^ Geologic atlas ~RAVN INTERTEC Celebrating 50 years of growth thtr-ttgh service and trust City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 2 A.4. Site Conditions Our reference documents indicate that there was a school budding on the south end of the proposed site which has been demolished and irs footprint backfilled. No records have been provided for compaction testing on the backflll material or of excavation observations after the removal of the structure. Currently, the site slopes down on the south end to a relatively flat site. Bituminous pavements partially cover the site, while the remaining portions consist of landscaped areas. A.S. Scope Of S~rvice8 Our scope of services for this proj~t was originally submitted as a Proposal to Mr. Doc Smith of EDS Buildere who provided authorization to proceed on April 8, 2008. Tasks completed in acxordance with our authorized scope of services are descxibed blow. Our scope of services was performed under the terms of our June 15, 2008, Generel Conditions. A.S.a. Reconnaissance We performed a reconnaissance of the site primarily to evaluate equipment access to exploration locations. A.5.b. Staking and Surveying We staked expbration locations by measuring dlmenslons from nearby buildings or other site features with a tape or surveyor's wheel at approximate right angles from those references. Surface elevations were measured using a surveyor's level. We referenced surface elevations to the fie hydrant kxsrted at 41'~ Avenue and Jackson Street NE, whose top nut was reported to be at elevation 925.1 b from the certificate of survey provided by Kemper il< Associates, Inc.. A.S.c. Subsurface Expioradon We drilled thirteen standard penetration test borings for the proposed Public Safety FadGiy as shown on the attached drawing provided by Buetow and Assocates. Borings were drilled as listed below. ^ Six borings were drilled within the proposed building, extending them to 25 feet. ^ Five boring were drilled within proposed pavement areas, extending them to 10 feet. ^ One boring was drill within the proposed settling pond, extending it to 15 feet. s Ra,u ~ 1NTERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 3 ^ One boring was drilled within an underground hdding tank excavation area assodated with NEI ' College of Technology, extending R to a depth of 15 feet This boring was intended to be Boring ST 7 as shown on the sketch, however Boring ST-4 erxxwr>tered the deep fill placement after the . tank removal. ' Penetration tests were rmed at 21/2-foot vertical irrtenrals to a depth of about 15 feet, and at 5 Toot P~ ' irrtervals at greater depths. t B. Results ' B.1. Exploration Logs B.7.a. Log of Boring Sheets ' Log of Boring sheets for our penetration test borir~s are included in the Append'a. The logs identify and describe the geologic materials that were penetrated, and present the results of penetration resistance, laboratory tests performed on penetration test samples retrieved from them, and groundwater ' measuremerrts. . ' Strata boundaries were infen+ed from changes in the penetration test samples and the auger cuttings. Because sampling was not performed continuously, the strata boundary depths are only approximate. . The boundary depths likely vary away from the boring locations, and the boundaries themselves may also ' occur as gradual rather than abrupt transitions. ' 6.1.b. Geologic Origins ' Geologic or~ins asslghed to the materials shown on the bgs and referenced within this report were based on: (1 } a review of the background inFormatbn and reference documerrts cited above, (2) visual ciassiflc~tton of the various geologic material samples retrieved during the course of our subsurface ' exploration, (3) penetration resistance, (4) laboratory test results, and (5} available common knowledge of the gedogic processes and ernirorunents that have impacted the site and surrounding area in the past 8.2. Geologic Profile ' As revealed by the soil boring logs, the site is underlain with a variety of geologic materials including . existing fill, glac~l soils and alluvial soNs. ~ ~ seauN ' IN7ERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-012g1 May 12, 2008 Page 4 B.2.a. Pavement Illlaberials Pavement was encountered at Borings ST-1, 5T 2 and ST-3. The pavement section was approximately 12 to 14 inches thick (3 to 4 Inches of bituminous and 8 to 11 inches of aggregate base) at eadi boring Location. B.2.b. Existing Fill Existing ffA was encountered below the pavement materials at the boring locatbrs3. The existing fin extended to depths of between about 1 to 20 feet. The existing fill consisted of poory greded sand (SP}, poorly graded sand with silt (SP-SM), silty sand ISM), dayey sand (SC) and sandy lean day (CL). The fill was shades of brown and gray and was typically moist, but occasionally wet. B.2c. Glacial Soils Having penetrated the pavement and existing fnl, gl~lal tral was encountered at a8 boring locations. The glacial tnl was encountered to various depths between 7'~4 to 25 feet. The gladal bpi consisted of sandy lean clay (CL) and dayey sand (SC) that was shades of gray and red brotim and was gener~ly moist to wet. However, pockets of glacial outwash were also enoour~tered in Borings ST-12 and ST-13. The outwash soils were encountered to termination depth in both Borings. The glacial outwash consisted aF fine-to- medium grained poorly graded sand (SP}, poorly graded sand with silt (SP-SM) and silty sand ISM) that was typically moist. After penetrating the pavement, existing fill, giac~l till and glacial outwash, Borings ST-1, ST-3, and ST-8 encountered glaciofiuvium to termination. The glacioflwium consisted sAt (ML} that was shades of brown and gray and was moist to wet. B.2.d. Inferred Geologic Ma~riaf Properties The results of our penetration resistance testing are summarised below in Table 1. Commerrts are provided to qualify the significance of the results. Table 1. Penetration Resistance Data Range aF Panstration tieologic Material Classification Resistarmss Comments SP, SP-SM, 3M, 3C, Variabb end locally poorly Existing Fill CL WH* to 29 BPF compacted 4 to 2g BPF, Generally Glacial Boils- Cohe$ive CL, SC between 7 to 16 BPF Rather soft to very stlff Very loose to medium Gladat Soils-Coheabnless SP, SP~M, SM, ML 2 to 34 BPF dense WH' = weight of hammer B RAU H INTERTEC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 Cry of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page S 6.2.e. Groundwater Groundwater was not observed as our roil borings were advanced. Based on the moisture contents of the geology materials encountered. it appears that groundwater was below the depths explored. B.3. Laboratory Test Results Results of our laboratory tests are presented below ~ Tables 2. Table 2. Laboratory Classification Trot Results Location Sample Depth (it) Classification AAoisture Content ('16) Pen~rrt Passing a 8200 Steve Liquid Limit Plastic Index ST 1 2.5 CL 15 - - - ST-1 7.5 CL 17 51 - - ST-3 5 CL 17 - - - ST~3 7.5 CL 18 - 30 16 ST-4 5 SP~3M 7 12 - - ST-5 2.6 CL 14 - - - ST-6 5 CL 23 -.- - - ST 7 5 SC 15 49 - - ST-8 5 SC 21 42 - - ST 9 5 CL 16 - - - ST 10 2.5 SC 17 - - - ST 10 5 CL 15 - 27 14 ST 11 2.5 CL 14 - - -- ST 12 2.5 CL 18 47 - - ST-12 5 CL 18 - - - ST 13 ~ 7.5 CL 16 - 28 14 C. Basis for Recommendations C.1. Design Details C.1.a. Building Structure Loads We understand fat the proposed Public Safety building will oons~t of a one to fifinrso-story structure with below grade parking. We assume an approximate lower level slab elevation of 908 therefore, con esponding to a first floor elution of 922. sRAUa lNTERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 6 We halve assume the below grade will be oonstruc~d with concrete or masonry block and above grade levels w11 be constructed with steel framing. We anticipate that maximum bearing wail loads associated with the proposed one to two-story public safety building will be 10 kips per lineal foot {klf); column loads will be S00 kips per column. C.1.b. Pavements and Traffic Loads Paved areas will presumably surround the proposed structure. We have not been provided with detailed traffic information, but have assumed traffic will likely consist of automobiles, light-duly trucks and large fire trucks therefore requiring Ught-duty and h~vy~duty pavement sections. We ts~ve assumed that the average daYy w~l acxount to approximately 200,000 Equivalent 1 &kip Single Axle Loads in heavy-duty areas and 60, 000 in light-duty areas. The pavements may consist of bituminous and/or concrete. C.1.c. Anticipated Grade Changes Grading plans have not been developed for this site, however per discussions with Mr. Doc Smith of EDS Builders, approximately 8 to 10 feet of ftll will be placed to bring the site up to elevations comparable to aunt embankments. C.'I.d. Settling Pond We understand that a settling pond will be located in the rarthwest portbn of the alts. Based on the site plan and site sunray provided by EDS Bu~ders, we assume proposed pond elevation to be approximately 909. C.7.e. Precautions Regarding Changed Information We have attempted to describe our understanding of the proposed construction to the extent it was reported to us by others. Depending on the extent of available b~formation, assurhptions may have been made based on our experience with simNar protects. ff we have not correctly recorded or Interpreted the project details, we should be notfied. New or changed information could require additional evaluation, analyses and/or recommendatbns. C.2. Deslgn and Colristiuction Considerations The geotechnk~l issues influencing design of foundations and slabs appear th consist of the follow Items: Existing fill was noted to be locally loose or soft in the footprint of the old school building. Uncontrolled fill w~l induce settlement under structural and traffic loads within the building footprint and pavement areas espedally at Boring ST-4 where the existing fill exthnds relatively deep. BRwuN INTERTEC City of Columbia Heights ' Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2908 Page 7 1. ' Even highly compacted fdl win settle slightly under it's own weight, and when All depths exceed 8 to 10 feet, that settlement could exceed the proposed structures settlement tolerance. Given the anticipated deep f~i areas within portion of the bunding pad, consideration should be given to the fill materials placed at or below e~evatlon 888. p silty or dayey soils are used as fill in these areas, a construction delay would be required between grading and foundation placement, dean sand should be considered for the fll material to accelerate th~ process prior to footing placement and t limit post-construction settlement ' ^ Locally soft glacial soils may also be encountered during construction near the surface and/or direly below the existing fill. These sons should be removed and replaced prior to the placement of foundation, pavements or additlonal fill. ^ CI soils when wre rt'~cularl du s i and fall moat can become in asi aYeY t. Pa Y ~9 Pr ~ hs, cre ngy difficult - th wrork with, causing rutting and overell general weakening of tl~e soil under construction traffic. if this does occur restabiization options indude: l) scarifying, blending and recompactlng soils or 2} subcutting and removing the soil that has become soft or wreak and repladng with a granular ' subbase. Based on discussions regarding our Andings, tore develop recommendations for the proposed Public ' Safety BuAding foundation, basement slab and pavemerds. Those recommendations are presented below in Section D. D. Recommendations ' ~ In accordance with our findings, below are our recommendations for the proposed Public Safety Building foundation, basement slab and pavements. D.1. Building Subgrade Preparation ' D.1.a. Excavations We recommend stripping aq surface vegetation, root zones, pavements and existing fnl be removed from ' below the building footprint and oversize area. Anticipated eoccavatlon depths and bottom elevations for each of the soil borings located within the proposed building are shown below to Table 3. 1 sRwua INTERTEC City of Cdumbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 8 ~ ao~e a. excawaao n uepms ana tsottom ~tevaaons Location Surface Elevation , A~cipated Excavation Depth {ft) t:orresponding Bottom Elevation Anticipated Fill Depth (tt) STS 904.83 7 %s 897.33 10° 8T-4 90423 20 584.23 22° 8T$ 905.35 734 897.85 23° ST 10 906.79 234 904.29 1 ST 12 908.63 2 ~ 804.13 3° ST 13 906.39 734 898.89 22° ° = Mtidpated fill depth to reach 1 foot below fitshed floor elevation in the proposed fire station (elevation 922} b = Mtidpated fill depth to reach Hoot below basement floor elevation (elevation 908). F_xcavatton depths will vary between the soil borir~ locations. Portions of the excavatbns may also be deeper than indicted by the soil boring profile. Contractors should also be prepared to extend excavations in.wet orfine-grained soAs to remove disturbed bottom soils. To provide lateral support to replacement baokflll, additional required fill and the structural loads they wl~ support, we recommend oversizing {widening) the excavations 1 foot horizontally beyond the outer edges of the building perimeter footings, or pavement limits, for ead~t foot the excavations extend below bottom- of-footing or pavement subgrade elevations. D.i.b. Excavation Support The existing fill is considered a Type C and glacial soils are a Type B Soil under OSHA guidelines. Unsupported excavations in the existing fill should therefore be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 134:1(horizorttal:vertical) or for glat~al soils a gradient no steeper than 1:1 (horrrontal:vertical}. D.1.c. Selecting Excavation Backflll and Addlttonal Required Fill On-site soAs free of organic soil and debris can be considered for reuse as backflll and till. The existing fill and glacial tIN, however, being fine-grained, will be more difficult to compact if wet or allo~w~ed to become wet, or 5 spread and oompac~ed over wet surfaces. Imported material needed to replace excavation spots or balance cut and fill quantities, may consist of sand, silty sand, clayey sand, sandy lean clay or Lean clay. We recommend, however, that the plastic index of these materials not exceed 15. s RAU ~ INTERTEC I 1 City of Columbia Heights Project SP 08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 9 However, for c~nstructlort issues stated in Sectbn C.2, we r+eoommend that Imported material needed to replace excavation spots at an elevation greater than 898 within the proposed building footprint, consist of sand having less than 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. D.1.d. Placement and Compaction of Baclcflll and Fill We recommend spreading backflll and fill in loose lifts no thk~CCer than 12 inches. We recommend compacting backfit and fill in accordance with the criteria presented below in Table 4. The relative compaction of utUity backflll should be evaluated based on the structure below whidi it is installed, and vertical proximity to that structure. Table 4. Compaction Recomm®ndafforw Summary Reference Relative Compaction, penxnt (ASTM D 0l:8 - standaM Proctor) Moisture Content Variance from Optimum, percentage points At or below elevation 898 100 -1 to +3 Above elevation 898 98 -1 to +3 Below slabs 95 -1 to +3 Bekm- Pavemerrts, within 3 filet of subgrede elevations 100 ~ -1 to +3 Below pavements, more than 3 feet beknnr subgrade elevations 95 -1 tD +3 Below landscaped surFac~es 90 -6 to +5 ' D.2. Spread Footings D.2.a. Embedment Depth For frost protection, we recommend embedding perimeter footings 421nches b~alow the lowest~exterior grade. Interior footings maybe placed directly below floor slabs. We recommend embedding building ' footings not heated during winter construction, and other unheated footings associated with canopbs, stoops or sidewalks f30 irrc~es below the lowest exterior grade. ' D.2.b. Net Allowable Bearing Pressure We recommend sizing spread footh~gs to exert a net allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per ,` square foot {psf). This value includes a safety factor of at least 3.0 With regard to bearing Capacity failure. The net allowable bearing pressure can be increased by one-third its value for occasional transient bads, but not for repetitive loads due to traffic, or for other live loads from snow or occupancy. ' ' D.2.c. Settlement ,. We estimate that total and differential settlements among the footings will amount to less than 112 and 1 inch, respecttvety, under the assumed loads. ssauw ' ~ INTERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-U8-U12g1 May 12, 2008 Page 10 D.3. Below-Grade Walls D.3.a. Drainage Control We reoornmend Installing subdrains belurid the below grade walls, adjacent to the wall footings, below the slab elevation. Preferably the subdrains should consist of perforated pipes embedded in washed grave{, which in turn IS wrapped in filter fabric. Perforated pipes encased in a fiRer'sodc"and embedded in washed gravel, however, may also be consklered. We rewmmend routing the subdrains to a sump and pump capable of routing any acxumulated groundwater to a storm sewer or other suitable disposal site. D.3.b. Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill Unless a drainage composite ~ placed against the backs of the exterior perimeter below gaede walls, we recommend that backfill placed within 2 hori~orrtal feet of those walls consist of sand having less than 50 percent of the pantiles by weight passing a #40 sbve and less than 5 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. Sand meeting this gradatkm will need to be Imported. Exterwr badcf~ll not capped with slabs or pavement should be capped with at least 6 inches of topsoil to limit the inflitration of surface drainage into the bacttfl1l. The flrdshed surface should ado be sloped tD divert water away from the walls. D.3.c. Configuring and Resisting Lateral Loads Recommended equivalent fluki pressures for wail design based on active and at-rest earth pressure conditk-ns are presented below to Table 5. Assumed wet unit badcfil weights. and sternal friction angles are also provkted. The recommended equivalent fluid pressures in partkxalar assume a level backtfll with no surcharge - they would need to be revised for sloping backfill or other dead or live loads that are placed within a horizorrtai distance behind the walls that ~ equal to the height of the walls. Dur design values also assume that the walls are drained so that water cannot accumulate behind the walls. These values are un factored. e Rau a INTERTEC I 1 i I t City of Columbia Heights Project SP 0&01291 May 12, 2008 Page 11 ~ anie r,. Kecom menaea eserow-a reas Warr design Param eter Equiv~ent Equivalent Equivalent Fluid Fluid Fluid Friction Pressure, Pressure, A~ Pressure, Wet Unit Weight Angle Active Case Rest Case Passive Case Sliding Backfill (pcf} (mil) (PSI (imfl (P~1 Frkdlon Imported Sand {SP or SP~M) 120 32 32 60 442 .6 On-sibs Soils 125 25 57 73 300 .3 To design for sand backflll, excavations required for wall construction should be wide enough and flat enough so that sand is present within a mne that (1) extends at least two hortmntal feet beyond the bottom outer edges of the wall foot~gs (the wall heel; not the stem) and then (2) rises up and away from the wall at an angle no steeper than t30 degrees from horimntal. We anticipate these geometric conditions will be met if the excavations meet OSHA requirements for the types of soils likely th be exposed In the excavation, and the wail footings are cast against wood forms rather than a(ry portbn of the excavation. D.4. Interior Slabs D.4.a. Subgrade Modulus We recommend using a modulus of subgrade reaction, k, of 150 pounds per square inch per Inch of deflection (pad to design the slabs. D.4.b. Moisture Vapor Protection H floor coverings or coatings less permeab~ than the concxete slab will be used. Hre recommend that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be place immediately beneath the slab. Some contractors prefer to bury the vapor retarder or barrier•beneath a layer of sand to reduce curling and shrinkage, but this practice risks trapping water between the slab and vapor retarder or barrrer. Regardless of where the vapor retarder ~ barrier is placed, we recommend consufling with floor covering manufacturers regarding the appropriate type, use and installation of the vapor retarder or barrier th preserve warranty assurances. sR~-uN INTERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-fl1294 May 12, 2008 Page 12 D.S. Exterior Slabs F_rcterior slabs vrill be underlain with existing ftil or gladal tiN soils that will consist of daysy soils, whk~r are considered moderately to highly frost susceptible. While grading to direct surface drainage away from buildings and toward arm crotch basins or other dreinage structures help limit the potential for saturation and subsequent heaving to ocasr, even limited amounts of ground movement can be detrimental to slab performaa~ce or a nuisance to building employees and guests. H heaving is a concern, one way io help limit Its potential occurrence is b remove frost-susceptble sods present below the overlying slab 'footprints' dawn to bottom-af~ooting grades and r~laoe them wig non-frost-susceptible sand having less than 6 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. for large slabs aril kxrg sidewalks in front of bulldirrg entrances, excavations to remove frost-susceptible soNs maybe extensive. However, removingthefrost-susceptible soils from below the slabs at entrances only could cause abrupt differential heaving on either side of the entrances. To both reduce excavation quantities and the potential for unfavorably abrupt differential heaving tD ocxur near building entrences, we recommend sloping excavations made to remove frost-susceptible soils from below slabs at a 3:1 (horizontal:vertkad), or flatter, gradient. The bottoms of the excavations should be sloped to dreln away from the buNding, and perforated drainpipes should be Installed along the bottom outer edges of the excavations to cotiect and dispose of water that could otherwise accumulate within the backfill. One alternative for reducingfrost-related heave is to place at least 2 inches of extruded polystyrene foam Insulation below the slabs and extend it approximately 4 feet beyond the outer edges of the slabs. The insulation may have to be buried below a cushion of sand or gravel to protect it during constnrctbn. Another altiemative is to support the slabs on frost-depth footings, and suspending the stabs at least 4 Mrclres above the underlyk~ subgrade soils to acxommodate heaving witiwut it affecting the slabs. D.6. Pavements D.B.a. Pavement Subgrade Preparation After stripping existing pavements and topsoti, we recommend scarifying, blending and reoompacting the exposed subgrade materials to at least 96 percent of their maximum standard Proctor dry densities or 100 percent >f in the top 3 feet, prior to placing any additional fill to meet design grades. Erccavation backfAl and add~lonai required fill placed in pavement areas should be spread and compacted in accordance with the recommendations provided above in Section D.1. BRwuN INTERTEC I City of Columbia Huts Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 13 D.6:b. Subgrade Proof Roll Prior to placlng aggregate base material, we recommend proof-rolling pavement subgrades to determine ff the subgrade materials are loose, soft or weak. and in need of further stabilization, compaction or subexcavation and recompaction or replacement. A second proof-roll should be performed after the aggregate base material is in place, and prior to plating bituminous or concrete pavement. D.6.c. Design Sections Laboratory tests m determine an R value for pavement des~n were not included in the scope of this project. Based on our experience with similar projects in the area. however, R is our opinion that an R- ' value of 20 can be assumed for design purposes. ' Based upon the aforementioned traffic loads and an Rvalue of 20, vue recommend a light~cluty pavement section that includes 3'f: inches of bituminous pavement (a 1 ~-inch surface course over a 1 '~4 -Inch base course}over 9 inches of aggregate base material. For hea~ry-duty areas, we recommend 4 inches of bituminous pavement {a 2 -inclt surface course over a 2-inch base course}over 10 inches of aggregate base material. 1 1 Where concrete pavements will be utilized, Hre recommend that at least 6 inches of aggregate base be placed over the subgrede to provide more uniform supportfor the concrete, and to provide a more stable working platform for construction. We recommend a minimum 5-inch thick concrete stab in fight-duty areas and a minimum 6-inch thick concrete slab (n heavy-duty areas. The above pavement designs are based upon a 28-year performance Iffe. TF~s is the amount of time before major reconstruction is antlclpa~d. This performance Iffe assumes maintenance, such as seal coating and cxack sealing, is routinely performed. The actual pavement Iffe will vary depending on variations an weather, traffic conditions and maintenance. D.6.d. AAateriais and Compactlon We recommend specifying crushed aggregate base meeting the requirements of Minnesota Department of Trensportation (MnIDOT} Speclfu:atbn 3138 for Gass 5. We recommend that the bituminous wear and base courses meet the requirements of 3peciflcatkurs 2360. Type MV. We recommend the aggregate gradaCrons for the asphalt motes meet Gradation Number 3 for the base purse and Gradation 3 for the surface course. We recommend the Performance Graded Asphalt cement be a PG 64-28. We recommend that the aggregate base be compacted to a minimum of 100 peroent of its maximum standard Proctor dry density. We recommend that the bituminous pavement be compacted to at least 92 percent of the maximum ~eoretical density. sRau~ i NTE RTEC City of Columbia Heights Protect SP-08-01291 May 92, 2008 Page 14 We recommend specifying concrete for pavements that has a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi, and a modulus of rupture (Mr) of at least 600 psi. We also recommend Type I cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150. We recommend specifying 6 to 7 peroent entrained air for exposed cona+ete to provide resistance to freeze-thaw deterioration. We also recommend using awater/cement ratb of 0.45 or less for concrete exposed to deicers. D.6.e. Subgrade Drainage We recommend installing perforated drainpipes throughout pavement areas at low points and about catch basins. The drainpipes should be placed in small trendies extended at least 8 Inches below the granular subbase layer - or aggregate base material where no subbase is present. D.7. Utilities D.7.a. Subgrade Stabilization We antidpate that utilities can be installed per manufacturer bedding requirements. D.7.b. Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill We recommend selecting, pladng and compac~ing utflily badcfill in accordance wfth the recommendations provided above in Section D.1. D.8. Settling Pond Based on the soil profile of Boring ST-9 located in the proposed settling pond, we estimath an infiltration rate with range from approximately 1x10 to 1x10 inches per hour (iNhr) (Table 4.1 of Das, Print es of Gent~hniral En~~jpg~ 2nd Edition). Once pond elevation has been established, we can perform double-ring infiltrometer testing, >f more'axurate inffltration rate estlmate is needed. D.9. Construction Quality Control D.9.a. Excavation Observations We recommend having a geotechntcal engineer observe all excavations related to subgrade preparation and spread footing, slab-on-grade and pavement consttvctton. The purpose of the observations is to evaluate the competence of the geologic materials exposed In the excavations, and the adequacy of required excavation overstzing. D.9.b. Materials Testing We recommend density tests betaken in excavation baddlfl and additional required fill placed below spread footings, slab-on-grade constructlon, beside foundation wails behind basement walls, and below pavements. sR~-uw INTERTEC City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 12, 2008 Page 15 ' We recommend Marshall tests on bituminous mbces to evaluate strength and air voids, and denstiy tests to evaluate compaction. We also recommends{ump, air content apd strengtlr tests of Portland cement concrete. D.9.c. Pavement Subgrade Proof-Roll We recommend that proof-rolling of the pavement subgrades be observed by a geobechnical engineer to determine 8 the results of the procedure meet project specifications, or delineate the extent of add>tional ' pavement subgrade preparation work. 1 D.B.d. Cold Weather Precautions If site grading and constriction is antidpated during cold weather, ail snow and ice should be removed from cut and fill areas prior to additional grading. No fill should be placed on frozen subgredes. No frozen ' soils should be used as fill. Concrete delivered to the site should meet the temperature requirements of ASTM C 94. Concrete should 1 not be placed on frozen subgrades. Concrete should be protected from freezing until the necessary strength is attained. Frost should not be permmed to penetrate below footings. .: E. Procedures E.1. Exploratory Borings The penetration test borings were dr~led with a truck-mounted core and auger dry equipped witty holk~ stem auger. The borings were performed in accordance with ASTM D 1586. Penetration test samples were taken at 2112- or 5~oot intervals. Actual sample intervals and corresponding depths are shown on the boring logs. ' E.2. Material Classification and Testing . E.2.a. Visual and Manual Classification The geologic materials enoourrtered were visually and manually classified in aooordanoe with ASTM Test Method D 2488. A chart explaining the classification system is attached. Samples were sealed in jars or ' bags and returned to our facilKy for review and storege. ' BRAYN INTERTEC City of Columbia He(ghts Project SP-08-41291 May 12, 2008 Page l6 E.2.b. Laboratory Testin® The results of the laboratory tests performed on geologic material samples are noted on or follow the appropriate attached exploration logs. The tests were performed in accordance with ASTM or AASHTO procedures. E.3. Groundwater Measurements The drtlers checked for groundwater as the penetration test borings were advankx;d, and again after auger withdrawal. The boreholes were then bat.kfi~ed or allowed to remain open for an extended period of observation as noted on the boring logs. F. Qualifications F.1. Variations in Subsurface Conditions F.7.a. Material Strata Our evaluatson, analyses and recommendations were developed from a limked amount of site and subsurface information. 8 is not standard engineering practice to retrieve material samples from expbratlon locations continuously with depth, and therefore strata boundaries and thbknesses must be inferred to some extent. Strata boundaries may also be gradual transitions, and can be expected to vary in depth, elevatlon and thickness away from the exploration locations. Variations in subsurface conditbns present between exploration locatbns may not be revealed until additbnal exploration work is completed, or oonstructbn commences. if any such variatbns are revealed, our recorrimendations should be re-evaluated. Such variations could increase constnx~ion costs, and a contingency should be provided to accommodate them. F./.b. Groundwater Levels Groundwater measurements were made under tl~e oonditbns reported herein and shown on the exploration logs, and interpreted In the text of this report. It should be noted that the observation period was relatively short, and groundwater can be expected to fluctuate in response to rainfall, flooding, irrigation, seasonal freezing and thawing, surface drainage modifications and other seasonal and annual facbrs. s RAU H I NTE RTEC ' F.2. Continuity of Professional Responsibility 1 1 1 1 I 1 I City of Columbia Heights Project SP-08-01291 May 92, 2008 Page 17 F.2.a. Plan Review This report is based on a Nmited amount of information, and a number of assumptions were necessary to help us develop our recommendations. It ~ recommended that our firm review the geotechnk:al aspects of the designs and specifications, and evaluate whether the design is as , if any design changes have affected the validity of our recommendations, and if our recommendations have been correctly interpreted and implemented in the des~ns and specifications. F.2.b. Construction Observations and Testing It is recommended that we be retained to perform observations and tests during construction. This will allow correlation of tiie subsurface conditions encountered during construction with those encountered by the borings, and provide continuity of professions! responsibility. F.3. Us® of Report Thy report Is for the exclusive use of the parties to which ft has been addressed. Without written approval, we assume no responsibility to other parties regarding this report. Our evaluation, analyses and recommendations may not be appropriate for other parties or projects. i=.4. Standard of Care In performing its servM.es, Braun Intertec used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar dreumstances by reputable members of its professbn currently practidng in the same locality. No warranty, express or implied, is made. s~wut~ iNTERTEC 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 Appendix e~auN INTERTEC 0~ I~ 1 t 1 0~ 0 ~ ~~ .~ N ~ ~~~ ~~O ~~~ ~ ~~ 0 ~ 0 0 ~~ ~J~~ Jac ~D ~ ~ ® 0 ~ ~ o ~ €ro ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ 0 ~e a ~~ ' '" LOG OF BORIWG BRAVN ' lNTERTEC Braun Project SP-08-01291 BoRtrtG: ST-1 Geotechnical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safety Building ' 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, Minnesota ' DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: 8114" HSA, Autohamrnsr DATE: 4121/08 SCALE: 1" ^ 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Descriptbn of Materials BPF iNL MC Teals or Notes 808.7 0.0 Symbol (ASTM D2488 or D248 96 96 PAV 3" Bituminous ova 71",Aggregate Base. 907.0 1.7 ' 906.2 2,5 FILL FILL• Clayey Sand, fine- to medium-grained, dark CL brown, moist. 7 15 SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, brawn, moist, medium. (Glacial Tile 9 17 51 ~ _ ~ _ 10 .S ' c . 14 ' ~ - a _ 19 ' o € 893.7 15.0 ML SILT, w0h Sand lenses, brown. moist, medium dense. 28 ' 892.7 18.0 {Gladofluvium ~ _ END OF BORING. a - Water not observed with 941/2 feet of holhw~r-stem ' ~ • • auger in the ground. Water not observed to ceve~in depth of 12 feet immediately after wRhdrawing fhe auger. b B i th ld ll d en ac or ng i e . 1 „ - 3s ~ _ ~ _ IS ~ - _ ~ $ S raun nbrrec -1 papa or 1 sRAUN~ I NTE RTEC LOG OF BORIN~i' Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-2 Ceotachntcal Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safely Buliding 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, AAinnesota DRILLER: Q Hanson METHOD: S 1!4" HSA, Autoharrrnsr DATE: 4121108 SCALE: 1" ~ 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Description of Materials BPF VYL Tests or Holes 906.5 0.0 mbol D2488 or D248~ PAV 4" of Bituminous over 8': Aggregate Base. 905.5 A FILL FILL: Clayey Sand, fine- to meduim~grained, trace of _ Gravel, dark brown, moist. _ 4 4 _ 5 10.0 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, gray, molt, 9 .5 11.0 ~, (Glacial Tnq - END OF BORING. - Water not observed with 9112 fed of hdlow-stem auger in the ground. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 7 feet • immediately after wfthdrawing the auger. Borirg then badcfHled. r b~il0-Ylitll pf"WI If1Af~i' b0IpW8Wf1 ~~ 1' 1 1 C t B RAV H'" ~ NTE RTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-3 Geotechnrcal Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Hsights, Minnesota DRILLER: 6. Henson METHOD: 31M" HSA, Autohammer ~ DATE: 4!21108 SCALE: 1" = 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Descxiptlon of Materiak BPF VIiL MC Tests or Notes 904.8 0.0 Symbol (p-STM D?A88 or D2487) 96 PA 3° of B'duminous over 1.1' of Aggregate Base. - 90$.7 2 FILL FILL• Lean Clay, dads gray, moist. _ 5 4 17 7. 6 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY, brown, moist. n~ilrer soft. 5 18 LL = 30 (Glacial Till) PI =16 8 11 • 13 884.8 20.0 SM SILTY SAND, ftne- ~ med'nun-greined, with layer of 26 Lean Clay, tn~oe of Gravel, reddish-brown, moist, medium dense. - (Glacial Tllq 879.8 0 ML SILT, fine-wined, brown, molt, medium dense. 14 878.8 .0 (G~) END OF BORING. Water not observed tocave-In depth of 16 feet - immediately after w~hdrewing the auger. - Boring then backfllled. ,~d~ moon ,nusrmG vc,~ywiuw~ sra pope ~ or ~ BRAV N'" INTERTEC LOG OF BORING'' Braun Project SP-08-07289 BORING: ST-4 Geotechniical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, Minnesota DRILLER: Q Banton METHOD: S 1/4" IiSP-, Aubhammer DATE: 4121108 SCALE: 1" = 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTAA Descriptbn of Materials BPF WL MC Tests or Notes 9042 0.0 bol (ASTM D2488 or D 96 96 FILL FILL: S ny Sand, fine- to medium-grained, trace of 9032 1.0 Gravel, dark brown, moist. FILL ((FiNed Topso~) - FlLL: Poorly Graded Sand with Sit, fine- to medium-grained, trace of Gravel. brown, moist. ~ 13 7 12 ~ - 8 ,s ~ ~ 8 ~ . 891.7 12.5 a - FILL FILL• Poorly Graded Sand, fine- to medium-grained, 6 with rubber places, brown, moist. 8 ~ F- FILL FILL: Poorly Graded Sand w#tr SiIL fine- to 6 medium-grained, brown, wet. ~ - a 884.2 2 . SM SILTY SAND, fine- to medium-grained, trece of Gravsi, 22 rah-brown, moist. medium dense. (GFacial TNI} y ; - 878.2 28.0 ~ END OF BORING. Water not observed with fBet of hollow-stem auger to - the ground. s - Water not observed tocave-in depth of 18 feet ~ immediately after withdrawing the auger. .____. ~ - Boring then backtNled. -0 Bract IMerlec Eorporalon ST-4~ pia 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BRAV N'" INTERTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Project SP-08-01291 ~ BORiNG: ST-5 Geotechnical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safety Budding 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, Minnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: 31/4" HSA, Autohammer DuATE: /lZ'U08 SCALE: 1"= 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Description of Materiah BPF Wl. MC Tests or Notes 905.4 0.0 Symbol ~~ D24B8 or D2•i87) 96 F1LL FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, dark tNO+nm, nwist. 902.9 2.5 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, brown, moil, 7 14 medium to rather stiff. _ (Glacial TNI) 8 14 10 8 •1 A END OF BORING. Water not observed with 9112 feet of hollow-stem auger in the ground. Water not obsenred to cave-in depth of 8 feet immediately after withdrawing the auger. '- Borkrg then badcfi6ed. ruwo-u, an oraun meoreo~ ~.wpwawn o~-o page ~ w ~ s R~-u a~ INTERTEC LOG OF BORINGI Braun Project SP-08-01 Z91 BORING: ST-r6 Geolbechnical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Pubik Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Helghts~ Minnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: s 1l4• FAA, Autoharrener DATE: 4121!08 SCALE: 1" a 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Description of Materials BPF WL MC Tests or Npf~ 904.8 0.0 Symbol (ASTM D2488 or D248 96 FILL FILL: Clayey Sand, fine- tomedium-grained, dark brown, moist. 902.3 2.5 CL LEAN CLAY, dark gray, moist to wet, rather stiff to soft. 11 (Glacial Till) 3 23 M -897.3 7.5 ML SILT, flne~named. IIgM gray, wet, very loose. 2 g (Glsu~oiluvlum) Q - 3 11.0 ~ END OF BORING. Water not observed wNh 91/2 fleet of hollow-stem w auger in the ground. Water not observed to cave-in depth of 8 feet lmmediatey after wittrdrawing the auger. ~ Boring then backfilled. ~ -- ~ _ . ~ - s 29 1 reu~ nbroec page 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BRA11N~" INTERTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-7 Geotechnical Evaluation LOCATION: see attar~ed sketch. Public Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Height, Minnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: S 1/4' HSA, Autoharrxner DATE: 4111 1t18 SCALE: 1' = 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTAA Descriptbn of Materiels BPF VW. Testa or Notes 905.5 0.0 Symbol (ASTM DTA88 or D248 96 FILL FILL: Sandy Lean Clag, trace of Roots. dark brown, motet. {(Filled Topsoiq) 903.0 2.5 SC CLAYEY SAND, trace of Gravel. brown, moist, 7 medium. . _ (Gtactai TYn 11 49 1a ' 13 _ 18 15 889.5 16.0 FJVD OF BORING. Water not observed eAth 1412 feet of hollow-stem - • • auger in the ground. - Water not observed to cave-in depth of 11 fBet immediately after withdravring the auger. Boring then beckflllad. ar-wwize~ owun moerw~ ~wpaawn a~-i papaiwi sRAUH~ INTERTEC LOG OF BORINCi~ Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-8 Geotechnical Evaluation LOCATION: See ~ s Public Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, Minnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: S 114' HSA, Aubohammar DATE: 4J11108 SCALE: 1" • 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Desaiptbn of Materials BPF WL MC 2 Tests ar Notes so5.a o.a s mbol D2a88 or D248 ~ ~ FILL FILL: Clayey Sand. trace of Gravel, dark brown, motet. 5 a 21 a2 ~ - 7.9 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY. trace of Gravel, brown, moist, 7 ~ ~ medium to nsther stlff. (Glaaai TiM) i° a ~ ~ - 10 o - F 11 885. SM : : = SILTY SAND, fine- to medium-grained, trace of Gravel, 18 _ • n3ddish-br~aum, moht, mecum dose. ; .• (Glacial Till _ • t :. y ~ ~ 879.a zs.a END OF BORING. - Water not observed with 2a 112 feet of hoikrw-stem r9 - auger in the ground. s - Water not observed tocave-in depth of 17 feet Immediately sitar wlthdrawmg the auger. ~ - Boring then baddilied. un MEerlec paps of 1 ~RAYN~ LOG OF BORING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I NTE RTEC Braun Project SP-08-01281 BORING: $`~'-9 Geotschnical Evaluation LOCATION: Bee attached sketch. Public Safety Building 41 st Avenue Columbia Heights, IAtnnesota DRILLER: O. Hanson METHOD: S 1I4' HSA, Autohammer DATE: 4121/08 SCALE: 1".4' FJev. Depth feet feet ASTM Description of Materials BPF WL MC Testa or Notes 908.0 0.0 Symbd (ASTM D2488 or 0248 96 FILL FILL: SAIy Sand, fine- to madam-grained, trace of CL Roots, blade. moist. Topso~) LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, brown, moist. (Glacial TAI) 4 5 16 6 13 89 . 1 END OF BORING. Water not observed with 9112 feet of hoAow-stern - auger in the ground. - Water not observed to cave-in depth of 8 feet immediately after withdrawing the auger. Boring then baddAled. SP Braun acne or~ B RA~1 N'" 1 NTE RTEC LOt3 OF BORING' Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-9 ~ Geobechnical Evaluation • LOCATION: See attached sketch Public Safety Building . 41st Avenue Columbia Heights, Minnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: s t/4" HSA, Autoharmter DATE: 4111!08 SCALE; 1" • 4' Elev. Depth teat feet ASTM Description of Materials BPF 1NL MC Testa ~ l~ 906.8 OA mbol (ASTM IY1488 or D2487) °4 FILL FILL: Silty Sand, fine- ~ na~um-grained, baoe of - FILL Roots and Grass. black, mobt. Ffued Topsoiq) - 904.3 2.5 FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, trace of Granret, brown, moist _ SC CLAYEY SAND, fine- to medkrrrgrained, trace of Iron 7 17 deposits, grayish-brown. waist, loose. - {Gthdal Till 1.8 5.0 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Greve!, grayish-brown, 6 15 LL = 27 mast, medium. PI =14 i- (QdaCial TII~ 10 ~ 9 ~_ 18 7 9 1.8 25.0 SM SILTY SAND, flue- to madhrm-greir~ed, trace of Gravel, 14 880.8 .0 •~ reddish-brovrn. rrroist, rrredium dense. (GPI Till . - END OF BORING. - Water not observed with ?A 1R feet of hollotir~tem auger in the ground. _ Water not obsenred to cave-in depth of 18 feet immediately after withdrawing the auger. Boring then backfilled. 1Za raun ss a mew t ~ 1 1 1 1 BRAUN"" INTERTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-11 Ceotechniical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. Public Safety Bui~ing 41at Avenue Columbia Heights Winnesota DRILLER: O. Hannon METHOD: 3114" HSA, Antohsnmer DATE: 41'11/08 SCALE: 1" ~ 4' Elev. Depth . feet feet ASTM Description of Materiels BPF VVI. Tests or Notes 919.2 0.0 Symbol (ASTM D2488 or D2487} . FILL ILL• Clayey Sand. fin¢ to medium-grained, trace of - CL Gravel, dark brown, moist. ( FIAed Topso~) - SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, brawn, moist. rather soil. 6 (Gladal Tilt) t3 5 .2 11.0 ; END OF BORING. Water rrot observed with 91/2 feet of hdlouv stem - auger in ~e ground. - Water not observed to cave-in depth of 8 feet i- immediately after withdrawing the auger. ~_ i ~- i '- ~~ ~- ~ Boring then baddlled. - - sP-va-u.e~n s RAU N~ I NTE RTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Project SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-'12 Oeofiechnical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch Public Safety Building . 4/at Avenue Columbia Heights, IiNinnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: s 114" Ht3A, Aueohamrner DATE: 4/21/08 SCALE: 1" = 4' Elev. Dapl*t feet feet AST M Description of Materials BPF Vlll. Tests or No1as 908.8 O.D m bol (ASTM D2488 or FILL FILL: StUy and, trace, Roots and Grass, black, FILL moist. ((Filled Topsdl)) .1 2. FILL: Sandy Lean Clay, trace of Gravel, dark brawn, _ CL moist. 4 SANDY LEAN CLAY, tree of Gravel, brawn, moist, rather soft. (Glacia171~ ~ 10 k i i {- i ~ i i i_ 24 ~- 21 ~- i_ 13 20.0 SP ':' ~: POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to medium-grained, 34 trace of Gravel, brown, moist, donee. :.~:: {Gfar~at Outwash) 880.6 .+. ~ END OF BORING. Water not observed with 24112 feet of hollow~atem auger in the ground. - Water not observed to cave-in depth of 17 feet immediately after withdrawing the auger. Bortng then badd'iled. arson Inlrlfec ea'r_ ....r ~ n( ~ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 sRAUN~ I NTE RTEC LOG OF BORING Braun Projec# SP-08-01291 BORING: ST-13 . Geotschnical Evaluation LOCATION: See attached sketch. PubNc Safety Building 41st Avenue Columbia Helghts~ AAinnesota DRILLER: G. Hanson METHOD: O:i DATE: 4f21/08 SCALE: 1" s 4' Elev. Depth feet feet ASTM Descripfion of Materiels BPF VVL Tests or Notes 906.4 0.0 S of (ASTM D2488 or D2487) FILL FiLL• Sandy Lean Clay, trace roots. dark brown, moist. 4 ((Fred Topsoip) FILL FILL• Clayey Sand. fine- to mednsrFgrained, trace of - Gravel, brown, wet. _ 3 898.9 _ CL SANDY LEAN CLAY, trace of Gravel, brotim, moist, 8 medium. _ {Glaaal Tdl) 17 14 19 29 8 . 25.0 SP- :~ POORLY-GRADED SAND adth SILT, fine- to 33 880.4 26.0 ~ • : medium-grained trace of Gunnel brown nwist dense , , , , . (Glaaal Oulwash - END OF BORING. Water not observed with 2412 feet of hoOoMr-stem auger in the ground. Boring then badtfilled. ~~~~. a.aw. n~.,~ wrpwaawl a~-ia pope i a ~ i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s RAU ~ NTE RTEC Descriptive Terminology of Soil Standard D ?A87 - 00 Classification of 8oits for EngMeering purposes ~Urilfied Soll Classfficatlon System) CrSsrla far Api nirr Grou bols and S Soi ls CNISSIHcetbrl g g p ym Group Narnas Using Laboratory Tista e ~ Group Hama r ~ ' Orawis Chen Grewb C• a 4 and 1 S C• 5. 3 ~Ir yVeq.~~ ~d sl .$ Mare Ulan 50% of coarse fracOorl ~ ~ k~ tklss • C <4 andlor 1 ~ C ~ 3 e GP e ~dy gmded ~I ~ retained on QlraveN wNh Flnas Fkles as ML or MH GN I °fe Na 4 slave ' Mon then 12% fines • Fktes ae CL Or CH GC are ae~ ~ ` ~nrb C~ g,~ C.2 8 and 1 5. C• S3 ° SW Well ceded sand" i ~ ~ o~Oa a 5% or less fines r C < 6 andbr 1 > > 3 e SP Poorly graded sand e paw Sands wNh Fblas Flnss dsssiryr sa ML or MH SIIA giny sand ran Na 4 slaw More Than 129E 1 Fines as CL or CH SC send ree ~ kwrdwrc PI ~ 7 and on ar above A' Ina r CL Lwn d t r w + SOb and Clays Uquid Imft PI <4 ar below A Hnar NO.. ~ e 1 ~ ~ • lase Oran 50 C~~ Liquid snit-oven dried < 0.75 gidpryB_~~d OL OL Or9enb ~y + s ~! 1 we 811 d Ina d PI on or abow'A Ilne CH F t 1 m ri B ~ ts an clays Liquid LUrln ' ge c PI pots beloar'A ins MH ElesOo sk k 1 + g: ~ 50 or more ~ ~ _ rl~fled < 0.76 ~ w ~n~ ~ t l w o H ly No Bolls organb rrudbeR dark M Dolor and organic odor tyF Peet lresod an ale emtadel paeeieg ale Sit (T.lnim) slave. r Held aamyN filed oebbke a bourderR or boat, add'Mdlh oobblee a 6auldals ar botlf b group mime. Cb ^ Da/ D+ Ce ^ ~ae~ D+xDN rsoi aoraateZl6%send, sdd~relawd'bglelpneme. Orerekwi116b 12%fnaesegUreduatsysaxlw GW-3M aMgradad Bawl vlMl ed OW.aC wst~pradd drawl wth day GP-GM pooly Waded Brawl vIM ell ~'-~ poorbr Graded Brawl aria day raeaeeea~iWtllb,add~'Ydtl~ duel symbol OG0~1 or SC..86L K toll mdetr 21S1R grava~idd'1Ma ~ Woup Ilelr+. eMdseat15b147Lars-raglaedlelsyai6slK 8NR8M weFgraded sard veal eR 6YV,9C w.1-gradd e.rla wlh day SP-9M paor[tr graded eerld xah els SPCC poorly graded eerld rdrl day rnaelbeg bldts plot M lrtdled area, eve b a CL~, ergr dsx redl aoraeils 10 b 2I9i plus Wo. g0 a, add 1eAI eald'or~l gmrer whidlewrle padaliwd redloorreheZ3076pYrs No.2la, PmdamYmnllesd.ad0lend~bgiaprlsne. rant eaaeina 80%pMe No.200 predp1e1w1edrgewN, add bavebr b group rome. PI a 4 and plot on or show y-' ave. PI <4 ar plots below A Ina. PI pbte on or above A' ave. PI plots 6elow'A ale. 80 ... 40 20 a 10 7 4 0 0 Liquid Llmlt (I..L) Laboratory Tests DD Dry deneilb pcf OC Qlganb oonbM, % WD Wet dsnslty, pot B Peroerrtof aaturetkxr, % MC Nabrral molsgae aontem. % 80 Sped6c gravlly ~ ld PI. P Io BmO. % Qf Ngle of Internal hictiort 1.1 tvlesncigr Inderr. % q+ rled~4P~ P200 % paesbg 200 slew qp Pocket penebomebr sb+ength, tsf Particle Size IdeMifle:atbn Boulders..- ...........................over 12' Cobtrlea .._._.........._...._......3' b 1r t3revet F~hte 1.~ ....................... __.. N0. 4 b 9N' Sand Coarse ............................ No. 4 b Na 10 iAedkarr _...._........__..._.. No. tO b No. 40 Fbs . . No.40 b Na 200 SB ..........................~~ ......<lVa 200. PI<4 or below A' Ins Clay ...................~................<No. 200. PlaaarKt on or above A' ale Relalthre Density ~ CohesbNess Soils lfery boas .........................._._ 0 b 4 BPF Laose...._.........._....._ .............. S b 10 BPF Median dense ................_.......11 b 30 BPF Derma ...._ ............................._. 31 b 50 BPF Vlerydenae ............................... ovar50 BPF Consbtency of Cohesive Soils Vlery eoll- ........................._...... 0 b 1 BPF Soft _ ..................................... 2 b 3 BPF Rathersdt ............................... 4 b 5 BPF Msdtum _......_........._..........._.. B b 8 BPF Ralhm akx ............_......._._._.. 9 b 12 BPF Sb7f ...._........_.......~.... 13 b 78 ~F ..... Illary atlf _.-_._...._............_....17 b 30 BPF Hard ................_..._... _........... owr30BPF Drtlllny Nolas Starldanl penetretbrt test borings ware sdvanoed by 3114' or 81f4' ID hdbrratem au!-ers unless nobd othsnvbs. Jalalg water was used b clean out auger prior b sampOng ony where Mdicebd on bgs- Sbrldard peneYdion last trorklgs ate dedgneted bN file prePol "ST (spin claret. a sempes were bilerl adOl fhs standard r oD sp11T brbe sampler. eeaoept where noted. Power auger borings were adwrroed by 4' or 8" dlanlabr ooniknrorlw tlgM, Bond-stem augers Shc deasrlcellons and abate depths were in- fen'ed ftom disturbed samples sugared bore surface and are. ftlsrefore, somewhat spproxirrlate. Power auger borings are datlDrlabd by the prel6r'B.' Hand auger borings ware advanced manualy with a 1 1R' or 3 7f4' diamebraugsrandwen Iirtlibd b OrodepOlfromwhidrthe augercould be menualgr wfthdraMar. Eland auger borktge are Indkxlbd by Ole preftx .~. BPF: Numbers indeab blows per foot recorded in sferldard perlstalion bat, aleo laroam as 9V'valua. The sampler was set 8' frlb lalrhkrrbed son below rte honorwabm auger. Driving raskbneeswere then oounbd for second and ihkd 8' inrxenlerds end added b gat BPF Where they diRered signiflcent~- they are reported k~ the blowing tome 2f12 for the aeoorid and third 6-hlCremenb, rsspediwty. tI11F1: WHindlalasthesempbrpenetratedao0lmdervreightaharmler and rods atone: driving riot requksd. WR: WR Irldicatea the sampler peneirabd aoI lender weight of rode alorfey hammerweigM end drMrlg not required. 7W Irslcabs tllkwa-e0ed (undsltabed) Wbesanlple. Nob: p-I bats ware tun it general aooordanoe wlOr applcebleASTM abrMards. Rar.7iG7 10 18 20 80 4D b0 ~ 70 80 g0 100 110 DIVISI'O~N •0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT D~OC ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ; ' S'E~CTiON 00300 -BID DIVISI.ON INDEX AND DE3~CRIPTIONS• -BID PACKAGE 3' 'C•OLUMBIA AEIGSTS PUBLI<.C SAFETY CENTER ' Bid Division Bid Di~yision Ti~tl~e: t~' CH3=04-~1 Masonry ' :CH3-OS-.1 ~Miscel~laneous Metals CH3=07~-1 Roof S~+stem . CI~3-0`8=1 Apparatus Bay Doors, Garage Doors, Overhead Doors, Sectional Doors CH3-08-2• .Al~umi~nu~m Entrances, Storefront, Glass and Glazing, Alumrnurn Windows ~'~ CH3=09-1 Wood, Plastics and Composites,, Rough. Carpentry,. Finish Carpentry, Interior Archi~tectur•81 Woodwork, .So~lid'Stxrface Falni~cations., Hollow Metal Doors and Fra~tnes, Flush Wood.Doors,. Access Doors and.Frarnes, ' ' s, Door Hardware, Tubular Skylights, Metal Detention Doors and Frame Lockers, Wood Lockers, Toilet Co~r-partments, Toilet Accessories, Wire. Mesh Partitions, Corner Guards, Fire Extinguisher~Cabinets, Fire Extinguishers, Flag Poles, Unit Skylights, Tubular Skylights, Specialties, ' Detention Equi~pnient, Horizontal Lor~ver Blinds, Entrance Mats and Frames ~ . CH3-0'9 Z - Gypsuan Board Systems and Metal Framing '. CH3-09-3 Porcelain Tile . CH3-09=4 Resilient Flooring, Carpet • CH3-0~9-5 Specialty Floors CH3-09=6 Acoustic Ceilings °CH3-0~9°°-7 • Painting CH3-1.4-T Hydraulic Elevator CH3-1.5-.1 Pbutnbng ~' ,~ :CH3-15 Z' Mechan~i~cal~, Temperature Control.,. Bal'anci~ng .CH3-15-3' Geotherma~} lhil~l~ing and Pipi~n~g ' ' CH3-15-4 CH3-16-1 Fire Pro~tecti~on System E~lectri~cal, Fire Alarm, Security, Voice.and Data, Tel~evis~ion 1 1 5. Signage is in a future bid package and is not included in any of the phase three packages. ~~ ~~~~it' ... -- - - ~- r, - .. 00300-1• BID DII~ISIONCIl3-04111lasonrv EXCLUDED INCLUDED A11 labor and material. As identified witlin the construction documents • including but not li~m~i~ted• to: • _ 0420Q9.Urit Masonry Assemblies • 047200 Cast .Stone Masonry 071113 Bituminous Dampproofi~ng 072100 Thermal Insulation 078413 Penetration Firestoppi~ng . 079200 joint Sealers • ALSO INCLUDED Unloading, protection and i~nstal~lation of all related materials; install hollow metafis frames in masonry walls where at least one (1) jamb abuts a masonry, 1' ~ tel bean ~ . la~tes and gtll~l~b~e ~ ~ ms• coot+di~ ation of meta•1 'sleeves; provide openings for mechanic ~ , plumbing, sprinkler• and electrical duct penetrations; coordinate mechanical and electrical supply line penetrations with mechanical, plumbing and sprinkler and electrical contractors; leave openings for major mechanical and electrical equipment and close-up after installation; provide wall recesses in masonry walls as shown for such items as f•re extinguishers cabinets, toilet accessories, infill CMU's between joists and deck, precast as required; protection of work; patching of holes as coordinated with mechanical and electrical •contractors; preparation of ~nnortar cylinders. Masonry reinforcing on wall and wall • insulation. This includes fire ~caulki~ng of walls, i•:e. roof decking and masonry walls. Cutting and• patching of walls and ceilings as needed for your work; rough. and fine grading of building area where it pertains to your work. Caulking and masonry joints, rough ~ca~npentry for windows and ~door~frannes, i~.e. •exterior wall cavities. All rebar that is grouted or anchored' ~in masonry walls is the •responsibil~i~ty of this contractor. Supply and maintain tem~po~rary barricades in operi~ngs, i.e. windows, doo~r• openings, i~nstal~l• 5/8" plrywood and poly until new openings are finished to .prevent weather damage and va~ndal~ism. • .Shop Drawi~ng~ and Siibnnittals• • Performance of work in a safe and workman~li~ke manner ' ' Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions . Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) ~yo~ • warranty . • OSFIA/barricades and protection for windows, 'door openings. (See . Safety Section 01520) - Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of ' other trades contractors • Bring earthwork, site back to original grade and compaction during . and after your work . Snow removal as required to corn~plete your•work and access for other trades, .(see other sections for more detail) ~~ If Bid Division CH3-04-1•, or any other bid division, would lice to use natural gas, Email Tom Dolan - ~r~ Thomas.dolan centerpointenergy com for gas cost and installation date. ' Center Point Energy will be running the ' gas line from 41'~ Avenue and have the meter installed on the east wall. of the Sally Port. ~ ~~ ~(~Q r 1 1 I 171 c~ !~ ~ ~ BID DIi~ISION CH3-0.5-1 Mrscellaaeou4 MdaLs 1 EXCLUDED • INCLUDED All labor and' material. ~As .identified within the construction documents ' including but not limited to Sections: • 0's 1200 Structural Steel Framing • OSS000 Metal Fabrications Oss 100 Metal Stairs . OSS213 Pipe and Tube Railings • Oss300 Metal Gratings •' ALSO INCLUDED F i d i ram ng an nstallation of bell tower, bell support, stair cases, ships ' ladder, handrail. Supply and• install reused material, i.e. hose tower racks, 1 canopy steel. • Shop Drawings and Subnn~ittals • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner ' Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • ~ Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials ' Verification of field dimensions ' ~ Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) ' • Layout 1 w~~y • OSI3A/barricades and protection coverin s for roof o enin s (See ' g p g . Safety Section O1 s20) • Safety in accordance with Section O 1 s~20 ' 1 ~ Move.stored~ mateirials as required to allow performance'work of . . _. _ .. _ _ . . . . . . _ other trades contractors ~ t _ ~ Snow removal as required to complete your work ~ ~ " ~ ~ " ' ~ ' ~ ~ ~' ~' ', 2. Bid Division CH3-OS-l shall review steel shops to verify the extend of their work. CH3-OS-1 shall include in ' ~ ~ their bid all steel, metal fabrications and miscellaneous metal not shown on these shops but• shown in the, ' '.__ . _. _. _ . _ _ Construction Documents. Shops are available on site at EDS trailer for review or may be emailed from the • ~ ' Construction Manager upon request. Construction Manager Email is doc(c~edsbuilders.com ~ ~ 11~(~~~ • ~ ' r • . 7 i .,. • • 00300-3 ~~ B1D DIVISION CH3-07-1 RoofSvstem EXCLUDED INCLUDED ~ All labor and material. As identified within the construction documents i~ncl~udi~ng but not limited to Sectians• ~,~ a 072100 Thermal Insulation ~- ~-'~~ ~~ ralOr~. 074113 Metal Roof Panels ~ ~/,•~O/oi 075113 Built-up Asphalt Roofing 07542'3 Thermo Plastic Polyolef n Roof ng 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Sheet Metal Warranty 079200 Joint Sealers 0~86200~ Unit Skylights 086223 Tubular Skylights ..+~ . ~~ _ ;. ALSO INCLUDED Rough carpentry for wood cants, nailer, curbs,. blocking, etc. see .Mechanical; any additional materials required on manufacturing roof ciulis to assure fastening of roof materials onto •ourbs to meet roof curb specifications; flashing of curbs, louvers and vents; .sealants and caulking as needed for this division. Install and maintain temporary barricades at roof edge and openings once the metal deck is onto allow other trades to instal•1 the~i~r work for the roof system prior, during and after instal~lati~on of the roof • Shop Drawings and Submittals • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner. . •~ Daily Housekeeping and final cleanup . •. Removal of~excess waste naateri~als • Loading, uril'oading, hoisting of your materials• • Verification• of field dimensions • .Coordination with other Contractors (Bid'Divisions) • Layout • Warranty ~ ~, • OSHA/barricades and protection coverings for roof openings. (See Safety Section 01520) • Safety i~n accordance with Section 01520 ~• Move stored"materials as required to allow performance work of other trades contractors • Snow removal of roof area as required for your work Section 077423 -Thermoplastic Polyolefln Rooting Ned ,~ ~tL~ 1. At 2.1.A.3, imposed Face Color shall be white not blaolc. 00300 BID DI'VI;SION CH3-08-1 Apparatus Bav Doors. GaraPe Doom. Overhead Doors.. Sectional Doors ' EXCLUDED • ~ INCLUDED All labor and material. As identified within the construction documents including but not limited to Sections: _ 078413 Penetration Fires~topping 079200 7oin~t Sealers 083613 Sectional Doors ,: n' J~ F1010 a ~ -~ _ ---_. __._. ALSO INCLUDED ~ Rough carpentry as needed•for~ your work. ' Shop Drawings and Submittals . Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner . Daily housekeeping and final cleanup . ~' Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting of.your materials • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) ,,~ ~ Layout . • Warranty ~ . • OSHA/barrcades and protection. (See Safety Section 01520) ' ~ Safety in accordance with Section 01520 • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work-of other trades contractors r 1 00300~~ BTD DIVISION CH3-OS-2 Alunrlnwn Sntrances~ and SYonfi+onts. Glass Glazlirr. A•lwnlnwn iWlndows EXCLUDED INCLUDED As identified• within the construction documents including but not limited to Sections: 079200 Joint Sealers 084113 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 085113 Aluminum Windows 085~619.Pass. Wi~ndows~ . ~ , . ~~~~ G/~rtriigl~~r ads ~d ~~ ~-~' ALSO INCLUDED Glazing of hollow meal frames, doors, sidelites, borrowed lites, etc. Insulation between aluminum window and sills, structural reinforcing . within aluminum frame assemblies per plans and specification or as required; all caulking and sealants required between windows and rough openings and for glazing windows, rough carpentry for wood cants,. nailer, curbs,. blocking, etc. Security glass as specified. . • Shop Drawings and Submittals • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading,. hoisting of your materials • • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with. other Contractors. (Bid Divisions) • Layout • Warranty • OSHA/bamcades and protection. (See Safety Section 01520} • Safety in accordance with Section 0.1520 - ---- - .._. _ •_ Move stored materials as required• to_ a~blow performance work of other trades contractors ~' ~~- 3. Bullet Proof windows showq in Floor Plan Keyed Note CG and shown on details 3 and 5/A4.1 shall be included ~ in Bid Division CH3-08-2. These windows and frames shall be by the same manufacture as the pass windows specif ed under Section 085619. These windows are none operable and have no pass through slot. Two vent holes of 1 /8" diameter will be required to vent the frame to the interior. Four foot wide windows openings shall ' be constructed as one window. Wider windows may be divided in t~u~ltip~ fram~t~~ase construction. 'Itiese divisions shall align with the vision window system muntins. //~~aa #1 N~/~~ . 7. Bid Division CH3-08-2 shall include the supply and installation of hardware on aluminum doors in aluminum frames. Hardware shall be as specified in 087100. 1~~ .a I ~ -I~q I~ 00.300~~ 1 i 1 BID DIVISION CH3-09-1 Wood. Plastics• and Composites Rough Carpentry. FYuish Carpentrv. ~, InteriorAnchltedural Woodwork. Solid Suriace•Fabrications. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors: Access Doors and Frames. Detention Doors and Frames. Door Hardware 1 i~ 1 1 INCLUDED Al'1 labor and material. As identified within the construction documents including but not limited to Sections: 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 066116 Solid Surface Fabrications 079200 Joint~Sealants 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 083436 Detention Doors and Frames ~•- 0'87100 Door Hardware ~ t. , r #~ ~~1~~, , iiol~ `^ 087163 Detention Door Hardware 102113 Toilet Compartments 102213• Wire Mesh Partitions .. . 10222°6 Operable Partitions 102613 Corner Guards 102813 Toilet Accessories 102815 Detention ~Toi~let Accessories 104413 Fire• Extinguisher Cabinets • 10.4416 Eire Extinguishers . 1~05113.Meta~1 Lockers • 105116 Wood•Lockers 105700 Wardrobe and Closet Specialties 107500 Flagpoles 111900 Detention Equipment 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds i 24813 Entrance Mats and Frames ALSO INCLUDED Caulk and fire caulk as it pertains to your work, i.e. inter hollow metal, windows, sills. Provide hardware templates for wood door manufacturer; . early delivery of hollow metal frames required for masonry •walls, pin • anchors as required and patching in concrete walls and masonry walls as needed; install existing flag pole and flag pole~assembly including digging •the hole and• concrete; coordination with other contractors on site and • the requirements of the construction schedule; provide plywood as shown and specified, i.e. telephone closet; finish hardware as shown and specified; install wood doors; install and remove construction cores in doors req~ured to maintain buildu-g security during construction; instals • fire protection specialties; install fireman's key lock box; provide and • store door hardware, to include a. written and signed inventory list (by installer) when received on site. Hardware to be~ stored in secure area on site provided by this contractor and approved by the Construction Manager; field measurements for materials furnished by the contract; co~irdi~nate deliveries and i~nstal~lation with requirements of the construction schedule; layout as required; unloading, sorting, inventory, 00300-7 EXCLUDED Building Mechanical and Electrical housekeeping pads, other than what is designated on the drawings. 6. distribution, and protection~of items installed or required under the ,scope • of this contract; insta~l'latio~n of bathroom accessories as shown; provision of caulking, sealants and firestopping .as related to the work of the '• contract; cut out of countertops, i.e. plumbing fixtures, electrical° ' penetrations as required; installation • of fire extinguisher cabinets and extinguishers per section 104413; jail cell frames, doors and hardware; '~ other miscellaneous jaa•1 cell accessories; i~nstal'lati~on of finish carpentry • items as shown and/or specified, scribe materials as required, assemble materials as required; provision of fasteners not supplied for installed ~' . materials; supply, and install' access doors where needed; insulation, if required; sealants and caulkin¢ As n~iPrl Add work of concrete casing to 4'-0" above finish floor shown ~n detail 29/A4.9 to Bid Division CH3-09-1. • Shop Drawings and Subnuttals ••~ Perfortnance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup ' • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • Warranty ' • ~ Maintenance of safety barricades around new additions • • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of • other trades contractors 1 1 oo~oo-s ~' ~, DIVISION C83=09-~ ~Gvnsum Board S':vstems ~d 1Kdal l~}a~tP EXCLUDED Instsl~l~ation of ~liol°1`ow metal frames where at, least one jamb abuts .a~ • m~ason~ry wall (Labor);. hollow metal. frames {Material); wood doors '~ (Material:);. metal doors {1Vtatenal);, Hardware, (Material). 'INCLUDED .All 'l'abor and material. As ~identifi~ed• within the construction documents ' inci~uding:but not I'imited to~Sections: •~ 054000 Cold-Formed Metal' Framing 079200 Joint Seale~:s •0~9311~9 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies '. 0922.16 Non-Structural.Meta1. Fngm~ing 092400 Portland Cement'Plas~tering '~ Aid#~, ~ll~,~pe 092900 .: ~ sum Board ~~,,'' d ?~l ~~` ~erlajns ~o~e~ur work . ~ ALSO INCLUDED Instal ~ation .of hollovi- metal frames in drywall (Labor), a14 wall and ' ceiling batt.and rigid insulation associated with drywall furring, partitions, ceilings, soffits, etc.; cement .board where specified; all sealants; steel stud ' fr~rn:ing, .i.e., Bell Tower; 'tower structure• and plywood; drywall taping • and •sandi~ng; structural metal framing work indicated within the' cons~truction~ documents; blocking for wall hung. items: windows,. ' casework; mechanical and electrical "cut-out". Armor (bullet proof) material as'indicated in wall i.e., Folaly area for Police and Fire. Assist in • • setting windows and 'door frames as needed to complete other trades work i e pass windows , . . . • ~SHop Draw~in~gs• and' Subm~ittal's• , P,ei~for~marrce of work in a ~sa~fe and workmanli+ke~ m~an~ner ~ Daii~y'Housekeeping.and final cleanup Removal ~of excess waste materials ~' '• Loading, ~un~loadi~ng,. H~oisti~ng of your materials Veii~fication. of field dimensions ~~ . Coordi~nati~on~ wi~th~ •other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout '~• Warranty . Maintenance of safety 'barricades ~• . Move. stored materials as required to allow performance work ~of other trades corntractors ' .. 1 t 00300=9 ~,~ BID DI'VISI.ONCA3-0~9-3 Poncela~ TYIe EXCLUDED Section 096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring; Section 096813 .Sheet ~ Carpeting; Section 096816 Tile Carpeting. INCLUDED All labor and material. Tile work as identif ed wi~tlun ttte construction ;'• documents including but not limited to: 0792.00 Taint Sealants as it pertains to Floor Tile ~ . 093000 Tiling ALSO INCLUDED Provide preparation and set material as required to level floors and walls to assure a quality product. Prep• surface to assure proper adhesion of your material. Final cleaning, protection of floors during construction '' finishes. Provide and install joint sealants; divider strips; thresholds; reducer strips; accessories necessary to complete the work. ' Shop Drawings and Submittals • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup ' • Removal of excess waste m~ateri~als • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) ~ ~'; • Layout • warranty . • Abide by OSHA laws . Move stored materials as requi~r+ed to allow performance work of other trades contractors ~~ io 1 00300=1~0 t ~• BID DI'i~I.SION CH3-09-4 Resillent Flooria¢. Cared ~' EXCLUDED Section-09300Q Ti~li~ng INCLUDED All labor and ma~teri~al. Resilient flooring, carpet and base work as ', identified with~i~n the construction documents including but not linuted to: 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories . 096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring ' 096813 Tile Carpeting • 096816 Sheet Carpeting ' ALSO INCLUDED Seam layout; wall base; sweeping; floor prep; thin set as required to receive your material. Clean floors, i.e. along wal•Is to assure proper ' bonding of materials. Frep surface to assure proper adhesion of your material. Cover floor as required to protect finish material during construction, clean carpet and seal floors. ' Shop Drawings and Submittals • Performance of work i~n a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup• • Removal of excess waste materials ~' Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials , • . Verification of field d~i~mensions~ • • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) Layout • Warranty • Abide by ~OSI~- laws _ `~ Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of J~ other trades co~ntracto~rs .' 00300-11 it BI.D DIVISI.ON CH3-09 S Saeclalty Floor. EXCLLT~DED Secti'on~•093.000 Tiling. INCLUDED All labor and material. 'Sp~ecial~ty fl~oori'ng:.as identified wi~th~in. the construction documentsincluding but not Timited~ to~ Section 09'67.00 . Fluid Applied' Flooring: ALSO INCLUDED Prep existing surface to assure proper adhesion oaf your materials. FTo~or set 'as required to~ receive your material: Final clean~i~ng and protect :final product (cover). • Shop Drawi~ngi and S~bmixtals • Performance of work i~n. a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoi~sfing afyour. materials • Verification of f eld•dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) . . Layout • Warranty . • Abide by OSHA laws . Move stored materials as :required to allow performance work of other trades contractors 00300-12 1~• BID DMSION CH3-09-6 Acouustic Ceili~s '• d' UDED S i 092900 G B E C oar . ect on ypsum X L INCLUDED All labor .and material. Suspended acoustical ceiling work as identified within the construction documents including but not limited to Section • 095100 Acoustic Ceilings. ' ALSO INCLUDED Provide adequate support for items supported by suspended ceilings; : acoustical insulation above ceilings where indicated; coordinate delivery of suspended ceiling tiles with Construction Manager. '' Shop Drawings and Subarittals • Performance of work in a safe and•workmanlike manner ' • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup Removal of excess waste materials ' . • Loading,•unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • Warranty Abide by OSHA laws ' • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of other trades contractors i', ~1 .t:. :' • :1 .'~ :' ~ • ,' ~ . • 00300-13 ~ ~ • BAD DIVISIONCH3-0~9-7 P,.atntinP 'EXCLUDED 1NCL•IJ•DED All labor and ma~teri~al. Painting as identified .within the constr-aiction documents including but not Ti~mited to: • 0~9'9~000 Paimting and ~Coati~ng ALSO INCLUDED Touch-up pa~i~nting; prep and painting of all ferrous metals, finishes of hollow metal frames and windows, doors, handrails, exposed ductwork, . deck and joist; Mask floors to prevent overspray and .clean up overspray. • Shop Drawings and Sulmittals • Per€ormance o~f work in a safe and workmanlike manner .. Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verifi~cati~o~n of field dimensions • Coord~inati~on with other Contractors (B'i'd Divisions) • Layout • Warranty • Abide by OSHA laws • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work :of other. trades contractors r 003'00-14 . ~,• BID DIVISIONCS3-1~1 Hvdrardlc Elevator • EXCLUDED '• INCLUDED A1~1 labor• and material. As identified wi~thi~n the construction documents • including but not li~mi~ted to: 078413 Penetration Firestopping .' ~ 142400 Hydraulic Elevators. • • ~ ~ • ALSO INCLUDED Cutting and patching of floors, walls and roofs as needed for your work; supply and install all material needed for installation of your work, steel ,~ brackets, supports, thresholds, fire stopping and caulking. Coordination • and servicing of other trades to complete .work in the elevator mechanical room and shaft. Install safety equipment to install your '~ work. Owner training and instruction. • Shop Drawings and Submittals • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner • •'~ Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials. • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials '~ Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) ~ • Layout • ' Warranty . Move stored materials as required to allow performance. work. of other. trades contractors t 1 1 00300-1~5 BID DIVI:SI.ON CII3-l S I Plumbing EXCLiJ~DED SAC and wAC city charges. INCLUDED All labor and material. Plumbing as identified within the construction nn'',, ska ,I i~~~b~ documents including but not limited to the following sections: N~ ~ 078413 Penetration Firestoppi~ng ~5,~-p ~la~u~1 ~a s ' "~~ ~~'~'` 079200 joint Sealants as i~t pertains to~ Plumbing 15010. Mechanical General 1'rovisions~ • 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15200 Noise,V'bration and Seismic Control ' 15250 Insulation 15401 Domestic water System 15405 Soil and waste Piping System . 15406 Rainwater Drainage System 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim l53iV Corr~pre-.~s~ irSys~t ~r ~. ~ 1 1/~~9tr0d~ ALSO INCLUDED Excavating, ackfill and compaction for underground piping; the cutting and patching of floors, walls, ceilings and roofs as needed for your work; concrete housekeeping pads; pressure testing of piping and systems; steel brackets and supports for piping and equipment; core drilling/cutting and patching of flooFS, wall and roof; sealing floor and wall penetrations and openings (this includes fire caulking after the construction of floors and • walil partitions as required);, pipe identifications; access panels as~ requirod~, . ~ perm~i~ts aad fees; inspections; drain and waste line. Winteri~zi~ng of drains • i~n winter construction areas, if required. Owner training and instruction. Rough-in and final' connectious to ~ki~tclien equipment; coordinate . o~penings:requi~red i~n floors, walls and roof wi~th~ other contractors; metal . ~ sleeves through fire rated walls as required; all building gas and fuel oil. CH3-15-1 Plumbing wi~lil~ need to pu~l~l plumbing perrn~it. Main gas lines are supplied by, mechanical contractor, branch lines to i.e., kitchen Add: All natural gas piping equipment, hot water heater, are responsibility of this contractor. installed by plumbing contractor, includes piping to natural gas meter and generator. ~~ ~,~ li~o og Shop Drawings and Submittals Performance •of work i~n a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and' final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials . Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • warranty . ~ OSHA/barricades and protection. (Se:e Safety Section 01520) • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of • other trades contractors 00300-1~6 1 1 A 1 ,~• i i ~ '; '. i I :~ f '~ BID.DlT~lSION CH3-l S-2 Mechantcal Temneratare Control. Balan~cinF EXCLUDED INCLUDED SAC.and WAC' city charges. Al'1 labor and material. As identified wi~th~in the constnaction d~ociimenfs including but l~im~ited to the fol~lowi~ng sections: • 078413 Penetration Fi~restop~ping 07~92~00 Joint Sealers as it perta~i~ns to Mechanical 15010 Mechanical General Provisions ' 15050 Basic Materials and.Methods • 15200 Noise, Vibration and Seismic .Control 15250 Insulation 1 ~~~ ~J1~g1od _~ .1 men 1a~ ~a'~,,~0108 -~ 15766 Infrared Heaters ~ ~ ~a U~ot 15801 Air Handling System --rte ~ ~Wa~~ ~~ ,.` 15825 Water Source Heat Pumps • 15~Q~ p ~ ~ ~ ~,~ 15830 - Air Handling Units 15840 Air Distribution System 15901 Temperature Control System (DDC) 15920 Gas Monitoring and Control System 15950 Electrical Wiring 15975 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ALSO INCLUDED Pi~pi~ng and fixtures as indicated in the construction documents and as~ needed to complete the work; core diilli~ng, cutting and' patching of floors, walls and ceil~i~ngs as needed for your work; i+nsulation for venti~l~ati°on and sheetrnetal work as~ indicated; i~nsta~ll new fi'lters~ for: equipment upon substantial completion; concrete housekeeping !pad's. related to. your work; pressure testing of systems; steel Brackets and' ~supports;..seabi~ng. floor and wall penetrations and op~en~i~ngs• (this includes fi~restopping to meet code); pipe iderrti~fications; access panels where required; perrn~its and fees; •i~nspecti~ons; owner: tra~i~ni~ng and ~i~nstruction; Payout; coord~i~nati~o~n oaf ceiling space with other. ~co~ntractors; adj~usti~ng~ . and liala~nci~ng of your equ~i~pment; tern~perature control. 'Supply masonry. angles. for duct ope~ni~ngs where not shown. Supply and install access doors. where requued~ hilt not shown i~n specifications. .1.5'82.6 Geothermal . Ground 'Loop -inside the bui~ldi~ng piping, see Bid Division CH3•-15-3 for more clari~ficati~o~n_. All gas fines are covered under •this~ bid division, except as noted i~n C'H3•-15-1 (Also Included). • Shop'Drawings and Submittals • • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike. manner • • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field di~rnensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • • Warranty OSHA/barri~cades and protection. (See Safety Section 01520) • 'Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of other trades contractors 00300-17 BID DIVISI.ON CH3-1 S-3 Geothermal Drilling and PtDlnr EXCLUDED INCLUDED All labor and material: As identified within the construction documents • including but not limited to the following sections: 15826 Geothermal Ground Loop Design-Build Specification ALSO INCLUDED Excavating, backfilling, and compaction for- undezground piping, cutting and patching of wall, floors, and ceilings as needed for your work; pipe identification; permit and fees; winterizing as needed. Run piping far enough into the building to allow CH3-15-2 to nm the interior piping. • Shop Drawings and Submittals Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner • Daily housekeeping and final cleanup • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, unloading, hoisting: of your materials • Verification of field dunensions • Coordination with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • • Warranty • OSHA/barricades and protection for walls, floors, and roof openings. (See Safety Section 01520} • Move stored materials• as required to allow performance work of other trades•contractors ooaoa~s BID DI•YI3ION CIl3-I S-4 Fart P~rottcaton Svstem~ ~ • .' • • EXCLUDED ' INCLUDED All labor and material. Fire Protection Systems as identified' within the construction documents including but not limited to the fol~lowi~ng ~ sections: ' 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealers as it pertains to Fire Protection 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15501 Fire Protection • ALSO INCLUDED The core drilling, cutting and patching of floors, walls and ceilings as ' needed for your work; supply and install all valves related to fire protection; concretehousekeeping pads for this category; pressure testing of piping and systems; steel brackets and supports for piping and equipment; sealing floor and• wall penetrations and openings (this includes ', firestopping to meet code); pipe identifications; access panels as required, drain and waste line. Coordinate installation of access doors. Owner • training and instruction. CIi3-15-4 Fire Protection System wi•11 need to pull sprinkler permit. • • Shop Drawings and Submittals • . • Performance of work in a safe and workmanlike manner Daily housekeeping and final cleanup• • • Removal of excess waste materials • Loading, un~load~ing, hoisting of your rnateri~als • Verification of field dimensions • • •Coordi~nation~ with other Contractors (Bid Divisions} • Layout • warranty ' • OSHA/barrcades and protection for walls, floors, and roof openings. (See Safety Section 01520) • Move stored materials as required to al°lovir performance work of '• 'other trades contractors • '~ ~ .. f ~. 00300-19 I~ BID DIVISION CH3-Y frl Electrical. Fire A•larin. S.ecurtty. Voice & Data. Television EXCL• iJ~DED INCLUDED Abl labor and material. As identified within the construction documents including but not limited to Section: 078413 Penetrati~on.Firestopping 079200 joint Sealants as it pertains to Electrical; Division 16 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16120 'Conductors and Cables 16130' Raceways and Boxes 16140- Wiring Devices . 16195 -Electrical Identification 16425• Switchboards 16452= Grounding 16461 Dry-Type Transformers (1000 V and Less) 6470 Panelboar~ds 16475 Fuses 16476 Disconnect Switches • 16478 .Transient Voltage Suppression 16481 Motor Controllers 16495 Transfer Switches ~ ~ ----~ 16500 Lighting 16621 Packaged Engure Generators 16740 Voice and Data Distn'bution System 16800 Systems 16915 Lighting Control Fyuipmen~t 17050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 17721 Fire Alarm Systems 17724 Security .~ 17741 Voice and Data Cabling Systems . 17770 Public Address and Music Systems ~ . 17780 Cable Television Systems . 17781 Television Systems ALSO INCLUDED .Core drilling, cutting and patcli~ng of floors, walls, and ceilings as required; sealing floor, wall and ceiling penetrations and openings (this includes firestopping to meet• code); concrete housekeeping pads and • bases for electrical equipment for this category; temporary. power and lighting; empty conduit and boxes for telephone, TV, data and sound systems acid blank covers as needed; electrical identification; rough-in and final connections to kitchen and other equipment, furnish and install hand dryers, as shown, site lighting. It is this contractor's responsibility to meet Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls power requirements including all materials and' labor, disconnect • construction rnanager•'s trailer and temporary heat: CH3-16-1 Electrical and Fire Alarm will need to pull permit and pay for all related permit and . inspecton~costs. Electrical . for security gates..Al~l labor and material for wiring, conduit as needed, core drilling, coordinate with other trades, i.e. door contacts, cutting and patching, fire caulk, anchors. 4. Generator and site lighting is by CH3-16-1. ~ Find 1) I ~l~q (OS . Shop Drawuigs aird~ ~Suburittals . • •~ Performance of work i~n a safe and workma~nl~i~ke manner • •Dai~ly housekeeping and final cleanup oo3oa2o 1 1 I i 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 • Removal of excess waste materials ' • Loading, unloading, hoisting of your materials • Verification of field dimensions ~ . • Coo~rdinati~on with other Contractors (Bid Divisions) • Layout • Warranty • OSHA/barri~cades and protection as related to your work. (See Safety Section 01520) • Move stored materials as required to allow performance work of other trades contractors . _ ._ . END OF SECTION 8. CH3-16-1 shall verify exact final location of electrical outlets and data boxes with the Construction Manager and the Owner. These loc tions may be adjusted from what is shown on the drawings to accommodate final furniture locations. '~ l 11~la~eg Note to Bid Division CH3-16-1, electrical service transformer and pad is installed and supplied by utlity. ~'1~'3 ~I~2SlOQ .4 00300-21 .'i . DMSION~ 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT ~REQUIREMEN'TS ?'~ SECTION 00400 -PROPOSAL FORM -BID PACKAGE S ' COLUMBIA HEIGHT8~ PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER SUBMIT PROPOSAL TO: CITY OF COLUMBIA HEIGHTS (OWNER) 590 40T" AVENUE NORTHEAST '~ COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 FOR: COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER (PROJECT) '~ ~ 825 41 ~ AVENUE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS, MN 55421 ' ~ BUETOW AND ASSOCIATES, INC. (ARCHITECT) 2345 RICE STREET, SUITE 210 . ST. PAUL, MN 55113 ' EDS BUILDERS, INC. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 404 A SAINT CROIX TRAIL NORTH ~ ) LAICELAND, MN 55043 SUBMITTED BY (a ~) '~ - (a partnership) . (art individual) i of Stmt City ~ State Zip Phone No. ' .FOR BID DIVISION(S): ,~ ~' CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS . We have carefully Head and fully understand the Contrail Documents, inducting the Instructions to Bidders (AIA701), General Conditions (A201/CMa), SupplementaUSpecial Conditions, Proposal Section, Technical Specifications, projeil manual, and drawings as prepared 6y Buetow and Associates, Inc, dated covering the work required in our proposal and the specifications. . ADDENDA . ' We acknowledge the receipt of Addenda and Dated and ' CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT We understand the Construction AAanager's funilion as descrit~ed and referred to throughout the ' Contrail Documents. We rgapze that each Bid Division Contractor ~ in fail a Prime Conl~railor and i ~ not asub=oontrailor working through a General Contractor. ( _ ~ ~ 00400-1 (ti BI~D~ DIVISION RESPONSIBIL• ITY V~kls~ ~recognise~ that :the svope of the work ~~uithin a bid :division represents. a construction unit tFaat is rrot necessarily restr~cted~ to a. single tn~de~ ~per~forrinance~ and our .proposal .tndudes the work ~cf all• trades requinjd to fully and suooessfully complete ~eil .of the work' r+equinad in the Bid Division(s) we have bid. MI'LESTQNE SCHEDULE We ~have~ reviewed the Section 00210 Milestone Schedule and .hereby endorse the milestone dates with regard ~to the work of the bid division we havs~ bid, except as spedf~cally set forth in the written aiaaendment below. (If you choose to amend. the progress requirements as stipulated, pl~se clearly indicate your amendment and: the ~reasoris why:a FSXCEPTI.OI~S AND/OR SUBSTITUTIONS We have ~submitted~ our proposal complete as speafled and shown on the drawings without exceptions or substitutions. COMBINED BIDDING DEDUCT We have sut~mitted proposals 'for more than: one Bid Division .and offer a vdurrtary deduct of _ Dollars ff wee ar+e ~awar•.ded tFre~ work in the following Bid Divvisons If more~• than one ~corr~bir~d bid dedratrt ~is desired, please state trelaw. We undersgaed• that :t~ie..amount stipulated vVill~'be deluded fr~+om thecombined total :of the ~Bicl Divisions we have• fisted herein. PROPOSEkL The undersigned agnr+es to perform all work as. identfied in Sedton 01'010 -- Summary of Work and Section 0030b -Bid Division Index, Descriptions as described in the Contract Documents for the total base bid listed below. the amount .shall be shown in both word's and figun3s. In case ~oF a discrepancy, ttte words shall govern. Also proposal must indude.all bond cx~sts and •applicable"sales tax. • BID DIVISION(S) BASE BID: Dollars ($ _ _ ) ~0:o4oo-a f i ~ I I 1 i 1 BID ALTERNATE PRICING.~FORM Please provide the additive or dedut~ive price for the project altemate(s} in accordance with Section 01030 in the Pnojecx Manual. If rat appNcable,, please stat NZ Alternate .prioes~ may ~be accepted by the ~OMrner up to 90 days after bids are received. Each Trade Contractor to~ smote the amount to be "Added To" or "No Change" to the bid for each of the alternates listed. ~ . Alternates -Bid Package .3 ALTERNATE NO. 1: Eliminate four (4) windows and anything relating to windows in Storage Meaanine 201 on Grid Line A (A3.2}. Replace with masonry wall system. ' ALTERNATE N0.2 Eliminate frve (5) aF the windows (one on the north, 'four on the west, A3.2) and anything relating to windows ~in Men's Locker Room 15~t (every other window}. Replace with masonry wall sys~rn ALTERNATE N0.3 Eliminate the high building sign lights in front of the buikiing above the Apparatus say and Entrance. (A3.1) ' ALTERNATE N.O.4 Eliminate the furring sblps and drywall on atl Exterior masonry walls on outside walls. ALTERNATE NO.S Change base bid diesel :generator U•o~ a Generac bi~#uel~ generator rising both diesel: and natural gas as:a fuel supply. 1 1 1 1 1 t ALTERNATE N0.6 Eiimtn~itie the •generator and c~ncxet® pad. All other Preparation and equipment to• be .installed. generator fo ~be installed at ~a dater date. ALTERNATE N0.7 Supply and irastall.~epoxy paint flooring system on concrete floors in Ileu of porcelain tile. in Rooms: Duty •Lodkers 005, Corridor 007, Corridor 012, and Stair A, - ALTERNATE N0.3 Supply and install carpet in lieu of file in Corridor 023, Corridor 151 acrd Corridor 1fi5. ALTERNATE N0.9 Eliminate security glass shown at exterior windows Labeled on A2.2 in keyed note CG. ALTERNATE .NO. 10 In all toilet.rooms and locker rooms change to 5'-0' high wainsoott with epoxy paint above. ALTERNATE NiO. 1~1 Change overfiead doors as follows OH7 beoomes.OH6 and OH5 becomes OH4. ALTERNATE .NO. 1.2 In Waltir~ Room 1:02 and Room 1'04 eliminate the hardwood above the file and paint and keep~the hardwood trim. Indicate Add or Deduct ~$ S . ~004~00-3 'I - ALTERNATE NO. 13 Change roofing system, and flashing from BUR to TPO. ALTERNATE NO. 14 Deduct Section 086200 Unit Skylights and Section 086223 Tubular Skylights, roof and interior finishes accordingly. $ ALTERNATE NO. 15 Deduct two (2) 30' flag poles. ~ The undersigned agrees to perform all work as identiFied in Section 01010 -Summary of Work and Section 00300 -Bid Division Index and Descriptions as descnbed in the Contract Documents Section 01026 Unit Prices. Proposal must include all bond costs and.applicable salmi tax . AGREEMENT This proposal, if accepted by the Owner within sixty (60) days of the date designated for receiving proposals will be issued as the basis for a contract directly with the Owner. The undersigned hereby agrees to accept a contract for the work covered by the proposal, under the terms and conditions of the contract documents. We acknowledge the fad that the Owner has the right to accept or reject any and all proposals with or without cause or terms. NAME OF BIDDER: ADDRESS: BY: (Signature) (Ty-pe or Print) TITLE: DATE: •• PHONE: ~ • FAX: E-MAIL: ENCLOSURE BID SECURITY: END OF SECTION 00400.4 ' DIVISION 0 - BIDDINQ AND CONTRACT REQUIREAAENTS SECTION 00500 -CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER The sucxessful bidder wilt execute an agreement with the Owner which shall be the standard form of agreement between Owner and Contractor, Document A101/CMa issued by the American Institute of Architects, 1992 Edition. ' No contractual adjustment shall be due or requested as a result of failure on the part of the Contractor to fully acquaint themselves and alt other parties to the contract with the provisions of Document A101/CMa. END OF SECTION 1 r i~ ~~ 00500-1 ~ I Document A101/CMa° -1992 ' Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contactor where the basis of paymer>f is a STIPULATED SUM 1 AGREEMENT trade as of the day of (!n 11~rrls. indicate doy, month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name and address) Qty of Columbia Heights 59040th Avenue Northeast Colombia Heights, MN 55421 and the Contractor: (Name and address) in the year of ADDI110trS AND DELEilO1rS: The author o1 ails doament has added iniormatlon needed for Its ocxripiaHon. The an1t10r may also have revised the text of the ortglrral AIA standard form. An Addhiars anal DisAsErorralikpartthatnotes added iMonrratton as weU as revisions b the standard form lard k available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertk:al line In the tart margin of this document Indkkretes where the author has added necessary fnformadon and where the ar11110r has added to ar deleted tram the origkrel AlA text This dotnrrrent tree hnportarrt legal aortaequerroes. Corratrltatlan rrHft an ~~ to its oornpletion or modHksetlort. The 1992 t=ditlat of AW Docrunent A201/CMe,General Condltbns d the Contract for Coraitnrctlon, CorreYttation tiAar~eper-AdNaer EdlGon, is adopted In gis dowment by reference. Do not use wllh atlrer general eortditlons unle~ this docrrnent is modNled. t 1 1 J For the following Project: (Include detailed descsrption of ProjecR /oaaAion, aafdness and scope.) Columbia Heights Public Safety Center 825 41st Avemte Northeast Columbia Heights, MN 55421 New Public Safety Center The Constntction IVlanager is: (Name and address) EDS Builders, Inc. 404A Saint Crax Trail North Lakeland, MN 55043 The Arclritect is: (Name and address) Buetow and Associates 2345 Rica Street Suite 210 St. Paul, MN 55113 The Owner and Cottttactor agree as set Earth below. InR. AIA Doerprrerd A101lCYaTM -1994. taopyrlpM O 1992 M The AmerNan InslNute of Art:hgects. Aq rlpMs resented. WA°AIaNO: This AU1e Document la protected by U.S. Copyright Law end intematlonal 7testks. unauthorlssd ropraductlon a dlatribugon of thle AIA Doaunad, ar any portion of Ik may rosult M aswre dull am! orhrllnal pensltlss, and wlq be prosecuted to the maximum exkrrt possble under the law. This docunerK was produced by / s ~ at 10:060 on 0711&200a under Order N0.10000g4064 1 wNch explrea on 7/16!'1009, and Is not far nmale. ~) ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contrail Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreemet, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contrail, and areas fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations as agreements, either written at• aa<'al. An enum~ion of the Contract Documents, othea than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE Z THE WORK OF THEI CONTRACT The Cancracoor shall execnte the satire Work described in the Contract Documents, except oo the extent specifically indicated in the Canttact Documents to be the responsibility of others, err as follows: ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTULL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commatcemem is the date from which the Contract Time of Seilion 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as firrt written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a noticx to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of canv>tuent, ~'it differs from t/te date of this Agreement or, ¢'applicable, state that t/u date will be fuaad in a ratite to proceed) Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to pu<oceed issued by the Oanes, the C.ontractar shall notify the Owner, through the Caostruction Manager, in writing not less than five days before cxcing the Work bo peanut the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other sectuity inoerests. § 3.2 The Contrailor shall aclrieve Substantial Completion of the entire Wa~rk not later than ( )days after the Date of Commencement. (Insert the calendar dote or number of calendar days cater the date of conmau:eemerti Also insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Wor/S if not stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.) Portion of Work Stduhntlal Connplatlott date subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Doamients. (Insert provisions, if arty, f+vr liquidated damages relating to failure a7 complete on time.) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of ($ ), subjeil to additions and dednctians as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 The Contrail Sum is based upon the fiollowing alternates, if any, which are described in the Contracx Documents and are heaeby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or outer ids' raation of accepted aliernate~ If decisions on os/ter altenurtes are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreaneni attach a schedule of such otleer altenratea stowing the amount for tads and tht date until which t/wt amount is valid) § 4.3 Unit prices, if any, areas follows: Mir. AIA Declanent A101/CWTM -19D2. Copyrlaht ~ 1892 by The Amerkan M>6114ite o1 Arddtecm. AN rlNhta~rNarrsd. WAeRNmG: Thla AIAe Document Is protected bll U.S. Copyrlpht law and hMerrMtlonal Tteatlea. Ibwuthorlxad reproduction or dletrltmtlon of ihb AIA Doa~ment, or any pordan of IR may result In severe dull and cNrnhml peratitlea, and wIN 6e proaacuNd to the mnclmum extent poaei6le under fha taw This doaenerd wan produced by / AIA eortYrere et 10:05A0 on 07M82009 under Onbr No.109086~094_1 whNd1 e~lres on 7/1512008, and Is not for resale. Wer Notex (267699962) I Dacriptlon UMta Price (S 0.00) I ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted by the Contractor to the Construction Manager, and upon Project Applications and Certificates far Payment issued by the Construction Manager and Architect, the Owner I shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 32 The period covei+ed by each Application far Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the ' month, ar as follows: ' § 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is aubmitbed to the Construction Manager riot later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the same month. >f an Application for Payment is received by the Construction Manager after the application date fixed above, payment ' shall be made by the Owner not later than ( )days after the Construction Manager receives the Application for Payment. § 3,4 Each Application fce Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in I acoordartce with the Contracx Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such foam and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Construction Manager or Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Construction Manager or Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contracxor's Applications for Payment I § 5.5 Applir~tions for Payment shall indicate the perfyentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Applir~tion for Payment I § 3.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: ' §5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by muhiPlY~B the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated fA that portiart of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of ( ). Pending final debemnination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Section 7.3.7 of the I General Conditions; . § 3.62 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materaay and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the I Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retairtage of ( ); §3.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of prfywious payments made by the Owner, and I §3.6.4 Subtract amotmts, if any, for which the Construction Manager or Architect has withheld or mtllified a Ceatificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of the General Conditions. I § 3.7 The progress payment amount determined in acoorflance with Section 5.6 shall be further modified tinder the following ~: §3.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to ( ) I of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Construction Manager recommends and the Architect determines for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and § 3.72 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of fire Contractor, any ' additional amourrts payable in acocedance with Section 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. INt. AU DooumeM A191/CNa~ -1992. f3opyripht ®1982 by The American InetlWte of Aff:hileCfB. N rlphta faaerwd WA.RNNIO: Ttda AIA~ nocument Is protected b!I U.S. Copyrlptlt taw ofd tifterfagoffal ltiaetlee. Uffauthorined reprodffctlorf or dlslribtftlarf or thla AIA Doaansnt, or w91 portion d ir, fray rpult N saws civil and a7mhfal peneltlea, and wW a~P to the nfaxhfafre afrhrd poaelble under tha law. This document was produced by ' ~ tuera ~ at 10~o an 07H9/2fl08 under Order tdo.1000964094 1 whkeh ergitee on 7nsrloo9, and tr not tar resale. () § 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: ((fit ds intended prior to Substantial Carnpktwn of the entire Wori; to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Sectiats S.fLl and S.fi.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Smn, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract bas been fully performed by the Contracxor except for the Conttactor'a responsibility to correct nonoonfarming Work sa provided in Section 1222 of the General Conditions and oo satisfy other requirements, if am-, which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a final Project Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Catssrructiort Manager and Architect; such final payment shall be made by the owner not mole than 3o days after the issuance of the final Project Certificate far Payment, ot: as follows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended atc supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from lino to tinge at the place where the Project is klcated. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) ( )per annum (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Acr~ similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal Places of business, dtt location the Pmject and elsewhere may a,,~'ect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect Av de/etums or modifrc~ations, and also regarding reguirentertts such as written disclosures or wiaiverx) § 7.3 Temporary facilities and services: (Here insert temporary facilities and services which are d{~`erent from or in addition to those included elsewhere in the Contract Documents.) § 7.4 Other Provisions: (Here list any special provisions c{,~'ecting the Contract.) ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 8.1 The Contract maybe terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. § 8Z The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Artie 14 ~ the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 The Corthact Documents, except fat; Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: Inlt AIA Document A1011C11As"~ -1lt;l~ Copyrbht ®i tIB2•by The American Insfltute of Architects. All rlpltts rssersed. WAsRNINt3: Thls AIAe Document Is protae0ed by U.S. CepyApht Law and hdemetland 7Yeatles. UnauthoNaed roproductlon or dlslritwtlon of this AIA Docransnt, or am portlon of It, may n:auR in severe clvU and crYnlnsl penalaes, and wW bs presecutsd to the amxlmum extent ponihla under the law. TFYe document wes produced hN ~ AIA eofhrare at 10#~llo an o7nar~oos under Order No.1000961094 t which ewes on 7nsrsooe, and b not for neeele. Usw Netaa: (2576 i 1 § 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Farm of Agteenmettt lln Owner and Contractor, AIA Document AlO1l~CMa,1992 Coratraction Manager Adviser Edition. § 9.13 The t.~eneasl Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Constrntsion, AIA Document A201/CMa,1992 Construction Manager-Adviser Edition. § 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Mamtal dated , and are as follows: Document Title § 8.1A The Specifications are those contained in the Project Mamtal dated as in Section 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Speci~iCatiwu bare or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement) Title of Specifications exhlbit: (Table deleted) § 8.1.5 The Drawings areas foIIows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings herr or rt!fer to an exhibit attaclud to this Agreement.) Title of Drawings exhibit: (Table deleted) § 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: Number Date ~9~ Portions of Addenda relating to hddding requu+emettts are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding negltirements are also ennma~od in this Article 9. §8.1.7 Other documents, if any, foaming part of the Contract Docnments areas follows: (List here any additional docwnents which are intended to fivrm part of the Contract Documents. The General Conditions provide that bidding requirements such as advertisement or irn+itation to bid htstnrcttons to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement T fiey should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Diocwnents.) This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OYYNER (Signature) (Printed nano artd title) L~~_~ ~.~_;?~Lti~7 (Signature) (Printed Home and title) an ooownad ntot~a+• -tee:. t:opyrlpht ®ise2 by The American Inerldrte of Ardrilerds. Aa rights r•.ervd. walmlrto: rnis nlln• nocummt hr InN'. protected by U.S. Copyright Law and irtsrnatlorral Trealles. ttnsueror~sd rsproductbn ar dlNrlbutlon of this AIA• Document, ar arry portlon of it, may resua In wrote doll and almind psrisltles, and wtN be proseculsd to the maximum extsrd posslhls under the law. This docunent was produced ty ~ AIA software at 10:05:00 on 07/1 arlooe under Order No.10000e40e4 1 whkh e>tpirea on 7/1 5 12 0 0 8. and la not for n~eele. User Notts: t257888952J ' DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00600 -PRE-CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SUBMITTALS -BID PACKAGE S ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. Each Contractor shall submit to the construction manager the following pre- contract performance submittals when applicable, within ten days of the date of the Letter of Intent. ' B. Pre-contract submittals shat) be submitted separately for each Contract. 1.02 PRE-CONTRACT SUBMITTALS ' The contractor shall not commence work nor allow subcontractors or sub-subcontractors or suppliers of any materials to commence work until the following submittals are provided and ' approved: A. Performance, and Labor and Material Payment Bond for 10096 of the Contract ' Amount (if required). B. Insurance Certificate with coverages as specified in Section 00810; Article 11, Insurance. C. A Schedule of Values. ' D. List of Subcontractors, material suppliers and equipment manufacturers. E. A detailed schedule for the work of the Contractor. F . Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials to be used on-site. ' G. . . Contrac~r written Safety Program. ' END OF SECTION 00600-1 1 DIVISION O -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00700 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR ' CONSTRUCTION -BID PACKAGE S COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' The General Conditions of the contract for construction are AIA Documents 201/CMa issued by the American Institute of Architects, 1992 Edition. ' No contrectural adjustment shall tie due or requested as a result of failun: on the part of the Contractor to fully acquaint themselves and all other parties to the contract with Document 201/CMa. 1 1 1 1 1 END OF SECTION 00700-1 1 ~ rilri Document A201/CMa° -1992 General Conditions of the Contact for Constvction where the Consfiuction Manager is NOT a Constructor ' for the ftilowing PROJECT: . (Name and location or oddness): ADDITIONS AND DEI.E'f10NS: Columbia Heights Public Safety Center The author of this doanrlent has ' 825 41st Avenue Northeast added Information needed for its Columbia Heights, MN 55421 completion. The author may also have revised the text of the odglrxel THE OYYIIE9ir AIA stander~d form. An Add~iats and (Name and addness~ Defeelore: Rspartthat dotes added City of Columbia Heights inforrnatlon as well as revislorls to 59040th Avenue Northeast the starxfard form tend k available Columbia Heights, MN 55421 from the author and should be ' reviewed. A vertkxll flue In the INt THE ARCHITECT: margin of this dotxerrerd trldlcates (Name and address): where the augtor has added Buetow and Associates necessary infomration and where ' 2345 Rice Street the author hag added to or deleted Suite 210 from the oHpinal AIA teuct. ' St. Paul, MN 55113 Ttds document has importeM legal c~r~sequenoes. Correuttation with en attorney is encouraged with respect TABLE OF ARTICLES to its completion or modHicatlon. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Z OWNER ' 3 CONTRACTOR . 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTKIN BY OWNER OR BY OTHER CONTRACTORS ' 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK ' 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPL TI N E O ' 1 O PROTECTKIN OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 IN~iRANCE AND BONDS ' 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ' 14 TERI~WITION Obi SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Docrenent A2911t2de~ -1x92. Copy~gM O 1982 by The Mierican atetllute d Arctrllacb. AN rlghte nguwd. WAeRNaKi: Thle AIAe Document y Irdf . prcleckd tiff U.S. Copyright Lew and Irrternetlonel Trestles. thmutlrormed raproductlon or dbtributlon of thle AIA Docranerd, or any portlon of it, ~ may result In awero clvll and crlmhrei psrWltlsa, end wla bs prcesculed to the mexMeen extend poselble under the Iaw. Title document xres produced by / ffi 10:10A2 on 07/1 ty2~be uMer Order tdo.t000964094 1 wHch expires on 7/1 5 12 0 0 9, and Is not for recele. ' Uem (4179557805) INDEX Aix of Nonao>oforming work 9.6.6, 9.9.3.123 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6,9.8.2,99.3,9.10.1,9.10.3 A to work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Ptrrvention 4.6.6,10 Acts and Omissions 32.1, 3.2.2, 3.32, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.6.6, 4.62., 4.7.9, 83.1, lO.lA, 1025,13.4.2,13.7, 14.1 1.1.1, 3.11 Additlonal Cask, Claims for 4.7.6, 4.7.7, 4.7.9, 6.1.1, 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing 4.6.10, 9.8.2,122.1,13.5 AddNionai Time, Claims for 4.7.6, 4.7.8, 4.7.9, 8.3.2,10.3 ADMIINLSTRATION OF TI3$ CONTRACT 3.3.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation bu Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Etiect 4.6.20, 4.9.1 Allowances 3.8 All-risk Ins~ance 11.3.1.1 Applications for Paymeat 4.6.9, 7.3.7, 9.2, 93, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4,11.1.3,1424 Approvals 2.4, 3.3.3, 3.5, 3.10.3, 3.12,4 through 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.6.12, 93.2,11.3.1A,13.42,13.5 Arbitration 45, 4.7.4, 49, 8.3.1,10.12,11.3.9,11.3.10 Architect's Approvals 2.4.1,3.5.1,3.103,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.3,4.6.12 An„hitcct's Authority fA Reject Wark 3.5.1, 4.6.10, 12.1.2,12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 13 Architect's Decisions 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.18, 4.6.19, 4.6.20.4.7.2, 4.7.6, 4.8.1, 4.8.4,4.9,6.3,8.1.3,83.1,92,9.4,95.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2,13.52,14.22,14.2.4 Architect's Iinspecxiom 4.6.5, 4.6.16, 4.7.6, 9.43, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,135 Architect's Instructions 4.6.10,4.6.12,7.4.1,9.4.3,12.1,13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.6.18, 4.6.19, 4.7.7 Architect's On-Siee Observations 4.6.5,4.6.9,4.7.6,9.4.3,9.5.1,9.10.1,135 Architect's Project Represerttadve 4.6.17 Architect's Relationship with Cotttrador 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.22, 333, 35.1, 3.73, 3.11, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.16, 3.18, 4.6.6, 4.6.7, 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.19, 52, 62.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2,10.12,10.1.4,10.15,11.3.7, 12.1, 13S Architect's Relationship with Construction Manager 1.12, 2.4.1, 3.12.6, 3.12.8, 4.6.8, 4.6.10, 4.6.14, 4.6.16, 4.6.18, 63.1, 9.7.1, 9.8, 9,9.1,9.9.2, 9.10.1, 9.10.2, 9.103,122.4,13.5.1,13.52, 135.4,14.2.4 Amltitect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.6.6, 4.6.7, 4.6.10, 5.3.1, 9.6.3,9.6.4,11.3.7 Arr:hibect's Representations 9.4.3, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits 4.6.5, 4.6.9, 4.6.16, 4.7.6, 9.4.3, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.92, 9.10.1,13.5 Asbeseos 10.1.2, 10.13,.10.1A 41 Architect, and Certificate of Payment 4.6.9 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect,l3xbent of Authority 2.4.1,3.12.6,4.6.6, 4.72,52,6.3,7.1.2,72.1,7A,9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 95, 9.6.3, 9.82, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 122.1,13.5.1,13.52,14.22,142.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 333.3.12.8, 3.12.11, 4.6.5, 4b.6, 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.17,4.6.19,4.6.20,4.7.2,521,7.4,9.6.4 Architect's Additional Services and B1tpe~s 2.4,9.8211.3.1.1,122.1,12.2.4,13.5.2,13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 4.6, 4.7.6, 4.7.7, 4.8, 9.4, 95 Attorneys' Fees 3.18.1, 9.10.2,10.1.4 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1 Award of Snboontracts and Otber Co>atracta for Fortlons of the Work 5.2 Boric DeDdtions 1.1 Bidding Regnireaients 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 52.1, 11.4.1 BaiOfer and MacMnery Iasurance 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 9.10.2 Bonds, Performance and Payment 7.3.6.4, 9.103, 11.39,11A /iu oocorant asol~is.~ - tees. Oepyrieht ©1592 by The Nrarican tnstltuEe of nrr:titieaa. we dehta naerved. wnnt+naca: Thls /w-• t)oewnard ~ init. t~~ aY U.S. CapyrteM taw and kaernagorml TtealNs. tMautlror~sd rsproductbn or dl.trlbusar of this AU1• Doasrant, or any Nortlan w It, nay resuR in awero clue and crlrnhat peraltlss, and will ba proeswted ilo the maocimum exlsnt poaalbls under Oa hw. This doaerant was Produced by / AIA sariware ffi 10:102 an 0711 ela00e under Order No.100006A0e4 1 Which e~ an 7/1td200e, and is not for reeds. LMar Notas: ~ (417957905) 1 1 1 1 __.1 1 1 1 1 Building Permit 22.3, 3.7.1 Capltaliaatlon lA Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.2 CPxtificates for Payment 4.6.8, 4.6.9, 9.33, 9A, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3,13.7,14.1.13.14.2.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 3.12.11,135.4 Certificates of Lnsurance 9.3.2, 9.10.2, 11.1.3 CLatatge Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.8.24, 3.11.1, 4b.13, 4.73, 52.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3.2, 83.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 113.1.2, 11.3A, 11.3.9,12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 72.1 CLanges 7.1 CHANGffi IN THE WORK 3.11,4.6.13,4.6.14,7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1,10.1.3 Claim, Definition of 4.7.1 Claims and Disputes 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 6.2.5, 8.32, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.4,10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 49.6 Claims for Additbnal Cost 4.7.6, 4.7.7, 4.7.9, 6.1.1, 10.3 Clause for Additional Time 4.6.9, 4.7.6, 4.7.8, 4.7.9, 83.2 Claims for Caaaealed or Unlmown Conditions 4.7.6 Claims for Damages 3.18, 4.79, 6.1.1, 62.5, 8.3.2, 9.5.1.2,10.14 Claims Subject to Au~bitradon 4.7.2, 4.8.4,4.6.1 (leaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Comm cement of Statatttry Limitation Peaiod ]3.7 Commit of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.12,2.21,3.2.1,32.2,3.7.1,3.10.1 3.12.6,4.7.7, 52.1, 6.22, 8.12, 8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6,11.4.1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications, Owner to Architect 22.6 Commnnications, Owner to Construction Manager 22.6 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1 4.6.7, 5.2.1 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.11.3.15, 4.6.5, 4.6.16, 4.7.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2,13.7.1 COMPLETION, PAYMEN7['3 AND 9 Completion, Sntial 4b.16, 4.75.2, 8.1.1, 8.13, 8.23, 9.8, 9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 13, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1,1022,11.1,11.3,13.1, 13.5.1,13.52,13.6,14.1.1,14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unlmown Conditions 4.7.6 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1 Consertt, Written 1.3.1, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.7.4.4.9.5, 9.3.2, 9.82, 99.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3,10.12,10.1.3,113.1,113.1.4,113.11, 132,13A2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY OTHER CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Consttvction Change Din~tive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1,4.6.13,7.1,73,9.3.1.1 Construdion Manager 42 Construction Manager, and Building Permits 2.2.3 Construction Manager, Claims against 4.7.2 Construction Manager, Communications through 4.6.7 Construction Manager, and Construction Schedule 3.10.1, 3.102 Construntion Manager, Definition of 42.1 Consbrnaron Manager, and Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11.1 Construction Manager,l?xtent of Authority 3.12.6,3.12.8,43,4.63,4.6.11,7.1.2,7.21,7.3.1, 8.3.1, 921, 93.1, 9.4.1, 9.4.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1,12.1, 1221,1224,14.22, 14.2.4 Consbrncfion Manager, Limitations of Anthority and ~~ 4b.6, 4.6.1Q 13.4.2 Construction Manager, and Submittals 3.10.3 Construction Manager's Additional Services and Bxpenses 1221,12.2.4 Construction Manager's Administration of the Contract 4.6, 9.4, 9S Construction Manager's Approval 2.4.1, 3.10.3 Construction Manager's Authority to Reject Work 4.6.10,12.2.1 Construction Manager's Decisions AIA Document A2011CAlan+-1992. Copyright ®1982 hY Ths American Uistltute at Architects. All dghta rsserwd WARN9IQ: This AIA' DocumsM k Ink. protected bl- U.S. Copyright Law and Irrtematlorml Treeaea. Unauthorized rgsoduoUon or dlatrlbutlon of Phis AIA° Document, or any poraon of k, $ may rasuk In severe CIWI and criminal pandtlsa, and will ba prosecuted to 1M ma~dmum sabrrt possltde under 11ra law This document was produced by / AIA aaawara at 10:10:02 an 07118!2008 under Order No.1009a9A084 1 whtclr er~ires an 7/1512009, arrd N not for resale. User Niles: (417x5578051 73.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,93.1,9.4.1,9.5.1 Construction Manager's Inspections 4.6.10, 9.4.3, 9.8.2, 9.9.2,12.1.1 Constriction Manager's On-Site ~servations 95.1 Constroctioa Manager's Relationship with Architect 1.1.2,4.6.8,4.6.10,4.6.11,4.6.14,4.6.16,4.6.18,63.1, 9.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.4.3, 951, 9.6.1, 9.6.3, 9.8.2, 9.83, 99.1, 9.10.1, 9.10.2, 9.103,11.13,122.4,135.1,1352, 13.5.4,14.22,14.2.4 Construction Manager's Relationship with Contractor 32.1, 32.2 3.3.1, 33.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.10.3,3.11.1,3.125,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.12.9,3.12.10, 3.12.11,3.13.2,3.14.2,3.15.2,3.16.1,3.17.1,3.18.1, 3.18.3, 4b.3, 4.6A, 4.6.6, 4.6.11, 52, 6.2.1, 622, 7.1.2, 7.2.1, 73.4, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 83.1, 9.2.1,9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.4.2,9.4.3,9.7.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 10.1.1,10.12,10.1.5,10.2.6,11.3.7,12.1,13.5.1, 13.52, 13.5.3, 13.5.4 Construction Manager's Relationship with Owner 2.23, 4.6.1, 4.6.2,10.1.6 Construction Manager's Relationship with Other Contractors and Owner's Own Forces 4.6.3 Construction Manager's Relationship witit Sibcontraccturs 4.6.10, 53.1, 9.63, 9.64 Constntction Manager's Rations 9.43, 95.1 Construction Manager's Site Visits 9.4.4, 9.5.1 Construction 3c>tedules, Contractor's 3.]0, 4.63, 4.6.4 Contingent Assipment of Saboontracts SA Confbming Co~ract Performance 4.7A Ca~act, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMII~iATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 4.7.7, 5.4.1.1,14 Contract Administration 3.3.3,4,9.4,9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2,9.2,11.13,113.6,11.4.1 Contract Dotarmeds, The 11,12,7 Contract Documents, Copies Prunished and Use of 1.3, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Paforrnartoe Doting Arbitration 4.7.4, 4.9.3 Contract Sum 3.8,4.7.6,4.7.7,4.8.4,52.3,7.2,73,9.1,9.7,11.3.1, 122.4, 12.3, 142.4 Contract Sum,1)efmitian of 9.1.1 Coatrat:t Time 4.7.6, 4.7.8.1, 4.8.4, 7.2.1.3, 73, 8.2.1, 83.1, 9.7, 12.1.1 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1.1, 6.1.2 Contracror's Bid 1.1.1 Contractor's Constrtrctlon Scheddes 3.10 Contractor's Empkryees 3.3.2, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18, 4.6.6, 4.6.10, 8.12, 102, 10.3, 11.1.1,14.2.1.1 Contractor's 1Lishfilty Insurance 11.1,11.3.1.5 Contractor's Relationship with Other Contractors and Owner's Own Forces 3.125, 3.142, 4.6.3, 4.6.7,12.2.5 Contractor's Relationship with Suboontracxors 12.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.62,113.7, 113.8, 14.2.12 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2,3.2.1,32.2,33.3,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.10.1,3.10.3, 3.11.1,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.129,3.16.1,3.18,4.6.6,4.6.7, 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.19, 5.2, 622, 7.3.4, 92, 93.1, 9.8.2, 9.103.10.1.2,10.1.5,102.6,11.3.7,12.1,13.5 Cantactor's Relationship with the Constmction 1.1.2, 32.1, 3.22,33.], 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.7.4, 3.10.1, 3.102, 3.10.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.5, 3.12.6, 3.12.8, 3.12.9,3.12.11,3.13.2,3.14.2,3.15.2,3.16.1,3.17.1, 3.18.1,3.18.3,4.6.3,4.6.4,4.6.6,52,6.2.1,6.2.2, 7.1.2, 72.1, 73.4, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 8.3.1, 92.1, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.42,9.4.3,9.7.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 10.1.1,10.12,10.1.5,10.2.6,11.3.7,12.1,13.5.1, 13.52, 13.5.3,135.4 Contractor's Representations 1.22, 3.5.1, 3.12.7, 6.2.2, 82.1, 9.3.3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.32, 3.18, 4.6.6, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 1.2.2, 3.2, 3.7.3Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Cornlact 14.1 Canuactas's Submittals 3.1Q3.11,3.12,4.6.12,5.2.1,5.23,7.3.6,9.2,9.3.1, 9.82, 9.9.1, 9.102, 9.10.3,10.1.2, 11.4.2 Contractor's Superintendent 3.9,102.6 Contrat~'s Supervision and Construction Procedures AIA DocrenMrt A4911CNs~ -19/4. Cspyrlpht01992 by The American MwtlWte cf Architects. AO dphtr reeerwd. WARNMIO: This AIA~ Docurwrd W toff. ~ U.S. law and Internetlonel 7Yeetlaa. lAtaulhortead rapreductton or dtsllbutlon of thhi AY1a Document, or any portion dl It, may roeull in eevare dull end pgrrlnW peneMlee, and wla be prosecuMd to the mndmum sxMnt poNlble eerder the lew. This docunrxt was produced hY ~ alA saaware at to:to~2 an ome~4oos under cedar wa.~ooos9sos4 t wlrch.~ires on insrtao9, and is not tar resale. user irotes: (41796Fi7a9S~ ' 1.2.4, 33, 3.4, 4.6.6, 822, 8.2.3,10 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.7, 11.2.1, 113.1.5 Coordination and Cornlation 12.2,1.2.4,3.3.1,3.10.3.12.7,6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 13, 2.2.5, 3.11 Correction of work ' 23, 2.4, 32.1, 4.6.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1,12.12, 122, 13.7.1.3 Cost, Definition of 73.6 Costs 2.4,3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.152.,4.7.6,4.7.7,4.7.8.1, 52.3,6.1.1,62.3,6.3.1,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,9.7,9.8.2, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2,113.1.3,11.3.4,11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4,12.2.5,13.5,14 Cutthtg and Patcbfng 314, 6.2.6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Other Contractors ' 3.142, 62.4, 9.5.1.5,10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3,11.1, 11.3, 12.2.5 Damage to the work 3.14.2, 99.1,102.1.2,10.2.5, 10.3,11.3 Damages, Claims for 3.18, 4.69, 6.1.1, 625, 8.32, 9.5.12,10.1.4 ~ ~Y 6.1.1, 83.3, 95.1.6, 9.7 ' Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 ' Decisions of the Arcllitect 4.6,4.7,63,8.13,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.82,9.9.1, 10.12,135.2, 14.22,142A Decisions of the Construction Manager 4.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.3.1,9.4.1,9.4.3,9.5.1 Dec111to~ to Withhold CertHlcatbn 95, 9.7,14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acxxptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.6.1,4.6.10,4.7.5,9.5,9.82,99.1, 10.2.5,12, 13.7.1.3 Defective Work, Definition of 35.1 ' Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.123, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.7.1,5.1,6.1.1,72.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 ' Delays and )~nslons of ~ 4.7.1, 4.7.8.1, 4.7.82, 6.1.1, 62.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1.3, 7.3.4, 735, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 8.1.1,83, 103.1,14.1.1.4 ' 4.74 8 4.9, 6.25, 63, 7.3.8, 9.3.12 Documents and Samples at the Site 1 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 1.1.1, 1.3,22.5,3.11,5.3 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions 3.2 Effective Date of Insurance 822,11.1.2 4.7.7,103 Employees, Contractor's 3.3.2.,3A.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1,3.18.2,4.6.6,4.6.10, 8.1.2, 102, 103,11.1.1,142.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and 1.1.3,1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.6.12,6.2.1,7.3.6,93.2,9.3.3, 11.3,12.2.4,14.1.2,14.2.1,14.22 Execution and Progress of the Wok 12.3,3.4.1,3.5.1,4.6.5,4.6.6,4.7.4,4.7.8,6.22,7.1.3, 8.2, 8.3, 9.5, 9.9.1,10.2.3,10.2.4 Eloecution, Correlation surd Intent ~ the Contract nocnments 1.2, 3.7.1 Extensio>ffi of Time 4.7.1, 4.7.8, 7.2.13, 8.3,10.3.1 Failure of Payment by Contractor 9.5.1.3, 142.1.2 Failure of Paymerrt by Owner 4.7.7, 9.7, 14.1.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) i~llsal Completion and Final Payment 4.6.1, 4.6.16, 4.72, 4.75, 910, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 Fir siancial Arrangements, Owner's 22.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Durance 11.3.1.1,11.35, 11.3.7 GENERAL PROVLSIONS Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Hazardous Materials 10.1, 102.4 Identification of Contract Documents 12.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 52.1 Irt~ 3.17, 3.18, 9.102, 10.1.4,11.3.1.2,11.3.7 Infornsation and Scevlaes Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 22, 4.7.4, 6.2.6, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.3,10.1.4,11.2,11.3,135.1,13.5.2 ~m'y or Damage to Person or Property 4.79 3.3.3,3.3.4,3.7.1,4.6.5,4.6.6,4.6.16,4.7.6,94.3, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,12.1.1, 13S Inlt AIA Document A4DUCYa'a' -1984. Copyripht•®1982 by The AmeAcan Ir~etlWte of Archllecm. All dyhts roesrwd. WA°ANINO: Thls AIA° DoaxnsM is protected by U.S. Copyrlpht Law and IMematlonal ileatiee. Unauthorizsd roproductbn or dletributlon of this AIA Doaanard, or any portion o! It, may roeult M aware civil and crhrrlrlal penaalas, and wNl be prosecuted ~ the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by / AtA software at 10:10A2 on 07/18/2006 under Order Na100038~0s4 1 whbh expires on 7 /1 5 /2 0 118, end ie not for meals. War Nolen: (4173657805) 1 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contracxor 3.8.1, 4.6.13, 5.21, 7,121,1352 Insurance 4.7.9,6.1.1,7.3.6.4,93.2,9.82,9.9.1,9.10.2,11 Durance, Boiler and Machinery 1132 Durance, Contractor's Liability 11.1,11.3.1.13 Insurance, Effective Date of 82.2,11.1.2 Dura~e, Loss of Use 11.33 Insurance, Owner's Lability 11.2,113.1.3 10.25,113 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent m Partial Ord 9.9.1,113.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with 11.3.10 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.3, 3.12.4, 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.19, 4.6.20, 7.4 Interest 13.6 12.5,1.4,15,4.1.1,4.7.1,5.1,6.12,8.1.4 Derpretatians, Written 4.6.18, 4.6.19, 4.?.7 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Regnirod 4.9.5 Judgnent ~ Final Award 4.9.1, 4.9.4.1, 49.7 Labor and Materials, Equdpment 1.13, 1.1.6, 3A, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.122, 3.123, 3.127, 3.1211, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.6.12, 62.1, 7.3.6, 932, 9.3.3, 1224,14.12, 14.2.1, 14.22 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 13, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.95, 4.9.7, 9.9.1,1022, 11.1,113, 13.1, 13A.1,135.1,1352,13.6 Liens 2.1.2, 4.72, 4.75.1, 82.2, 933, 9.10.2 LDitation on Co~otidation or Ja3nder 49.5 Limitations, Statutes of 4.9.42, 1226, 13.7 Limitations of Authority 33.1, 4.6.12, 4.6.17, 5.22, 52.4, 7.4, 113.10 Limitations of Liability 2.3,3.21,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.128,3.1211,3.17,3.18, 4.6.10, 4.6.12, 4.6.19, 6.2.2, 9.4.3, 9.6.4, 9.10.4, 10.1.4, 1025,11.12,112.1,113.7,13.42,135.2 Limitations of Time, General 22.1, 2.24, 32.1, 3.73, 3.82.3.10, 3.125, 3.15.1, 4.6.1, 4.6.12, 4.6.18, 4.72, 4.73, 4.7.4, 4.7.6,A.7.9, 4.6.42, 52.1, 5.2.3, 62.4, 7.3A, 7.4, 82, 92, 9.5, 9.6.2, 9.8, 9.10, 11.1.3,113.1,11.3.2,1135,113.6, 1221,1222,13.5,13.7,143 Limitations of Time, Specific 2.12, 22.1, 2A, 3.10, 3.11, 3.15.1, 4.6.1, 4.6.18, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5.3, 5.4, 7.35, 7.39, 8.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9A.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.102,11.1.3,11.3.6,11.3.10, 11.3.11,12.22,1224,1226,13.7, 14.1, 142.2 Lass of Use Insurance 11.33 Material SnppDrs 13.1,3.12.1,4.6.7,4.6.10,5.21,93.1,9.3.1.2,9.3.3, 9A3, 9.65, 9.10A Materials, Hazardous 10.1,10.24 Materials. labor, Bquipment and 1.1.3,1.1.6, 3A.1, 3.5.1, 3.82, 3.122, 3.123, 3.127, 3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.6.12,6.2.1,7.3.6,93.2,9.3.3, 122.4,14.12,14.2.1,1422 Means, Methods, Techmgnes, Sequences and Procedures of Constnrction 3.3.1,4.6.6,4.6.12,9.4.3 Minor changes m the work 1.1.1, 4.6.13, 4.7.7,7.1,7A US PROVI3IO1!iS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications bu the Contract 1.1.1, 1.12, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.12, 4.6.1, 5.23, 7, 83.1, 9.7 Mntoal Responsibility 6.2 Nonco~orming Work, Acceptance of 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 4.7.52, 95.2, 9.82,12,13.7.1.3 Notice 23, 2A, 32.1, 32.2, 3.73, 3.7.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.129, 3.17,4.7,4.8A,4.9,52.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,822,9.4.1, 95.1, 9.7, 9.10,10.1.2,10.26,11.13,11.3,1222, 122.4,133,135.1,1352,14 Notice, Written 2.3, 24, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.1294.7, 4.8.4, 4.9, 5.2.1, 5.3, SA.1.1, 822, 9A.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9.10,10.1.2,10.2.6, 11.1.3,11.3,122.2,122.4,133, 13.5.2,14 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.52 Notice oo Prootod 8.22 Notices, Permits, Fees and 223, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4,1022 ~~ AIA Doeunant AE01R:N°TM -1992 taopyrlpht O 198E by The Arnsrken Insalde of ArohlEecle. w• rlpht. -essrwd. WA°RIS1~Kd~. Thls AIA° Document b protected by U.S. Oopyrlpht Lair and Inrsrnatlonal Trsatlae. Unauthrrl~ed raproduGbn or dlitr~utlan of tl~b AU Doamsnt, ar arry l~~ ~ M. / AIWA software atOA@ an 07/18YlOOS under ~ No.1000984a94 ~to~~maodmun ~Po~ IbN~v ~Ihs ler. Thb documerd Meae P-ahM~ed by uaar Notes: (4173567905) 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 Observations, Architect's On-Site 4.6.5, 4.6.9, 4.6.10, 4.7.6, 9.4.4, 9.5.1, 9.10.1,121.1, 13.5 Observations, Contraction Manager's On-Site 9.4.4, 12.1.1 Observations, Contractor's 12.2, 3.22 Occupancy 9.6.6, 9.8.1, 99,11.3.11 On~ite Inspections by the Architect 4.6.5, 4.6.16, 4.7.6, 9A.4, 9.8.2, 9.92, 9.10.1 On~ite Observaiiais by the At+clritect 4.6.5,4.6.9,4.7.6,9.4.4,9.5.1,9.10.1,135 On-Site Observations by the Construction Manager 9.4.4, 9.5.1 Orders, written 2.3, 3.9, 4.7.7, 7, 8.2.2,11.3.9, 12.1,12.2, 13.52, 14.3.1 Other Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.142, 4.6.7, 4.95, 6, 11.3.7,1212,122.5 OWNER 2 Owner, Deflmtion of 21 Owner, Formation a~ Services Regnired of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 4.6.2, 4.6A, 6, 9, lO.lA,10.1.6,11.2, 11.3, 135.1, 14.1.1.5,14.1.3 Owner's Authority 3.8.1, 5.21, 52.4, 5.4.1, 7.3.1, 8.22, 9.3.1, 9.32, 11.4.1,12.2.4, 13.52, 14.2,143.1 Owner's Pirtancial Capability 22.1,14.1.15 Owner's I.tabillty Insln~anoe 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 11.33 . Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2,5.21,5.4.1,9.6.4 Owner's Right to Carry Oat the work 2A, 12.24, 14.22.2 Owner's Rtght to Clesn Up 63 Owner's Right to Perform Consbrnr~ion with Own Farces and to Award Other Contracts 61 owner's Right to stop the work 23, 4.7.7 owner's Right to Suspced the worlr 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Speddicaftons and Other Documents 1.1.1,13, 22.5, 53 Partlal Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 99,11.3.11 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.6 Pateals, Royalties and 317 Payment, Applications for 4.6.9,9.2,93,9.4,95.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 Payment, Certlt5cates thr 4.6.9,4.6.16,9.3.3, 9A,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7,14.1.1.3,142.4 Payment, Faillame of 4.7.7, 9.5.13, 9.7, 9.102, 14.1.13,142.1.2 Payment, Final 4.6.1, 4.6.16, 4.72, 4.75, 910, 11.1.2., 11.1.3, 1135, 12.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3,11.3.9, ilA Payments. 4.7.4, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.23 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9,14 Payments to Subcontractors 5.42, 9.5.13.9.62, 9.63, 9.6A,11.3.8, 142.1.2 PCB 10.12,10.13,10.1A Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3,11.3.9, l lft Permits, Fees and Nolicm 22.3, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4,102.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.12,10.1.3,10.1.4 Product Data, Definition of 3.122 Prodnd Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.iT,, 42.7 Program and Completion 4.6.5, 4.7.4, 8.2 Program Payments 4.7.4, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3,13.6,14.23 Project, Defimtion of the 1.1A Project Mannal, DeiFitioa at'the 1.1.7 Project Manuals 22s Project Repreaentstives 4.6.17 Property In~auraru;e 10.25,113 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulation and Laws 1.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.9.7. 10.22, 11.1,1 l 3,13.1, 13.4, 135.1,13.5.2,13.6, 14 Rejection of war']c 35.1, 4.6.10, 122. AU Docanent A201/CrMTM -1982. Copyright O 1982 by The American IrIBtlI1lte d Archliects. AO Nghb raae7aed. wARINNOi: Thin AU1° DocrarMlnt hf Init. P py U.S. Oopyrlght Lear and httentatlwret 7leetiee. Unautlarlsed reproduction err dlatrNndion o! this AIA° Doaarrent, a anp parlbn of i4 7 may result In aevare dell end ptmlrrel perarltles, and will be proeecutad to the msximum extant pesalble ardor Ure law. This document was produced by / AU eoRarare at 10:10 on 07/1812009 underOlder No.t000064084_t addch axplres on 7h512008, and b nd Icr resets. War Notes: (4179557ti0~ Releases of Waivers and Liens 9.10.2 Representations 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.3,9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.6.1,4.6.17,5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.8, 4.9 Responsibility for Those Performdng We Work 33.2, 4.6.6, 6.2.,10 Retainage 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Review at Contract Docmnoents aad I~ieW Conditions by Contractor 1.2.2, 3.T., 3.7.3, 3.12.7 Review of Coatracbor's Submittals by Owner, Constnuction Manager and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.3, 3.11, 3.12, 4.6.12.4.6.16, 52.1, 523, 92, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12.5 Rights amt Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.152,4.6.10,4.7.6,4.9,5.3,6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7,10.2.5,10.3,122.2,12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Royalties and Patents 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitratbn 49.2 Sstety a[ Persons and Property 10.2 Safely Precaattons and Programs 4.6.6, 4.6.12,10.1 Samples, Definition of 3.123 Samples, Shop Drawhrgs, Product Data and 3.11,3.1?.,4.6.12 Samples at the Site, Docamertts and 3.11 Schedoee of Vahres 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data a~ Samples 3.11,3.1?,,4.6.11,4.6.12,4.6.15 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 62.1 Site Inspections 12.2, 3.3.4, 4.65, 4.6.16, 4.7.6, 9.8.2, 9.10.1,13.5 Site Visits, Ar>:hitect's 4.6.5, 4.6.9, 4.7.6, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.92, 9.10.1,13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.6.10,12.2.1,13.5 Speritications, Definition of the 1.1.6 Specifications, The 1.1.1,11.6,1.1.7, 1.2.4, 1.3, 3.11 Statute of Limitations 4.9.4.2,12.2.6,13.7 Stopping the Work 2.3, 4.7.7, 9.7,10.1.2, 10.3,14.1 Shed Materials 62.1, 9.3.2,10.2.1.2,11.3.1.4,12.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 12.4,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.6.6,4.6.10,5.3,5.4 Stirboontractual Relations 53, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.62, 9.6.3, 9.6.4,10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8,14.1.1,14.1.3,14.2.12 Submittals 1.3,3.2.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.6.12,52.1,5.2.3,7.3.6, 92, 9.3.1, 9.82, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3,11.13 Snbrogatlon, Waivers of 6.1.1,11.3.5,11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.6.16, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8, 9.9.1,12.2.1,1222, 13.7 Subabatntial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 52.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architecx 4A Substitution of Construction Manager 4A Substitutions of Materials 3.5.1 Sub-sub~ntracxor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 4.7.6 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superlntertd~t 39,10.2.6 SapervhlOn and Cansbrnctton Proadnres 12.4, 3.3, 3.4, 4.6.6, 4.7.4, 62.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 82, 8.3.1,10,12,14 Sorely 4.8.1, 4.8.4, 5.4.1.2, 9.102, 9.10.3, 142.2 Sm~ety, Consent of 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 22.2, 3.183 3bspenedon by the Owner [ar Convedence InR AIA Domarwrtt A$Ol/CMa"' -1882. C~yriphR • 1982 by The Amerlcen hrstlh0e of Andileras. All rights reasvsd. W/:RN9~: Thls AtA~ Doaarrant is meyresult Ian ssvera crlmMe pe~ltlae, and wIN be Umutl~orixad roproduetlon a dstrlMMlon a/ 11Ye AIA DoaenerM, ar u~y parson al it, 8 prosewlad to the maxNman ex~ powlble under the law. Thb doament was produced ty ~ usrs ~ at 10:10:02 an mn 812088 urdw Order Na1000964094 t sArlclr e>gf6es on 7nsrmos, and to not for resale. (417~5780~ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14.3 Suspension of the Work 4.7.7, 5.4.2,14.1.1.4, 143 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.7.7, 5.4.1.1, 14 Tales 3.6, 7.3.6A Termination by the Comractor 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1,14.2 Termination of the Architect 4.4 Termination of the Construction Manager 4.4 Termination of the Contractor 14.22 TERMWATION OR SUSPENSION OF TAE CONTRACT 14 Tests end Iiuspectlons 3.3.3, 4.6.10, 4.6.16, 9.4.3,122.1,13.5 TIME 8 Thtote, Delays and Ext~ions of 4.7.8, 7.21, 83 Time Limits, Specific 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,4.6.18,4.7,4.8.1,4.8.3,4.8.4, 4.9.1,4.9.4.1,4.9.42,5.3,5.4,7.3.5,7.3.9,8.2,9.2, 9.3.1.9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.102,11.13, 11.3.6, 11.3.10,11.3.11,1222, 12.2.4,122.6,13.7, 14 Thru; Idimita on Claims 4.7.2, 4.7.3, 4.7.6, 4.7.9, 4.8, 49 Title to Wank 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECIZON OF WORE iZ Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions 4.7.6, 8.3.1, 10.1 Unit Prices 7.1.4, 7332 Uce of I)owments 1.1.1,1.3, 225, 3.12.7, 53 Use of Site 3.1.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Vahus, Scbednle of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims: Flnat Payment 4.75, 4.9.1, 9.10.3 waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.42 Warr of Claims by the Contractor . 9.10.4,11.3.7,13.4.2 waiver of Claims by the Owner 4.7.5, 4.9.1, 9.93, 9.10.3,11.3.3,11.35,113.7,13.4.2 Waiver of liens 9.102 Waivers a[ Stiubrogstion 6.1.1,11.35,113.7 warranty and Warranties 3S, 4.6.16, 4.7.5, 93.3, 9.82, 9.9.1,12.22,13.7.1.3 weather Delays 4.7.8.2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded 49A Work, Definition of 1.1.3 written consent 1.3.1, 3.128, 3.14.2, 4.7.4, 4.9.5, 93.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.102, 9.10.3, 10.12,10.13,113.1, 11.3.1.4, l 1.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.6.18.4.6.19, 4.7.7 written Notice 2.3, 24, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.129, 4.7.1, 4.7.6, 4.7.9, 4.8A. 4.9.4.1, 52.1, 53, 5.4.1.1, 8.22, 9.4, 95.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.12,10.2.6,11.1.3,11.3,1222,1224,13.3, 135.2, 14 Written Orders 2.3, 3.9, 4.7.7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 121,12.2,13.52,14.3.1 AU1 Documard ARO1/Ctlla~ -1881. Copyright O 19a2 hY ThB Amert~n Instltu<s d AmJNtects. AU Ngtda reserved, wAfiNNp: Thls AU-° Document h Init. p by U.S. CopyrlgM Law and hdernagoml iFeallss. Unautl~orlasd roproductbn or distrlbutlon of this AIAe Document, or arty portlen o1 It, 9 may resuR In savors dolt end almlml peneltles, and will be proeaculed b the medmum extant posNbls under the hw. This doaxnerd was produced by / AIA soflwaro at 10:10:02 on W/18/2006 under Order No.1000984084 1 whbh expires on 7/t b/200g. and Is nd for reeale. User Notes: (4f 7356780', i~ ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINRIONS ~ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contrack A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or imitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, saa~le forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). § 1.12 THE CONTRACT Tire Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract reps+esents the entire and in~ated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, represe~rtions or agnxnnarts, either written or oral. The Contract may be waded or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed fA crate a cantraotnal reh-tionship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Construction Manager and Contractor, (3) between the Architect and Construction Manager, (4) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor ~ (5) between any persons ~ entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Construction Manager and Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performarroe of their duties. ~ 1.1.5 THE~YMDRK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Wok may oonstitate the whole ar a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Worfc performed under the Contract Doclmaents may be the whole or a pmt and which may include ccestrrrction by other Contractors and by the Owner's own forces including persons ar entities under separate contracts not administered by the Comtruction Manager. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Docuuments. wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. ~ 1.1.5 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample farms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. § 12 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT § 12.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. ~ 122 Bxecution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is fA be performed and correlated personal observations with req of the Contract Docarments. § 12.5 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary fce tore proper execution and cormpletian of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required Daly to the extent nu tro~,en.M nxol~ss+° -19x4. CapyripM o 1 ssz br The nmencan ~nsllWOa of Ardtlrac:ls. nor r1yMs rasar~ad. wnntat~a: ns. ntA' Doournsnt tr ~' protected aY us. topyrtpht tar and lneema8ona17reatMa llnautlwriaed rapraductlon or dlatrlbueon of tha IYA° Doaanent, or srgr patlon ar ly 10 mry revert In aevero d.e and crlaibait pentltlss. and rat bs proacutad to ltle maximum aEeM t+oaBbls uwar iM law. Thle doarnent wes prada:ed by ~ AIA acaeiero at 10:t0.V2 an omerloos under order No.t0003640s4 1 whkh e~ires on 7n5r~D09. and is not tar reaela Uaertioles: (4179557805) ' consistent with the Contract Docume~s and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary tD produce the intended results. ' § 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contracror in dividing the Work among Snbcontradors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. ' § 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHRECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFlCATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS § 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which die Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-snbcx>ntratxor or naterial or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings. Specifications and other doctwoents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise irdic~ted the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's retard set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of ' the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor ce any SuboonttacWr, Sub-subcattracaor or material or equipment supplier on other projects err' for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The ' Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subc~tnu~ars and material or equipment suppliers are grouted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate b~ and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Docnmgrts. All copies made nndrr this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Trawings, Specifications and other ' documents prepared by the Architecx. Submittal m distribution to meet official regulatory requirements err for other purposes in cortrtecxion with this Project is rat to be eonstrtred as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright err other reserved rights. t § 1A CAPRALQATION § 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specificaIly defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles ce (3) the tides of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. ' g 1.5 INTERPRETATION § 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "arty" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 DEFlNITION t § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. ' § 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mectmnic's lice rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the prvpexty on which the Project is located, ' mually refeaed tp as the site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title, recorded a um+eoorded. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER ' §221 The Owner shall, at the request of the Conttacxar, prior to exearti~ of the Agre~at and promptly from trine to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasartable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fu1fiII the Owner's obligations under the Contract. [Note: Unless srtch reasonable evidence wen furnished on request prior ro Ahe exer:rrtian of t/te Agree>rruti: the ' prospective contractor would not be ngriir~ to errecute the Agreement or to conunence the Workj AIA DacumN~t A281/CMaTM -1992. Copyrl8ht01882 b1- The Ameracan kretldRe of Arehimols. All rl8hb rsservsd. WARIaNQ: Thb AIAs Doeranant Is Ink. ~a~d tly U.S:.Copyripht Law and r11an1atlonel 7leatlas.l>tlaulllormad reprodrlctlon or dbtrlbutlon of this AIAs DocranNd, a atry pertlon of N, may result In ssvsro clvN and ahnbatl perwlass. and w91 bs prossgrted b ohs mailman extsrd posslbk under the law. Th7a doetanerd was produced by 11 / u eoaxrare at 10:10:02 on 07/18/~00a under Older No.1000994094 1 whid~ e~irss on 7/1512008, and Is not for reset. (4179567806) § 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. § 2.2.3 Bxcept for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Ce®tract Doamdents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessment and charges required for consulction, use or occupancy of permanent strictures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. Unless otherwise provided under the Contract Documents, the owner, through the Construction Manager, shaII secure and pay for the binlding permit. § 2.2A Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness fA avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docimaents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary fad' execution of the Work. § 2.2.6 The Owner shall forward all communications bo the Cofactor through the Construcxion Manager and shall c0dibemporaneoisly provide the same ceaunnimications bo the Architect. § 2.2.7 The foregoing ode in addition bo other duties and re~onsibilitiea of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect ro Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Othea Contracoods), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). § 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK § 2.3.1 If the Contracxor fails to correct Work which is not in aoc:ordance with the requirernenta of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently faihi to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically eo empowered by the Owcer in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Walk, or arty portion thereof. until the cause for such order has bees eliminated; however, the right of the Owner fA atop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor err any other person err entity. § 2r4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK § 2A.1 If the ~;p _ r catractad~ defaults err neglects to carry out the Walk in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a may period after receipt of written ice from the Owner to commence and conCmue correction of such default err neglect with diligence and prodnptneas, the owner may after suchseven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven-day period. If the Contractor within such second seven-day period atleer receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue bo correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of codxecting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Construction Manager's acid Architect's and their respective consultants' additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, n~lect or failure. Such action by the Owner and aarounts charged bo the Contractor are both subject bo prior approval of the Architect, aftea consultation with the Construction Manager. If payments then or thereatler due the Contractor are not sufficiem to Dover such wants, the Contractor shall pay the diffidence m the Owner. ARTI~XE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 DEFlNRION § 3.1.1 ~'he Cofactor is the person err entity identified as arch in the Agreement and is refereed to throughout this Agdternent as if singular in number: The berm "Contractor" mesas the Contractor or the Contractor's anthorized representative. § 3.1.2 The plural term "Contractors" refers ti persona or entities who perform construction under Conditions of the Contract that are administered by the Construction Manager, and that are identical or substantially similar to these Conditions. Intl. AIA Documem AROlK81da~ -1892 CopyriDM O 1982 by The American IrrdlOde of ArohPoecls. Aa rlphts rssereed. W This AIA~ Docunad Is maYreadt Ike eewre~clvll~d crimtnsl pnp9dss, and w1M bs prossc~p~d b ~ nuxhmsna n of tlds AIA DocumatM, err s+q- por8an ad N, possalts under are law. Tads doaarrent was produced by 12 ~ AIA software at 10:10:0¢ an o7narrooe undo.Ondar Nalooo99soa4 t which expires on 7n5+zoo9, and is notfor issue. lher No1ss: (4178667805) ' § 32 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDRIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information fluaiahed by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.2 and shall st once report to the Construction Manager and Architect errors. inconsistencies oromissionsdiscovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner, Construction Manager or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to repan it to the Construction Manager and Architect. If the Contactor performs any construction activity knowing it involves ' a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Construction Manager and Architect, the Contractor shall assume appropariate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate ar~unt of the attributable cods for correction. § 322 The Contractor shall take field measmenmertts and verify field conditior~ and shall carefully compare such field measttrements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before corntta~encittg activities.l3trars, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Construction Manager and Architect at once. § 323 The contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Section 3.12. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.9 The Contractor shall supervise sod direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over connstruction means, methods, techniques, sequences ' and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work utMler this Contract, subject to overall coordination of the Construction Manager as provided in Sections 4.6.3 and 4.6.4. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner far acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, ' Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work undea a contract with the Contractor. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract ' Documents either by activities or duties of the Construction Manager ar Architect in thear administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required a performed by persons other than the Contractor. § 3.3.4 The Contractor shall inspect portions of the Project related to the Contractor's Work in carder to determine ' that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3~4 LABOR AND MATERULLS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise ~ovided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated oar to be incorporated in the Work ' §3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other .. persons c~rryittg out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unt'it persons or persona tort skilled in tasks assigned W them. ' § 3.5 WARRANTY § 5.5.1 The Contractor wan~ants to the Owner, Cortstnrction Manager and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free form defects not inherent is the quality required oa• permitted, and that the work will conform widr the requirements of the Contract Documents. Wot1C not co~orming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage ar defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, inproper or insttfficient maintenance, improper operation, oar normal wear and tear under rtornual usage. If required by the Construction Manager or Architect. the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. AIA Docunattt AS01/CYsn -16aY. copyrlpnt ®1682 lry The American Instlhtte oT Arci~tects. AN rlghte reserved. wA°RNINO: TWs AIA° Document Is ~N' protected by U.S. Copyrlpht Lew end bdamallond Trestles. Uneuthorbwd reproduction or dhtrlbution oT this AIA Document, or any Portion of i4 1 ~ may result In sews clvll end crNninsl penWtles, end wtll be prosecuted to the mrorlmum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ' / AIA software at 10:102 on W/1812006 un~r Artier No.1000®64094_1 which expires on 7/15f2009, and is not Tor resale. User Norse (4179567605) § 3.0 TAXES § 3.0.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and simt7ar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractre which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMRS, FEES AND NOTICES § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit and the Cottttactor shall secure and pay for all other permits and gover~nW fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which sre customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally requited when bide are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to asceatain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinatru:es, bur7ding codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that poztions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Construction Manager, Architect and Owner in writing, aad rteceseary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. § 3.7x4 If the contractor performs work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice tD the Construction Manager, Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility fce such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.0.1 The Contractor shall include in the Corrtrad Sum all allowacees stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by alk>watrcea shall be supplied for such amour and by such persons or entities as the Owner may dined, but the Cootrar~or shall trot be requited to employ persons ar entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Work; .2 allowances shall cover the coat to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, Profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances; .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the (orange Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and tip allowances under Section 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs miler Section 3.8.2.3. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT .. §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competern superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at dre Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the contractor, and given bo the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contracxor. Important shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly co~rmed on written request in each terse. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE §3.10.1 The Contractor, pnomptiy after beang awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Arehittxx's ittfotmation and the CorrsavctiaD Manager's approval a Contractor's Corratruction Schedule for the Work. Such schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals ae required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project construction schedule to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the work. Inlt AIA Document A20UCMa~ -1992 OopyrlpM • 1992 try The Amerlart kretllrrre of ArohlMCts. All rlyhts reserved. WAeRMNti: This AIAe Document Is pratecled by U.S. Copyrlphe Law and Yrtemethnml Trestles. tlrroutlrorlasd reproductlon ar dlstrlbutlon of this AtA Docunant, or any portlar of it, 14 rosy result In aevero clvll end rxhnlnd panaltlu, and will bs prosecuted to the mmrlmum ~nt posatble under the law. This document rtes produced hY ~ tAieworaof at 1010:02 on 07n tY200s unr~r Order No.10009s1094_i r erpres on 7n 612009, and tr rat far resets. lai~isosl 1 1 n § 3.102 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Construction Manager in scheduling and performing the Contractor's Work to avoid c~Dflict, delay in or interference with the Waric of other Contractors or the construction or operations of the Owner's own farces. ~ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Construction Manager's and Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and allows the Construction Manager and Architect reasonable time to review submittals. § 3.10.4 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SRE ~ 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change orders and other Modifications, in goon order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during constrncxion, and in addition approved Shop Drawings. Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Construction Manager and Architect and shall be delivered eo the Construction Manager far submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. ~ 3.1Z SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.121 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, cehedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Subsubcontracxor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate sow portion of the Work. ~ 3.122 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagraus and other information fitmished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment far some portion of the Work. § 3.123 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or worimranship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.124 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to~ demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to oo~arm tD the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject tD the limitations of Section 4.6.12. ~ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit bo the Construction Manager, in accordance with the schedule and sequence approved by the Construction Manager, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Con ruction Manager in the coordination of the Contractor's Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals with relatcd documents submitted by other Contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. § 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Sales or similar submittals until the respective submittal has bees approved by the Construction Manager and Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. § 5.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contrru~or 1 represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measnrem~tts and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. ' ~ 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Carttract Documents by the Construction Manager's and Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Constriction Manager and Architect in writing ' of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Construction Manager and Architect have given written approval 0o the specific deviation. The Contnuxm shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Construction Manager's and Architect's approval thereof. AIA Docunent A201JCINem -1012. Cap~ld O 1962 by The American tnstldrte of Arohitects. All rlyhts nuswwd. WA°RNWO: Thls AIAe Document Is Init. P by. U.S. Oopyripht law and hMerrmtionel 7leatlss. Unanthorlsed reproduction or distributlon o1 this AIA Document, or erry portlon of rt, 15 may result In aarere dull and cNrnhrel pemlOss, and will be prosecuted to the mexlmum esterrt possOds under Ora lew. This document was produced try ' ~ AW software at 10:10:02 on 07/18f2008 under Older No.10008e'/084_i which s~irea on 7M5l2008, and tr rwt for nrsele. Userltotes: (41%9567805) § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples err similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Construction Manager and Architect on previous submittals. § 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Constrtxxion Manager and Architect are not expected to talcs responsive action maybe so identified in the Contract Documents. §3.12.11 Whey professional certification of perfaratance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Constnu~ion Manager and Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the aocwacy and oomplebe~s of such calculations and certifications. § 3.13 USE OF SITE §3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to anus permitted by law, adirtances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not un<easonably encumber the site with materials err equipment. § 3.132 The Contractor shall coordinate the Contractor's operations with, and secure the approval of, the Construction Manager before using any portion of the site. § 3.14 CUTTING ARID PATCHWG §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting m patching required to complete the Work or bo maloe its parts fit together properly. § 3.142 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or folly or partially completed canstrttction of the Owner's own forces or of other Contractors by cutting, patching, excavating or otherwise altering such construction. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by other Contractors or by the Owner's own forces except with written consent of the Construction Manager, Owner and such other Contractors; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the other Contractors err the Owner the Contractor's consent to cooing or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANWG UP §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area flee from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Wank the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, nebbish, the ContracWr's tools, cozstruction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Constntction Manager may do so with the Owner's approval and the cost thereof shall be charged tD the Contrceror. § 3.16 ACCESS TO YYORK §3.16.1 The Contactor shall provide the Owner, Conatrucdon Manager and Architect access to the Wank in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS §3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for iufrirtgennent of patent rights and shall hold tl1e Owner, Construction Manager and Architect harmless from loss on account thete~ but shall not be responsible for such defense err bas when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Doaimeata. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly fiunishad to the Architect. § 3,18 WDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall inde~ify and hold ttaranless the Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, Construcxion Manager's and Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them 5oan and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense hs attributable tD bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury bo or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulthng therefrom, but Daly to the extent caused in whole or in part by AIA Document A201/Cits~ -1882: CepyrlgM ®1892 by The American Inetlhda of Arohiteclr. All rights reserved. WARNwO: This AIA• Docurrwrd la Init. ~ by U.B. Copyright taw and IrrternsaanN 7testlss. W~authal:sd raproductlon or dlsMlrutlon et this AIA• Documad, err arty portion of k, 1 B rosy result In ssvaro alvll and crlmirral penelaes, and wal bs presscuted to the mexhnum axterrt poasWs under tits law. This document was produced by / AV1 saltware at 10:10:02 on 07/18/2008 under Order Na10000t14094 1 wNch expires on 7/1612009, and Is rat icr raesle. War Noses: (41795578051 negligent acts ar omissions of the Contractor, a Suboontractar, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them ar anyone for whose acts they may be liable. regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss ar expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or reduce other rights ar obligations of indemnity which would otherwise adst as to a party ar person described in this Secxion 3.18. § 5.18.2 In claims against any person ar entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractar, a Subcontractar, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them ar anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Section 3.18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation ar benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under warkers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts ar other employee benefit acts. §3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Section 3.18 shall not extend po the liabih'ty of the Construction Manager, Architect, their consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation ar approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs ar specifications, ar (2) the giving ' of or the failure po give dirtxtions ar instructions by the Construcxion Manager, Architect, their consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving ar failure po give is the primary cause of the i~ury ar damage. ' ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.1 ARCHRECT § 4.1.1 The Architect is the peasan lawfully licensed to practice arclritecture ar an entity lawfully practicing t architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to mroughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect ar the Architect's authorized representative. § 4,2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER § 4~.1 The Construction Manager is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred W throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in mtmber. The term "Construction Manager" means the Construction Manager or the Construction Manager's authorized representative. § 4.3 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Construction Manager and Architect as set frith in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or expended without written consent of the Owner, Construction Manager, Architect and Contractar. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.4 In case of termination of employment of the Construction Manager ar Architect, the Owner shall appoint a construction manager or architect against whom the Contractor makes no masonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former construction manager ar archipect, respectively. § 4.5 Disputes arising under Sections 4.3 and 4.4 shall be subject po arbitration. § 4.6 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4`6.1 The Construction Manager and Architect will provide administration of the Ccatttract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representatives (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the comction period described in Section 12.2. The Construction Manager and Architect will advise and consult with the Owner and will have authotty bo act on behalf ' of the Owner only to the expert provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise malified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. § 4.6.2 The Construction Manager will depermine in general that the Work is being performed in aooos'datioe with the requirements of the Contract Documents, will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavar po guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. §4.6.3 The Construction Manager will provide for ooardination of the activities of other Contractors and of the Owner's own forces with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Cotitractar shall participate with other Contractors and the Construcxion Manager and Ownea in reviewing their wnstruction schedules when directed po do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions po the construction schedule deemed Inlt AIA Document A201/CMaTM -1aa2. Capyripld ®t aB2 by The Amerlaan Ineatute of Archaeote. All rl~q reMrved. VVARI~10: Thh AU1° tlooumant M protected by U.S. Copyright Lew and hdematlond Tresses. Unaulhodzsd reproduotlon or dletrl6uaon at this AIA° Documend. or any porgon of M, ~ 7 may resuR in severe dull end crlmMal penallles, and rrlll be prosewtad to the mndmum exterd poaslbls under the law. This document wes produced hY ' ~ AIA aotlYYere et 10:10:02 on 07hB1200a under Qder No.1000999094_1 wldch expires on 7fl 5!2009, and is not tar resale. User Notes: (4179557905) necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The eomstivction schedules shall oonstitote the schedules to be used by the Contractor, other Contractors, the Constnmtion Manager and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 4.6.4 The Ceatslntction Manager will schedule and coordinate the activities of the Contlactass in accordance with the latest approved Project construction schedule. §4.6.5 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progtess and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in acoordarme with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive ar continuous on-site inspections to check quality ar quantity of the Wank. On the basis of on-site observations as an architect. the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor tD guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the wart. § 4.6.6 The Ca~nstruction Manager, except to the extent required by Section 4.6.4, and Architect will not have control over ar charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences ar p~rucedtn+es, ar far safety precautions and programs in connection with the Wank, sinrx these at+e solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Section 3.3, and nether will be responsible for the Cartttacror's failtm to carry out the Work in accardance with the Contract Documents. Neither the Construction Manager nor the Architect wIIl have control over ar charge of ar be responsible for acts ar omissions of the Candractor, Subcentracbors, ar their agents ar employees, ar of any other persons performing portions of the Work § 4.6.7 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents ar when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall communicate through the Construction Manager, and shall contemporaneouslyprovide the same communications to the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with other Contradars shall be through the Construction Manager and shall be contemporaneously provided to the Architect. § 4.6.8 The Construction Manager will review and certify all Applications for Paymcet by the Contractor, including final payment. The Construction Manager will assemble each of the Contractor's Applications far Payment with similar Applications from other Contractors into a Project Application and Pmject Certificate far Payment. After reviewing and certifying the amounts due tits Contractors, the Construction Manager will submit the Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment, along with the applicable Contractors' Applications and Certificates for Payment, to the Architect. §4.6.9 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of Contractors' Applications for Payment, and the ceatifications of the Construction Manager, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractors and will issue a Project Certificate far Payment. § 4.6.10 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents, and to require additional inspection or testing, in accordance with Sections 135.2 and 135.3, whether ar not such Work is fabricated, installed ar completed, but will take such action only after ~fying the Construction Manager. Subject to review by the Architect, the Construction Manager will have the sutharity to reject Wort which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Construction Manager considers it necessary ar advisable for implementation ~ the intent of the Contract Documents, the Construction Manager will have authority to require additional i»spection ar testing of the Wank in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 1353, whether ar not such Wark is fabricated, installed ar completed. The foregoing autharity of the Construction Manager will be subject to the provisions of Sections 4.6.18 through 4.6.20 inclusive, with respect to irrterpr+etations and decisions of the Architect. However, neither the Architect's oar the Construction Manager's authority to act under this Section 4.6.10 oar a decision made by either of them in good faith either to exercise ar not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty ar responsibility of the Architect ar the Construction Manager to the Contrac~ar, Subcontracxors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents ar employees, ar other persons performing any of the Work. § 4.8.11 The Construction Manager will receive fi+om the Contractor and review and approve all Shop Drawings, Product Data sod Samples, coordinate them with information received from other Contracxors, and transmit to the AtA DocwnNrt A2DU'CYare - 7YD4. Capyrlpht O 199E br Ttie American hretlprte of ArdMlecfa. All rights reserved. WARNNO: This AIA° DocumerN 18 Init. by U.s. CopyrlpM Law and Interrratioml Treaties. Unauthoriasd•reproduetlon or dlgrl6ution otttds AtA° Uoaenene, err arty portion of It, 18 nary resrra in severe dull and alminal pemitlsa, and will be prosecuted m ure maximum extent posNWe under the hw. 71de document was produced by AU software at tort O:OE on WN 8/2009 under Order No.1000984094 1 whtdt expires on 7h51200a, and b not for reads. User (totes: (417955780.x7 1 ' Architect chase rot:omimeaded for approval. The Construction Manager's actions will be taloen with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work of the Contractor or in the activities of other Contractors, the Owner, or the Architect. §4.6.12 The Atchibax will review and approve or take other appropriate action aeon the Contractor's submittals each as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for cro~ornoartce with information gives and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Arclitect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cease ao delay in the Work of the Contractor or in the activities of the other Contractors, the Owner, as' the Construction Manager, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the atxuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating ' instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Arclitect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations ender Sections 33, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's reviear shall not constitute approval of safety prasmtions or, aiiess otl>eawise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, bechmgces, sequences err procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.6.15 The Construction Manager will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. §4.6.14 Following consultation with the Cortstrncdon Manager, the Architect will take appt<opriate action on Change Orders or Constriction Change Directives in sooordartce with Article 7 and will have authority to order mimr '' changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. § 4.6.15 The Construction Manager will maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of all Contracts, Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes and selections made doting construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Sarrgrles and similar required submittals. These will be available to the Architect and the Contractor, and will be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Project. ' § 4.6.16 The Construction Manager wrll assist the Architect in conducting inspections tn determine the dates of Sabstatrtial Completion and final cromq~letion, and will receive and forward to the Architect written warranties and related docuiments required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor. The Construction Manager will ' forward. tn the Architect a final Project Application and Project Certificate far Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 4.6.17 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will p~r+ovide ace or ire project representatives tn assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit ti be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.6.16 The Architect will interpret aid decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the ' Contract Documents on written request of the Coisttuction Manager, Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response t0 such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agireement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.6, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fiunish ' such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made far them § 4.6.78 Interpcetstions and decisions of the Architect will be: ~nsistert with the intent of and reasonably inferable ' from the Contract Documents and grill be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretatons and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will >mt show partiality to either and wrll not be liable far results of i~premtions or decisions so rendered in good faith. ' § 4.6.20 The Architect's decisions on matters relating tn aesthetic effetx will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. ' tint. al- Docunwnt n2otlcM.~ -1882 Copyright m t e~ by The prneri~n msnaae of ArcFirecm. ai ri8hts mssrvsd. w/wraNO: This lw-• icprramt ~. metbie uiavera d~irll a~rxd atminal petaabs, end wia~be ~~~ ropreducdan err diatrltadron of tt~ia AiA Document, or eny portlon of It, 19 prosecuted to the me~rlmum ext~t poesl6le under lfie law. Thb doasrxrrd wee produced by / uwr Notes: e< 10:10:02 on 07/1812009 under Omer No.1000a64094 1 wNch expires on 7h 512008, and b not for resale. 4179567805) § 4.7 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ' § 4x7.9 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or inberpo<etation of Contract terms, Payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and C~trador• arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate ' Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 4.7.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Construction Manager or Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Section 4.8. A decision by the t Anclutect, as prrovided in Section 4.8.4, shaIl be required as a condition precedcet to arbitration or litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owrter as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Wark or (2) the extent ~ which the Work has been completed. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent to ' arbitration or litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Section 4.8.4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic's lien. ' § 4.7.9 Time limits on Claims. Claims by ether party must be made within 21 days after otxauYence of the event giving rise bo such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recegaizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additio~l Claim made after the initial Claim has ' been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. § 4.7A Continuing Contract Performance. Pending fi~ resolution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Comractor shall proceed diflgentiy with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue tD make payments in accerdance with the Contract Documents. § 4.7.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The matting of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the ' Owner except those arising from: .9 liens, Claims, security inte~r+ests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .9 terms of special warranties requited by the Contract Documents. ' §4.7.6 Claims for Concealed or Unlmown Conditions. Tf conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily ' found to exist and generally recegnized as inher~ertt in construction activities of the character provided four in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given bo the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the cwnditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contrac~r's cost ' of; or time requited far, perfonasance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Conntract Sum or Contnict Time, or both. F the An;.hitect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, ' the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractour in writutg, stating the reasons. Claims by ether party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect bas given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial detennirtaticn, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Secti~ 4.8. ' § 4.7.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim far• an increase in the Cor~ract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding ~ execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or propeaty arising under Section 10.3. If the ContracWar , believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasounable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance ' with the procedure established herein. Init. AfA Documard A20'1/CMa~ -1992. CopyrfOlrt O 1962 by The American InstlWte of Arehascta. All riphta roasrwd. WA°RNMt01: This AtA° Document la ' pralected btr U.S. t;opyrlght Lew and hrbrnatlanal 7Featles. Unauthorised reproductbn or dlstranAlon of rids AfA Dognnant, or arty portion of If, ~ •. may result In severe cWa and txirngral pemltlas, and wul~be proaeculed to the mardmum sxterd possible under the Mw. Thla dtxament was produced by / lAlawersot~ at 10:102 on 07/18/2008 under alder No.1000984084_i whttth expkes on 7/15/2008, arat b not Tor resale. 4179557805 ~ ) , 1 1 1 1 ~ 4.7.8 Claims for Additional Time. ~ 4.7.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim fa an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Wark. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. § 4.7.8.2 If adverse weather conditions ate the basis far a Claim far additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions bad an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 4.7:9 Injury ar Damage bo Person ar Property. If either party to the Contract sins injury ar damage bo person ar property because of an acx ar otnission of the other party, of any of the other party's employees ar agents, ar of others far whose acts such patty is legally liable, written notice of such injury ar damage, whether ar not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not excxeding 21 days after first obseavanc:e. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for additional cost ar time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Sections 4.7.7 ar 4.7.8. ~ 4.8 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 4.8.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one ar more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the clainnank (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Atrhiba:t expects m take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole ar in part, stating reasons far rejection, (4) recd approval of the Claim by the other party ar (S) suggest a compromise. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amt of the Claim. ~ 4.8.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare ar obtain appropriate doctmnentation. ~ 4.8.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the patty malting the Claim shall, within'ten days after the Architect's Preliminary response, take one ar more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim ar (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. ' ~ 4.8.4 If a Claim has ~t bees resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the patties ar requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will reader to the parties the Atthitect's written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Stan ar Contract Time ar both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractar's default, the Architect may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance is resolving the controversy. 1 1 § 4.9 ARBITRATION ~ 4.9.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy ar Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, ar the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitratar ar arbitrators may be entered in any quit having jurisdiction thereof, except corrhovetsies ar Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided far in Section 4.7.5. Such ~rrtroversies ar Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Section 4.8.4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written dema~ of either party. Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim has been referred to the Arrdritoct as provided in Section 4.7 and no decision has been rendered. ~ 4.9.2 Rules and Notices far Arbitration. Claims between the Owner and Contractor not resolved under Section 4.8 shall, if subject to arbitration under Section 4.9.1, be decided by arbitration in accotdanc:c with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Assoaation eizaentiy in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. Notice of demand far arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other patty m the Agreement between the Owner and Contractar and with the American Arbitration Association, and copes shall be filed with the CansWction Manager and Architect. ~ 4.9.5 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbitration proceedings, the Owner and C~tractor shall comply with Section 4.7.4. aln Docamart A401/CtAs~ -rasa. CspyripAt o tsez by The Amerkwn Insstute of ArchNects. al nonts roawvsd. wMNING: Thl: atn• ooa.nent is Inlt. ~~ by US OopyrlgM Law and hrternatbml 7tsaass. Unautlarized reprodudlon or distrlbutlon of this AIA° Document, or eny portlon of it, 21 may roses in severe dull end crlminel psraltlsa, and wnl be prosecuted to the rrmximum extard poaslbls under drs law. This document was produced by / AIA solhYers at 10:t0:D2 On W/18/2008 uMer t)rder No.1000364094_1 vrMch on 7/151200a, and is rat for resale. Uear Notes: (417355780 § 49.4 When Arbitration May Be Demerrdod. Demand for arbitration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of (1) the date ~ which the Arc}lited has rendered a final written decision on the Claim, (2) the tenth day after the parties have presented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events described in Section 4.72. §49.1.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitradon within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. >f the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated. such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable t0 all parties ccecerned. § 49.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 49.1 and 4.9.4 and Section 4.9.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has ariseq and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based ~ such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Secxion 13.7. § 4.8.5I.imitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating b0 the Contract Documents sbaIl include, by consolidation or joinder err in any orbs manner, the Construction Manager, the Architect, or the Construction Manager's or Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference tD the Agreement and signed by the Constrndi~ Manager, Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall inchrde, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manna, parties other than the Owns, Contractor, other Contractors as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of factor law whose presence is required if complete relief is ro be accorded in arbitration. No persons or entities other than the Owner, Contractor or other Contractors as defined in Section 3.1.2 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration imolviog an additional person oar entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration ~ a dispute not described therein or with a person err entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable ands applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.8.8 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted ~ be demanded. When a party fails to include a Claim through oversight, inadvetteZtce or excusable neglect, or when a Claim has matured oar been acquired subsequently, the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. § 49.7 Judgment on Pinar Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, oral judgment maybe entered upce it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINRIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a pers~ err entity who has a direct contract with the Contra to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term'Snbcontractor" is refaced to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in numbs and means a Subcontractor err aD 811thDlrZed rive Of the Snbconhractor. The term "Snbcontractar" does not include other Cantracburs err subcontractors of other Contractors. § 5.1.2 ASub-subcontractoar is a person or entity who bas a direct car indirect condracx with a Subocetractor to perform a pa~rtion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcwntracto>~" is refen od bu throughout the Caastract Documents as if singular in number and means aSub-subcontracoor oar an authorized rive of the Sub- subcztntractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Constctlction Manage for review by the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish aA oocuma~N assnrcaw~ -1tiD2. txpyrlaln ®1 1182 by The Amerl~n Inatltute of Arddtecls. Aa rtphts nraarwd. wARNIlKt: rnla~AlA• Dodaraent is IMt. ~ U.S. Copyrlpht L.aw grid tntsrnHtlorxil Trsatlea. WauthoNzed reprodudlon a d1s616utlon of thls AU1• Document, or•aM- poraon o! It, ~ may r.sua M aewre dull and criminal psmlttes, end war ba proasculed to the maximum axteiie poaalble under the law. rnie document win produced by / AIA eoRwme e< 10:102 an 07/18/2008 undsr Order No.1000984084_t wFdch expires on 7h 6/2008, add le not for reeela War Nara.: (4173557x06) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 matcaials s equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Wsk. The Construction Manager will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether s not the Owner, Construction Manager or Architect, aftea due investigation, has t+ea~nable objection to any such proposed person s entity. Failtue of the Construction Manager to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person s entity to whom the Owner, Construction Manager s Architect has made reasonable and timely objeilion. The Contractor shall not be requited to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.5 If the Owner, Construction Manager s Architect has reasonable objection tD a persons entity proposed by the Contracts, the Conttacts shall propose another to whom the Owner, Construction Manager s Atchitect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased s decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. However, no inctease in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting frames as requited. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, Person s entity previously selected if the Owner, Construction Manager s Architect makes reasonable objection to such change. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS ' § 5.3.1 By apptoptiate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Conaacmr shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by teams of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner, Construilion Manager and Atchitect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect under the Contrail Documents with respect to the Work W be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will trot prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agr~eemetlt, the benefit of all rights, remedies and tedtess against the Contractor that the Contracts, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Ca~ntrailor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-snbconttacxors. The Conttactor shall make available to each Proposed Subcontracts, Prior to the execution of the subcontract agtat, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontracts will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontracts, identify to the Snboontrails terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontntctarc:s. § 5A CONTINGENT ASSIGNNIENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcentract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contracts to the Owner provided that: assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner fs cause pursuant ~ Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner aoxpts by notifying the Subcontracb~r in writing; and assignment is subject to the poor rights of the surtty, if any, obligated under bond relating bo the Contract. § 5r4.Z If the Work has been suspended fs nmre than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY OTHER CONTRACTORS § 6.10WNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORIN CONSTRUCTION WRH O1NN FORCES AND TO AWARD OTHER CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction s operations rehtted to dte Project with the Owner's own forces, which include persons s entities under separate contracts not admitusteted by the Construction Manager. The Owner finther reserves the right to award other contracts in cottnecdon with other portions of the Projeil s other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical s substantially similar to these including those pottions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contracb~r claims that delay s additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contracts sl~ll make such Claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Docutents. AIA Document A2911~CMa~ -1992. Copyright ®1992 Dy The AmerN;an q~stlsrte of ArchlOec[s. AN rlyhb reesrved. WARNNO: Thls•AIA° Docrnnerd Is Init. ~ U.S. Capyrlght Law and internatlonsl iFsatlss. lArarrthorlxsd reproductbn or dl~rlbutlon of this AIAe Document, ar arry person of N, may result M severe clvN and ciiminal pandtles, and will bs prosecuted to the maximum extent poes~le under 9re law. This doaarwra was produced by ~ ~ ~ ^ at tato~ on o7nerzaoe urxler Order No.tooo8e~o94 ~ vM~k:h expires on rnanoo9, and a not tar reeele. at ~~ 1 § 6.1.2 When the Owner performs carstruction ~ operations with the Owner's own forces including persons or cetities under separate contracts imt administerod by the Construction Manager, the Owner shall provide for coordination of such forces with the Wa~rk of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. § 6.1.3 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs consttvction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own fames, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in this Article 6 and in Articles 3, 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILRY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner's own farces, Construction Manager and other Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and perforalance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's c~nstluction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Wank depends for props execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner's own forces or other Contractors, the Contractor shall, prior to procuding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Construction Manager and Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construcxion that arould render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall cortstitnte an acknowledgment that the Owner's own forces or other Contractors' completed or partially ~mpleted censtrnction is Stand proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays ~ by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be baene by the party responsible therefor. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed construction or partially completed constnrction ar to properly of the Owner or other Contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and other Contractors shall be subject to the provisions of Section 4.7 provided the other Contractors have reciprocal obligations. § 6.2.6 The Owner and otter Contractors shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Conractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP § 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, other Contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for mainb<ining the premises and surrounding area fi+ee from waste materials and rubbish as described in Section 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Construction Manager, in oonsultatron with the Architect, determines to be just. ARi1CLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 CHANGES § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work maybe accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.12 A Change Order shall be based neon sgceement among the Owner, Construction Manager, Architect and Contractor; a Construction Charm Directive requires agreement by the Owner, Comstru~on Manager and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor, an older for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Wyk shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and Contractor shall proceed paomptiy, nnlees othera+iae provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the work IniL AIA Document A~1/CMs7e -19a4. fbpywipht O 19a2 by The AmeAaan Irrstltute of Afchlbcts. All rlphts rseerved. WA°RNINO: Thls AIA° Document ht protected by U.9. Copywlpht Lew and Intematlond TY+setlss. lhroudwrlaed ropraducdon ~ dletritwtlon of this AU1 Document. or any portion of h, ~ may result In aware chill end criminal psnslaes, and will 6e proseeutsd to the msdmun aatMrt possible radar the law. 'tide doaanerrt owes produced by / AIA e0tlvwars at 10:10:O1z on o7/1 B/1DOB under t~der N0.10011064094_i which expires on 7/15/1008, and to not for resale. Uaar Noleo: (417~i57805) ' § 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contrast Documents ~ subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally cartemplabed are so changed in a proposed Change Omer or Construction Change Din~:tive that application of such unit prices tD quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable ' unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 721 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Construction Manager and signed by the Owner, ' Construction Manager, Architect and Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. ' § 722 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may i~lude those listed in Section 7.3.3. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTNES ' § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Construction Manages and signed by the Owner, Constrxtion Manager and An„hitoct, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract ' consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contrast Time being adjusted ~Y• ' § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump s~ properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; 2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; ' .3 cost bo be detrxmined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or Percentage fee; or A as provided in Soctlon 7.3.6. § 7.3A Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall Promptly P~~ ~~ ~ change ~ the Work involved and advise the Construction Manager and Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if ate, Provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed ' adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.5.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Tim or the method for deternoinirrg them. Such ' agreemart shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. .. § 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be deed by the Construction Manager on the basis of reasonable ' expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, incase of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable aIIowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall laeep and present, in such form as the Construction Manager may Prescribe, an itemized aosountirrg together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Document4, costs ' for the purposes of this Section 73.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 cx>sts of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance. fringe benefits requinxi by agreement or custom, and workers compensation instnance; ' 2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumod; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; AIA Doaansrrt A201NCtte*a -1892. CopyrlpM01992 by The Ameracan InetlWte d Architects. a9 rlphte roeerwd. WaeNINQ: This au-• oocronent Is Init. ~~~ py U.S. Copyright Lsw and prterrratlarral Troatlas. Uneuthorized reproduction or dlstrlbutlon of tl-Ia AIA• Doaorrorrf, or any portlon of n, may result In sawxe dull and criminal penaltlss, and will ba proascutsd to the rraodrnum axterd powlbla under the lair. This dorxxrrerrt was produced by ~ ' / AW aotttsare at 10:102 an 07H 8/2008 order Order Nc.1000984084 1 whbh expires on 7h ti/2009, and Is rrot tar resale. tkar NoW: (417855780 .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance. Permit fees, and sales, uae ar similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional cysts of supervision and field office persomtel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost eo the Owner, aunts not in dispute may be inchtded in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion ar change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Stun shall be actual net cost as c by the Construction Manager. When both additions and credits covering related Wark or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time ar the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be refeared fA the Crntstruction Manager far determination. § 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Construction Manager conceimirtg the adjustments in the Comract Sum and Contract Time, ar otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately issued through the Construction Manager and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.~1 The Architect will have authority to ordea minor changes in the Wark not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum ar extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order issued through the Construction Manager and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall cterry out such written orders P~PtiY• ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINRIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including sutl>Arized adjustments, allotted in the Contntct Documents far Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commcecexlreat of the Work is the date established in the Agneeaoent. The date shall not be Postponed by the failure to act of the Coraractor ar of persons ar entitles for whom the Contractor is responsible. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § &1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confums that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Wark. § 8.2.2 The Contracxor shall not knowingly, except by agreement ar instruction of the Owner in writing, prenuatttrely commence operations on the site ar elsewhere priar to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 r7o be ftu~nished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Wark shall riot be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of cammencemeat is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days ar other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. § 8.2.3 The Contractar shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Stbstantial Completion a-ithin the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Wark by an act ar neglect of the Owner's own forces, Construction Manager, Architect, any of the other Contractors ar an employee of arty of them, ar by changes ordered in the Wark, ar by lobar disputes, fire, umtsual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties ar other causes beyond the Contractar's control. or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, ar by other causes which InR. AIA Doc~onent A201/CMaTM -1992.OopyrlpM®1982 by The Amerkan metld,te of AndWecfs. AR tiphb reasrved. WAeRNINIk This A1A® Doamamt h protecMd hf- U.S. Copyrl8ht Law end IrNMrWphnal Treatha. Unauthorized reproducgon err dlstrlbution at thh AtA Document, or any portion or K, 26 may result h sewers dv8 and crhnlnal psnaltlas, and will be prwe~x~led to the aaxlmum exbntpowlMs under the larv. This doc~snent was produced by / AIA soflMaee at 10:10:02 on 07!18!2008 under Order No.1000964084 1 which e~lres on 7/1512009, and is nd for resale. that Notes: (41795578051 1 1 the Architect, based on the recommendation of the Construction Manager, detamices may justify delay, then the Contras Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.5.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.7. § 8.3.1 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either patty under other provisions of the Contras Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including autirorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Cautras Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES § 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment. the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, through the Construction Manager, a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Construction Manager and Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Construction Manager or Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the C~tntctor's Applicati~s for Payment. § 9.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.1.1 At least fifteen days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager an itemized Application for Payment far Wok completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contrasor's right ~ payment as the Owner, Construsion Manager or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontrasors and material suppliers, and reflesing retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contras Documents. ' § 9.5.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on acceunt of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.5.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contrasor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other mason. ' § 9.S.Z Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials sus equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon ' compliance by the Contractor with pr+ocxdures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the siee for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.5.5 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The ContracWr further warrants that upon submittal of au Application for Payment all Wark for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received fiom the Owner shall, to the best of the Contrasor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, ' security irnerests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, SubcoMractars, tceterial suppliers, or other persons or entities malring a claim by reason of having psovlded labor, materials and egnipmes relating to the Work. § 9A CERTIFlCATES FOR PAYMENT ' § 9.4.1 The Construction Maaagrr will assemble a Projes Application for Payment by combining the Contrasor's applications with similar applications for progress payments from other Contractors and, after certifying the amounts due an such applications, forward them to the Architect within seven days. ' §9.4x2 Within seven days after the Architect's receipt of the Projes Application for Payment, the Construction Manager and Architect will either issue to the Owner a Project Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrasor, for such amount as the Construsion Manager and Architect determine is pt openly due, or notify the ' Contrasor and Owner in writing of the Construction Manager's and Archites's reasons for withholding AIA Documanf A201K~M~ -1lf02. CopyHpht ®19a2 by The American krstlhrte of Arehaects. All rlphb reserved. WMMttO: This AU1s Document Is ~~ protected by U.tt. Copyrlpht Law end hdematlond Trestles. ttrrauthorl:ed reproducflon ordlstHbutlon of thle AIA• Docrerexrt, or arty poraan ~ If, ~ may raautt In savers dull and crlminal psrraltles, and wla be prosecuted to the msxhnum extent possllrle under the law. This document was produced by ' ~ U~ Notsa: at 1 otooz on o7/18!!008 urxier Order No.1000084084_1 wh~lr expires on 7n 5/1009, and is not far resale. (8178667605) certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. Such notification will be forwarded to the Contractor by the Construction Manager. § 9.~3 The issuance of a separate Certificate for Payment err a Project Certificate for Payment will constitute repi+ese~tions made separately by the Construction Manager and Architect to the Owner, based on their individual observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment submitted by the Contractor, that the Work has progressed m the point indicated and that, to the best of the Construcxion Manager's and Architect's knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Wa~rk is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing represe~ons are subject bo an evaluation of the Work far oo~ormance with the Contract Doctmrents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations firm the Contract Documents correctable prior bo completion and to specific qualifications exper~sed by the Construction Manager or ArchitecK. The issuance of a separatJe Certificate for Payment or a Project Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled eo payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a aerate Certificate for Payment err a Project Certificate for Payment will not be a repreaerrtation that the C~strucdon Manager or Architect has (1) made exhaustive ce continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed the Contractor's construction means, methods, oechniques, sequences or Procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor' a right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO 1MTHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Construction Manager or Architect may decide not to certify pay~t and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Construction Manager's or Architect's opinion the represeMadons to the Owner required by Section 9.4.3 camrot be made. If the Construction Manager or Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Construction Manager or Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.2. if the Contractor, Construction Manager and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Construction Manager and Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Construction Manager and Architect roe able to make such npreseatations to the Owner. The Construction Manager err Architect may sire decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently, discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate far Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Construction Manager's err Architect's opinion to pt+obect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating puobable filing of such claims; .3 failure of the Contractor eo make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; A masonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor, .B reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the eaticipated delay; or persistent failure oo carry out the Work in accordance wim the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification wiII be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.5.1 After the Construction Manager and Architect have issued a Project Certificate far Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the mamter and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Construction Manager and Architect. § 9.B.2 The Contractor shall P~PdY pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages acdraily retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcmrtractor'spcrtion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-suboontractora in similar manner. h11t. AIA Doc~mMnt A~UCYs~ -1992. Copyrlpht ®1992 by Ths American Ins04de d Architecm. All rlphts reserved. W/:RIrING: This AIAs Document Is protected bl- U.S. t:apyrlyht Lew and Intemstionel Trestles. ikrutlwrFted reprodudbn err dlstributlon of this AIA Document, err any portion of R, ~ may result In severe dull and crhnirwl penelWs, and w10 6s prosecuted to the mm:hman aetad poesbls under the law. This dowment urea produced by / AIA eotterere ffi 10:10112 an 07/1812009 under Order No.1000.984084_1 which exptree on 7/15/2009, and Is not for resale. l~sr Notes: (4173557805) 1 1 1 1 1 § 8.6.3 The Construction Manager will, on request, furnish to a Snboontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect on account of portions of the Work done by such Suboorttractor. § 8.6.4 Neither the Owner, Construction Manager nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. § 8.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 8.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or saline use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall trot constitute acceptance of wank not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 8.7 FAN.URI: OF PAYMENT § 8.7.1 If, through no fault of the Contractor;. 1) the Constnrction Manager and Architect do not issue a Project Certificate for Payment within fourteen days after the Corwtrnction Manager's receipt of the Co~ractor's Application for Payment ar 2) the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the dace established in the Contract Documents the arl~ount certified by the Construction Manager and Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect, stop the work until payment of the amourrt owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately a~ the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. § 9.8 SUBSTANTWL COMPLETION § 8.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the work when the work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy ar utilizc the Work for its intended use. § 8.82 when the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor and Construction Manager shall jointly prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or . The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and coaect items on the list. Failure tD include an item on such list does rat alter the respons-bility of the Contracxor m complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the list, the Ar+chitoct, assisted by the Construction Manager, will maloe an inspection to determine whether the wcek or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not inchtded an the list, which is not in accorda>xe with the roquireuneats of the Contract Documents, the Contrncbor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantral Completion, complete a camrect such item upon notification by the Architect. The Co~ractar shall then submit a request far another inspection by the Architect, asasted by the Construction Manager, to determine Substantial Completion. whey the work ~ designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect wIIl prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Camtractar far security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall 5nish all items on the list aooomp~nying the Certificate. warranties required by the CaDOtract Documents shoo commence on the die of Substantial Completion of the work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substarial Completion shall be submitted to the owner and Contractor far their written aoceptarx:e of responsibilities assigacd tD them in such Certificate. § 8.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the work or designated paation thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Construction Manager and Architect, the Owner shall make paymeru, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, far slrch work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.8.1 The Owner may occupy or use any cempleted or partially cemplebed portion of the wank at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented t4 by the insurer as required under Secxion 11.3.11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may connn>eace whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, AIA Document A201/Ctlsn -1t1-2. CopyripM O 1992 by The American IrrstlhRe d Arohlleda. All dphte reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Docunerrt Is Imo' protected by U8. Copyrlpht taw end Irrtemaaonel 7wsUes. UrmrrtlfoMzsd roprodurrtiarr or distritsrtiorr o1 thh AIA° DaaeneM, or any parthm of k, ~ may result In severe dNl and rxlminal pansltlp, end will be prosecuted to the rnsxYrrum extort posslbN under the Isrr. lltls doasnern was produced by / s at 10:10:02 on 07/1912008 under Order Na1000991094_1 wTdch expires on 7/1fi12008, and b not for resale. (4179557805) 1 retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage m the work and insurance, and have in writing concerning the period for correction of the work and oommenoement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor and Construction Manager shall jointly paieepere and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreeme~ between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreennent is reached, by decision of the Architect after consultation with the Construction Manager. § 9.9.2 Immediiaeeiy prior to such partial occnparrcy or use, the owner, Construction Manager, Conr<actor and Architxct shall jointly inspect the area ou be occupied ar portion of the work ro be used in as+der to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy air use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Wank not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 FINAL COkIPLErION AND FlNAL PAYIMENT § 9.10.1 Upoa oo~letion of the Work, the Contractor shall forward to the Conetntction Manager a written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and shall also forward to the Construction Manager a final Contracxor's Application foe' Payment Upon receipt, the Construction Manager will forward the notice and Application to the Architect who will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect, based on the recommendation of the Constructuon Manager, firs the Work acceptable Hader the Contract Documents and the Contract folly perforated, the Construction Manager and Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of their knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections, the Work has been oompleeed in aocor+dance with bernos and conditions of the Contract Doctmuents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Constroction Manager's and Architoct's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent m the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.102 Neither final payment nor air remaining retained peacentage shall become due until the Contractor submits bn the Architect through the Constntction Manager (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for aoaterials and equipment, and other indebtedness competed with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or other wise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to: remain in farce otter final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled ~ allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statett~at that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to Dover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final Payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising ant of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Suboorttracbor refuses to furnish a release ar waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfitcwry fA the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains tmsatisfiod after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund bo the Owner all money that the Owner maybe compelled tD pay in discharging such lies, including all costs anti reasonable attorneys' foes. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Complyion ~ the Work, final completion thereof ie materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecxittg final completion, and the Construction Manager and Architect so confirm, the Owner shall, opon application by the Contractor and certification by the Constructim Manager and Architect, and without teLmirratirtg the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or orerected is less than retainage stipulaeod in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of fire balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect through the Construction Manager prior' to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made un~r terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. The malting of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner as provided in Section 4.4.5. INf. AIA Document A29U~CWm -1091 ~ 1982 by The American tnondde at Mdrtecte. AO ripMa nxaarwd. W/eRNN01: Thts AIA° Document b proeecbd bl- U.S. Cepyriplrt Law and Inbmallormt TYaMlea UrrsutlrorEeed raprodrrctlon or dlNrlbullon of thls AIA Doaarrent, ar arty paUon of ly ~ may Weak In asuere dv9 and cr6rrirrd poneltlss, and w01 be prosecuted to the mexMarm extent poeeafM under the lew. Thls doaerutrt area Ixoduoed by / AlA eolhmre at 10:10:02 an 07/19/1008 under l7rder No.1000964064_t which eepires on 7/t512009, and k not for reeeb. User Notes: (4179557805) ' § 9.10A Acceptance of final payment by the Contrat~or, a Subcontractor or material supplies shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application far Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Section 4.7.5. ' ART~LE 1'0 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ~ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS § 10.1.1 The Contracxor shall be responsible far initiating, anaintairriug and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the Contractor's safety program to the Construction Manager for review and coordination with the safety programs of other Contractors. § 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos ar ' polychlorinatedbiphenyl (PCB) which has not been inndeind harmless, the Contractar shall immediately stop Work in~the area affected and repel the condition to the Owner, Constrvction Manager and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not be resumed excxpt by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos ar polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Wark ' in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), ar when it has been tendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, ar in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, ar by arbitration under Article 4. ' ~ 10.1.3 The Conractor shalt not be required putsuaat to Article 7 to perform without consent any Wark relating to asbestos or polychlorinatcd biphenyl (PCB). 1 § 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and lwld harmless the Contractor, Construction Manager, Architect, their consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of ar resulting from performance of the Wark in the afliinbed area if in fact the ataterial is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) ' s~ has not been tendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily i~nry, siclrness, disease ar death, ar to i~ury to ar destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use insulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole ar in part by negligent acts ar omissions of the Owner, anyone directly ar indirectly employed by the Owner ar anyone for wlwse acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether ar not such claim, damage, loss ar expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shalt not be construed to negate, abridge ar induce other rights ar obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Sectiton 10.1.4. § 10.1.5 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury ar death to persons resulting from a material or substance encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractar shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner, ' Construction Manager sod Architect in writing. The Owner, Contractor, Construction Manager and Architect shall then proceed in the same maw described in Section 10.1.2. ~ 10.1.0 The Owner shall be responsible far obtaining the services of a licensed laboratory to verify a presence ar absence of the material ar substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material ar substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall fnrnistt in writing to the Contractor, Construction Manager and Architect the names and qualifications of persons ar entities who are to perform tests verifying the pr+eaence ar absence of sudr material or substance ar who are to performm the task of reffioval ar safe containmetrt of such material ar substance. The Contractor, the Construction Manager and the Architect wr71 promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether ar not any of them has reasonable objection to the parsons or entities proposed by the Owner. If the Contractor, Construction ' Manager ar Architect has as objection to a person ar entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor, the Construction Manager and the Ardritect have no reasonable objection. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ' ~ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to Prevent damage, i~ury ar loss to: .1 employees on the work and other persons who may be affected thereby; ' AtA Document ARMI~CMa~ -1982 Copyrlpht ©1992 by The Ameacan Inetlhite ~ Mchitects. Aa riphtf raeervsd WAeRNNti: Thls AtAe Documad Is Init. protected ~ ~~ ~P1RIOht law and I~arneaaol Treetlas. Unauthorlasd nProductlon ar dlstritwtlon of thls AIA Document. or aM- poraon of It, ~1 ' may reeua In severe chill end crMnlnal penel9ss, and wta be prosecuted to the mexlmum sstent possade under the law. Thb document was produced by ~ ta.r at to:toA2 on tnnerrooe under Oder rto.toooss~toe~a_t which expires on rnsrzoo9. aria le not for resale. tat issssraosl 1 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on ar off the site, under care, custody ar control of the Contractar ar the Contractor's Subcontractors ar Sub- subcontractors; .3 other property at the site ar adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation ar rephu:ement in the course of construction; and construction ar operations by the Owner ar other Contractors. § 1022 The Conhactar shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ozdinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons ar property ar their protection from damage, injury ar loss. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditioffi and performance of the Contract, re~orrable safeguards far safety and pmtectiaa, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, pramnlgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites anni utilities. § 10.2.4 Whey use for storage of explosives ar other hazardous materials ar equipment ar unusual methods are necessary far execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise almost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage ar loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property refeased to in Sections 10.2.1.2,10.2.1.3 and 10.2.1.4 caused in whole ar in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, aSub-subcontractor, or anycme directly ar indirectly employed by any of therm, ar by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2,10.2.13 and 10.2.1.4, except damage or loss attributable tD acts ar omissions of the Owner, Construction Manager ar Architect ar anyone directly ar indir+actiy employed by any of them, ar by anyone for whose acts any of them maybe liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Conhactor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible nmenmber of the Contractor's organizati~ at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of aaadents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner, Constrcuction Manager and Architect. § 1027 The Contractor shall not load ar permit any part of the construction ar site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. § 10.5 EMERGENCIES § 10.5.1 in an emergency affecting safety ar persons ar property. the Contracxar shall act, at the Contractar'a discretion, to prevern threatened damage, injury ar lass. Additional conmpensation ar extension of time claimed by the Contractor on aooonnt of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.7 and Article 7. ART~LE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 COI~RRACTOR'S LUIBN.RY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Corrtrar:tor shall purchase froum~ and maintain in a company ar lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set Earth below which may arise out of ar result from tbe Contractor's operations under the Contract and far which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor ar by a Snboormactor ar by anyone directly ar indirectly employed by any of them, ar by anyone far whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under worloers ~mpensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness ar disease, ar death of the Contractor's employees; .5 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, ar death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims far damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly ar indirectly rrlated to employment of such person by the Carrtrarxor, ar (2) by a>rother Pennon; AU1 Dopmrwrt A2D11CWTM -1994. CapyrlyM ®1962 byThe Arrreriron hrsadrte of Archlrects. All rights reserved. WARNNttt: This A1A~ Docrmerrt y tnK' protected by U.S. Copyright Law and IMerrrsgonel Treaaas. Unaulhorizsd roproductlon ar dhgrlbutlon o1 this AIAe DocumsM, or arty portlon M It, ~ may reerdt M esvaro dull and criminal perralass, and will 6s prosecuted to tlw ma:imam axbM poasias under 1M hsv. This doaxnent was produced by / ~soi~ at 10:10:02 On 07h 812009 under Order No.1000964094_1 which on 7/15I~09, and Is not far resale. (4179567605) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' .5 claims far damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefr+onn; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. ' § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence ceclaims-made basis, shall be maintained without inberrupdon from date of commencement of the Work nntII date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. § 11.9.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for transmittal bo the Owner with a copy to the Architect prior to commencement of the Wotk. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies ' will not be canceled ar allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has bcen given to the Owner. if arty of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to renosirt in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing wntimtation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final ' Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. ~ 112 OWNER'S LIABILJTY INSURANCE 1 ~ 112.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, the Owner may purchase and rnairttain other insurance for self~protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically regnired by the Contract Doctmtents. § 11.3 PROPERTY MSURANCE ~ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a co~any or companies lawfully suthoiiaad to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the aunt of the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Coact Doctmnents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the ' Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subconttacta~rs and Sub-subcontractors in the work. ~ 11.3.1.1 Property instance shall be on an "all-risk" policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical k>ss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, falsewurk, temporary bniklings and debris rer~val including demolition occasioned ' by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compeaisation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise parovided In the Contract Documents. ' § 11.3.12 If the Owner does not intend tD purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Ownea shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to comuoericement of the Work. The Catiiracxor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcantractars and Sub-subcontractors in the Wat1t, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thettrof shall be charged tD the Owns. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase ur maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thea~eto. ' ~ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer irtcreasea the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified ar if the Owner elects to purchase this AIA~ DoounsM A20UCMsTM -1982. CopyAght ®1982 by The American Institute of Arctdbcls. All fights roasrwd. WAtiMNO: This AIA° Document N ~~ pratsctad b7- U.S. Capyrlght Law end Mbrwdtonal 71'eatles. UrwuthoNted reproducgon or dldributlon of this AIA° DocrmMSnt, or any portion or It, ~ may resrdt in aevw dw end~crdnlnal peradtles, and w91 bs prosecuted to the mndmum e~dent poss~ls ands the law. Thla document was produced by ' ~ AIA $ottware at tataa2 an tnnarlaos under order nto.toooss4asa t which exprres a~ ~n sr~oo9, era is not ror resale. User Note: (41795578D~ insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. § 11.3.1 A Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. ~ 11.3.1.5 The insurance required by this Suction 11.3 is not intended to Dover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor which are utili~d in the performance of the wank but not incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense, Provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools err equipment which shall be subject to the provisions of Suction 11.3.7. ~ 11.32 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents err by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, 3uboontracbors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. ~ 11.3.3 boss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Cormactor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for ott~=r apocial hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the coat thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adjacent to the site by ProP~Y insurance under policies separate frame those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire err other perils covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Bach policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Bach policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. ~ 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and against the Construction Manager. Architect, Owner's other Contractors and own forces described in Article 6. if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, consultants, agents and employees of any of them, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as the Owner and Contractor may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Construction Manager, Constntction Manager's oonsulta~, Architect, Architect's oonsul[ants, Owner's separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub~ubcanttactora, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agt+eementa. written where legally requaed far validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties ermm~erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by ertdorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity ever though that person err entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, oontr~actual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly err indirectly, and whether err not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made Payable t4 the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to regniremerrts of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Cortractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of AIA Document A20UCItan -1992. CopyrlpM m 1982 by The American NiMIWte of Aroltheote. All 1lpltb reasrwd. WARNUIO: Thls AU1° Document Is Init. pngCbd by U.S. CopyrlpM t.aw and Inlernedlonal iFesdles. Unsuthorixed nproduotlon or dletMbuUon of ehls AIAe Document, or arty portion of It, ~ may result In sewn dun and orlmMal psrwltln, and wla be ~oescuMd to the rrrexlmum extent poa9rle under the law. This document ww produced by ~ AW software at 10:10:02 an 07/18/2D0a under Order No.1000964094_1 whbh s'Npires on 7M612009, end k not Tor resale. Uesr Notes: (4179567805) 1 ' insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where leplly required for validity, shall require Suboontractars to maloe payments to their SubsubcontracWrs in similar manner. ' § 11.8.8 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occrurence of an insured loss, give bond far proper perforalance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.9. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. § 11.8.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power tD adjust and settle a lose with insurers unless one of the parties in ' interest shall object in writing within five days after occtrn+ence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Section 49. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. rf distribution of insurance proceeds ' by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. § 11.8.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or »se by endorsement or ' otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy err use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11A PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to famish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in budding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. . § 11.2 Upon the request of any person err entity aPP~B to be s potential beneficiary of bonds covering Payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ' ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING ~OF WORK 1 § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is cevered contrary to the Construction Manager's or Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents. it must, if required in writing by either, be uncovered far their observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. ' § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Construction Manager air Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, We Construction Manager or Anchitect may request to see such Wark and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. Tf each Work is in soccrdance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appsopriate Change Order, be charged to the Owrt~. If such Work is not in aocordarrce with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the ~Uwner or one of the other Contractors in which event the Owner shall be responsible for paymern of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTKBI OF WORK § 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Constriction Manager oar Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed befase or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed err completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Construction Manager's and Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. § 12.2.2 i1; within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated pa~rtion thereof, or after the date for comm~encement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously giver the Contractor a written aaxptance of such condition. ' This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Wauck first performed after Substantial AIA Document A201/CMa~ -1992. Copyright®1962 by The Amerman Inetlhde d An~rOecis. All rights reserved. WARNar01: This AM° Document la Init ~ ~ U.S. Copyright Law and Lnterrrat1oro17FeMlss. tNreuMorhtd roproductlorr or dlstributlon of thht AlA° Documsrd, err any porgon or It, may result In severe dull end criminal psnel9ss, and will be proescuted to tM rrwtlnwm exbnt pods under the law.lTYs document was produced by ~ / AW soaware d 10:10:02 on 07/1812008 under Order No.1000364094 1 which expires an 7h 512006, and is not far resale. Uaar Notes: (417965780 1 Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Section 12.2.2 shall survive acceptance of the work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove Eronn the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the regtriremertta of the Contract Documents and are neithea corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correcx nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such noncceforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect issued through the Construction Manager, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contrador's expense. If the Contractor does not pay cysts of such removal and storage within ten days after written Mice, the Owner may upon tce additional days' written entice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall aoootmt for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Construction Manager's and Architect's seavices and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the C~tractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deCicien<y. if payments then ~ thereafter due the Contractor are not suffCieffi ro raver such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. § 12.2.5 The Conhactor shall bear the cost of coaecting destroyed or damaged oonstrncxion, whether completed ar partially completed, of the Owner or other Contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not is accordano with the raquiremeda of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Sa~ion 12.2 shall be coeatrued to e~ablish a period of limitation with respect m other obligations which the Conttactar might have under the Coruract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as dea<xr'bod in Section 12.2.2 relates only m the spoafic obligation of the Contractor m correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may besought to be arforcod. nor to the time within which pr~ocoadings may be oommenoed to establish the Codractor's liability with respect m the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Wank. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK § 12.3.11E the Owner prefers to accept Wark which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contras Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOIIS PROVISION8 § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW § 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.21 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such othea party in reaped to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the C~trad shall assign the Contract as a whole without written oortsent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that parry shall nevertheless remain legally responsible far ell obligations under the Contract. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE § 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm ce entity or to an officer of the corporation fm which it was idended, or if delivered at or sent by registered ar certiSied mail to the last business address known m the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition m and not a limimtion of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available bylaw. AfA Document AZDU'CIIaTM - tarts. copyyrlphe O 1 tl9¢ M Ths nnxirlcan tnstlwte oT Andilects. All dphb roserved. WARltINO: 77rs AIA• Cocuwnxint b Init. ~~ ~ U.S. CapyrlpFa taw and krternatlond lheatlee. Ihautlrorizsd ropraductlon ar dietrltxdlon of this AIA• DoaensM, or any P~ ~ ~ ~ may result M amrere ehrN and ahNmd penaltles, and wla be proaeculsd to the maxhnum extent poesbts under the hw. T'hls document was produced M / Dear a< 1 Q10~2 an tt7/18/2t108 under Order FIo.100086~84_i rMdch srrpires on 7l1517A08, and is not Tar resat. (41 7956 76 05) 1 § 73.4.2 No action or failure bo act by the Owner, Constnuxlon Manages, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waives of a right ar duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of ce acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Wark required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jtrrisdictiort shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory ar entity acceptable to We Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Construction Manager and Arcltibect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are ro be made so the Construction Manager and Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. ' § 15.5.2 If the Construction Manages, Architect, Owner a public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Construction Manager and Architect will, upon written authorirsdon from the Owner, instruct the Conttador m make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the CoNracxor shall give timely notice bo the Construction Manager and Architect of when and where tests and itrspections are to be made ro the Construction Manager and Architect may observe sudr procedures. The Owner shall bear such cysts except as provided is Section 13.5.3. ri 1 1 § 13.5.3 if such procedures far testing, inspection ar approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portioce of the Work bu comply with req»irements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Constnrction Manager's and Architect's services and expenses. § 13.5A Regained certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered bo the Construction Manager for transmittal to the Architecx. § 13.5.5 ff the Construction Manager or Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Constnrction Manager or Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.8 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant bo the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.8 INTEREST § 13.8.1 Payments due and unpaid under dre Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 CW WEI~ICEMENT OF STAMORY tJNRATION PERIOD § 13.27 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Snbsta~isl Completion. As to acts or failures m act occurring price to the relevant date of Subs~tial Coaopktion, airy applicable statues of limitations shall commence to rtm and any alleged cares of action shall be deemed to have accrued in arty and all events not later than such date of Snbstantisl Completion; 2 Between Substantial Completion and Foal Certificate for Payment. As bo acts or failures to act oceurring snbsegnent eo the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificaee for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed m have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issnarax of the final Certificate fair Payment: and .3 Auer Final Certificrtte for Payment. As eo acts ar failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate fair Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to AIA Occurrent AZO'IICAts1Y -19,2. Copyrtpht O 1992 try The Arnerl~n hrstitua oT Archiaca. Aa rlpha raasrued. WARItINO: This AIAe Document Is 1~' protected b1- U.S. Copyrlpht LeYr and adsrnaaaral ThsNes. lAnerahorl:ed reproduction or datrlbutlon of tMs AIA° Document, ar any porllon of If. ~ may result a savers chAl and orlminal penaltles, and will bs prosecuad to the maximum exam posslbte under tlrs law. This doaxnent was produced hY / eNoPosa~re at 10102 an 07/18rd00a under Order No.1000891094_1 which expires on 7/75/2009. and a not for resaa. (4179657805) 1 run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events ~t later than the date of any actor failure bo act by the Contractor pmY;trant m any warranty provided ~nnder Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, ~ the date of actual commission of any otltea act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever oocars last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONrRACf § 141 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contract may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days through no actor fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Snb-subcontractor or their amts or employees ~ any other persons perfornrirtg portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, frn atry of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having juuisdiction; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, malting material unavailable; .3 because the Constnrction Manager or Architect has not iss»ed a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the mason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.2, ar because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Sectrolr 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, ar 120 days in any 365i1ay period, whichever is less; or the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. § 14.'h.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment. tools, and oonstrur~tion equipment and machinery, irrcluding reasonable overhead, profit and damages. § 14.1.3 if the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act a fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing pactions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owrrer has persistently felled to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice bo the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.2. § 14.2 TERMINATION f31f THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor. .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or pmoper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .S persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or roles, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; ~ A otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Doctmlerrts. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, after consultation with the Construction Manager, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and oiler giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if arty, seven days. written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and consuuction equipment and ara~inery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. § 14r2.S When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the masons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. toil. aA Document AZOVCIIh*+~ -11182. raopyrtght O itl~ by The /4nerlcen InatlWEa of nndrseas. Ae raolrte rsaerwd. WARNINQ: This AW oocrsnent a protected by U.S. CopyrlgM L.aw and hrterrmtlorW Treatlaa. Urrautharized rsproductlon or dletrit-u8an of thls AIA° Dacranerrt, or any portlen of If, may reaua In estlere dull and crlminsl peroltles, and wla be prwsculod ~ the maxlnssn extent poalble under the law. Tfrls doament was produced by ~ / AIA eollware at 10:102 on 07/t8r200a under Order No.1000864094_1 which expires on 7M 612008, and Is not for resale. tJsor Nobs: (4178657806) 1 ' § 142A If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Construction Manager's and Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such cwsts exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owrtes. The amount to be paid to the Contracxor or Owner, as the case may be, shall, upon application, be certified by the Architect after consultation with the Construction Manages, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. ' § 14.5 SUSPENSION BY THE OYYNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.5.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Corrtracbor in writing to suspend, delay or inten opt the Work is whole or in part for such period of bane as the Owner may determine. ' ~ 14.5.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased wet of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interruption. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performamx is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause ' for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied wader another provision of this Conttac;t. ' § 1435.5 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. 1 ' AIA Document A201/CMsri -1982. Copyright ®1982 hY The American Irretltule M ArCfdteCl9. A8 riglrta nnsrvsd. WAttNINd: TMs AIA° Document Is Inlt. i py U.S. Capyrlght t.aw end irtmnatlorrsl TMStles. UrrMdhorlmd repraductlon a dhztrlbutlon of ihhz AIA° Docansrd, ar arty pordan of it, ~ may resrrtt In sawn dw1 end crimhrsi penaNlas, end wla bs prosecuted to the rrwrhnrsrr rrt poeaade under the lair. 71d6 doament was produced by ' ~ AIA soaware at 10:10A2 on 07/1812008 under order No.10009aW94 1 whkh erxpiras on 7n5/2009. and is not for resale. User Notes: ~ (4179557805) ' QMSION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00810 SUPPLEMENTAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -BID PACKAGE 3 AIA DOCUMENT A201/CMa,1992 EDITION COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS ' The General Conditions, Section 00700, are hereby made a part of this Section. The articles contained in this Section may delete, modify, or add to the provisions of the General Conditions and shall take precedence over the General Conditions. ' ARTICLE 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION, AND INTENT ' 1.2.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and replace with "The Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Corrtractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor as provided in the agreement." 1.2.4 Add the following: "The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, and the arrangement of the Drawings shall not make the Architect an arbiter to establish subcontract limits between Contractor and Subc:ontractor." 1.2.6 Add the foNowing Subparagraph: Where a reference in the Contract Documents to a Federal Specifications, ' American National Standards Institute Standard, American Society of Testing Materials Standard or other standard does not include the edition or date of the standard, the edition and amendments current as of the date of this Project ~' Manual shall apply. A TR ICLE 2 ' OWNER ' 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety. ' 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 Delete all'seven-day period°. Add in its place "three-day period". ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 00810-1 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 In the 5th line, after the word recognized, add "or should have recognized". In the 5th line, delete the work "knowingly`. In the 8th line, delete the wont `appropriate". 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 In the 1st line after the wont pay, add the words, "in a timely manner. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.4 In the first line after the word 'knowing', add "or does the work when he should have known". 3.13 USE OF SITE Add the following Subparagraph: 3.13.3 Materials stored within contrail limits shall be in an area designated by the Construction Manager. Materials or equipment lost through mishandling shall be replaced by the contractor without cost to the Owner. Materials, tools and equipment which will not become incorporated into the final building produil lost through theft shall be replaced by the contrailor without cost to the Owner. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 Add the ward 'defend" before the word "indemnify' in the 1st line. Delete the words 'but only to the extent" from the 6th line. Add new sentence at the end of the paragraph "The Contractor shad purchase insurance insuring the obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph with limits of insurance not less than those specfied in Article 11 " ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.4 Delete the words "against whom the Contrailor makes no reasonable objeilion and" from the 2nd line of this paragraph. 4.6 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.8.2 Delete the word "endeavor" of the 3rd line and insert "shall make reasonable effort". 4.6.10 Add the following to the end of the sentence ending in "Contract Documents" in the 5th line'; however, the Construilion Manager cannot request removal and replacement of rejected work without approval of the Owner or the Architect". 4.6.11 Delete the words "and approve" of the 1st line and insert in its place "for proper form, numbers, and types of required information". 4.7 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ooslo-2 4.7.2 In the second line after the period add the sentence "The Architect will consult 1 with the Construction Manager. 4.7.7 After the first sentence, add the sentence "Other than with respect to emer+gendes 1 as set forth below, if the contractor fails to make a claim or request for a change orcier for additional sums before it does the work, the contractor may not make a claim for additional sums of such work.° ' 4.7.8.1After the first sentence, add the sentence "Other than with respect to emergendes as set forth below, if the contractor fails to make a datm or request for a d~ange order for additional sums before it does the work, the contractor may not make a ' claim for additional sums of such work.° 4.9 ARBITRATION ' 4.9.1 Second line down delete the word "shall' and substitute °may, upon written agreement of all parties". 6th and 7th lines down delete the words "shall be ' subject to arbitration upon written demand of either party "and substitute °may, upon written agreement of all parties be subject to arbitn~tions°. Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph "To the extent that the provisions in these ' General Conditions refer to arbitration following a decision by the Architect ar other events, such reference shall mean arbitration only upon written agreement of all parties to arbitrate.° ' 4.9.x.2 Second line down, delete the words "a reasonable time' and substitute "thirty days'. ' ARTICLE- 7 CHANGES IN WORK 7.1 CHANGES ' Add the following paragraph: .. y.1.1.1The Construction Manager has no rights under the terms of their Agreement with ' the Owner to order or approve Extra Work or Change Orders in the Field. 7.3 CQNSTRUCTiON CHANGE DIRECTIVES ' 7.3.3.3Delete the words "mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee" and add the words "f'dteen percent (15%) allowance for ovefiead and profit. Allowable contractor marpk~-up for overhead and profit for subcontractor Hroric shall be ten pen~ent (10 /u) ° 7.3.6 Delete the word "reasonable" nean3st the end of the first sentence of the 1 paragraph and substitute "fifteen percent (15%)°. !Heart new sentence after the first sentence "Allowable contractor marls-up for profit and overhead for subcontractors work shall be ten percent (1096). '- 00810-3 ARTICLE 9 , PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: "On the 25"' of each month the contractor may submit their application for payment for the contractor's work for that month. The Schedule of Values ' accepted for billing purposes shall be used for this purpose. The Architect's and Construction Managers determination shall be binding upon the Contractor. .1 Payment will be made on the last day of the month following the month ' application was received. .2 Prior to the date each progress payment falls due, the Contractor shall properly execute the following documents: Application and Certificate for Payment, and Partial Waiver of lien and exchange them for payment at Monthly Meetings.' 9.3.2 Add the following sentenoe to the end of this paragraph: "Any extra cost of on-site and off--site storage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor." Add the following paragraph: 9.3.4 The Owner will reserve an amount of not to exceed fare percent (596) of all progress payments as retainage. Retained amounts shall be paid to the contractor as a part of the Contractors Final Payment. Alternate forms of retainage in accordance with M.S. 15.73 may also be used at the option of the contractor. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.3 Delete the words "4.4.5" from the last line of this paragreph and replace it with "4.7.5" 9.10.4 Delete the last sentence of this paragraph in its entirety. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE 11.0 INSURANCE Delete the Article in its entirety and substitute the following Article 11 in its stead. 11.1 CONTRACTORS LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 Each Contractor shall punshase and maintain such insurance as will protect them 008104 ' from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the contract, whether such operations be by them, or by any subcontractors ' or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them be liable. All insurance companies writing coverage for this project shall be approved or licensed to operate within the State in which this ' project is located. Written oertilication of this requirement shall be presented to the Owner, Architect and Construction Manager. ' 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagreph 11.1.1 shall be as follows: .1 Workmen's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance: ' Workmen's Compensation and Occupational Disease insurance at statutory limits as provided by the State and Applicable Federal in which this contract is performed. Employer's Liability Insurance $1,000,000. ' .2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance covering (the contractors must provide liability coverage on an occurrence base format): ' A. Operations -Premises Liability: including, but not limited to, bodily injury, inGuding death at any time resulting therefrom, to any person or property damage resuking from execution of the work ' provided for in this contract or due to or arising in any manner from any act or any omission or neglgence of the Contractor and any subcontractor, their respective employees or agents. ' B. Elevator .Liability: including, but not limited to, bodily injury, including death at any time resulting therefrom, to any person or property damage resulting from operation or use of any elevator or hoist, if either or both are operated or used in connection with execution of this contract. ' C. Contractor's Protective Liability: including, but not limited to, bodily injury, including death at any time resulting therefrom, to any pen;on or property damage resulting from acts or any omission of ' any subcontractor, their employees or agents. D. Products -Completed Operations Liabil""ity: including, but not limited ' to bodily injury, including death at any time resulting therefrom, to any person or property damage because of goods, products, materials, or equipment used or installed under this contract or because of completed operations, which may become evident after ' acceptance of the building, including damage to the building or its contents. ' E. Contractual Liability -Each and every policy for liability insurance, carried by each Contractor and subcontractor as required by this Article shall specifically include contractual Ilabil[ty (hold harmless ' clause) coverage with respect to Article 3.18 of the AIA General Conditions. 00$10-5 F. G. Special Requirements: the insurance requin3d under 11.1.2.2 of this Article shall specifically include the following special hazards: 1. Property damage caused by conditions otherwise subject to exclusions "X,C,U" explosion, collapse or underground damage, as defined by the National Bureau of Casualty underwriters. 2. Property damage liability coverage shall be broad fprm coverage. 3. "Occurrence° bodily injury coverage in lieu of "Caused by accident°. 4. "Occurrence" property damage coverage in lieu of "Caused by accident". 5. EXCEPTION: Contracts that do not require excavation or underground work are not required to have the above "Special Hazanis" insurance coverage under 1 above. Limit Of Liability: The insurance under 11.1.2.2 of this Article shall be w~tten in the following limits of liability as a minimum: $1 ~~~0~ $2,000,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $ 50,000 $ 5,000 ~\~~ per occurrence `\` annual aggregate products ~~~ e: p occurrence per ~f+e damage medical exo The foil 'ng coverages shall be Pre ses and Operations Bodily Pecsonal~ and Advertising injury ~nket Contractual Liability ~ 00810-6 operations protective products contractual one fire) (any one person) operations and Property Damage • Section 810 -SUPPLEMENTAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE ' ' CONTRACT FfitRCONSTRUCTI:ON; ~~ ~~n/~ ~/~ 1. Revise theinsurance requirements, in th~is~ seelion as~ folQows; /7 0 1. •Comprehensive ar CaYnmercia~l Oeneral~ ~L• iabifity Qlncluding Pr~eniises-Qperation; ' . 1 Independent Contractar's Protective; Pi+odwcts and~Completed+Operations• Bread for ~operty i ' Damage): a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000. Each Oocumettce ' 52,000,000. Aggregate b. Property Damage: $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $2,000,000. Aggregate c. Products and Completed Operations: $2,000,000. Aggregate • d. Pmperiy Damage Liability shall provide X, C and 1:1 Coverage. ' e. Broad forte Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations i Contractual Liability. ' j 2. Contractual Liability a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $2,000,000. Aggregate b. Property Damage: 51,000,000. Each Occumattee • $2,000,000. Aggregate i j 3. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: ~ ~ 51,000,000. Aggregate 4. Business Auto Liability (including owned,non-owned and hired vetuicles): ' a. Bodily Ynjury: $500,000. Each Person 51,000,000. Each Occurrence b. Property Damage: 5500,000. Each Ocxr~rrence c. Or 51,000,000: Combined Single Limit 5. 3!'•the General: Liability coverage are provided by. a~ Commer.ciap Liability~policy„ the; a. General Aggregate shall be not less than 52,0 ~ ~ ,000. and it sha~lr•apply, in total,. to. Ulais~ project only ands be provi'ded' an.a primary and non-Contributory Hasis. ' b. Fire I)amage• Limit shall .be not Voss than 5~1~©0;000•. nun any l;iro~ • ~c. Medical >{acpe~ses Limit shall be noC less than S1.A,00~0. any one person. ' ~ d. Umbrella Excess Liability on a Following Form Basis: a. $2,000,000. over primary insurance b. 510;000. retention for self-insured hazards each oc:curra-ce 7. Workers' Compensation: ' a. State: Statutory ~ b. Applicable Federal Statutory ' I c. Employer's Liability $100,000. PerAccident - _. ~ 5500,000 Disease, Policy Limit • _ . _ _ 5100,000. Disease, F.ach Fanp(oyee ' 19.1.3 No Contractor shall commence work under this contract until they have obtained all insurance required under this section and evidence that insurance has been obtained in the form of a valid certificate of insurance has been famished to the ' Owner, the Art~ttitect and the Construction Manager, and accepted by the Owner, nor shah any Contractor allow any s~tbcontrador to commence werk of thdr suboontrad until the same insurance has been obtained by the suboontrat~or. ' Unless exceptions are noted or specfied, each and every Contractor and subcontractor shall maintain aN insurance required under 11.1.2.1, 11.1.2.2 and 11.1.2.3 of this section for not less than one (1) year after completion of the ' contract. 00810-7 11.2 11.3 11.1.4 Each Contractor shall file with the Owner, Ard~itect and Construction Manager a Certificate of Insurance. Any certficate submitted and found to be incomplete will be returned as unsatisfactory. Certificates of Insurance shall contain a clause stating the coverage afforded by the policies listed will not be canceled or materially altered, except after 45 days advance written notice to the Owner, An;hitect and Constnaction Manager, mailed to the addressed indicated herein, and, in the event that such notice is not given to the Owner, Architect and Construction Manager at least 45 days prior to cancellation or a material change, the policy will continue in full force and effect for the benefit of the Owner, Architect and Construction Manager as if such change or cancellation did not occur. 11.1.5 If requested by the Owner, Contractor shall famish the Owner with the true copies of each policy required of them or their subcontractors. OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall provide Owner's Protective Liability Insurance as protection against claims which may arise from operations under this contract. PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 The Owner shall effect and maintain Builder's Risk Insurance for completed value coverage and shall include the interest of the contractors and their subcontractors. This insurance is to be upon all the structures on which work of al! contracts is to be done to one hundred percent (10096) of the insurable value thereof, including items of labor and materials connected therewith whether in or adjacent to the structures insun3d, materials in place or to be used as part of the permanent construction including surplus materials, shanties, protective fences, bridges, temporary structures, miscellaneous materials and supplies inddent to the work, and such scaffoldings, stagings, towers and equipment as are not owned or rented by the contractor, the cost of which is included in the cost of the work. The loss, is to be made adjustable with the payable to the Owner as tn~stee for the insureds and contractors and subcontradArs as their interest may appear, except in such cases as may require payment of all or apro-portion of said insurance to be made to a mor~agee as their interest may appear. EXCLUSIONS: This insurance does not cover any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaftokling, staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the workmen or any cook shanties, bunkhouses or other structures erected for housing the workmen. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 In the 2nd line, after the word bonds, add the words "in a form approved by the Owner'. 11.4.2 Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential benefidary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under th® Contract, the Contractor shall promptly famish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. .~~? k~'a~ ,~,~ ~~. <~ ?:. 00810.5 1 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the folkwving: °Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the judgment rate as provided by Minnesota law.' 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR GAUSE ' 14.2.1 Subparagraph .4 after the word Documents, add the words, 'induding without limitation poor workmanship, provision of non-conforming materials, or failure to get work done in a timely manner.° I 1 1 1 I END OF SECTION 00810-9 i 1 r~ 1 1 i DIVISION 4 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUAAENTS SECTION 00820 - ADDITIONAL ARTICLE8 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AIA DOCUMENT A201/CAAa,1992 EDITION BID PACKAGE S - COLUMBIA HEIGHT8 PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS The General Conditions, Section 00700, are hereby made a part of this Section. The articles contained in this Section add to the provisions of the General Conditions and shall take precedence over the General Conditions. ARTICLE 16 JOB MEETINGS 16.1 MEETINGS 16.1.1 Meetings shall be conducted perwdically by the CM for the purpose of coordinating and expediting the work. It shall be mandatory that each contractor's Project Manager andlor Superintendent, foreman or lead person be in attendance. Also, from time to time, the Construction Manager will designate certain subcontractors to attend. 16.1.2 Progress and Project Meetings shall be held at the site on a regularly scheduled basis, The date and hour will be established by the Construction Manager. 16.1.3 The essence of the discussions and dedsions of each meeting will be entered into the minutes and copies of the minutes will be furnished to all in attendance and interested parties. ARTICLE 17 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE 17.1 STARTING THE WORK 17.1.1 The Contractor shall commence the Work in such a manner and at such a time as to expeditiously intertaoe with the Work of other Contractors, and shall pursue the Work diligently to completion. The Contractor shall vnork in a cooperative manner with other contractors. 17.1.2 Upon receipt of a Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall pursue and complete the Work without voluntary interruption for any reason, as long as the Work can be performed. The Contractor agrees that they shall continue the Work at ail times the Work can be performed, at a pace consistent with good industry practice regardless of pending or current daims or disputes in connection with the Contract Documents. 17.2 TIMELY PERFORMANCE 17.2.1 It is the Owner's intent to complete the Project as soon as possible, and in this pursuit the Owner may coordinate the scheduling function. The Contractor oos2o-1 agrees to cooperate in scheduling and pertorming the Work to achieve completion of the Project as soon as possible. 17.2.2 The Contractor acknowledges and accepts the prospects of such delays, interterences and interruptions to the progress of the Project and to the Work as are inherent in the construction industry. The Contrailor represents that they have included compensation for such delays, inthrterenoes and interruptions in the Contrail Sum. 17.2.3 The Owner does not guarantee that delays, interterences and/or interruptions to the Work will not occur. The Owner expressly disclaims any responsibilities or obligations resulting from delays, interferences or interruptions. 17.2.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or damages due to delays, interterences or interruptions to the Work or the Project, but shall be entitled only to an appropriate extension of time in accord with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. ARTICLE 18 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING 18.1 SCHEDULING 18.1.1 The Construilipn Manager will provide the overall scheduling function for the Pn~jeil, and will coordinate scheduNng input from Contrailors during the ceunre of constriction. Day today activities planned by Contrailors will be incorporated into a Construilion Schedule. The purpose of the Construilion Schedule is to gukle the Project from milestone to milestone, using input provided by Contreilors. 18.1.2 The Work to be pertormed under this Contract shall be commenced immediately and be completed in accordance with the milestone schedWe and the subsequent constn~ction schedule incorporating scheduling input from the Contractors on the Projeil. Contrailor agrees to complete its Work in accordance with the construction schedule as updated from time to time, and specifically in accordance with day today schedule input submitted to the Construilion Manager by the Contractor and accepted by the Construction Manager for incorporation in the construction schedule. It is expressly understood and agreed that upon request by the Construction Manager the Contrailor shall adjust its individual scheduled activities to allow coordination of the Project Work, to achieve established milestone dates or to allow completion of the Projeil in an expeditious manner, all without additional compensation to the Contractor or damages of any kind. 18.1.3 The Construction Manager will provide a Milestone Schedule which will establish the major points of completion during construction and toward which Contractors shall orient their efforts. 18.1.4 If at any time a contractor is of the opinion that the quality of their work is, or will be jeoparctized, as a result of the scheduling or coordination of the project, or for any reason known to them, they shall stop work and immediately inform the ooe2a2 Construction Manager of their action and the reasons therefore. The contractor shall immediately, on the same day, reduce their action and their reasons to writing, hand it to the Field Construction Manager for the record, and mail a copy to the Architect. Upon subsequent and timely investigation by the Construction Manager and the Architect, a decision shall be made on the point of jeopardy, and the problem resohred in accordance with the full intent of the contract documents. 18.2 INTERMITTENT WORK ' 18.2.1 If a Contractor's work is intermittent by nature, or if they have reason to leave the Site for a period of two days or more, they shall inform the Construction Manager in advance. ' 18.2.2 When planning to leave the Site during the course of its Work, a Contractor shall provide evidence that their absence will not adversely affect the progress of the ' Project, nor of any other Contractor's previously scheduled work commitment. 18.2.3 When planning to reduce manpower during the course of its Work, a Contractor ' shall provide evidence that reducald manpower wilt not adversely affect the progress of the Project, nor of any other Contractor's previously scheduled work commitment. 18.2.4 Contractors shall cancel any absences or manpower reductions that, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, will adversely affect scheduled progress as determined by the Construction Schedule and the Program Schedule. 18.2.5 Each Bid Division Contractor is required to report to the Field Construction Manager prior to resuming work on the project after an absence from the site for ' one or more working days. The purpose of reporting is to make the Field Construction Manager aware of the Cntractors re-invdvement with the work and to provide an update of any conditions that could affect the continuing work of the ' Contractor. 18.3 WORK DAYS 18.3.1 Construction schedules are based on Contractors working five (5) day weeks, eight (8) hours per day unless overtime or additional time is designated. Any variation to this policy will be disruptive to the Project Construction Schedule and to other Contractors work. Contractors may not use a four (4) day, forty (40) hour week or any other foreshortened vvorlc week other than a five (5) day, eight (8) hour per day week or what may be specifically required by the Construction Schedule. Any deviation from this must be requested in writing from the Construction Manager. ' 18.4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PENDING 18.4.1 The Construction Manager may initiate and coordinate an expediting program, in ' cooperation with each contractor, incorporating all critical items of materials and/or equipment provided under the various Bid Division requirements. ' 18.4.2 In order to ensure timeliness and accuracy, each Contractor shall cooperate by providing order and advrowledgment documentation (without pricing) as required 00820-3 by the Construction Manager. 18.4.3 Each Contractor shall further cooperate by keeping the Construction Manager ' informed of any and all changes in the commitments previously incorporated in the expediting pn~gram, and when deemed necessary by the Construction Manager, provide soun:e contacts for direct expediting by the Construction Manager. ' 18.4.4 The Construction Manager expediting program is to be considered abads-up program and shall not in any way relieve the individual Contractors from the ' perfomnanoe responsibilities subsdibed to elsewhere in the contract documents. END OF SECTION 1 1 r 1 1 r 00820-4 1 DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00830 -PREVAILING WAGrE DIRECTIVE -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS SAFETY CENTER The prevailing Wages are to be minimum wages paid to all construction employees working on ' site with the purpose of constructing the City of Columbia Heights Public Safety Center. The administrative procedures explained in this directi~re are intended to be minimum procedures. Any additional Administrative procedures required for special situations will be established by the City of Columbia Heights or State of Minnesota. Any rates not submitted with the proposal, or listed in the Project Manual; and/or not approved by the City or State; will not be allowed. Employers, Administrative persons and supervisory ' persons are exempt from the Prevailing Wage Directive. Employees working in excess of eight (8) hours per day and forty (40) hours per week shall be ' paid at a rate of one and one half (1-112) times the basic hourly rate. Any employees working Sundays or holidays are entitled to receive twice the posted or approved rate. Each employer is required to inform their employees working on site, as to the prevailing wage minimum ' requirements. In addition, the prevailing wage minimum rates will be posted on site. Each awarded contractor is morally, administratively and flnancially responsible for payments or prevailing wage compensation to employees who perform work on site. All complaints or claims must be in writing and must be deliven~i or mailed to the Department of labor and Industry. The State Department of Labor and Industry will be the final authority for administration and all decisions concerning the prevailing wage directive for this project. 1 1 1 1 END OF SECTION 00830-1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 .,..............». s ............~ .....~.. ..b.. _ .,_ ,. MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRY PREVAILING WAGES FOR 8TATE FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS THIS NOTICE MUST BE POSTED ON THE JOBSITE IN A CONSPICUOU8 PLACE Construction Type: Commercial County Number: 02 County Name: ANOKA Effective: 2008-03-03 Revised: 200&04-02 This project is covered by Minnesota prevailing wage statutes. Wage rates listed below are the minimum hourly rates to be paid on this project. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per weds shall be paid at a rate of one and one half (1 1/2) times the basic hourly rate. Violations should be reported to: Department of Labor and Industry Prevailing Wage Section 443 Lafayette Road N St Paul, MN 55155 (651) 284-5091 DLI.PrevWage~state.mn.us * Indicates that adjacent county rates were used for the labor class listed. LABOR CODE AND CLAS8 EFFECT DATE BASIC RATE FRIN~iE RATE TOTAL RATE 101 LABORER, COMMON (GEN LABOR WRK) 2008-03-03 27.88 12.17 39.83 2008-05-01 28.98 12.47 41.43 102 LABORER,SKILLED ASST CRFT JRNYMN 2008-03-03 27.68 12.17 •• 39.83 2008-05-01 28.98 12.47 41.43 103 LABORER, LANDSCAPING 2008-03-03 15.86 9.03 24.69 2008-05-01 18.91 9.03 25.94 104• FLAGPER80N 2008-03-03 27.86 12.17 39.83 2008-05-07 28.98 12.47 41.43 105` WATCHPERSON 2008-03-03 24.03 11.82 35.85 2Q08-05-01 25.33 12.12 37.45 108 BLASTER 2008-03-03 28.66 12.17 40.83 2008-0501 29.96 12.47 42.43 htlp://workplace.doli.state.mn.uS/prevwage%ommercial~rintphp7county~2 6/12/2008 VV••'•••VaaV4L 11V. W.W1b •. Y.bV 1 YbV Y Vl V LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT DATE BASIC RATE FRINGE RATE TOTAL RATE 107 PIPELAYER (WATER, SEWER 8 GAS) 2008-03-03 28.16 12.17 40.33 2008-05-01 29.46 12.47 41.93 108' TUNNEL MINER 2008-03-03 24.29 11.41 35.70 109 UNDRGRND 8 OPEN DITCH LABOR (8~ 2008-03-03 28.16 12.17 40.33 2008-05-01 29.46 12.47 41.93 GROUP 1 ' 2008-03.03 31.49 13.40 44.89 2008-05-01 32.39 14.15 46.54 201 HELICOPTER PILOT 202 CRANE,OVER 135' BOOM,WITHOUT JIB 203 DRGLNISMLR,SHVL CNTRLS,3 CU YDS+ 204 PILE DRIVING,WITH 3 DRUMS IN USE 205 TOWER CRANE GROUP 2 2008-03-03 31.49 13.40 44.89 2008-05-01 32.39 14.15 46.54 206 CABLEWAY 207 CONCRETE MIXER,STATIONARY PLANT Z08 DERRICK-GUY,STFLEG,PWR,SKD,IMMOV 209 DRGLNISMLR/SHVL CNTRLS,TO 3 CYDS 210 DRDGE OR ENGINEERIPOWERBENGINEER 211 FRONT END LOADERS CU YDS 8 OVER 212 GRADER OR MOTOR PATROL 213 LOCOMOTNE CRANE OPERATOR 214 MIXR-PAVING,ROADMOLE,CONWAY/SMLR 216 TRACTOR -BOOM TYPE 217 TRACTOR CRANE -CRAWLER CRANE 218 TUGBOAT, 100 H.P. AND OVER GROUP 8 FOR RATE CALL 651 284~5091 OR EMAIL DLI.PREVWAGE~STATE.MN.US 219 DUAL TRACTOR 220 ELEVATING GRADER 221 PUMPCRETE 222 SCRAPER,32 CU YDS AND OVER 223 SELF PROPELLED SOIL STABILIZER GROUP 4 2008-03-03 28.32 13A0 41.72 2008-05-01 28.57 14.15 42.72 224 AIR TRACK ROCK DRILL 225 ASPHALT BITUMINOUS STABLZR PLANT 226 AUTOMATIC ROAD MACHINE(CMUSMLR) 227 BACKFILLER OPERATOR 228 CONCRETE BATCH PLANT • 229 BITUMINOUS ROLLER,B TONS OR MORE 230 BITUMINOUS SPREADER.FINISH (PWR) http://workplace.doli.state.mn.us/prevwage%ommercial~ritu php?county=02 6/12/2008 vvaaaaaawavw a a~..w,aaaa~ •. ~.. a "b" r va v LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT DATE BA81C RATE FRINGE RATE TOTAL RATE ' 231 CAT TRACTORS W/ROCK WAGONS/SMLI2 Z3Z CHIP HARVESTER AND TREE CUTTER 233 CONCRETE MU(ER ON JOB SITE ' 234 CONCRETE MOBIL 235 CRUSH,WASH,SCREEN GRAVEL PLANT 236 CURB MACHINE 237 DOPE MACHINE (PIPELINE) 236 DRILL RIGS (ROTARY,CHAIN,CABIE) 239 FORK LIFT OR STRADDLE CARRIER ' 240 FORK LIFT OR LUMBER STACKER 241 FRONT END LOADER OVER 1 CU YD 242 HOIST ENGINEER (POWER) ' 243 HYDRAULIC TREE PLANTER 244 LAUNCHER,TANKER PERSON,PILOT LIC 245 LOCOMOTNE 246 MECHANIC WELDER 247 MILL,GRIND,AND PLANE MACHINE ' 248 249 MULTIPLE MACHINESfWELD,GENS,PUMP PAVE BRKR,TAMP (PWR),MIGHTY MITE 250 PICKUP SWEEP W HOPPER OF 1 CUYD+ ' 251 252 PIPELINE WRAP,CLEAN,BEND MACHINE PWR PLANT ENGINEER,100 KWH + 253 PWR HORIZONTAL BORING MACH 8" + 254 PUGMILL ' 255 RUBBER TIRE TRACTOR,BhIOE ATTACH 25B SCRAPER UP TO 32 CUBIC YARDS 257 SKID LDR,1 CUYD+ A BACKHOE ATTACH ' 258 SLIP FORM (POYVER DRNENxPAVING) 259 TIE TAMPER AND BALLAST MACHINE 280 TRACTOR, BULI.DOZER ' 281 TRENCHING MACH (SEWER,WIATER,GAS) 282 WELL POINT INSTALLATK)N ' GROUP 6 Z008-03-03 18.00 8.00 22.00 263 AIR COMPRESSOR, 800 CFM OR OVER 284 BITUMINOUS ROLLER UNDER 8 TONS ' 285 CNCRTE DSTRB/SPRDIFNSH,FLOAT,JNT 266 CNCRTE SAW W MLILT BLADE,PWR OPER 287 FORM TRENCH DIGGER, POWER OPER ' 268 FRONT END LOADER UPTO INCL 1CUYD 289 GUNITE GUNALL 270 HYDRAULIC LOG SPUTTER ' 271 LOADER-BARBER GREENE OR SIMILAR 272 POST HOLE DRIVING MACHINE/AUGER 273 POWER AUGER AND BORING MACHINE ' 274 POWER ACTUATED JACK 275 PUMP 278 SELF PROP CHIP SPRDR(FLAHERTY) ' 277 SHEEP FOOT COMPACTRIBLADE,200HP+ http://workplacedoli.state.mn.usfprevwage%ommercial~rrint.php?co>tm~ty~2 6/12/2008 .... - ......... _ .., . b ...~.. LABOR CODE AND CLA88 278 SHOULDER MACH W SANDICHIP SPRDR 279 STUMP CHIPPER AND TREE CHIPPER 280 TREE FARMER (MACHINE) 281 BTMNUS SPRDRIFINSH MACH OPRfHLPR GROUP 8 EFFECT DATE 2008-03-03 2008-05-01 BA8IC RATE FRINGE RATE TOTAL RATE 28.35 13.40 41.75 2925 14.15 43.40 282 CONVEYOR 283 DREDGE DECK HAND 284 FIRE PERSON OR TANK CAR HEATER 285 GRVL SCRN PLNT-PORT,NOCRUSHNVASH 286 GREASER (TRUCK OR TRACTOR) 287 LEVER PERSON 288 OII.R-3HVL,CRANE,DUNE,CRUSH,MILL 289 PONVER SWEEPER Z90 ROLLER ON GRAVEL COMPACTION Z91 SELF PROPELLED VIBRATING PACKER 292 SHEEP FOOT ROLLER 293 TRACTOR, WHEEL TYPE,OVER 50 H.P. 294 TRUCK CRANE OILER GROUP 1 Z008-03-03 18.40 301 MECHANK: -WELDER 302 TRIM;TOR TRAILER DRNER • 303 TRUCK DRVR,OPER HANDJPWR WINCH GROUP 2 19.15 304 4 OR MORE AXLE,STRGHT BODY TRUCK GRO UP 3 • 2008-03-03 20.25 305 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR DRIVER 308 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR-1 PERSON 307 THREE AXL1= UNIT'S GROUP 4 • 2008-03-03 18.45 308 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR SPRAY OPR 309 DUMP PERSON 310 GREASER 311 PILOT CAR DRIVER 312 RUBBER TIRED SELF PROPELL PACKER 313 TIMO AXLE UNIT 314 SLURRY OPERATOR 315 TANK TRUCK HELPER-GJ-S,OIL,WATER 318 TRACTOR OPERATOR, UNDER 50 H.P. 401 HEATING AND FROST INSULATORS 2008-00-03 38.68 402• BOILERMAKERS Z008-03-03 29.89 403 BRICKLAYERS 2008-03-«i 30.74 http://workplace.doli.state.mn.us/prevwageJcommercial~rint.php7county=02 6.0o u.4o 6.00 25.15 6.00 26.25 6.00 22.45 15.87 16.43 15.15 52.55 46.32 45.89 6/12/2008 1 1 i 1 I 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 I 1 1 1 .,..........~_,.». a .~ ........a ....ate - ~- ...._ .. LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT DATE BASIC RATE FRINGE RATE TOTAL RATE 2008-05-01 32.34 15.15 47.49 404 CARPENTERS 2008-03-03 31.69 13.00 44.69 405 CARPET LAYERS (LINOLEUM) 2008-03-OCi 28.01 1320 3921 408 CEMENT MASONS 2005-03-03 30.84 13.65 44.49 407 ELECTRICUINS 2008-03-OCi 33.80 20.51 54.11 408 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS 2008-03-03 38.57 1829 54.88 409 GLAZIERS 2008-03-03 32.08 13.50 45.58 2008-0802 33.71 13.50 47.21 410' LATHERS 2008-03-03 31.89 12.82 44.71 2008-05-01 33.49 12.82 48.31 411 GROUND PERSON FOR RATE CALL 851 -284-5091 OR EMAIL DLI.PREVWAGE~STATE.MN.US 412 IRONWORKERS 2008-03-03 31.80 18.72 50.32 2008.05-01 32.80 19.42 52.22 413 LINEMAN FOR RATE CALL851 -284-0091 OR EMAIL DLI.PREVWAGE~STATE.MN.US 414 MILLWRIGHT 2008-03-03 31.51 15.27 48.78 415 PAINTERS 2008-03-03 29.70 14.08 43.76 418• PILEDRIVER 2008-03-03 30.72 13.50 4422 417 PIPEFITTERS - STEAMFITTERS 2008-03-03 3723 18.15 53.38 418 PLASTERERS 2008-03-03 27.93 17.45 45.38 419 PLUMBERS 2008-03-03 35.30 18.79 52.09 420 ROOFER 2006-03-03 30.49 13.05 43.54 2008-05-01 31.74 12.85 44.59 421 SHEET METAL WORKERS 2008-03-03 37.10 14.88 51.78 422 SPRINKLER FITTERS 2008-03-03 37.17 18.86 53.83 423• TERRAZZO WORKERS 2008-03-03 30.88 15.05 45.91 424 TILE SETTERS 2006-03-03 28.13 17.23 45.38 2006-05-01 29.73 1723 48.98 http://workplace.doli.state.mn.us/prevwage%ommercial~rintphp?county=02 6/12/2008 ................... ~ ...........p .. »b. ~ ..~......a .. LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT DATE BASIC RATE FRIN~3E RAPE TOTAL RATE 425 DRYWALL TAPER 2008.03-03 28.67 14.94 43.61 430" WIRING SYSTEM TECHNICIAN 2008-03-03 29.87 11.58 41.43 431" WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLER 2008-03-03 20.91 9.90 30.81 435 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKER 2008-03-03 28.51 12.11 38.62 438' SIGN ERECTOR 2008-09-08 23.89 8.12 31.81 http://workplace.doli.state.nnn.us/prevwage%ommerciel_printphp?county~2 6/1?./2008 1 ' ' DIVISION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIIREMFNI S SECTION 00850 -INDEX OF DRAWINGS -BID PACKAGE 3 t COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER Drawing Index A0.0 Cover Sheet Civil C2 Paving Plan (for reference -date September 26`x) Architectural A2.1 Lower Level Floor Plan A2.2 Main Level Floor Plan ' A2.3 Mezzanine Floor Plan A2.4 Roof Plan A3.1 A3.2 Building Elevation & Sections Building Elevations A4.1 Wall Sections A4.2 Wall Sections ' A4.3 Wall Sections A4.4 Wall Sections A4.5 Wall Sections A4.6 Stair 8c Elevator Sections & Enlarged Plans A4.7 Stair 8c Elevator Sections & Enlarged Plans A4.8 Stair Sections & Details A4.9 Details 8c List of Abbreviations ' A5.1 Enlarged Floor Plans A6.1 Interior Elevations A6.2 Interior Elevations 'ls ' A6.3 A6.4 Lobby Elevations 8c Enlarged Lobby Plan >~ebby-Hctsils ~jl~rbr ~(~br~~3S ~ A7.1 Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plan ' A7.2 A7.3 Main Level Reflected Ceiling Plan Mezzanine Reflected Ceiling Plan A8.1 ~L\00 r Sc~l~+ A8.2 Door and Frame Details 1 F1.1 Lower Level Furniture Plan (for~reference only). F1.2 Main Level Furniture Plan (for reference only) Structural ' Sl General Notes & Details S2 Foundation/Basement Plan ' S3 S4 Main Level Framing Plan Low Roof/Mezzanine Plan SS High Roof Plan S6 Sections S7 Sections S8 Sections S9 Sections S10 Details Sl l Arched Opening Details Mechanical ' MS1.1 Site Plan -Geothermal Wells and Plumbing M 1.1 Title Sheet ' 00850-1 M2.1 Lower Floor Plan -Waste, Vent and Storm M2.2 Lower Floor Plan -Water and Gas M2.3 Main Floor Plan -Plumbing M2.4 Mezzanine Floor Plan -Plumbing M3.1 Lower Floor Plan -Piping M3.2 Main Floor Plan -Piping M3.3 Mezzanine Floor Plan -Piping M4.1 Lower Floor Plan - HVAC M4.2 Main Floor Plan - I4VAC M4.3 Mezzanine Floor Plan - HVAC M5.1 Roof Plan M6.1 Schedules M7.1 Details M7.2 Details M8.1 Risers M9.1 Building Section Electrical ES1 Site Plan -Lighting E1 Lower Floor Plan - Power ~ Systems E2 Main Floor Plan -Power & Systems E2.1 Mezzanine Floor Plan -Power & Systems E3 Lower Floor Plan -Lighting E4 Main Floor Plan -Lighting E4.1 Mezzanine Floor Plan -Lighting ES Schedules E6 Schedules END OF SECTION 00850-2 SECTION00900 -CODE REVIEW COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING Code Review September 25, 2008 -Revised October 30, 20118. Project Description A new public facility containing both the Police and Fire departments of the City of Columbia Heights. ' Applicable Codes Applicable codes include International Building Code. t History of Review None. i the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code and by reference the 2006 Use and Occupancy Classification Ch. 3 Sec 304 Police and Fire Office areas: Group B Garage and Apparatus: Group S-2 4-hour Holding Cell Area Group I-3 Minnesota Fire Code chapter 90722 does require an alarm system for this building since our occupant load over 500. Ch. 5 General bldg. height and areas Type V B -construction Table 503 B 9;000 sf allowed base area per floor S-2 13,000 sf allowed base area per floor I-3 5,000 sf allowed base area per floor B & S-2 Base stories allowed 2 stories, I Base stories allowed is 1 story. 505 Mezzanine 505.1 -shall not contribute to area allowed. -mezzanine is allowed 1/3 area of space located in storage. Fire Dept. Mezzanine is 976 sf Mechanical Mezzanine is 1540 sf, Apparatus area is 18,585 sf, 2516/18585 =1/7 +/- 506 Area Allowed per Story Aa = At + [At Ifj + [At x Is] If = (F/P - 025) 30/30 If = (844!844- 025)1= 0.75 B --- Aa =9000 + 6,750 + 18,000 = 33,750 S-2 --- Aa = 13,500 + 10,125 + 27,000 = 5025 I-3 --- Aa 5000 + 3750 + 10,000 = 18750 Basement - Proposed18,195 sf (Gi3,750 or 50625) First Level -Proposed 26,371 sf (Ei3,750 or 50,625xI is a small portion) Second Level -Future 16815 sf (<i3,750) 504 Stories allowed above grade Table 503 B = 2 stories above grade S-2 = 2 stories above grade I-3 =1 story above grade 5042 Stories may be increased by 1 story. Total stories allowed above grade is 3 for B and S-2 occupancies. This allows for the future 2nd level. BA # 0806 Section 00900 ' 1 of 8 508 Mixed use and occupancy 508.3.32 Separate Occupancy Calculation Ch.6 Ch.7 Ratio for B + S-2 + I-3 is less than 1 Basement 16815/33750 + 1380/50625 + 0/0 = OS2 1" Leve115892/33750 + 7385/50625 + 3 100/18750 = 0.78 508 2 Incidental use area - (fire barrier) ~ Se tion Table 5082 Parking garage 1 hr w/auto sprinkler storage rooms over 100 sf 1 hr w/auto sprinkler Fire resistance rating for building elements - Z~pe V-B Table 601 Structural Frame 0 Bearing Wall Exterior 0 Bearing Wall Interior 0 Non Bearing exterior walls 30 feet from property 0 Floor Construction 0 Roof Construction 0 Table 5083.3 Required separation between B, S-2 and I-3 a 1 hour serration is required. Fire resistance rated construction 707.14.1 IIevator lobby not required less than 4 stones. 70714.1 Also Exception 1; Not required at street entry if sprinklered. Draft curtains omitted from current MNSBC. BA # 0806 Section 00900 2 of 8 Ch.10 0--- o--- ®---- t~-- Means of Egress Basement Level -One hour rated walls are shown dashed BA # 0806 Section 00900 3 of8 - ~ ~ -.® ' ` .r.~ ~ ~ I 1 I -- -@-~- - -~-~ ----- ! I ~ ~ I ' I ~ ~ I -i - I I ans : ~ '' i 71A1 --~ 0---- * - - - - - - - - .xat un to ' ' ~ • i m ~ -tm ~ i I ' B nas - - - ~ o---- ~ - -- r~ - + ; --~ -~ ~ ~ , i , ~~ I im+ • aae S~2 S ( mna .ass ~ I •eenm .~.ee i s ~ --~ ---- -- - _ - .~ .,..s ^aa, ^1.m ~ ~ - ~ ~,~„W i _ - --- - --- -- ---m ~~ ~ ®--- ----------------------- -- ~ ~ .aw I I I I I ~, ~ i i --~---a : --i , ---- : ::.. x . ~ --- ~---~ ~ : I I ~ ~ I I - ~~ I First Level -One hour rated walls are shown dashed BA # 0806 Section 00900 4of8 Mezzanine Level -One hoar rated walls are shown dashed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 1004.1.1 Total Occupants are 532. Table 1017.1 Corridor fire resistance rating Occupancy B with sprinkler system has a rating of zero hours. 1 hour rated stairwells. Table 1020 Exception 8; first level and future second level may be open to each other. 707.14.1 Elevator lobby not required since elevator does not connect more than three stories. Ch29 Plumbing System Table 2902.1 WC B WC = 50/25 + 311/50 = 822 S WC = 131/100 =1.31 (S toilets =1/100 occupants) I-WC =1 per cell = 4 Total WC = 14 Required (4 men's, 2 men's urinals, 5 women's, 4 unisex and 4 cells equal provided). Lavs B Lavatories = 80/40 + 281/80 = 5 S 1 S Lavatories = 131/100 = 1.31 (Lavatories = 1/100) I Lavatories = 1 per cell = 4 Total Lavatories = 11 Required (4 men's, 5 women's, 4 unisex and 4 cells equal provided). DF B and I Drinking Fountains = 401/100 = 4.01 (B Fountains = 1/00) S Drinking Fountains = 131/1000 = 0.131 (S Fountains = 1/1000) Total Fountains = 5 Required. 6 provided. BA # 0806. Section 00900 5 of S COMcheck Software Version 3.5.3 Envelope Compliance Certificate 2004 IECC Report Date: 09/15/08 Data filename: Columbia Hieghts Public Safety.cck Section y :Project Information Project Type: New Construction Project Title :Columbia Heights Public Safety Construction Site: 825 41st Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Owner/Agent: City of Columbia Heights 59040th Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 Designer/Contractor: David Olds Buetow Aud Associates 2345 Rice Street St Paul , MN 55113 651483 6701 Section 2: General Information Budding Location (for weather data): Colombia Heights, Minnesota Climate Zone: 6a Heating Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 7391 Cooling Degree Days (base 50 degrees F): 2908 Vertical Glazing /Wall Area Pct: 9°i6 BaOdioe TWoe Floor Area Office 47088 Section 3: Requirements Checklist Climate-Specific Requirements: Component Nsme/Deseription Gross Area Cavity R- Cont. R- Proposed U-Bndeet U- orPerimeterValne Valne ___ Factor Factor Roof 1: Structural Slab 24957 --- --- 0.025 0.034 Skylight 1: Metal Frame with Thermal Broak:Double Pane with Low- 32 --- --- 0.700 0.600 E, Tinted without Curb, SHGC 0.57 Exterior Wall l: Brick w/ CMU Backup, HC 1.0 16654 --- --- 0.066 0.089 Window 1: Metal Frame with Thermal Break:Double Pane with Low- 1502 --- --- 0.600 0.350 E, Clear, Factory Assembled, SHGC 0.63, PF 0.10 Door H.M.: Solid, Swinging 200 --- --- 0.200 0.700 Door Gless: Overhead, Non~wiaging 1606 -- --- 0.800 0.500 Door insulated: Overhead, Non-Swinging 1366 --- --- 0.060 0.500 (a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseliae calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements. BA # 0806 Section 00900 6of8 1 1 1 1 Air Leakage, Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements: ^ 1. All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with amoisturevapor-permeable wrapping material installed in aceordance with the manufactuter's installation instructions. ^ 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements. ^ 3.Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified. ^ 4. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and in amanner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation. ^ 5. Stair, elevator shaft vents, and other outdoor air intake and exhaust openings in the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers. ^ 6. Cargo doors and loading dock doors are weather sealed. ^ 7. Recessed lighting factures are: (i) Type IC rated and sealed or gasketed; or (ii) installed inside an appropriate air- tightassembly with a 0.5 inch clearance from combustible materials and with 3 inches clearance from insulation material. ^ 8. Building entrance doors have a vestibule and•equipped with closing devices. Exceptions: Building entrances with revolving doors. Doors that open directly from a space less than 3000 sq. ft. in area. ^ 9. Vapor retarder installed. Section 4: Compliance Statement ' Comp/lance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed envelope system has been designed to meet the 2004 IECC requirements um COMcAeck Version 3.5.3 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in t}~tequirements Checklist. ' UBVIO Va7S Name -Title 1 BA # 0806 fr Section 00900 7 of 8 Additional Energy Calculation Roof System U Calculations: Roof System Roof System Air film (exterior) 0.17 BUR Membrane :" Mineral Fiber 0.33 1.75 ~ ~~ epP`~ G 6" Avg. polyisocyanurate 37.1 ~~ FF~~ Metal decking 0.00 Air film (interior) 0.61 ~~ ~f ~ $ R Factor 39.96 - U Factor provided .025 Opaque Wall System U Calculation: Brick. air space. insulation and block Air film (exterior) 0.17 4" face brick/stone 0.80 2" air space 2.58 2" extruded polystyrene 10.00 8" concrete block 0.89 Air film (interior) 0.68 RFactor 15.12 ~~ ~/ U Factor 0.066 Sources of Dam: Data for wall expanded polystyrene insulation: Amoco Foam Products Company, 2907 Log Cabin Drive, Snyrna, Georgia, 30080-7013 Data for roof polyisocyanurate insulation: Dow Chemical Company, 2020 Dow Center Midland, Michigan, 48674 Data for shading coefficient of glass: Viracon Glass Company Other Data: Mechanical and Electrical Equipment for Buildings 7th Edition, Stein/Seynolds/McGuinness,1986, Chapter 4 End of Code Review BA # 0806 - Section 00900 8of8 1 DIVISION 7 -GENERAL REQUiREIIAENTS SECTION 07010 - SUMMARY OF WORK -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Work included in the Contract Documerrts consists of the new Public Safety Center, Columbia Heights, Minnesota. B. The subdivision of Work between ~e multiple Prime Contractors is delineated in Section 00300 of these specifications. C. The timing and sequence of the work is generally described in the Milestone Schedule. That schedule will be modified and expanded with input from Contractors subsequent to contract awards. The resulting Construction Schedule will be used for actual construction. D. This project is exempt from the 0.25°y6 highway tax. The tax for this project is ' 6.5°~f,. 1 1 1 1.02 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Contractors shall limit their use of the Project site for work and for storage as designated by the Construction Manager. Contractors will not occupy or use any of the Owner's fadlities or services. Any work required outside of the designated limits shall be previously scheduled and coordinated with the Construction Manager and Owner. B. No radios will be perm'~tted on site. C. Contractors shall locate field offices, storage trailers, and employee parking as designated by the Construction Manager. D. Contractors shall cooperate to the fullest extent possible with the Construction Manager to protect the public, staff, and visitors from construction. Ciearwp must be constantly maintained and dear accesses must be provided at all times. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Prior to ocxupancy the owner will 6e instatGng equipment, furnishings, and other amenities as n~~ired for occupancy. Each contractor shall cooperate with all Owner installations and coordinate the completion of this work accordingly. END OF SECTION 01010-1 1 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01025 -CONSTRUCTION AND CHANGE bOCUMENT3 -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION AND CHANGE DOCUMENTS ' A. Contractors will be limited to the number of construction sets and change documents that are provided at no cost. Each Contractor will be allowed up to two sets of construction documents and subsequent change documents for each bid division awarded. Any additional sets required wiH either be paid by or backcherged to the Contractor. ' B. All Contractors should identify the number of sets needed for their contract work and notify the Construction Manager accordingiy. i 1 1 END OF SECTION 01025-1 1 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01080 -ALTERNATES -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUAABIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC 8AFETY CENTER ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemerrtary Conditions and other Division-1 Speclfications Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.02 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. ' 9.03 DEFINITIONS: . A. Definition. An alternate is gn amount proposed by Nd1 bid division bidder and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that ' may be added to, deducted from or no change to the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation ' methods described in the Contract Documerrts. The cost, credit or no change for each alternate is the net addition to, deduction from or no change to the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contrail Sum. 1.04 PROCEDURES: A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items inadental to or required for a complete installation wheti~er or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Notification: Immediately foNowing the award of the Contract, notify each party ' invohred, in writing, of the status of each aftemate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for !star consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modification to aR®mates. t C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. D. Schedule: A `Sd~edule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenca'd in the Schedule contain requirements for ' materials necessary ~ achieve the Work described under each Alternate. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not applicable). ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 09030-1 3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES: A. Each Trade Contractor to state the amount to be "Added To" or "No Change" to the ' bid for each of the alternates listed. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Eliminate four (4) windows and anything relating to windows in Storage Mezzanine 201 on Grid Line A (A3.2). Replace with masonry wail system. Indicate Add or Deduct ' 3 ' ALTERNATE N0.2 Eliminate five (5) of the windows (one on the north, four on the west, A3.2) and anything relating to ' windows in Men's Locker Room 154 (every other window). Replace with masonry wall system $ ' ALTERNATE N0.3 Eliminate the high building sign lights in front of the building above the Apparatus Bay and Entrance. (A3.1) $ ' ALTERNATE N0.4 Eliminate the furring strips and drywall on all Exterior masonry walls on outside walls. Stk $ ALTERNATE N0.5 Change base bid diesel generator to a Generac bi-fuel generator using both diesel and natural gas as a fuel supply. $ ' ALTERNATE N0.6 Eliminate the generator and concrete pad. All other Preparation and equipment to be installed. Generator to be installed at a later date. ALTERNATE N0.7 Supply and install fluid applied flooring system on concrete floors in lieu of porcelain file in Rooms: Duty Lockers 005, Corridor 007, Corridor 012, and Stair A. Use same system as specified under 096700 Fluid Applied Flooring, except system shall be a 20 mil epoxy system plus a urethane top coat. ALTERNATE NO. B Supply and install carpet in lieu of file in Corridor 023, Corridor 151 and Corridor 185. $ $ ALTERNATE N0.9 Eliminate security glass shown at exterior windows ~~3 (~' Labeled on A2.2 in keyed note CG. (except at showers and their ~~ $ 11yS corresponding personal drying/dmssing space ~ - oxide of actual shower.: g4'hmedi~t~ly _ ALTERNATE NO. 1 ~ !h ail toilet rooms and locker rooms cnange to 5'-0' high wainsoott with epoxy paint above. $ ALTERNATE NO. 11 Change overhead doors as follows OH7 becomes OH6 and OH5 becomes OH4. $ ALTERNATE NO. 12 to Waiting Room 102 and Room 104 eliminate the hardwood above the file and paint and keep the hardwood trim. $ ALTI=RNATE NO. 13 Change roofing system and flashing from BUR to TPO. $ 01030-2 1 ' ALTERNATE NO. 14 Deduct Section 086200 Unit Skylights and Section 086223 Tubular Skylights, roof and interior finishes acconiir~ly. ALTERNATE NO. 15 Deduct taro (2) 30' flag poles. ' END OF SECTION 1 S ' ~a~ ~ 1 i-Ilg log __ - __ -- ~_~~ In Alternate No. 4 add: "Also eliminate the furring strips, drywall, and 2" rigid insulation in rooms 167, 168, 169, and 179 along wall shared with Apparatus Bay 180. Furring is to remain as drawn in rooms Stair A, 025, ' .026 and l49 underthis alternate_bid:' ____._-__ -_ _--._ __ ._...___ _ 1 1 01030-3 ' DNISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 GENERAL ' A. See the drawings for items to be demolished ~ otherwise removed to allow for installation of new work. ' B. Do not endanger any work by cutting or digging. Structural members shall not be cut without the consent of the Architect. Do not alter the work of another contractor without his consent. ' 1.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each Contractor shall do ell cutting and patching for his trade section uMess otherwise indicated. Each contractor shall employ skilled tradesmen to do patching. ' Patching shall match adjacent surfaces. B. Each contractor shall be responsible for coifing and patching his own openings in existing or previously constructed walls, ceiling, floors, etc. Provide personnel protection under coring operations in occupied areas. ' C. Holes cut in exterior walls or foundations shall be waterproofed. D. If the Contractor has not finished the required information in sufficient time before ' masonry walls, concrete floors and ceiling have been constructed, the Contractor requiring modifications shall be responsible for all necessary cubing, patching and refinishing. ' E. Trades requiring openings cast in precast concrete members shall immediately notify precast concrete fabricator the size and location #or the openings. Failure by any trade to give timely notice regarding the size and location of openings will result in ' the precast members being cast without the desired openings. Openings shall then be cut by the trade which required the opening. Ead~ cut shall be reviewed before work begins by the Architect and precast supplier to ensure that the structural ' integrity Af the member will not be affected. 1.03 COLLARS AND COVER PLATES ' A. Rough openings for ductwork, piping and equipment shall be covered with sheet metal collars or escutcheon plates. Excessively large openings shall be patched and finished to match adjac~nnt surfaces and trimmed with collars or escutcheon plates. ' See Division 15. 1.04 DAMAGE A. Wherever any material, construction or utility is damaged, the cyst of repair or ' replacement shall be charged to the Contractor responsible for the damage. tf responsibility cannot be faced, the cost shall be shared among the Contractors in proportion to their activities under the contract. ' END OF SECTION 01045-1 1 DIVISION 7 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01060 -LAYOUT AND MEASUREMENTS -BID PACItA~3E 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 RESPONSIBILITY A. The responsibility for accun~te layout and measurement of the work of each contractor is their own. In addition, each contractor shall verify the dimensional accuracy of their work is reliant upon before they begin their work. They shall report ail inaccuracies to the Construction Manager and not proceed until corrections are made. If a contractor inadvertently or knowingly proceeds with their work on dimensionally inaccurate work of another, they will be liable for the cost of corrections to their work when the error is corrected. ' B. Assistance provided by the Construction Manager shall not relieve a Contractor of their responsibilities established by the Contrail Documents. 1 i. C. The Contractor shall carefully proteil monuments, stakes, and bench marks. If destroyed or disturbed by the Contractor or their employees, suboontn~cton3 and sub-subcontractors the cost to the Owner of replacing them shall be charged against the Contractor and shall be deduiled from the payments for their work. 1.02 CHECKING LINES AND LEVELS A Each Contractor shall thoroughly examine the existing conditions and be familiar with work to be performed as hereinaRer specified and as outlined on the drawings. B. Two basic grid lines and one bench mark elevation point necessary for the location and construilion of the building shall be established by the Owner. C. Each Contrailor shall compare all lines and levels given on the drawings with ailual field conditions and shall call attention to discrepancies of they occur. D. Each Contractor shall verify and document with the Construilion Manager all lines and levels and be responsible for the proper location of all their work. 1.03 SURVEY AND LAYOUT A. Each Contractor shall be responsible for line and grade survey and layout from the basic grid lines and benchmark established by the Owner. Layout of the site paving, parking, etc. shall be done as noted on the Plans. END OF SECTION 01050-1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01060 - PERMITS, fN3PC-CTION, AND LICENSING FEES -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' 1.01 PERMITS AND INSPECTION FEES A. The Owner will secure and pay for the general building permit j B. Required City bur~ding permits shall be applied for and secured by Trade Contractor and paid for by the City of Columbia Heights. Any State and/or County permits that are required to be paid for by Trade Contractor. I C. Any other specialized permits or inspection fees shall be applied for, secured and paid for by the Trade Contractor requiring such permits. ' D. All Contrac~rs must have City Contactors License, $60.00 each. See attached application. ' 1.02 INSPECTIONS ' A. Any Contractor requiring special inspection by the City or other agency shall arrange and schedule the Inspection and give a minimum of 48 hour notice to the Construction Manager, Architect, and Engineer. B. Partial occupancy permits may be applied for by the Owner. All Contractors will cooperate and assist in securing and maintaining partial occupancy permits. C. Mechanical and electrical Contractors shall review their speafications to comply will all speaal testing and inspections. ' D. Where the Contract Documents r~uire inspections, tests or approvals of the Work to be made by an independent testing agency or laboratory or an independent professional consultant, the independent testing agency or ' laboratory or independent professional consultant shall be satisfactory to the Architect and Consbuction Manager. ' E. Each contractor shall inspect work of others which will receive or is adjacent to their Work before c~mmmencing their work. Do not proceed until conditions which would result in a less than first class installation are satisfactorily corrected. ' Commencing work shall constitute as acceptance of the work of others by the contractor as satisfactory to receive their work. 1 END OF SECTION 1 01060 -1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01061- OFF~$ITE DISPOSAL -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' 1.01 DISPOSAL A. Each Trade Contractor, and their sub-contractors and suppliers, shall be ' responsible for the disposal of all construction debris or other materials which result from their operations on the project site. 1 B. Naturally occurring soils which are deemed unsuitable for use in the work may be spread or buried on site when deemed appropriate by the Owner. Such disposal shall be carried out with sufficlent compaction and in a manner which will not pose a future nuisance due to settlement or erosion C. Ail trucks, or other vehicles, which leave the site loaded with debris and excess materials shall be covered to the extent required to keep the materials from spilling onto roadways. Any spillage shall be immediately cleaned up by the contractor that is disposing the material. END OF SECTION 01061 -1 1 DiVIS1ON 7 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01200 -PROJECT MEETINGS - Blh PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAI=ETY CENTER 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS A. Prior to the initiation of on-site activity, a meeting will be held with all Bid Division Contractors for the purpose of planning, scheduling and coordinating an orderly initiation of on-site construction activity. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTIOPI CONFERENCES A. Each Contractor is required to meet on the site with the Construction Manager and the Ar+chitect/Engineers as required by the Construction Manager prior to beginning their Work. The purpose of this meeting is to review the intent of the Contrail Documents as they pertain to the Contractor's Work, and to integrate the initiation of that Work with the Work already in progress on the site. 1.03 PROGRESS & PROJECT MEETINGS A. Contractors active on site shah be required to attend Progress and Project Meetings when called by the Construction Manager. These meetings are for the purpose of planning and assessing construction progress and for discussing problems of mutual conoem. B. It shall be mandatory that each Contractor and/or their superintendent, foreman or lead person be in attendance at these meetings. C. All decisions, instructions and interpretations given by the Owner or their designated representatives at these meetings shall be conclusive, and shall be binding on the Contractors. D. The minutes of such meetings will be recorded and distributed to the Contractors by the Construction Manager. . E. Construction Meetings to be held weekly or bian~ekly as determined by the Construction Manager. END OF SECTION 01200-1 1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL RE4UIREMENT3 8ECTlON 0'1300 -SUBMITTALS -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA H~IGHT8 PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's ' name and catalog number or by reference to recognized industry standards. B. To ensure that the speafied products are famished and 'metalled in aoconiance ' with the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review by the Architect. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS ' A. Contractual Requirements for Submittals: General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. ' B. Section 01700- Contract Closeout ' C. Individual Submittals Required: Pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Make all submittals of shop drawings, samples, requests for substitution, and other similar items, in strict acxordance with the provisions of this Section of these spermcations. ' 1.04 DISCLAIMER ' A Contractor agn3es that shop drawings submittals processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of shop drawings submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Anchitect that the Contractor understands the ' design concept; that they demonstrate their understanding by indicating which equipment and material they intend to famish and install and by detailing the fabric8tion and installation methods they intend to use. ' B. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and Contrail Documents are discorrered either prior to or after ' shop dn~wing submittals are processed by the Architect, the Contract Documents shall control and be followed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS ' A Preparation 1. Preparation by qualMed detailer. ' 2. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Dn~wings. 01300-1 B. Scale Required 1. Unless othenNise spedf~cally directed by the Archithct, make all shop drawings accun~tely to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the items, i~ method of connection to the Work and the adjacent surfaces or materials. C. Type of Prints Required 1. Submit all shop drawings to the Architect through the Construction Manager in the form of one black and white prints. Prints shall not exceed 30 by 42 inches. Provide enough copies for the distribution by the Architect to the Owner, Construction Manager, related Engineers, Architect, Contractor and Sub Contractors. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE A. Preparation 1. Manufacturers standard schematic drawings: a. Delete information which is not applicable to project. b. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project. 2. Manufacturers catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illusions and ether standard descriptive data. a. Clearly mark each Dopy tv identify pertinent materials, products or models, b. Show dimension and clearances required. c. Show performance characteristics and capabilities. d. Show wiring diagrams and controls where applicable. B. Number of Copies Required 1. Submit the number of copies which are required to be returned and three bluelines which will be retained by the Architect and Construction Manager. 2. Where copies are required for inclusion in closeout documents, submit these in addition to the requirements spedfied above. 2.03 SAMPLES A. Preparation 1. Office samples sized to dearly illustrate: 01300-2 ~i ' a. Functional characteristics of product or materials, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. ' F ll l l b f t h l fi range o es, excep . u co or samp w en spec c co or(s) are specified. ' 2. Field samples and mods-ups, when shown on the Drawings or specified in a particular Section: ' a. Erect at Project Site at location acxeptable to Ar~itect. b. Construct each sample or mode up complete, including work of all ' trades required in finished work. c. Remove as directed, unless specfic Section albws incorporation in ' the work after acceptance. B. Acxuracy of Sample ' 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, all samples shall be of the precise article proposed to be furnished. ' C. Number of Samples Required ' 1. Submit all samples in the quantity which is required to be returned plus one which will be retained by the Architect. 2. After review, samples may be used in oonstructlon of Project. ' 2.04 COLORS t A. General 1. Unless the precise Dolor and pattem is specifically described in the ' .. Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattem is available in a specified product submit accurate color charts and pattem charts to the Architect for their review and selection. ' B. Comparative Analysis ' 1. Unless all availacle colors and patterns have identical costs, identical performance. characteristics, and identically suited to the installation, completely describe the relative costs and capabilities of each. ' 2.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect's Approval Required 1 1. The Contract is based on the materials, equipment, and methods described in the Contract Documents. 1~ 01300-3 r B. 2. The Architect may, at their discretion, consider proposals for substitutions ' of materials, equipment, and methods only when such proposals are accompanied by fuN and complete technical data and all other information ' required by the Architect to evaluate the proposed substitution. 3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this work by the Architect. ' Approvals Where the phrase "Approved Substitution", Equal Approved" or similar verbiage occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material, equipment or methods will be approved as equal by the Architects unless the item has been specifically approved for this work by the Architect. C. 2. ~ The decision of the Architect shall be final. 3. Each Bidder, Sub Bidder, Manufacturer and Material supplier in submitting a request for substitution agrees that if the proposed material, product or equipment is approved and subsequently used in the Work, the proposer shall assume all crosts incurred on account of additional work and change required to incorporate the material, product or equipment into the Work, including all such work and changes performed under other contracts. Each bidder shall include sufficient sums in the Bidder's Bid to cover such costs. Availability of Speafied items 1. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderiy and timely progress of the Work. 2 in the event specified item or items will not be so available, so notify the Architect prior to receipt of bids. 3. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS A. B. Inspections and Test Reports 1. Classify each as either "shop Drawing" or "Product Data", depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for this Project or a standard pubiicat~n of workmanship control testing at point of production; process acconfingly. Warranties 1. In addition to copies desired for each Contractors use, famish 2 executed copies for the Architect's use plus additional copies where required for maintenance manuals. 1 1 1 1 1 1 01300-4 1 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. General 1 1 1 1 1. Prior to submittal for An:hitect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate aN material, induding the following procedures: a. Determine and verify dimensions and conditions, catalog numbers, and sunilar data. b. Coordinate as required with all trades and with all public agencies involved. c. Secure all necessary approvals from public agencies and others; signify by stamp or other means that all required approvals have been obtained. d. Clearly indicate all deviations from the Contract Documents. B. Grouping of Submittals 1. Unless othennrise specifically permitted by the Architect, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items. 2. The Architect may reject partial submittals as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.02 TIMING OF SUBMITTAt~ A. General 1. Make all submittals for Underground, Mechanical, Electrical Structural Steel and Joists two (2) weeks after Letter of Irrterrt..has been sent. All other submittals are to be submitted within four (4) weeks of Letter of Intent has been sent or as specifically called for to allow suffident time for reviews, securing necessary approvals, possible revision and resubmittal, placing orders, coordination with other contractor's work, and securing delivery. ' B. Delays 1. Costs of delays occasioned by tardiness of submittals by the Contractor ' shall be the responsibility of that Contractor. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS ' A. General ' 1. Consecutively number all submittals. 01300-5 1 B. 2. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal, in duplicate, ' showing the date of transmittal, Speafication Section or Drawing Number to which the submittal pertains, brief description of the material submitted, ' notification of deviations from Contract and the company name of the originator of the submittal. Resubmittals ' 1. When material is resubmii#ed for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal; indicate by reference to previous submittal that this is a , resubmittal. 3.04 PROCESSING OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A B. C. D. Each Subcontractor shall prepare, review and approve each submittal, and then transmit it to the Construction Manager. Upon receipt of a submittal from the Contractor, the Construction Manager shall review and proceed as folbws: 1. If submittal is complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents, they will transmit it to the Arch'~tect. 2. In the case of Structural, Mechanical or Electrical shop ~dnanrings or product data, the Construction Manager, shalt transmit the submittal directly to the Consultant and send a copy of the letter Of transmittal to the Architect. 3. If the submittal is incomplete or not in acxorclance with the Contract Documents, the Construction Manager shall return rt to the Contractor for resubmission. The Construction Manager shall send a copy of the letter of transmittal to the Architect. Upon receipt of a submittal from the Construction Manager, the Architect shall review, stamp, initial, and date each submittal. 1. "APPROVED": Upon receipt of a submittal from the Construction Manager, the Architect shall review, stamp, initial, and date each submittal. 2. "APPROVED WITH CORRECTIONS NOTED": Upon receipt of a submittal from the Construction Manager, the Architect shall review, stamp, initial, and date each submittal. 3. "NOT APPROVED": Upon reca3ipt of a submittal from the Construction Manager, the Architect shah review, stamp, initial, and date each submittal. Upon receipt of a submittal from the Construction Manager, the Consultant shall review and forward each submittal as follows: 01300-6 I 1 1 1. If the submr~tal is acceptable, the Consultant shall stamp, sign, date, and forward it to the Architect for their review as desdibed in Paragraph 3.04.C. 2. If major corrections are requires or the submttth! is an unacceptable, the Consultant shall indicate the objections, return the submittal to the Contractor through the Construction Manager, and send a copy of the submittal to the Architect so that they are aware of the reasons for the Consultant's actions. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. E. When a submittal is returned by the Architect and resubmittai is not required the Construction Manager shall: 1. Review submittal for Architects/Consultant's comments and take appropriate action indicated. 2. Coordinate field verrfications not possible during eariier review described in Paragraph 3.01A. 3. Distribute submittal as specified in Article 3.05. ' 3.05 DISTRIBUTION 1 1 1 A. The Contractor shall distribute reproductions of shop drawings to the following: 1. Contractor who prepared submittal (verify number of copies required). 2. Job site file. 3. Other affected Contractors. 4. Suppliers or fabricators. B. The Construction Manager shall retain the processed shop drawings for the record. C. Distribute samples and copies of product data which carry the Architect's review stamp as directed by the Architect. 3.06 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK A. Tire manufacture or construction of any pieces of equipment, device, or other item for which shop drawings, product data, or samples are required to be furnished, shall not commence prior to complete processing of the appropriate submittal. B. Any Contractor who proceeds without a submittal bearing the Arcchitect's stamp does so at their own risk. Architect shall maintain the right to reject work or materials provided without proper prior submittal. END OF SECTION 01300-7 DMSION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500 -CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS BID PACKAGE 3 -COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUGLIC SAFETY CENTER ' 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 1 1 I A. Construction Manager shall provide the following temporary facilities and controls for the Work: 1. Field office for the Construction Manager personnel. 2. Sanitary facilities. 3. Temporary 200 amp service with 6 plugs on 41 ~ Avenue power pole. B. Contractors shall provide ~mporairy facilities and oontrds needed for the Work including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity, phone. 2. Enclosures such as tarpaulins and canopies. 3. Provisions for storage. 4. Construction aids and equipment. 5. Barriers. 6. Protection. 7. Site water control and dewatering. 8. Cleaning during the work. 9. Refuse containers and disposal. 10. Temporary faality removal. 11. Hoisting. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Substantial Enclosure: When tfie exterior walls are substantially complete, the roof system is substantially complete, exterior openings are temporarily closed and temporary doors are installed, the building, or portion thereof, shall be deemed by the Construction Manager to have reached `Substantial Enclosure'. 1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING ANp POWER A. •~ Temporary Lighting: There is a 200 amp' service at the power pole on 41e1 Avenue. Each contractor is responsible for additional service until the electrical contractor in Bid Package 3 can provide additional service. B. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain and remove temporary service for light and powder required in construction for aN trades until permanent system is in open~tion. 1. Temporary Service: Bring irrto new building temporary service arranged to serve the lighting and power requirements for the project Electrical Contractor to supply 200 amp service. 2. Temporary Lighting: a. Provide at least one (1) 200 watt incandescent Tamp, or the equivalent lighting, for each 625 sq. ft. of floor area with at least one light in each room. Provide additional lights in corridors and stairwells as necessary to provide adequate illumination. Furnish 01500-1 all light bulbs for the temporary lighting system throughout the duration of the project. B. C. D. b. Provide maintenance service for all temporary lighting faalities including lamps during regular working hours. Each Contractor shall negotiate with Electrical Contractor for all costs for distribution, connection and increased service size and systems required in excess of that specked. The Owner will pay for the electrical current used for temporary power. All temporary lighting and power shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. 3. Temporary Power -will be bid in Bid Package 3. a. Distribute G.F.I. power and maintain 20 amp outlets, so located to permit any part of Work to be reached with an extension cord not longer than 100 feet. This can be accomplished by assuring G.F.I. breakers or outlets at designated locations. b. Provide and maintain service in excess of that specified above at the request of other Contractors and Subcontractors. This cost is paid for by the contractor requesting the service. c, Provide and maintain power to the construction office once moved ' into the building. 4. As soon as the permanent power and lighting systems can be safely energized as determined by the Construction Manager, they may be used ' for temporary light and power, subject to the following conditions: a. The systems are restored to original condition as required to , comply with the Specification requirements and warranty period. b. Permanent power and lighting systems shall be utilized during the construction without commencement of material or fixture ' warranties. c. The electrical contractor shall provide and maintain service ' needed for building temporary heat. d. Each Contractor shall fum'rsh and maintain portable cords, lamps ' and connectors for the above-described temporary facilities in orcder to complete Contractor's work. Each Contractor may be required to supply their own electrical power, i.e. portable ' generator, until footings and foundation walls are installed. e. Each Contractor shall reimburse Electrical Contractor for all costs ' for distribution, connection and increased service size and systems required in excess of that specified above. f. Each Contractor shall provide supplemental lighting for their Work ' 01500 2 1 i 1 1 when natural lighting is not adequate. g. If any Contractor requires additional temporary power or lighting, they shall provide it as part of the base bid. h. The Owner will pay for the electrical current used for temporary power. i. All temporary lighting and pourer shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local codes and regulation and with utility company requirements. j. Electrical contractor to test all cords as required by OSHA and color code cords required or destroy cords as needed. 1.04 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING A. Prior to substantial enclosure: 1. Temporary endosures for the contractors work, i.e. concrete, brick and masonry work, fuel and equipment necessary for heating materials incorporated in the Work and for protection of the Work is the responsibility of the party pertorming the work. 2. Fuel, equipment and method of heating shall be satisfactory to the authorities having jurisdiction. See requirements in technical Spedf~ations for environmental conditions to be maintained. 3. The concrete contractor will be responsible to supply and install insulated blankets to keep the ground from freezing and protecting stabs from freezing and as required in the specifications. B. After substantial enclosure: 1. The Owner shall provide sufFcient temporary heating as required for finishes. 2. The Owner shall provide temporary ventilation as required to eliminate condensation, dry out the Work, and to allow the Work to proceed. 3. The Owner shall provide fuel for temporary heat. 4. Under no dreumstances shall any item of air handling equipment be operated without Construction Manager and Owner permission for temporary heat or ventilation place. If the unit is used before construction is completed, the filters shall be replaced as needed and before the building is accepted by the owner at no cost to Owner. This set of filters shall not be considered as the spare set of filters specified. 5. The temporary heating system shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. 1.05 WATER 01500-3 A. Each contractor is responsible to provide their own water until the plumber can supply the service. Each contractor is responsible to provide their own hoses, barrels, etc. as required for water usage. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall ma' in water at all times for use by all trade contractors. Temporary water meter shall be suppli~liy owner and installed by CH3-15-1.~ Ad~~~ f I(/Ql~ 1.06 FIELD.OFFICE AND TELEPHONE-----~~- - --~----~ A. The Construction Manager shall provide an on-$ite cx~truction office, (i.e. existing space) for the use of the Owner, Architect, and themselves. Limited use of these facilities will be offered to Contractors. B. Contractors requiring field offices and telephones will need to coordinate location of office with the Construction Manager. C. It will be each Contractors responsibility to arrange and pay for telephone service. D. All Contractor electrical and telephone connections to on-site construction office trailers shall be accompilshed without overhead wiring. 1.07 TOILET FACILITIES A. The Construction Manager will arrange for temporary toilet facilities for , Contractor use. The contractors will not use any of the Owner's public or private facilities. 1.08 DUST AND FUME PROTECTION A. Each contractor shall provide and maintain a protection as may be required to prevent dust and/or fumes from migrating. Each oontrador is also responsible for cleaning areas that have been contaminated be contractor actions, i.e. finished areas. 1.09 WEATHER PROTECTION A. Each Contractor shall provide and maintain protection as may be required to complete his work in accordance with the Construction Schedule until such time that substantial enclosure is obtained as defined in 1.02 of this Section. This shall include protective coverings and enclosures, heaters, fuel, required attendants, and removal upon completion as speaf~ed. B. CH2-03-1 shall provide, maintain and remove the following items if required by project conditions. CH3-04-1 will take over protection of openings of floors, walls, and ladders once they start in the area. Also, temporary enclose openings once masonry is completed with 5/8° plywood and poly. 1. Use plywood and mark for temporary enclosed openings. Use plywood and mark the floor openings and protect floor ends until masonry contractor has walls up past 42'. 2. Temporary plywood doors at designated building entrances, as it relates to concrete openir~s, i.e. Stair C. ' 01500.4 1 I 1 1 3. Contractors requiring the removal of temporary enclosures to perform their Wor1c shall be responsible for removal and replacement immediately upon completion of work in that area. 4. CH2-03-1 Concrete Contractor to supply temporary ladder andlor stair and fall protection barricades at all stair openings. 5. CH3-04-1 Masonry to keep site graded and compacted as needed for use and access to yours and other trades working, see section 00300 for other trades responsibilities, l.e. roof CH3-07-1 snow removal. C. Each Contractor shall be responsible for properly covering and protecting finish work and removal and cleaning of snow and ice from work surfaces until the date of Substantial Completion for their contract. D. Each Contractor shall arrange for snow removal for their . ' 1.10 REMOVAL 1 I 1 I A. Each Contractor shall completely remove their own temporary materials and equipment when their use is no 1or~ger required. B. Each Contractor snail clean and repair damage they have caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facil'~ties. C. Each Contractor shall restore existing ~ facilities they have used for temporary services to their specified or original condition. END OF SECTIbN 01500-5 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' SECTION 01513 - DEINATERING -- BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' 1.01 SURFACE WATER ' A. Bid Division CH1-02-1 shall excavate, grade and level the project in a manner which will reduce the entrapment of surface runoff of precipitation to a minimum. Where excavations retain precipitation due to their configurations, Bid Division ' CH1-02-1 shall provide and maintain the necessary dewatering equipment. He shall pay all fuel and maintenance costs. ' B. Excavations by otte=r Trade Contractors work which become flooded by surface runoff shall be dewatered by that Trade Contractor who is doing the work. C. Dewatering methods shall be designated to discharge the water in a manner consister-t with kx~i regulation. Water shall not be discharged across neighboring lands. Review dewatering plans with the Architect and Owner. 1 1.02 GROUND WATER A. Bid Division CH1-03-1 shall be responsible for the removal of ground water which ' enters the excavated areas as necessary. B. Others who require excavations below this level shall provide their own ' dewatering. C. Refer to the soil exploration report. Ground water levels are subject to fluctuation due to weather, seasons of the year, and other natural causes. ' END OF SECTION 01513-1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 07520 -SAFETY -BID PACKAGE 8 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. Safety is the responsibility of each individual Contractor. Each Contractor shall comply with all local safety ordinances and OSHA regulations and requirements while performing the Work B. Each Contractor is required to submit bound Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the Construction Manager, to be used for reference only, prior to transporting the materiaUchemical on site. In addition, it is the responsibility of each Contractor to maintain an accessible MSDS file for their employees, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers that are on site. C. Each Contractor shaA submit evidence of an Employer Safety Program that complies with cun+ent OSHA regulations and requirements prior to beginning any contract Work. ' D. The Contractor and their Subcontractor(s), Sub-subcontractor(s), and suppliers shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of the pubNc and of ' workers on the job, and to prevent accidents or injury to any persons, on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the Work is being performed. The Contractor and their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractor(s), and suppliers shall comply with ' Federal or State OSHA regulations and all other laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations relative to safety and the prevention of accidents. E. The Contractor shall designate a. responsible representative at the job site as a ' Safety Representative who shall be responsible for the promotion of safety and prevention of aociderrts, and shaft enforce all applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and standards pertaining to safety and prevention of accidents. ' CM3-04-1 Masonry to take over barricades and protection once they start in the area. F. Trade Contractor CH2-03-1 Concrete, Rough Carpentry will be responsible to ' install all barricades, protection and maintenance at staircases, wall edges, window openings as it pertains to concrete, wall openings, floor openings. During construction where a fbor area is exposed install and maintain barricades unfit ' wails go up. Install and maintain temporary ladder to all stair areas including mezzanine. Supply and install fire extinguishers throughout the project. ' Trade Contractor CH3-Q5-1 Steel, Miscellaneous Metals is responsible for their own protection. Each trade contractor is required to instal{ barricades, protection and fire ' extinguishers as needed to protect the worker and keep the building watertight. Also, to help maintain existing barricades when profiedion is taken down during your operations. G. To promote a safe site Minnesota OSHA has partnered with us to perform consultations on a quarterly or as needed basis. ' END OF SECTION 01520-1 1 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01545 -PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK -BID PACKAGE 3 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. Contracton3 shall consider protection of the finish work of prime importance. Care shall be taken by contractors not to damage completed work of other contractors, and to provide adequate protection for their awn completed work. B. When moving men and/or materials across floors, grades, roofs or other vulnerable surfaces and through existing areas, the contractor doing the moving ' shall provide adequate surface protection to prevent damage to existing surtaces. END OF SECTION 01545-1 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01570 -TRAFFIC, ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY PROTECTION BID PACKAGE 3 -COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Each Contractor shall be responsible to maintain traffic, environmental and safety protection rules, regulations and measures as required by the EPA, OS!•IA and other state and local governing agencies. 1.02 TRAFFIC PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall arrange for flagmen, berric:ades, etc. to maintain proper traffic flow if required by the Contractors operations. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any street closures or traffic control devices required to complete the contract work. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY PROTECTION A. Contractors shall complete the work in the most expeditious manner with the least disruption to traffic, environmental and existing school. Equipment shall have proper mufflers, back up warning alarms and all other safety features as required for safe operation. B. Contractors shall take ail necessary steps required to protect the Owner's staff, employees, visitors, public and surrounding buildings while completing the work. C. Each Contractor shall conform to aA environmental regulations and laws established by the EPA and other state and local governing agencies. END OF SECTION 01570-1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 07 S80 -PROJECT SIGNS -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Construction Manager shall provide orre general information sign displaying the name of the Project, Owner, Architect and Construction Manager. ' B. The Construction Manager will provide temporary on-site informational signs: ' 1. As requin3d by codes, laws and n:gulatory agencies. 2. To identify key elements of the construction facilities as instructed by Owner or Construction Manager. ' C. No other signs other than identification signs on o~oas, shall be displayed by any Contractor. ' D. Contractors shall provide their own safety signs as required to be in compliance with safety rules and good practice. END OF SECTION 01580-1 ' DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 09600 -MATERIAL AND EQUIPIiAEN7 -BID PACKAGE 8 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 NEW MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ' A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall: ' 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standarcfs. 2. Comply with sizes, makes, types and qualities specified or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer. ' B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: ' 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. ' 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sixes and gauges, to be interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind sha11 be identical by the same ' manufacturer. ' 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or spedfied shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing by the ' Architect/Engineer. C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is ' designed or is specified. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS ' A. When the Contract Documents require that installation c~rrrply with manufacturers' printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, inducting tvuo ~ copies to the ' Architect/Engineer. ' B. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the site during installation, until completion . C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with ' such instructions and in corri'onnity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Project Team for further instructions. ' 2. Do not proceed with such Work without clear instructions 01600-1 t D. Perform Work in accorr! with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any ^ preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically .modified or exempted by the Contract Documents. ^ E. Finish contractor shall anticipate floor and wall prep to bring surtaces up to finish standard and meet manufacturers specification section requirements 1 03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ' A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with the Short Term Construction ^ Activities Plan. Coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the site 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturers' original ^ containers or packaging, and with identifying labals intact and legible. 2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with ^ the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and to assure that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods which will ^ prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ^ A. Store products in accord with manufacturers' inspections, with seats and labels intact and legible. ^ 1. Store products sut~ect to damage by the elements in weather tight enclosures. ^ 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturers' instructions. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to. assure that the products are maintained under specified conditions, and are free from damage or deterioration. C. Protection After Installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove the coverings when they no longer are needed. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products List: 1. Before commencing Work, submit to the Project Team a complete list of major products proposed to be used, with manufacturers' and suppliers' names, product names, model numbers, and, where applicable, names of installing subconhactors. 01600-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Contractor's Options 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard. 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named, which complied with the specifications. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal", Contractors must submit requests fpr substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. 4. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option. C. Substitutlons: 1. There are no substitutions. END OF SECTION 01800-3 ' DIVISION 7 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01610 -ACCESS, DELIVERY ~ STORAGE -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUAABIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 ACCESS ' A. Contractor vehicle parking and location of Meld offices and storage trailers require prior approval of the Construction Manager. ' 1.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Contractors receiving deliveries to the site shall request a 24hour nofu~ of ' delivery from suppliers. Contractors receiving deliveries shall ensure that their personnel are at the site to receive deliveries and property store same. B. Bidders of Divisions for supply only divisions shall give 48 hour notice to the Construction Manager so proper arrangements can be made for unloading. ' C. Any Contractors or Bid Division suppliers not giving proper notice shall reimburse the Contractors at the site or be backcharged accordingly for unloading and storage of said materials. ' D. All Contractors shall limit storage of materials in the building. Delivery of material shall not be made to the project site until the job progress permits delivery and the ' schedule calls for it. E. All storage areas and locations requir+a prior approval from the Construction Manager. ' F. Each Contractor shall move any stoned material or equl ent under their control pm , as directed by Construction Manager, when it interferes with the operation of the ' Owner or other Contractors at no additional cost to the Owner, Construction Manager or other Contractors. ' G. Contractors shall obtain and pay fpr additional storage and work areas needed for operations. 1 1 1.03 PROJECT ADDRESS A. The project address for deliveries is: City of Columbia Heights Public Safety Center 825 - 41'~ Avenue NE Columbia Heights, MN 55421 END OF SECTION 01610-1 I DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01700 -CONTRACT CLOSE-0UT - SID PACKAGE 3 I CbLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 DESCRIPTION I A. Each contractor shall comply w~h requirements stated in the Contract Documents for procedures in closing out the Work. ' 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION PROCEDURE A. The procedure for substantial completion and final inspection as outlined in I Section 00700, Article 9 shall be followed. B. Each Contractor shall be allowed thirty (30) calendar days from the date of receipt I of the Architect's inspection report to complete the items on both their list of items to be completed or corrected and the Architect's inspection report. Contractors failing to perform in accord with these time parameters will be subject to the provisions of the General Conditions, and the Owner will have the right to carry I out the Work in need of connection and/or completion, the cost of which will be deducted from the Contractor's contract amount. ' C. By the act of signing the Certificate of Substantial Completion prepared by the Construction Manager and' or Architect, the Contractor represents that they have: ' 1. Reviewed the Contract Documents, 2. Inspected their Work for compliance with the Contract Documents, 3. Completed their Work in accord with the Contact Documents, and all pertinent submittals. I D. They further represent that: I 1. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owners representative and are operational, 2. Their Work is comple~d and ready for final inspection. 1.03 CONTRACTORS' CLOSE-0UT SUBMITTALS A. Upon Substantial Completion, the Contrac~r shall submit the following to the Owner through the Construction Manager. I 1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities, including Cert~cates of Inspection, I 2. Warraniles and Bonds, 3. AIA Document G706 -Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and I Claims, 01700-1 4. AIA Document G706A -Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, 5. AiA Document G707 -Consent of Surety to Final Payment, 6. AIA Document G704 -Certification of Substantial Completion, 5. Record Drawings 7. All test reports, material certifications, etc as required by the Health Department, City Officials, etc. as specified in the Contract Documents, 8. Completed and certfied Form IC-134, Withholding Affidavit for Contractors, la. Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Rate Determination. 1.04 OWNER INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING A. Each Contractor shall instnux~ the Owner or Owners designated staff in the proper operation, use and maintenance of all materials, finishes, equipment and systems installed or furnished by the Contractor. B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals far the equipment to the Architect through the Construction Manager. Submit 2 copies, unless otherwise spedfied. The manuals shall be neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, pages tabbed and indexed. All material shall be printed or typewritten, and individual pages shall be set into plastic page covers. The manuals shall contain the following information. 1. Complete operating instructions and recommendations for the type of fuel and other materials to be used in or with the item. 2. Manufacturers complete data sheets 3. Complete deaning instruction inducting recommended cleaning materials. 4. Complete lubrication data and schedules 5. Maintenance data, repair and adjustment data inducting manufacturers instructions. 6. Parts list with numbers, recommended parts to stock and nearest parts depot and service organization. 7. Assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, mechanical diagrams and installation diagrams and instructions. Special Tools. Provide special tools normally furnished wfth equipment which are ' required for maintenance purposes such as wrenches for door losers. 0700-2 1 C. Owner instn~ction and training will be scheduled by the Construction Manager. ' Contractors will have all subcontractor representatives and factory and equipment supplier repl~serrtatives present at these meetings as required to pnrvide complete operating and maintenance instructions. ' D. Refer to individual sections of the Work for additional operating and maintenance instruction requirements. ' 1.05 REBAtES ' A. All utility rebates are to be fumed over to the Owner. Each Contractor shall supply the Owner with the necessary information and assist the Owner in obtaining rebates. 1.06 FINAL APRLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Each Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accord with the ' procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. ' END OF SECTION 1 01700-3 DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01710 - DUIYIPSTERS, CLEAN-UP, CLEANING AND FINAL CLFJIN-UP BID PACKAGE 3 - COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER ' 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. Each contractor shall remove, dispose, dean and maintain the buildings and site during the progress of their work, and at the completion of their Work, so the Owner can do a weekly rough sweep of the site. ' B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their portion of final cleaning requirements. ' 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each Bid Division Contractor will be responsible for clean up of his and his subcontractors debris rubbish containers overspray and other similar items , , , , resulting from his operation on a daily basis. ' B. Each Bid Division Contractor will be responsible to relocate material as the Construction Manager requires. ' C. Conduct cleaning and disposal open~tions to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws. D. Failure by the Contractor to dean up properly and remove material off-site will ' result in one or more of the following actions: 1. The Construction Manager wilt dean up Contractor's debris and badcd~arge the Contractor for the work involved. 2. Whatever other action(s) the Construction Manager deems necessary to ' insure that the project is kept safe and dean. E. Each Contractor is responsible for providing their own trash oorrtainers and/or durnpsters. Each Contractor shall provide regular timely monitoring of the containers and/or dumpsten3 to maintain appropriate timing of removal, hauling, disposal and replacement of dumpsters. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT ' 1.01 CLEANING PRODUCTS ~ EQUIPMENT A. Use only those cleaning materials that wiN not create hazards to health or ' property, and which wNl not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer.af the surface material to be leaned. C. Use leaning materials only on surfaces recommended the deani material by ng manufacturer. D. Each Contractor shall provide their own leaning equipment. 01710-1 E. Each Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner, the Construction Manager and the refuse hauler regarding dean-up. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEAN-UP A. Ead~ Contractor shall execute periodic housekeeping to keep their Work, the site t and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. ' B. Each Contractor is financially responsible for their own dean-up operations. Clean-up must be timely as well as thorough in order to meet safety regulations and permit other Contractors to perform without hindrance from dirt and debris. ' The Construction Manager will coonlinate project housekeeping, and take appropriate steps to maintain dean working conditions. Contractors failing to meet housekeeping requirements will be badccharged for services arranged by ' the Construction Manager. C. Each Contractor shall retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing ' maximum access, not impeding traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials. D. At least weekly, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris , and waste material from site. 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from contradAr's activities will not adversely affect the work of others. ' 3.09 FINAL CLEANING A. Each Contractor shall remove all debris from the finished building and site. B. The Owner shall pertorm final building dean-up. ' C. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, each active Contrader shall conduct an inspection of exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work ' areas, to verify that the entire Project is dean. E. Prior to completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection comply with the following: 1. Remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipmenrt, machinery, scrap, debris, and waste. ' 2. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances; and polish transparent and glossy surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. 3. Remove wastQ and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction fadlities , for the Project and from the Site. 01710-2 1 F. Exterior and Site Final Cleaning 1, Inspect all exterior surtaxes and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, ' smudges, and any other foreign matter. 2. Remove all splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. ' 3. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no cost to the Owner. G. Interior Final Cleaning 1. Inspect all interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. ' 2. Remove all splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. 3. Remove paint droppings, stains, spats, and dirt from finished surfaces. ~' H. Clean glass inside and out. I. Surtaxes requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish ' recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. J. Plumbing, Heating, Ventilation Final Cleaning ' 1. Plumbing fixtures shah be sterilized, washed and cleaned. ' 2. Unit ventilators, radiation, cornectors, registers aril grilles and other mechanical work in finished spaces shall be washed, vacuumed, dusted and otherwise leaned as necessary to remove all stains, dust, and dirt. ' 3. Filters for air handling equipment shall be replaced or thoroughly cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. ' K. Electrical Equipment and tight Fixtures Final Cleaning ~- 1. Electrical devices, switches, outlets, lenses and grilles, fixtures, bulbs, and other electrical equipment in finished spaces shall be washed, vacuumed, dusted and otherwise cleaned as necessary to remove ail stains, fingerprints, dust and dirt. 2. All burned out lamps shall be replaced. ' 3.04 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY Should the Owner ocarpy the Work or any portion of the Work prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance of the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final ' leaning shall be as de#ermined by the Construction Manager in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contact. ' END OF SECTION 01710-3 1 ' DNISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01720 -RECORD DOCUMENTS -BID PACKAGE 3 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SAFETY CENTER 1.01 DESCRIPTION ' A. The Construction Manager will maintain a set of Record Documents at the site including the following: ' 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orcier and other Modifications to the Contracts 5. Written Instructions 6. Approved Shop Drawings ~. 7. Product Data and Samples 8. Field Test Records 9. Construction Photographs 1.02 RECORD D RAWINGS ' A. During the course of construction. each Contractor shall record any and all installation information that differs in size, dimension or type from that shown on the Construction Documents on a single set of construction documents which are ' to be fumed over to the Construction Manager to serve the purpose of compiling as-built drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract dose~ut, and as a condition of final payment, each Contractor shall deliver Record Documents, as indicated in 1.02A above, in neat, dean and dry ' condition, to the Construction Manager, for delivery to the Owner. B. Each Contractor shall accompany his Record Document submittal with a transmittal letter in duplic~tte, containing: 1. Date ' 2. Project designation 3. Contractor's name and address 4, Bid Division name and number ' 5. Title and number of each Record Document 6. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative ' END OF SECTION 01720-1 1 1 Ill. Approved Substitutions for Architectural Work; A~ „~ ~ ~~~19 r©g --- ~ - -_~. -_~-_ ~-.- _. _ - - , a roved substitutions are made with the understanding of the submitting party that each Bidder, ~~rub-bidder, ~ ' These pp duct! manufacturer and material supplier in submitting a request for substitution agrees that if the proposed material, pro or equipment is approved and subsequently used in the Work, the proposer shall assume all costs incurred on account of j additional work and changes required to incorporate the material, products or equipment into the Work, including all j ' such work and changes performed under other contracts. Each Bidder shall include sufficient sums in the Bidder's Bid to -- ~ - -~ - . cover such costs. ~ ~~ - -- --- ~- These approved substitutions are made with the understanding of the submitting party that each biddm, sub-bidder, manufacturer and material supplier in submitting a request for substitution agrees that if the proposed material, product or equipm~nt~is approved and subsequently used in the Work, the proposer shall assume all costs incurred on account of additional work and changes rcquircd to incorporate the material, products or equipment into the Work, including all such work and changes ~ ~3d~t lase~8ntracts• Each Bidder shall include sufficient sums in the Bidder's Bid to ' cover such costs H4$ u 1 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: a. Concrete masonry units (CMOs). b. Reinforced concrete masonry. c. Decorative concrete masonry units. 1 d. Face brick. B. Products fumished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Section 033000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structure) frame, installed under Section 051200 -Structural Steel Framing. C. Products installed, but not fumished, under this Section: ' 1. Cast stone trim, fumished under Section 047200 -Cast Stone Masonry. 2. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, fumished under Section 055000 -Metal Fabrications. 3. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Dn~nrings: For reinforoing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" C. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units and colored mortars. D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. 1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. ' E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. ' F. Shop Drawings: For the folkxnring: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforoing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." G. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Face brick, in the form of streps of 5 or more bricks. ' 3. Special brick shapes. 4. Pigmented mortar Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 5. Weep holes and vents. ' 6. Acxessories embedded In masonry. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 -1 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample subm'dtals and to demonstrete aesthetic effects. 1. Build sample panels for typ(cal exterior wall in sizes approxknately 48 inches long by 48 inches high. 2. Incorporate the following into sample panel: a. Window condition. b. Veneer ties. c. Cavity wall weeps. d. Include asealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mock-up. e. Include through wail flashing installed fora 24 inch length in comer of exterior wall mods-up appro~amately 16 inches down from top of mock-up, with a~ 12 inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). Include an end dam condition. f. Include decorative-faced concrete masonry un'ds on one face of interior unit masonry wall mockup. g. Include cast stone masonry units. 3. Clean 12 of exposed faces of sample panel with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted sample panel from the elements withweather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panel is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of sample panel is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Arohitect in writing. b. Approval of sample panel does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents contained in sample panel unless such deviations an: specifically approved by Arohitect in writing. 6. Approved sample panel may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion and is approved in writing by Architect. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If uniLg are not stored in an enclosed ' location, cover tops and sides of statics with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cemenfitious materials on elevated platforms, under ever, and in a dry location. Do not use ' cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. ' D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platfomrs, under cover, and in a dry bcation or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. , E. Store masonry aooessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. ' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or ' frost. Do not build on frozen substretes. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with coldweather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 2 OF 12 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER _ _ '~ Specifcation Section ~ ~~ -' "Manufacture -- - Product and Comments 042000 - Unrt Mason Keene build' rode Cavity D ina a Ma ' 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~' g P ~s g Assemblies __.. ___....._~_. _..__Dri Wall '1-~Qry~~d SN~,s~i~1'~io it-~ ~I~ Lq~OQ --•---- h 2.1 --•------- - MANUFACTURERS ' A. Standard CMU: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Aggregate Industries; Concrete Products Division 2. Amcon Block and Precast, Inc. 3. Anchor Block Company. 4. County Materials Corporation. ' 5. Oldcastle Architectural, Inc. 6. Approved Substitution. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUS) ' A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90. ' 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average netarea compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless indicated otherwise. C. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2500 psi. ' 2. Dens'dy Classification: Normal weight. 3. Pattern and Texture: a. Standard pattern, ground finish. Lay in 1/3 bond unless indicated otherwise. 4. Cokes: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full premium Dolor selection. ' 5. Style: Standard pattern, ground finish. (~ Colors may be selected from any of the 24 Available 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: As specified above. 1 ,~ chor Block "Burnished Block~Color Selections" sampll III~`"~colors except Midnight Black. Other manufactures are to ' ' 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS [provide a selection from a~~similar number of colors: A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractors option, complying with ' B. requirements below. Masonry Lintels: Made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforoing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. ' 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as fellows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished ' brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would resuR in sawed surfaoES being exposed to view. ' B. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average netarea compressive strength of 3000 psi minimum. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g per 30 square inch per minute when tested per ASTM C67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested per ASTM C67 and is rated "not ' effbresced:' 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 - 3 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4. Size (Nominal Dimensions): 4 inches wide by 4 inches high by 12 inches long, 4 inches wide by 4 inches high by 8 inches long, 4 inches wide by 8 inches high by 8 inches long, and 4 inches wide by 2-2/3 inches high by 4 inches long. Other sizes indicated on Drawings may be field-cut or manufactured. a. Lay in 1/2 bond. 5. Colors: a. BRICK ONE: Glasgow Blend SX A 08-08 Dart Text with darkest greys removed. b. BRICK Tll1~: IGngsport Reds Dart-Text A 8X. 6. Manufacturer. The Belden Brick Company or approved substitution. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather constnxxtiion. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Blue Circle Cement: Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation: Lafarge Mortar Cement. D. Masonry Cement: Not Alkrnred. E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar • pigmerrts, all complying with specified requiremerrts, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 1) Capital Materials Corporation: Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. 2) Glen-fiery Corporation: Color Mortar Blend. 3) Holcim (US) Inc.: Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 4) Lafarge North America Inc.: Eaglebond. 5) Lehigh Cement Compariy: Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144. 1. For joirrts less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of Dolor necessary to produce required mortar Dolor. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelereting admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of ' composition indicated. I. Water: Potable. 2.6 A. REINFORCEMENT Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grede 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvan¢ed, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187 inch diameter. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 4 OF 12 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187 inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187 inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches on center. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated comer and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors spectf'~ed in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with 8 subpan~graphs below, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Hot-Dip Galvan¢ed, Carbon-Steel VKre: ASTM A82; with ASTM A153JA153M, Class B-2 coating. ' 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653JA653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvan¢ed after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A1.53/A153M. ' B. Wire Ties, General: Unless indicated otherwise, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8 inch Dover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. ' C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.188 inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. ' 2. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053 inch thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 3. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting Into dovetail ' slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face. D. Partition Top anchors: 0.097 inch thick metal plate with 3/8 inch diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of ' tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins. Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A153JA153M. ' F. Adjustable Masonry Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but rest tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, ' and as fellows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-pound force load in both tension and compression without deformir~ or developing play in excess of 0.051nch. 2. Screw,Attached, Masonry Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, and ' slotted holes for inserting wire tie. p. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections from 0.067 inch thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187 inch diameter, hat-dip galvanized steel wire. d. Acceptable Products: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division: D/A 213. ' 2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.: No. 213 Wire Veneer Anchor. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: HB-200. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 - 5 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Rubberized-~-sphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to ahigh-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.: Peel-N-Seal. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing: CCW 705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O Wal Division: Dur-O-Barrier. d. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grece & Co.: PemwA-Barrier Wall Flashing. e. Heckmann Building Products Inc.: No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. f. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Textroflesh. g. Polyguard Products, inc.: Polyguard 400. h. Polytite Manufacturing Corp.: Poly-Barrier Self Adhering Wall Flashing. B. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9 inch centers. C. Metal Drip Pans /Edges: Prefinished metal complying with Section 076200 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Fleshings: Specified in Section 076200 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Fleshings: Flashing manufacturers standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A Compressible Filler. Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain laterel stability in masonry wall. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic rooFng feR compying with ASTM D226, Type I (No.15 asphalt felt). D. WeepNent Products: Use the following, unless indicated otherwise: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton, 1/4 to 3/8 inch diameter, in length required to produce 2 inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. Use only for weeps. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free reining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrede within the wall cavity. 1. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity, 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep. b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged. c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.: Mortar Break. b. Arohovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O Wal Division: Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.: Mortar Net. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 6 OF 12 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.10 INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IV, closed-cell product extruded with an integral skin, (INSUL-1) as specified in Section 072100. ' 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner. Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing ' mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: ' a. Diedrich Technologies, inc. b. EaCo Chem, Ina c. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless indicated otherwise. ' 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to Portland cement and lime. 3. Add cold~nreather admixture (if used) at same rate for mortar that will be exposed to view, ' regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar Dolor is consistent. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. Minimum compressive strengths at 28 days: a. Type M: 2500 psi; for masonry in contact with earth and walls below grade. b. Type S: 1800 psi; for exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls, 1 brick veneer, cast stone masonry, and for other applications where another type is not indicated. c. Type N: 750 psi; for interior non-load-bearing walls. Do not use for brick veneers. ' C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. 1. At Face Brick: P9210 Shale by Prism Pigmerrts 2. At Decorative Masonry Units: Gray with Rheopel additive. 3. Interior Masonry Units: Standard gray mortar. ' ~D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not indicated otherwise, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured per ASTM C143/C143M. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-drnren saws; provide clean, sharp, unshipped edges. Allow units to dry before Iaying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. ' B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 square inches per minute when tested per ASTM C67. Alk~nr un'ds to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 - 7 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COWMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.2 TOLERANCES ' A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. ' 2. For bcation of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For kxs~tion of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or ' mince 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Joints: 1. Do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum ' thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less- than-half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless indicated otherwise, lay exposed masonry in running ' Mond; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. C. Bond Pattern for Brick: Unless indicated otherwise, lay exposed brick in running bond. ' D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, buiki in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidy with mortar, unless indicated otherwise. ' F. Fill cones in hollow concrete masonry un'rZs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless indicated otherwise. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow bridle and concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fuly bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Wdh webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starling course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting coun3e on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surtaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless indicated otherwise. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless indicated otherwise. 3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the foNowing methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than 1 metal tie for 4.5 square feet of wail area spaced not to exceed 36 inches on center horizontaly and 16 inches on center vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 8 OF 12 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches on center vertically. ' 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (2-piece) type reinforcement. ' B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place. ' C. Collar Joints in Clay Tile Masonry: After each course is laid, fill the vertical, longitudinal joint between wythes solidly with mortar at exterior walls, except cavity walls. D. Comers: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at comers, unless ' indicted otherwise. E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: t 1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches on center. 2. Prove continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches on center. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS ' A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in hor¢ontal joints, but not less than 1 metal tie for 2.67 square feet of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches on center horizontally and 16 inches on center vertically. Stagger ties in attemate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches on center vertically. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. ' 3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar ' fins protruding into cavity. •• C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Section 071113 -Bituminous Dampproofing. ' D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced appro~amately 12 Inches on center bath ways, on inside face of insulation boanis, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit Insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions, with edges butted tightly. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry. 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT ' A. General: Install in mortar with a minimum ever of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless indicated otherwise. ' C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at comers by using prefabricated L-shaped units. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 - 9 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces steel and concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 2 inches in width between masonry and structural steel or concrete, unless indicated othennrise. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches on center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten scn:w-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete backup w(th metal fasteners of type indicated. Use 2 fasteners. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 square feet of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control~oint gaskets designed to fit standani~ sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Buiid.flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flaw. Seal joints below gn~de and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges offactory-fabricated, expansion~oint units into masonry. 3. Build fn compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installatlon of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel IiMels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-sae units and 24 inches for block,sae units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless indicated otherwise. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 -10 OF 12 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES t COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Install flashing as follows, unless indicated otherwise: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through wall flashing on sloping bed of ' mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and tum up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. ' 3. Install metal drip pan edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wail. Stop flexible flashing 1/4 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. ' 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/4 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. ' C. Install reglets and Hailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be buiR into masonry. D. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar anchored into substrate and Dover with sealant. E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: ' 1. Use specfied weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches on center, unless indicated otherwise. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply ~ with configuration requirements for cavity ' drainage material in Part 2. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections. and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done ' at Contractors expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 and Level 2 special inspections per the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verfied compliance of grout spaces and of gredes, s¢es, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. ' D. E Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5,000 square feet of wall area or portion thereof. Cla Mason Unit Test: For h t f it id d ASTM C67 . y ry eac ype o un prov e , per . F. Concrete Masonry Unit Prism Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C140. ' G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion SpecifK;ation): For each mix provided, per ASTM C780. H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C1019. 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 042000 -11 OF 12 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.14 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as Work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and~rush hand~:leaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied per manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surtaces. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 2. Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 -12 OF 12 PHASE THREE -.BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 047200 . CAST STONE MASONRY ' PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast stone trim Including the following: ' a. Window sills. b. Datestone. ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast.ooncrete building units Intended to simulate natural cut stone. ' B. Wet Cast Concrete Products: 1. Wet Casting Method: Manufactured from measurable slum concrete and vibrated into p a mold until It becomes densely consolidated. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and Installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchon3ges if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: ' 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 6 inches square in size. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qual'fied manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required un'ds. 1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute. ' B. Testing Agency Qual'~ications: An Independent testing agency qualfied per ASTM E329 for testing i ind iceted, as documented per ASTM E548. C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar Ingredients of a uniform quality, Including color, from one manufacturer for each cementttious component and from one source or producer for ' each aggregate. E. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. ' 1. Build mock-up of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Comply with requirements of Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 047200 -1 OF 5 CAST STONE MASONRY COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coorclinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry Work to minimize the need for on~ite storage and to avoid delaying Work. B. Padc, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wkfe-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might ceuse staining. Move cast stone units, tf requir+ed, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cest stone units on wood skkis or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, undercover, and in a dry location. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested per ASTM C114. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C33; gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C33, gradation as needed to produce required textures and cobra as needed to produce required cast stone colors. E. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A240/A240M, ASTM A276, or ASTM A666, Type 304. 2.2 CAST STONE UNITS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Artstone Company. 2. Architectural Ornamental Castings, Inc. 04'1200 -Cast Stone Masonry MarcStone ti _ 3. Edwards Cast Stone Company. ~ Cast Stone Units Q,ofl~,~~ ~~ jy1 ~'' i-__!__ N _M7__y'_ 1 4. Stonco Concrete Products. -' « ~~"~ 5. Thunderstone, LLC. 047200 -Cast Stone Masonry Stoneworks 6. Approved Substitutions. Cast Stone Units ~,t ~(d~ ~ ~r~l9laj_ )" B. Provide cast sfione units complying w~h ASTM C1364 using wet cast method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing per ASTM C666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C1364. C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on exposed surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless indfcated otherwise. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless indicated otherwise. D. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from Indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. CAST STONEMASONRY 047200 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. ' 4. Locafion of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on ' unformed surfaces. 5. Sills: For sills 4 feet in length and smaller, provide seamless units. E. Cure units as follows: 1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 peroent relative humidity and ' temperature of 100 degrees F for 12 hours or 70 degrees F for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a. No fewer than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 degrees F or above. ' b. No fewer than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 degrees F or above. c. No fewer than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 degrees F or above. d. No fewer than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 degrees F or above. ' F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. G. Colors and Textures: Natural gray. ' H. Size: Nominal 4 inch by 6 inch , in locations and profiles indicated. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS ' A Provide mortar materials that comply with Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. ' C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix. Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, Type S. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329. 1. Acceptable Products: . a. Blue Circle Cement: Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation: Lafarge Mortar Cement. F. Masonry Cement: Not Allowed. G. Aggregate for Mortar. ASTM C144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. ' 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. H. Water. Potable. 2.4 ACCESSORIES ' A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M, and hot- dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A123/A123M. B. Dowels: Round steel bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A615/A615M, 12 inch ' diameter, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A123/A123M. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 047200 - 3 OF 5 CAST STONEMASONRY COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies for mortar mixes. B. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining dents, accelerators, n~taniers, water- repeilent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admbtures, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Do not use calcium chbride in mortar. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. C. Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. 1. For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Empty an independent testing agency to sample and test cast sione units perASTM C1364. 1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Set cast stone as ind'~cated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned per established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless indicated otherwise. 1. If not indicated, set units with joints 3/8 to 1/2 inch wide. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concceled flashing into mortar joints as units are set. E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless indicated otherwise. H. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at bcatwns indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS . PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints ' before applying sealant, unless indicated otherwise. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet,l/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. ' C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with ' adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1M6 inch, except due to warpage of units within tolerances spedfied. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. ' B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved San~les, complying with other requiremenrts, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as Work progresses. ' 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. ' 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying deaners; remove deaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by budtet~nd-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic deaner applied per manufacturer's written ' instructions. ' END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 047200 - 5 OF 5 CAST STONE MASONRY ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A Section Includes: ' 1. Structural steel. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Grout. B. Related Sections: ' . 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed stn~cturel steel. 3. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for [steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame] [miscellaneous steel fabrications] [and] [other metal items] not defined as structural steel. 5. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs:' 6. [Division 09 painting Sections] [and] [Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings"] ' for surface-preparation and priming requirements, 7. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel. ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges:' ' B. Seismio-L~d-Resisting System: Elements of structural~steel frame designated as "SERB" or along grid lines designated as "SERB" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. ' C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A6/A6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded buiR-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. ' 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches. D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected . Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in signficant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the SeismicrLoad-Resisting System and which are indicated as ' "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. . 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Performance Requirements: 1. Connections: Provide details of[ simple shear] connections . required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by strudural~teel fabricator[, including comprehensive englneeNng design by a qualified professional engineer,] to withstand loads indicted and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. a. Select and complefie connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. ' NEW FACILITY 051200 -1 OF 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER b. Use [LRFD; data are given at factored-load level] [ASD; data are given at service- load level]. 2. Moment Connections: Type [PR, partially] [FR, fully] restrained. 3. Construction: [Moment frame] [Braced frame] [Shear wall system] [Combined system of moment frame and braced frame] [Combined system of moment frame and shear walls] [Combined system of braced frame and shear walls] [Combined system of moment . frame, braced frame, and shear walls]. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Subrri~ttal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drewings. ' 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. . 5. Identify members and connectbns of the seismicdoad-resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. For structural~teel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural design data [signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for theft preparation]. D. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint [whether prequallfled or qualified by testing] [qualified by testing], including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. E. Qualification Data: For qualified [installer] [fabricator] [professional engineer] [testing agency]. F. Welding certificates. G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. H. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysts. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, hjgh-strength bolt nut~nrasher assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. . 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout J. Source quality-control reports. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 OF 11 NEW FACILITY ' ~ ~ COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1.5 4UALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Five years of experience in steel fabrication on similar sized ~ projects. B• Installer Qualifications: Five years of experience in steel installation on similar sized projects. ' C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified per AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement [P1] [P2] [P3] or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Quai'rfications of Shop Painting Applicators." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural ' Welding Code -Steel " 1. Welders and welding operators performing Work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAVII~S and ' FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. ' 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 orA490 Bolts:' 5. AISC Steel Construction Manual. I ' F. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct meeflng at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 -Project Management and Cooniination. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel ' members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace .damaged materials or structures as directed. ' B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturers labels intact 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owners testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. ' 2. Clean arxi relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning grid lubricating ASTM F1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. ' 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction ' without delaying Work. ~ Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1 NEW FACILITY 051200-3 OF 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content~plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] [50] percent. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: 60 percent. 2. Channels, Angles[, M] [, S]-Shapes: 60 percent. 3. Plate and Bar. 25 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 5. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. 6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. C. W-Shapes: [ASTM A9921A992M] [ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50] [ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50] [ASTM A913/A913M, Grade 50]. D. Channels, Angles[, M] [, S]~Shapes: [ASTM A31i/A36M] [ASTM A5721A 572M, Grade 50] [ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50] [ASTM A913/A913M, Grade 50]. E. Plate and Bar. [ASTM A36/A36M] [ASTM A5721A572M, Grade 50] [ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50]. F. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A588/A588M, Grade 50. G. Cofd-Formed Hollow Structurel Sections: ASTM A500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing. H. Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A847/A847M, structural tubing. I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: [Standard] [Extra strong] [Double-extra strong]. 2. Finish: [Black] [Galvanized] [Black except where indicated to be galvanr~ed]. J. Steel Castings: ASTM A216/A216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. K. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668/A668M. L. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon- steelwashers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325, compressble-washer iype with plain finish. B. High~Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts[ or tension-control, bolt-nut washer assemblies with spli'ned ends]; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy- hex carbonsteel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washere wfth plain finish. 1. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain finish. C. Zno-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and' Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structurel bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [Hot-dip zinc coating] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating] [Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating]. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 OF 11 NEW FACILITY 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325, compressible washer type with [mechanically deposited zinc coating] [mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy-coated] finish. D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F1852, Type 1, [heavy-hex] [round] head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. ' 1. Finish: Plain [Mechanically deposited zinc coating]. E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, Type B. ' F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F7554, Grade 55, weldable] [ASTM A354] [ASTM A449] [ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50] [ASTM A36/A36M]. 1. Configuration: [Straight] [Hooked]. ' 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-]hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A3BM carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain [Hot-d1p zinc coating, ASTM A153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically ' deposited zinc coating, ASTM 6695, Class 50]. G. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F1554, Grade 55, weldable] [ASTM A354] [ASTM A449], straight. ' 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-]hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153/A153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. H. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A36/A36M] [ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B7] [ASTM A354, Grade BD] ' [ASTM A449] [A 572/A572M, Grade 50]. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy ]hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: [ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened] [ASTM A36/A36M] carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153/A153M, Class Cj [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 50]. i. [Clevises] [and] [Turnbuckles]: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, ' Grade 1035. J. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1030. K. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A708, Grade 1018. ' L. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer of loads and alkniv hortcontal movement perpend'~cular to plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint. ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compl'~ance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-0esign Product: Subject to compliance with n~uirements, prrnride [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amsoot Structural Products Corp. b. Fluorocarbon Company Limited. ' c. R.J. Watson Bridge 8 Stnxtural Engineered Systems. d. Seismic Energy Products, L.P. 3. Mating Surfaces: [PTFE and PTFE] [PTFE and mirror-finished stainless steel]. 4. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than [0.03] [0.04] [0.06] [0.06] [0.10] [0.12]. ' 5. Design Load: Not less than [2,000 psi] [5,000 psi] [6,000 psi]. 6. Total Movement Capability: 2 inches. 1 NEW FACILITY 051200 - 5 OF 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer. Compy with Section 098000 -Painting and Coating. [Section 099600 - HFgh- Performance Coatings.] B. Primer. SSPC-Paint 25, (Type I] [Type II], zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. C. Primer. SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, [Type 1] [Type II], zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. D. Primer. SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer. E. Primer. Fabricator's standard lead- and chnxnate-free, nonasphaRic, rust-inhibiting primer compying with MPI#79 and compatible with topwat. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20] [ASTM A780]. 2.4 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrink~e-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for appl'~cation and a 30-minute working time. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Masterflow 713 Plus by BASF Building Systems. b. Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, inc. c. 1107 Advantage Grout by Dayton Superior. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate per AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steal Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Camberstructural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel per ASTM A6JA6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assemby. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. ~• B. Them~l Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermaly cut edges to be welded to compy with requirements in AWS D1.11D1.1 M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, [mechanically thermal cut, ]or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accuretey finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted per [SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning] [SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning] [SSPC~P 3, "Power Tool Cleaning]:' F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors per AVIIS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's wrdten instructions. G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and strejght members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 OF 11 NEW FACILITY ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches on ' center unless otherwise Indicated. I. Holes: Provide holes r+eyuired for securing other work to structurel steel and for other Work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.[ Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.] 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other Work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts per RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of join specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened [Pretensioned] [Slip crittcal]. ' B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M[ and AWS D1.8/D1.8M] for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. ' 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.7 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel shell. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. Black Rodc Column, Inc. b. Dean, George H., Inc. ' c. Dean Lally L. P.; Fire-Trol Division. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on testing ' perASTM E119. . 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: [4 hours] [3 hours] [2 hours] [As Indicated]. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING • ' A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to ' 2. a depth of 2 inches. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high~trength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag , or flux deposits. Prepare surtaces per the following specifications and standards: ' 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off Blast Cloning:' 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." ' 5. SSPC-SP 14JNACE No. 8, "IndusMal Blast Cleaning NEW FACILITY 051200 - 7 OF 11 • STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 6. SSPC-SP 8/NACE No. 3, "Commerc~l Blast Cleaning " 7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning:' 8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." 9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling:' . C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer per manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish lt from first. D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by hot-dip process to structural steel per ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize [lintels] [shelf angles] [and] [welded door frames] attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to pertorm shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel Work is beipg fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with Contract Documents. C. ~ Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be[ tested and] inspected per RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A480 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop,uvelded connections will be tested and inspected per AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and the following inspection procedures, attesting agency's option: 1. Uquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E708; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspections ASTM E164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shopanrelded shear connectors will be tested and inspected per requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either aless-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on addltional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, per requirements in AWS D1.11D1.1 M. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8 OF 11 NEW FACILITY ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 F>(AMINAT10N A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other ' embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been con+ected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION 1 A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and per AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base [Bearing] [and] [Leveling] Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surFaoe of plates. 1 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug tighten [Pretension] anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly ' finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.[ Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.] C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel ' Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent 1 contact with members. Perfom~r necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where ind'~cated. ' F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection[ unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits Fn AWS D1.11D1.1M]. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be ' enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors per AWS D1.1/D1.1M and 1 manufacturers written instructions. NEW FACILITY 051200 = 9 OF 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts per RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened [Pretensioned] [Slip critical]. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.iM[ and AWS D1.8/D1.8MJ for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specfications, weld quality, and methods used in conecting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs[ where Indicated], back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes . without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturers written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire- resistance rating indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect [field welds] [and] [high-strength bolted connections]. B. Bolted Connections: Boned connections will be[ tested and] Inspected per RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected per AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected per AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, attesting agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E965. b. Magnetic. Particle Inspection: ASTM E 09; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors per requiremerrts in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either aless-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to shear connectors. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, per requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with Contract Documents. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer fs damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching upshop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC~P 2 hand-tool cleaning ar SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -10 OF 11 NEW FACILITY 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS . PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099000 -Painting and Coating. NEW FACILITY END OF SECTION 051200 -11 OF 11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1 ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 A. 2 1 . A. 1 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 ' A. B. 1.5 ' A. B. 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Roof framing. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Performance Requiremerrts: 1. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. Welding oertificat~. Qual'~'ication data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Prefect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Clark Steel Framing. 2. Dal~lncor, Inc. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 4. Approved Substitutions. B. Provide produces specified in this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet Conform to minimum requirements of 1996 AISI standards: 1. Grade: Fy=33 KSI minimum. 2. Coating: G60. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 054000 -1 OF 2 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 - EXECUT1ON 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing per AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing members in 1-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Erection Tolerances: Install cold~ormed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space ind'nridual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. EXTERIOR NON~OAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. 3.2 3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint per ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. ' 2. Vanity and countertop brackets. 3. Steel weld plates and angles. 4. Miscellaneous steel trim. 5. Metal ladders. ' 6. Metal bollards. 7. Loose steel lintels. ' 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pertom~ance Requirements: 1. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movement resuRing from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surtaoe temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of ' materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrk:ation and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Shaw anchorage and aa~ssory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts speafied for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data .. signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. '~ B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturere of topcroats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcroats. 1.4 4UALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: 1. Fabricator and erector shall each have a minimum of 5 years experience in performing Work of this Section. Fabricator and erector shall submit neBUmes showing compliance with Work ' experience requirement to Architect for written approval prior to starting Work. 2. Prior to start of Work, fabricator shall submit certifications to Architect and structural engineer for written approval that they are registered and approved by building official, per IBC Chapter 17. Fabricator shall participate regularly in third party quality control program of AISC ' and be registered and approved by building official per IBC Chapter 17. Fabricator shall also be acceptable to structural engineer. 3. As an option to 2 above, Contractor may pay for full-time inspection during fabrication of ' Project steel. This inspection shall be conduced by Owner's inspection company (at fabrication plant). In addition, fabrication plant shall also be acceptable and approved in ' PHASE THREE -'BID PACKAGES 055000 -1 OF 4 METAL FABRICATIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER writing by structural engineer, Architect, and building official. Do not proceed with steel fabrication Work until Architect has provided final written approval. 4. Fabricators and erectors shall submit current welding certfications, for fabrication plant and field welding, to the A/E for written approval prior to start of welding. If re-certfication of welders is required, retesting shall be Contractor's responsibility. B. Welding Qualifxs~tions: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS D1.1ID1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in this Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel per the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchon~ges, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such fiems to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specfied in this Section but required for Work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for ' installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. For metal fabrications exposed to view in completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. C. Reinforoing Bars for Bollards: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed. D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F436 hardened carbon steel. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Type 304 stainless~teel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM 8633, Class Fe2n 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer. Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Zino-Rich Primer. Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Epoxy Zino-Rich Primer CM113/19. ' b. Carboline Company: Carbo¢inc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings: Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited: Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zino-Rich Primer. e. PPG Arclirtectural Finishes, Inc.: Aquapon Zino-Rich Primer 87-670. ' ~ f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.: Tneme-Zinc 90-97. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high~incrdust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in ' steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout ' complying with ASTM C1107. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain stnictural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accuratey. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. ' 2. Weld comers and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections wRh hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners ' where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integraly welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches on center. B. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate Bose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of s¢e indicated for ' openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. C. Backing Plates: Steel plates in connection with studs and furring necessary for engaging and ' fastening of wall hung items at locations indicated on Drawings, or as necessary. .. 1. Backing plates: Securely weld to structure, heavier than 20 gauge; self-drilling screwed or bolted to 20 gauge and lighter steel stud supporting members in required position. Shop ' prime finish. D. Vanity Top Brackets and Countertop Brackets: 3/8 inch by 2 inch bent steel support brackets as detailed. Pre-drill holes. Profile as indicated on Drawings. Prime paint finish. ' E. Metal Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Elevator Pit Ladders: Comply with ASME A17.1. 2. Space siderails 16 inches apart, unless indicated otherwise. ' 3. Steel Ladder Construction: Flat bar sidereils, with 3/4 inch diameter steel bar rungs fitted in centerline of siderails, plug welded, and ground smooth on outer rail faces. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung. ' F. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055000 - 3 OF 4 METAL FABRICATIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated bel~v for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B) and Items Indicated to Receive ZincrR~h Primer: SSPC- SP 6MACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning:' b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Poorer Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Fleld, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. a. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollarcls in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -.BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 055100 AAETAL STAIRS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inductee: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concxete-filled treads. 2. Industrialtype stairs with steel grating treads. ' 3. Steel pipe railings attached to metal stairs. 4. Steel pipe handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. ' 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering anaysis by a ' qualfied professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. ' a. Uniform Load: 100 pound-force per square foot. b. Concentrated Load: 300 pound-force applied on an area of 4 square inches. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to ad concurrently. d. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulfing from railing loads in addition ' to loads specfied above. e. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. ' 3. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand effects of gravity loads and the following bads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. a. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 1) Uniform load of 50 pound-force per square foot applied in any direction. ' 2) Concentrated load of 200 pound-force applied in any direction. 3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. ' b. Irrfill of Guards: 1) Concentrated load of 50 pound-force applied horizontally on an area of 1 square feet. 2) Infili load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified ' professanal engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualfications: Fabricator of products. ' PHASE THREE =BID PACKAGES 055700 -1 OF 6 METAL STAIRS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel per the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other Work so that they will not encroach on ' required stair width and will be within fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless indicated otherwise. For components exposed to view in completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postoonsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled content is not less" than 25 percent. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500 (cold formed) or ASTM A513. D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011 M or ASTM A1008/A1008M. E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510. F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011 M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 1. Cold-rolled steel, complying with ASTM 1008/A1008M is acceptable. 2.3 ABRASIVE NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integret abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. METAL STAIRS 055100 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance wlh requirements, provide the following product: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.: Type 9511 or approved substitution. 2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 3 inches wide without lip. ' B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integrel or applied to un'~ts, as standard with manufacturer. C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. ' 2.4 FASTENERS A. Generel: Provide zinc~lated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM 8633 or ASTM F1941, ' Class Fe2n 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grede, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grede A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; ' and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grede 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A583; and, where ' indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs. D. Machine Screws: ASME 818.8.3. ' E. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select per AWS specifications for metal alby welded. ' B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 -Painting and Coatings. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. ' 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. ' E. Bituminous Paint: Cold~applied asphaR emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout ' complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concxete Materials and Properties: Comply with requiremerds in Sedion 033000 -Cast-in-Place ' Concrete for normal weight, air-entreined, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless indicated otherwise. H. Welded wre Fabric: ASTM A185/A785M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless indicated othennrise. ' 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal freming, hangers, struts, dips, bredcets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join camponents by welding unless indicated othenNise. ' 2. Use connections fat maintain structure) value of joined pieces. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drein. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055100 - 3 OF 8 METAL STAIRS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Preassembied Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly marls units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless indicated otherwise. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surtaces. D. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grein separation or otherwise impairing Work. E. Form exposed Work with accurate angles and surtaces and streight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless indicated otherwise. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for the following: a. Type 2 welds at Commercial class stairs. b. Type 3 or 4 welds at industrial class stairs. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where ' possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless indicated otherwise. locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous freming members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and starts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within fire-resistance-rafied stair encbsure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair cromponents before installing masonry. 2.7 B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet unless indicated othennrise. 2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized~steel sheet at exterior stairs. 3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld .brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 5. Shape metal pans to include~nosing integral with riser. 6. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. METAL STAIRS 055100 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 7. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform freming. a. Smooth Soffd Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits. C. Metal Bar-Gn3ting Stairs: Form treads and platfom~s to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from pressure-locked steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16 inch bearing bars at 15/16 inch on center and crossbars at 4 inches on center, NAAMM designation: P-11-4 (1x3/16) STEEL. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms from pressure-locked steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 12 inch in least dimension. 3. Surface: Serrated. 4. Finish: Galvanized. 5. Acceptable Products: a. Brovm-Campbell Company: No. 19W4 Series. b. McNichols Co.: Wheels n' Heels. c. Approved Substitutions. 2.8 STAIR RAILINGS A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 -Pipe and Tube Railings. 2.9 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architecturel and Metal Products" for recommendationsfor applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Galvan~ing: HotiJlip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Interior Stabs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless indicated otherwise. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specfication No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055100 - 5 OF 6 METAL STAIRS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless indicated otherwise. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be bunt into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connek~ions accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior un'ds that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Fiek! Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, GeneraP' Article. G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or levelir~ nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding. cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless indicated otherwise. 2. Pack grout solidy between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS A. Comply with requirements of Section 055213 -Pipe and Tube Railings. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded ' areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching upshop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair ' galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION , 1 METAL STAIRS 055100 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 i I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube railings. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Perfomnance Requirements: Provide reilings capable of withstanding effects of gravity loads and the folkwing loads and stresses within limit and under conditions indicated: 1. Delegated Design: Design reilings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional~engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Generel: In engineering reilings to withstand structure) loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of reiling materials based on the following: a. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. b. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.85. 3. Structural Performance: Design reilings to withstand effects of Brevity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: a. Handreils and Top Rails of Guards: 1) Uniform load of 50 pound-force per foot applied In any direction. 2) Concentrated load of 200 pound-force applied in any direction. 3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. b. Infill of Guards: 1) Concentreted load of 50 pound force applied horizontally on an area of 1 square foot. 2) Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. a. Temperature Change: 120 degn~ F, ambierrt;180 degrees F, material surfaces. 5. Control of Corrosion: Prevent gahranic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from din:ct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drewings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachmerrts to other Work. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear reilirtg member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of reiling system, made from full~¢e components, including top reil, post, handreil, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a. Show method of finishing and connecting members at intersections. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For qualfied professional engineer. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055213 -1 OF 6 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualiftcations: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel:' C. 1.5 A. 1.6 Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel per the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserf$, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, B. rolled trade names, stains, discoloretions, or blemishes. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as ' supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON ' A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preoonsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. ' B. Tubing: ASTM A500 (cold formed) or ASTM A513 unless indicated otherwise. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A3BM. ' 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: ' 1. UngaNanized-Stee{ Railings: Plated steel fasteners compying with ASTM 8633 or ASTM F7941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for ainc coating. 2. Hot-0ip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zincrcoated steel fasteners compying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 for zinc coating. , B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. , PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -2 OF 6 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing componenrts and for attaching them to other Work, unless otherwise Indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E488, conducted by a ' qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zino-plated to comply with ASTM 8633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select per AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. ' B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI~S. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust~ontent paint oomptying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with pairrts specified to be used over it. 1 D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 -Painting and Coating. E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer ' complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zino-rich primer. F. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Water based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134. G. Bi#uminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emu~ion complying with ASTM D1187. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, nonoom~sive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior ' and exterior applications. I. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, rronshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project arts to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is ' recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Generel: Fabricate railings to compy with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member ' sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minim¢e field spl~ing and assembly. ' Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. ~ Use oonnect'wns that maintain stnrctural value of joined pieces. ' C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. ' D. Fonn Work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude wathr. Provide weep ' holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055273 - 3 OF 6 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS COWMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld a[I around at oonnedions, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minim¢e distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 1. Nonwekied Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabrrcate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as detailed or by flush radius bends. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wail returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other Work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to trensfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent brecket or felting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anctwrage devices for connecting railings to croncrete or masonry Work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorege devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open- sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearence of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable ff they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearence, including color and texture, of railings. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.7 STEEL FINISHES - A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. ' a. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. b. Comply with ASTM A153/A153M for hot~lip galvanized hardware. 2. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. ' 3. Fill vent and drein holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized reilings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ' ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughy clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. ' D. For nongalvan¢ed steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. ' E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surtaces to comply with SSPC- SP ti/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning:' F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surtaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specfication No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099000 -Painting and Coatings. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joirrts. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of reiling componerrts that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means ' without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with t rake of steps and remps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. ' D. Adjust reilings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for pem~anently connecting railing ' components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 055213 - 5 OF 6 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Welded Connections: Use Comply with requiremerrts performed in shop or in field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturers written instructions. B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturers written instructions. C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by oondtbons, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bon to metal supporting surfaces. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorege, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements or toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. B. Galvan¢ed Surfaces: Clean field welds, boned connections, and abraded areas and repair galvan¢ing to comply with ASTM A780. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prated finishes of railings from damage during constriction period with temporery protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial , Completion. END OF SECTION PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 ' PART 1-GENERAL SECTION 055300 METAL GRATINGS 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal bar gratings. ' 2. Formed-metal plank gratings. 3. Metal fremes and supports for gratings. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of wigstanding effects of ' Brevity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: a. Fbors: Uniform load of 250 pound-force per square foot or concentrated load of 3000 pound focee, whichever produces the greater stress. b. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 pound-force per square foot. c. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 100 pound-force per square foot. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: ' 1. Formed-metal plank gratings. 2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 3. Paint products. ' B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of gratings. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by qual'fied professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 METALS A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. ' 3. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011 M, structural steel, Grade 30. 5. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/Af353M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055300 -1 OF 3 METAL GRATINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.2 FASTENERS ' A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainlesszteel fasteners for exterior use and zingplated fastieners with coating complying with ASTM 8633, Class Fe2n 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless~teel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and lass , required. B. Anchors: Provide anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times load imposed when installed in , concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by qualified independent testing agency. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS , A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds In steel, complying ' with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to , support indicated loads. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. ' D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS ' A. Pressure-Locked Steel Grating: 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 7/16 or 1/2 inch on center. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4 inches minimum. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch. , 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches on center. 5. Traffic Surface: Serrated. 6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 ounces per square ' foot of coated surface. B. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars wfth bars of same size and material as bearing bars. ' C. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS ' A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and , weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar ftems. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded ' anchors. ~ Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches on center and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long. , METAL GRATINGS 055900 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior, at Hose Stair Tower. ' 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. ' B. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot~lip process complying with ASTM A123/A123M. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncroated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPG ' SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Spectiffication No. 1: ' Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, ' alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not ' weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that have been hot-dip galvanzed after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. ' C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. ' E. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. 1. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. F. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed anus with same material as used for shop painting to cromply ' with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. G. Galvanized Surtaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 055300 - 3 OF 3 METAL GRATINGS ii it PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and Hailers. 2. Video monitor blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Lumber. DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grede lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2[, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated per AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX)]. . 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. Application: Treat rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. identify fire-retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Application: Treat rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 081000 -1 OF 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. For items of dimension lumber s¢e, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent ' maximum moisture content of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: ' 1. Mioaed southern pine, No. 3 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA. 3. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. ' D. For blocking and Hailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other Work. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS ' A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plygged, fire- ' retardant treated unless indicated otherwise, in thickness indik~ed. 1. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch nominal thickness unless indicated otherwise. 2.6 FASTENERS ' A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relatnie humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A ;with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where ' indicated, flat washers. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Construction Adhesives: 1. Surebond SB-400 as manufactured by Surebond, Inc. (Perimeter Trim System). 2. W-602 as manufactured by Macro Adhesnes (Perimeter Trim System). ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ,. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit ' rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate Hailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requiremenffi for attaching other construction. B. Provide blocking as indicated and as required to support facng materials, fudures, specialty items, and trim. C. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: ' 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches on center with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire blodk concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at Bch floor level, at ceiling ' line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches on center. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solkt wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 inch nominal thickness. ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 square feet and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block txmoealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet on center. D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of ' member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preseroafnre treated lumber. ' 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. F. Securey attach rough carpentry Work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, ' complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICUs International Building Code. ' G. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make t'Ight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other Work. Form to shapes indicated and ' cut as required for true line and level of attached Work. Coordinate locations with other Work involved. ' B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Reuss bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless othennrise indicated. C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous ' flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.3 PROTECTION ' A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. ' B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. ' END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 061000 - 3 OF 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 061600 SHEATHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test Response Character tics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air ciroulation. ' Provide for air circulatbn around stacks and under coverings. . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL 1 A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD ' A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency aoceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' C. _ Appl'rc~tion: Treat plywood, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. ' B. Kiln-dry material aflsr treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Identify fire-ntardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification markir~ of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Tnsst plywood, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing (SHEATHING 22): Manufactured per ASTM C1177, glass mats both sides and long edges, water resistant core, non-cAmbustible per ASTM E136, Type X per ASTM C36 ' when tested per ASTM E119. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 061600 -1 OF 3 SHEATHING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Performance Requirements: a. Racking Strength (URimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not less than 540 pounds per square foot, dry. b. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 pound-force, parallel. c. Humidfied Deflection (ASTM C1177): Nat more than 1/4 inch. d. Permeance (ASTM E98): 23 perms. e. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.56. f. Flame Spread: Ma~dmum of 0 per ASTM E84. g. Smoke Developed: Mabmum of 0 per ASTM E84. 2. Ma~amum framing spadng is 16 inches on center. 3. Panel S¢e:1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide. 4. Edges: Cut square. 5. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 6. Acceptable products: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation: DensGlass Gold Sheathing. b. National Gypsum Company: e2XP Sheathing. c. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.: GlasRoc Sheathing. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing (SHEATHING~O): Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a saft~pray resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117. 2.7 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIERS A. Building Paper -Roofs: ASTM D266, Type 1 (No. 30) asphalt-saturated organic feR), unperforated. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized- asphaRcompound, bonded to ahigh-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CCV1~705-TWF 'fhru-Wall Flashing by Carlisle Coatings 8 Waterproofing or comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace 8 Co. -Conn.: Vycor Plus Self- Adhered Flashing or Vycor V40 Weather Barrier Strips. b. MFM Building Products Corp.: Window Wrap. c. Polyguard Products, Inc.: Polyguard 400. d. Protecto Wrap Company: PS-45. B. Primer for Fle~dble Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. SHEATHING 061800 - 2 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL t A. Securely attach ~ substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for poHrer-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICUs "International Building Code" ' B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-slant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture. C. Do not bridge building expansion joirrts; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural ' support elements. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, " " APA DesigNConstruction Guide: Residential & Commercial. 1. Compy with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above. ' B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated bebw: 1. Roof Sheathing: Screw to cold-fom~ed metal framing. ' 3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers wrdten instructions. 1. Prime substrates as n~ommended by flashing manufacturer. ' 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. At ends of hoed and sill flashing turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 4. Lap flashing overweather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. ' 5. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 6. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller. ' 3.4 PROTECTION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with wither-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply oavering anmediately after ' sheathing is installed. •• B. Remove weather-resistant sheathing paper prior to application of final building materials. END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 061800 - S OF 3 SHEATHING 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS . PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ' PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior railing caps. ' 2. Standing and running trim. 3. Wood cabinets. 4. Piastio-laminate cabinets. 5. Plastio-laminate countertops. ' 8. Wood elements at stairs 7. Interior wood trim. ' B. 8. Shop finishing of woodwork. Interior architectural woodworlk includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed~within other construction before woodwork installation. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cabinet han~uvare and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large~cale details, attachment devit~, and other components. C. Samples: ' 1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and cobr, with exposed surface finished. ' 3. Plastio-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. D. Casework Samples: Unless full example of cabinet construction is requested, provide the following: 1. Comer pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joirrts between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. ' b. Miter joints for standing trim. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. E. Woodwork Qual'dy Standard Compl'~ance Certificates: AWI Quality Cert'fication Program certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualffications: Fabricator of woodwork. B. Qua1'dy Standard: Unless indicated otherwise, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." ' 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels for woodwork. 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 064023 -1 OF 5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and hum~ity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of constriction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Subject to compliance with requirements of AWI standards. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certfied by ALSC's Board of Revtew. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced. C. Wood Products: 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2.3 RAILING CAPS A. Interior Railings: Clear, kiln~lried red oak railing caps of pattern indicated. 2.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 1. Species and Grade: Red oak, Clear, NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed. 5. Veneered Material: Not allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surtaced (smooth). .. 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper oompying with LMA SAT-1. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABET Incorporated. b. Arpa IJAS. c. Forbo Arborite. d. Formica Corporation. e. Laminart. f. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces. g. Pionoite Decorative Laminates. h. WilsonArt International. i. SolidSurfacing Fabrications: Specified in Section 066116. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 1OODWORK 064023 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Section 087100 -Door Hardware. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, 601602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. 1. Acceptable Product: Standard Series 430 by Julius Blum or approved substitution. ' C. Wire Pulls: Bads mounted, solid metal, 4 inches bng, 5/16 inch in diameter. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, 803141 ' E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, 605091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zino- plated steel bell-bearing slides. ' 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1 HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1 HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. ' 4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide. F. Keyboard Tray. 1. Size: 14.5 inches inches deep by 5 inches wide by 14 inches to 24 inches high (adjustable). ' 2. Finish: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range.. G. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matiching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett 8 ' Company, Inc. or approved su~titution. H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. Provide where indicated on Drawir>9s. ' I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. Provide where indicated on Drawings. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide bright chromium finish that complies ' with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Specified in Section 061000 -Rough Carpentry. B. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urn-formaldehyde. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Complete fabrk~tion to maximum extent possble before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. ' 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 3. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088100 -Glass Glazing and in ' " " ' GANA Glazing Manual. For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. s B. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish: ' 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Grein Directron: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and faced panels. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. ' 5. Sem'rexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indic:atad for exposed surfaces, stained to match. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 084023 - 3 OF 5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 6. Dn~wer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same spades indicated for exposed surfaces. 7. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Coors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of solid colors and patterns, matte finish. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. D. Solid Surface Countertops: Specified in Section 066116. 2.8 ~ SHOP FINISHING A. Finish arch'~tecturei woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Badtpriming: Apply 1 coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish eats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply 2 coats to bads of paneling. C. Finish Carpentry Substrates: 1. Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3E. a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent). b. 3 Finish Coats: Interior, oil-modified, dear urethane (satin). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated Work for completion and complete Work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. B. Grade: Install woodwork to compy with requirements for the same grade specified In Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in g6 inches. Shim as required with concealed shims. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fd adjoining Work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for cxxnplete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulNength pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and dn~nrers fd openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 1. Fasten wall cebinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches on center with fasteners appropriate for anchoring to structure. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 1MOODWORK 064023 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with ' manufacturers written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. ' 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200. ' END OF SECTION ' 064023 -Interior Architectural Northern Woodwork, Inc. Millwork Supplier. Details -- Woodwork hardware per specification and ~~ J~d(Subs~i~u~+an - ---- Drawings ~ ~ t N~I4~~9 - ---- 1 I 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 064023 - 5 OF 5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ~' 1 1 I 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 066116 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid polymer fabrications indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Includes related accessories and attachments. a. Countertops with sinks, back-splashes, and side-splashes. b. Vanity tops with integral bowls, back -splashes, and side-splashes. c. Interior window stools. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: ' 1. Tensile Strength: B,000 psi per ASTM D638. 2. Flexural Strength: 7,890 psi per ASTM D790. 3. Tensile Elongation: 0.4 percent per ASTM D638. 4. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 790 5. Hardness: 56 Barcol Impressor per ASTM D2583. 6. Thermal Conductively: 7.0 Btu per square foot per degree F. 7. Water Absorption Long-term per ASTM D570. 0.4 percent, 3~ inch thick material. 0.8 percent 1/2 inch thick material. 0.8 percent 1/4 inch thick material. ' 8. Color Stability: No Change at 200 hours. 9. Wear and Cleanabil'ely: Passes per ANSI 2124.3 and 2124.6. 10. Stain Resistance: Sheets: Passes per ANSI 2124.3 and 2124.6. ' 11. Fungus and Bacteria Resistance: Does not support microbial growth per ASTM G21 and G22. 12. Flame Spread Index Less than 25. ' 13. Smoke Developed Index: Less than 25. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Dn~wings: Indicate locations, dimensions, elevations, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions, and coordination requirements with adjacent Woric. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product description, fabrication information, and compliance ' with specified performance requirements. C. Samples: Submit minimum size 6 inch by 6 inch Samples illustrating surface color and finish. Approved Samples will be retained as standarcl for Work. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company special'¢ing in manufacturing of products specfied in this ' Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualfications: Company certified by manufacturer to install products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 068118 -1 OF 4 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver components to site until areas are ready for installation. B. Handle materials with care to prevent damage to finish surfaces. C. Provide protective coverings to prevent damage or staining to surfaces. D. Store components indoors in dry heated spacs3s. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and workmanship for 10 years against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requiremerrts, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturer. 1. Acrylic Solid Surface by LG Hi-Macs. 2. Avonite Surfaces by Aristech Acrylics LLC. 3. Conan by DuPont Company. 4. Formica Solid Surtaang by Formica Corporation. 5. GbraRer by Wilsonart International. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material (S.SURFACE): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requiremerrts in ANSI 2124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 1. Provide material with minimum physical and performance properties specified beknnr. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch: Repairable by sanding or polishing. B. Countertops: 1/2 inch thick material, edge details as indicated on Drawings. Prove countertop complete with back plashes and side-splashes as indicated on Drawings. C. Vanity Tops with Sinks: 12 inch thick material molded tops in sizes indicated on Drawings, complete with bowls; edge details as indicated on Drawings. Provide tops complete with back- splashes as indicated on Drawings. D. Interior Window Stools: 1/2 inch thick material, adhesive joined with inconspicuous seams; edge details as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Adhesive: 2-part, non-porous joints, with a chemical bond type as recommended by manufacturer. B. Sealant: Manufacturer's standarc! mildew-resistant, FDA/UL recognized silicone sealant in cobr matching or clear formulations. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory~abricate components to sizes and shapes ind'~cated on Drawings and per manufacturer's instructions. SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 086118 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Form joints between components using manufacturers standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joirrts and voids. . i 1 1 i 1 C. Provide factory holes and cutouts for plumbing fittings as indicated on Drawings. D. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Route radii and contours to templates. Reject defective and Inaccurate Work. E. Thermoforming: 1. Construct matching melds of plywood sections to form component shapes. 2. Form pieces to shape prior to seaming or joining. 3. Cut pieces larger than finished dimensions. Sand edges. Remove nicks and scratches. 4. Heat entire component uniformly between 275 to 325 degrees F during forming. 5. Prevent blistering, whitening and cracking of materials during forming. F. Back-Splashes and Side-Splashes: Fabricate 1/2 inch thick material using radius cove at intersection of counters and back-splashes and side-splashes. 2.5 FINISH A. Finish surfaces uniformly. 1. Matte: Standard finish with gloss rating of 5 to 20. Z. Semi-Gloss: Gloss rating of 25 to 50. 3. Polished: Gloss rating of 55 to 80. B. Color (S.SURFACE-1): Architect will select color from manufacturers full color range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb, level, and per manufacturers instructions. B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished Work. Keep oomponer~ts clean when making joints. C. Vanities and Countertops: 1. Install plumb, level, true, and straight. Shim as necessary using concealed shims. 2. Attach top securey to base unit or support brackets per manufacturers printed instructions. 3. Seal between wall and component with manufacturers recommended silicone sealant. D. Integral Sinks: 1. Provide solid surface materials bowls and sinks with overflows in kx~tions indicated on Drawings. 2. Secure sinks and lavatory bowls to tops using manufacturer's recommended sealant, adhesive, and mounting hardware to maintain warranty. E. Keep components and hands clean during installation. F. Plumbing connections required to sinkslbowls are specified in Section 224000 -Plumbing Fixtures. G. Window Stools: 1. Install window stools full length of window, set securely into place using only concealed fasteners and manufacturer's approved adhesive. 2. Window stools shall be plumb, true and level. . 3. Provide minimum 1/8 inch expansion gaps on both sides of window stools, sealed with manufacturers approved sealant. 4. Ease edges and sand smooth. ... .. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 066116 - 3 OF 4 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains. B. Replace stained components with new materials. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or replace damaged Work that cannot be repaired to Arch'decYs satisfaction. END OF SECTION SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 086118 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING t PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified,asphalt dampproafing. 2. Application as vapor retarder at brick cavity wall backup conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by 1 of primary materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampprooFing to be performed per manufacturers' wrrtten instructions. B. Ventilafron: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COLDAPPLIED, EMULSIFIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Blush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1. B. VOC Content: 0.25 pounds per gallon or less. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the specified manufacturers: 1. BASF Building Products: Hydrocide 600. 2. ChemMasters Corp.: Mastergard 400. 3. Henry Company: Asphalt Emulsion. 4. Kamak Corporation: Emulsion Dampproofing. 5. Tamms Industries: Dehydratine. 6. W. R. Meadows, Inc.: Sealmastic Emu~ion. ' 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. EmulsifiedAsphaR Primer. ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, eoccept diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer. B. AsphaR-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D7668, Type I. C. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by dampproofing ' manufacturer. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 071113 -1 OF 2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requiremerrts for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1. Proceed with dampprooflng application only after substrate construction and penetrating Work have been completed and unsatisfactory condtions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproof'ing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to Work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime mafierial manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; Dover with asphalt-coated glass fabric. 3.3 A. B. C. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 APPLICATION, GENERAL Comply with manufacturers written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are ind'rceted or required by Profeclt conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampprooFng. Apply dampprooflng to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior. 1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of foaling, and dawn a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install fleshings and comer protection stripping at internal and external comers, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- wide strip ofasphalt-coated glass fabric in a h~ivy coat of dampproofing. Dampprooflng coat for embedding fabric is in addltion to other eats required. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity wails. COLD-,APPLIED, EMULSIFIED,ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavlty Walls: Appy primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gallon per 100 square feet. CLEANING Remove dampprooFing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation under slabs-0n-grade. (Previously issued in Footing/Foundation Package.) ' 2. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill). (Previously issued in Footing/Foundation Package.) 3. Cavittl wall insulation. 4. Concealed building insulation. ' 5. Foamed-in-place sealant. 6. Vapor retarders. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single ' B. manuf~turer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E118. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136. C. Recycled Content: Provide glass-fiber insulation with recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. ' 1 4 WARRANTY .. . A. Warrant materials and workmanship for 1 year against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work Repair defects, or replace with new materials. faulty materials or workmanship developed ' during the guarantee period at no expense to Owner. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS ' A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Pnformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. ' B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (INSUL-1): Rigid, cellular, poystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin; formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process. ASTM C578, of type and density indicated below, with ma~amum flame-spread ' and smoke~evebped indices of 75 and 450, respectively: ... .. .. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 072100 -1 OF 5 THERMAL INSULATION COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the folowing: a. D'rversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Coming. lnsulfoam Add ~~ ~I/is/bd' Extruded Polystyrene__ d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Type IV, 1.60 pcf ,unless indicated otherwise, typically used for perimeter and cavity wall insulation. a. Thickness: 2 inches unless indicated otherwise Indicated on Drawings. b. Thermal Resistance: R-5.0 per inch. C. Unfaced, Glass-Fber Board Insulation (INSUL-13): ASTM C612, Type IA; with maximum flame- spr~d and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84, passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation.. b. Johns Marnille. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Nominal density of 2.25 pounds per cubic foot, thermal resistivity of 4.3 degrees F x h x square foal per Btu x in. at 75 degrees F. D. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation (INSUL-20): ASTM C612; with maximum flame-spread and smoke~ieveloped indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the folknnring: a. Fibrex Insulations inc. b. Isolatek International. c. Owens Coming. d. Roxullnc. e. Themtafiber. 2. Nominal density of 4 pounds per cubic foot, Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 degrees F x h x square foot per Btu x in. at 75 degrees F. 3. Nominal density of 6 pounds per cubic foot, Type II, thermal resistivity of 4.16 degrees F x h x square foot per Btu x in. at 75 degrees F. •- 4. Nominal density of 8 pounds per cubic foot, Type III, thermal resistivity of 4.35 degrees F x h x square foot per Btu x in. at 75 degrees F. 5. Fiber Color: Darkened, where Indicated. E. Foamed-in-Place Insulatia~ (INSUL-70): 2- or 3-component insulation system consisting of plastic resins and catatyst foaming agents which, when combined with compressed air, produces cold- settingfoam insulation. For use in exterbr CMU walls. Comply with the following components: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Minimum 4hour fire resistance wall rating per ASTM E119, for 8 inch and 12 inch concxete masonry units when used in standard 2 hour rated CMU. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. a. Flame Spread: 5. b. Smoke: 0. c. Fuel: 0. 3. Combustion Characteristics: Noncombustible, Class A building material. 4. Thermal Values: Minimum R Value of 4.5 per inch.at 32 degrees F 5. Water Vapor Transmission: 15:5 to 16.9 perms~n when tested ASTM C355. - Clarification in 2.1.E, install foam-in-place insulation as specifed-in locations noted-by Key Note "Q" on A2 series sheets and in precast core hatched on A7.1 Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plans. This work is by CIi3- THERMAL INSULATION ~ 072100 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES _~ 1 ' 6. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. CP Chemical Company, Inc.: Tripolymer. b. Jesco, Inc.: Rapco Foam. c. Polymaster. PolyMaster R~01. d. Taibred Chemical Products, Inc.: Core-Fill 500. e. Thermal Corporation of America: Thermoo. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' F. Foamed-in-Place Sealant (INSUL-71): Single component, polyurethane foam. For use at perimeter of window and door rough openings and where indicated. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Great Stuff Pro by Dow Chemical Company. b. Sealdte B, Type ii by Schul Internatlonal Company, Inc. c. Niversal Foam Sealant by V1f~IlsealUSA, LLC. ' 2.2 PERIMETER FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Joirrts at Exterior Curtain-1Nall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E719 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-Inch wg or ' ASTM E2307. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of floor assembly. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. AID Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. c. HiRi, Inc. ' d. Johns Manville. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. Thermafiber, Inc. ' g. Tremoo, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protec~iat Systems Group. h. USG Corporation. ' 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder (VAPOR.RET 1): ASTM D4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum pem~eance rating of 0.13 perm. ' B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pn:ssure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability ~ bond insu~tion securely to substrates Indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to ' substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.: TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco: Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. 1 1 I' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulatbn manufacturer's written instructions applicable to . products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insu~tion. Remove projections that interfere with placement. PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 072100 - S OF 5 THERMAL INSULATION COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Install caviar wall insulations as follows: 1. Install foam plastic insulation with small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches on center both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press un'ds firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. a. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with 2-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specfied in Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, , complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Seal joirrts betHreen closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, , or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved ir>to place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. 2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless indicated otherwise. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. ' a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installatbn. 3. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by freming m~nbers per the following ' requirements: a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. If more than 1 length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that produce a snug ends. b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between ' edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of ' metal studs. 5. Install board insulation where indiceted on Drawings per curtain~vall manufacturers written instructions. 6. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integrel pockets within window frames, ' spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. ' D. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system. E. Stuff glass-fiber, loose~fill insulation Into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown: ' Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling density of approximately 2.5 pounds per cubic foot. F. Install foamed-tn-place insulation with cores of concrete masonry units indicated on Drawings and per manufacturers instructions. G. Install foamed-in-place sealant at voids between door and window frames and rough openings prior to placing finish materials. Folk„nr manufacturers written instructions. , H. Installation of Vapor Retaniers: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with ' loose-fiber insulation. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over freming by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches on center. 2. Seal overiapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape per vapor- retarcler manufacturers instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetretions with vapor- retardertape. Locate joints over freming members or other solid substrates. ' THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adheshres as recommended by vapor-r~arder manufacturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders wig vapor-retarder tape ~ create an airtight sal between penetrating objects and vapor retanier. 5. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other Work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather exposures, possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of concealing Work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 072100 - 5 OF 5 THERMAL INSULATION I COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS I 1 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing-seam metal roof panels. 2. Metal soffit panels. 3. Snow guards. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requiremenffi: 1. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested per ASTM E2140. 2. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance dass indicated. a. Uplift Rating: UL 80. 3. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding effects of gravity loads and the folbwing bads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing per ASTM E1592: a. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the folbwing minimum design wind pressures: 1) Uniform pressure of 20 pound-force per square foot, accting inward or outward. b. Snow Loads: 35 pound force per square foot. c. Deflectbn Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouffi of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, comers, anchorages, trim, fleshings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled Work .. 1. Acxessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. c. Downspouts. d. Roof curbs. e. Snow guards. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Desjgn Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requiremenffi and design criteria, induding analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified prsional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Snow Retention System Calculations: Include calculation of number and bcation of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, panel length and finish, and seam type and spacing. E. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Roof panels and attachments. 2. Purlins and rafters. PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 074113 -1 OF 7 METAL ROOF PANELS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and ' penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs. F. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrenty period. ' 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Water-Tight Performance Warranty: Manufacturer's written warranty for 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. AEP -Span. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Company. 3. Centric Architectural Systems. 4. ColorKlad by RyersoMntegris Metals. 5. Firestone Metal Products, LLC. 6. innovative Metals Company, Inc. 7. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. S. PacrClad -Peterson Aluminum Corp. (074113 -Metal Rook Panels Polyguard HT Underlaymen~t se f adhearing ~e_~ ~ 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by hot~dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755JA755M. 1. ZincrCoated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. E~osed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 4. Conc~led Finish: Manufacturer's standani white or light-cobred acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Panel Slants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper badcing;1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant and: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer and complying with Section 079200. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solverrt-Release Sealant: ASTM C7311. 4. Backer Rods: ASTM C1330, Type C as specified in Section 079200. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 2 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with ' release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. ~ Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 degrees F; ASTM D1970. ' 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 degrees F; ASTM D1970. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the folkanring: a. Carlisle Coatings 8 Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. ' b. Grace Constriction Products; a unit of Grece, W. R. 8 Co.; URre. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. ' e. Owens Coming; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturers recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. ' 2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Plywood Sheathing as specified in Section 061600 -Sheathing. ' B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate. ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Freming, General: ASTM C645, cold-formed metallicbed steel sheet, ASTM A653IA653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless ' otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking firsts and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied dating. ' Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastlc, SSPC-Paint 12, dmpounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per dat Provide inert-type nondrrosive dmpound free of asbestos fibers, suffur ' dmponerrts, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 STANDINGSEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. Generel: Provide factory formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interoonnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using dncealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, amply with ASTM E1514. B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using dncealed clips located under 1 side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together. 1. Profile: Vertical-rib, structural seamed double-lodced~oint, as indicated on Drawings. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 074113 - 3 OF 7 METAL ROOF PANELS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. Material: Zino-ooated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.028-inch nominal thickness. ' a. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturers full standard colors. 3. Clips: Structural type to akxommodate thermal movement. a. Material: Stainless steel. ' 4. Joint Type: Double folded. 5. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 6. Panel Height 2 inches. ' 7. Acceptable Product: UC-6 Double Lock by Firestone Metal Products, LLC or approved Substitutron. 2.8 ACCESSORIES ' A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, ridge ' closures, clips, fleshings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise Indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. ' 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin~oam or clll laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premdded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. ' 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, ' minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to sal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, comers, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as ' adjacent metal roof panels. C. Backer Rods: Comply with Section 079200. Install backer rods under center of each panel to reduce oil canning. ' 2.9 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive uri~s•designed to be installed without penetrating metal .. ' roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, damps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Seam-Mounted, Snow-Guard Rails: Units fabricated from metal baseplate and~ored to fixed bracket and equipped with 2 bars. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SnoFence ' by S-5! or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Berger Building Products: S-Casting Snow Rail System. 2) Polar Blox: Standing Seam Snowguard. ' 3) Riddell & Company, Inc.: Snobar. 4) Srrow Management Systems: Clamp On Snow Fence. 5) TRA-Hoge, Inc.: Clamp-0n Snow Fence. b. Brackets and Baseplate: Aluminum. ' c. Bars: Aluminum, clear anodized. 2.10 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturers standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indiks~ted performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. ' METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 4 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES t COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Provide panel profile, including major nbs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that ' provide a tight seal and prevent meal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recrommendations in ' SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION ' A. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof sheathing on entire roof surface. Attach with substrate-board fasteners. 1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes ' with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 2. Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated construction. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpuriins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel ' support members and anchorage per metal roof panel manufacturers written instructions. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION ' A. Self,Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at kacations indicated on Drawings, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 ' inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underiayment within 14 days. B. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. ' C. Install flashings to cover underiayment to comply with requirements specfied in Section n7t3200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. ' 3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from save to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. ' B. Thermal Movement Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Point of Fixdy: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at ridge. 2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. ' C. Install metal roof panels as follows: 1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 square feet in presence of factory-authorized representative. ' 2. Field cutting of metal panels by torah is not permitted. 3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 4. Provide metal closures at each side of ridge and hip caps. 5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all ' openings. 6. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel Work proceeds. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 074113 - 5 OF 7 METAL ROOF PANELS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 7. End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger ' panel end splices to avoid a 4-panel splice condition. 8. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. D. Fasteners: ' 1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to interior. E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of Work securely in place, using ' manufacturer's approved fasteners per manufacturers' written instructions. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized- asphait underiayment to each contact surface, or by other pemnanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicted and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicted or, if~not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Scei side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing~eam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. 4. Seamed Joirrt: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized reamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are oompletehr engaged. 3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with fleshings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, sum covers, fleshings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be pemnanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 3.6 SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION A. Stop-Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to metal roof panels with adhesive, sealant, or adhesive tape, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 6 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUM$IA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on sbpe and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of ' alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage a factory~authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not ' comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional worts with specified requiremerrts. ' 3 9 CLEANING . A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are ' ' installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer s written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 074113 - 7 OF 7 METAL ROOF PANELS I ' PART1-GENERAL SECTION 075113 BUILT UP ASPHALT ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Built-up asphalt roofing systems. ' 7.2 DEFINITION A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equivisoous temperature, the temperature at ' which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75 centipoise for mechanical application, within range of plus or minus 25 degrees F, measured at mop cart or mechanical spreader immediatey before application. ' 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' 1. Roofing System Design: Provide built-up roofing system that is identical to systems that have been sucx:essfully tested by qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated per ASCE/SEI 7. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. ' B. Shop Drewings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. ' D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. ' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufac~rrrers products. ' B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system manufacturer. ' C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with fire-tit-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E108, for application and roof slopes indicated. ' D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to compy with requirements in Division 1. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owners insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer, ' and installers whose Worts interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, inducting manufacturers ' written instructions. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 075113 -1 OF 6 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 7. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. B. Special Warranty: Provide roofing Subcontractors 5-year written warranty and maintenance agreement. 1. Warranty form is included at end of this Section. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products ~ one of the following: 1. BPB America, Inc. 2. Firestone Building Products. 3. GAF Materials Corporation. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc. 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type VI, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. 2.3 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type VI, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber feR. B. GranuleSurfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D6164, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS- modified asphaR sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color. Gray. 2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when cak;ulated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). BUILT UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075113 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Fasteners: Factory~oated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance ' provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. D. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water-wom gravel or ' crushed stone, free of sharp edges. 2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS ' A. Substrate Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 12 inch think, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following]: ' a. Georgia-Pacific Corpon~tion; Dens Deck. b. Approved Substitution. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated step fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance ' provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. Poly'~socyanurate Board Insulation (INSUL-4): Felt or gloms-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation. ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 2, with maximum flame-spread of 75 and smokeifeveloped of 450 based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. ' 1. Edges: Square. 2. Long Term Thermal Resistance: 9.0 per 1.5-inch thickness. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi. ' 4. Density: 2 pcf. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other Insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to sbpes indicated. ' 2.8 ''J I 1 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid,Applied Adhesive: Manufacturers standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: Where indicated, provide 1 of the following types of cant strips: 1. Perlite insulation board, ASTM C728. 2. Cellulosic-fiber insulation board, ASTM C208. D. Cover Board: Where indicated, provide 1 of the following types of cover boards: 1. Perlite insulation board, ASTM C728. 2. Cellulosio-flber insulation board, ASTM C208. 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: 24 inch square minerel-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip- resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer,12 inch thick, minimum. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 075113 - 3 OF 6 BUILT UP ASPHALT ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous streight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck per roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install substrate boards on concrete deck surfaces. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturers written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Adhered Insulation on Concrete Deck: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as folkyws: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gallons per 100 square feet and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluidapplied adhesive. F. Mechanically Fastened Insulation on Steel Deck: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening spettified board-type roof insulation to deck type. G. Install ever boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt Dover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. install built-up roofing membrane system per roofing system manufacturers written instructlons and , applicable recommendations of ARMAMRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Applik:ation of Built-up Roofing:' B. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not ' exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday or when rein is forecast. C. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. , D. Install 4 ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle indirection to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond ' cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. E. Aggregate Surfacing: Prompty after installing and testing roofing membrene, base flashing, and ' stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 60 pounds per 100 square feet of hot roofing asphalt. While food coat is hat and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: 400 pounds per 100 square feet. ' BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075113 - 4 OF 6 ~ PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates per roofing system manufacturers written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securey at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install stripping, per roofing system manufacturers written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturers standard size per walkway pad manufacturers written instructions. 1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER END OF SECTION PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 075113- 5 OF 6 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING COLUAABIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ROOF WARRANTY , Owner. Owner's Address: ' Project: Project Address: Project No. Date of Final Acceotance: Roofino Contractor: Roofing Contractors Address: Roofino Contractor's Phone No.: Sheet Metal Contractor: This warranty stipulates that above-named Contractor(s) shall, during a period of 5 years from date of final acceptance of Work, maintain roofing systems and repair defects that result from faulty workmanship or defec- tive materials, without further cost to Owner, including replacement of wet insulation caused by such defects. F~ccluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, buildings, or buildings contents caused by acts or omissions of Owner; fire, lightning, winds with peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of elements; movement or failure of supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath roof. F~cclude from this warranty damages to building or contents. Before expiration of above warranty period, Contractor(s) shall inspect sheet metal in presence of Owner and make necessary correction of deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until necessary repair Work has been completed. ROOFING CONTRACTOR Signed: Title: Date: 1 1 1 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 075173 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , I I 1 SECTION 075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system, (Roof-2). 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin. B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D1079 and gbssary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and ' Waterproofing ManuaP for definitions of terms related to roofing Work in this Section. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base fleshings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without . failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. ' Membrane roofing and base fleshings shall remain watertight. 2. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist upl'rft ' pressure calculated per ASCE/SEI 7. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base fleshings and membrane terminations. ' 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and fastening spacings and pattems for mechanicelly fastened membrane roofing. ' 4. Insulation fastening patterns for comer, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: ' 1. Sheet roofing, of cobr specified, including T~haped side and end lap seam. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Walkway paver, full s¢e. ' D. 4ual'fication Data: For qual~ed installer and manufacturer. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Perfomnance Requirements" Article. ' 1. Submr~ evidence of compliance with perfomnance requirements. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 075423 -1 OF 8 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and ' witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. G. Researoh/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES. H. Field quality-control reports. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified fimn that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to Install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturers special warranty. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components, including roof insulation ~ and fasteners, if any, for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108, Class A; for appl'~cation and roof sbpes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by qualified testing agency. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. E. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1. 1. Meet with Owner, Arch'dect, Owners insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturers representative, deck Installer, and installers whose Work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof axessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturers written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installers personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading lim'dations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base fleshings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review govemtng regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturers name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mi~dng with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range nrquired by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterwration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 075423 - 2 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Lim'dations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condfions permit roofing system to be installed per manufacturers written Instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base fleshings, roof insulation, fasteners, roofing 1 acx~essories, roof pavers, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by installer, covering Work of this Section, including components of membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.7 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING (ROOF-2) A. Fabrio-Reinforced Thermoplastic PolyoleFin Sheet: ASTM D6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. GAF Materials Corporation. c. GenFlex Roofing Systems. d. Johns Manville. e. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics. f. Versico Incorporated. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color. Black, unless indicated otherwise. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturers standard unreinforoed thermoplastic poyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturers standard. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturers standard, of thickness required for appl'~cation. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturers standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximatey 7 inch by 'i/8 inch thick; with anchors. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 075423 - 3 OF 8 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside comer sheet flashings, T joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. Generel: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturers standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. B. Polylsocyanurate Board Insulatbn: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grede 3, feR or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturers recommended sprayapplied, low-rise, 2-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another Insulation layer. 2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III or Type N. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. 2.6 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drein bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and Hailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that naNers match thicknesses of insulation. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 075423 - 4 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 053100 -Steel Decking. 4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer ' has passed. 5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method per ASTM D4263. 6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof ' deck have been removed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation per roofing system manufacturers written instructions. Remove sharp projectans. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no Work is taking ' place or when rein is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base fleshings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rafn is forecast. ' Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing. D. Install acroustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Section 053100 -Steel Decking, per acoustical roof deck manufacturers written instructions, immediately before installation of overlying ' ~ construction and to remain dry. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturers written instructions for ' installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to coMorm to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install 2 or..more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in 2 or more layers, install ' nor>composite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulatoH for top layer. E. Trim surtace of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not 1 restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boarcls. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with ' insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of Hailers, projectans, and penetrations. G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphaR primer at rate of 3/4 gallon per 100 square feet and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 degrees F of equiviscous temperature. ' 3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. PHASE'THREE -BID PACKAGES 075423 - 5 OF 8 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners spec~caly designed and sized for fastening specified board type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation per requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classfication. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners spec~caly designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation per requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNaY' for specified Windstorm Resistance Classfication. 2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 degrees F of equiviscous temperature. 4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead,applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of fullspread insulation adhesive, fumy pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 3.4 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to n~eive roofing and install per membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturers technical personnel. C. ~ Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions ' required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by ' manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securey at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply membrane roofing wlth skle laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of ' membrane roofing and sheet fleshings per manufacturers written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Appy lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daffy and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not compy with requirements. H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securey seal membrane roofing in ' place wlth clamping ring. I. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain ' weathertightness of transltion. THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 075423 - 6 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.5 BASE FLASHING_INSTALLATION A. Install sheet fleshings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates per membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and fieldfiormed inside and outside comers with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet fleshings into the adhesive. Hotair weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet fleshings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive per roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qual~ed testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturers technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspections, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Arohitect and Owner. B. Con~ect deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and per warranty requirements. C. Clean oversp~ray and spillage from adjacent constructor using cleaning agerrts and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION .. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 075423 - 7 OF 8 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ROOF WARRANTY Owner. Owner's Addrees: Proiect: Proiect Address: Protect No. Date of Final Acceptance: Roofing Contractor: Roofino Contractor's Address: Roofinn Contractor's Phone No.: Sheet Metal Contractor. This warranty stipulates that above-named Contractor(s) shalt, during a period of 5 years from date of final acceptance of Work, maintain roofing systems and repair defects that result from faulty workmanship or defeo- five materials, without further cost to Owner, including replacement of wet insulation caused by such defects. Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, buildings, or buildings contents caused by acts or omissions of Owner, fire, lightning, winds with peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of elements; movement or failure of supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath roof. Exclude from this warranty damages to building or contents. Before expiration of above warranty period, Contractor(s) shall inspect sheet metal in presence of Owner and make necessary correction of deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until necessary repair Work has been completed. ROOFING CONTRACTOR Signed: Title: Date: 1 1 1 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 075423 - 8 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured Products: ' a. Manufactured through wall flashing. b. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed Products: ' a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. c. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requiremerrts: 1. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assembl'~es as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabricetion, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 2. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces per recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: a. Wind Zone 1: For velocity pressures of 21 to 30 pound-force per square foot: 60- pound-force per square foot perimeter uplift force, 90-pound-force per square foot comer uplift force, and 30-pound-force per square foot outward foroe. b. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal ' movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. c. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured ' product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. D~tinguish befinreen shop- and field- 1 assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identfication of maeirial, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and ' dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. ' 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge and special conditions. 1 7. Details of connections to adjoining Work. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-112 inches per 12 inches. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 076200 -1 OF 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Samples for Verif~ation: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size ' ind'~cated bek~r: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: , 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Material: Full-size Sample. D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. ' E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. ' 1.4 ~ QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal ' flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in~eniice performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Compy with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim ' installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair ' finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory~applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panet Finish: Deterioration includes the following: ' a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested per ASTM D 2244. b. ChaNdng in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested per ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. ' 2. Finish Warranty Period:' 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Firestone Metal Products, LLC. 2. Hickman Construction Products. 3. ~ Ryerson. ' 4. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. 5. Pao-Clad by Peterson Aluminum. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: 1. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying ' strippable, temporary protectNe film before shipping. 2. Use pre-finished metal for items exposed to v'~ew in finished Work. Use unfinished galvanized metal for items not exposed to view in finished Work. B. Metallio-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755JA755M. . 1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Zino-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating deeignatbn; 1 structural quality. a. For flashing and trim not exposed to view. ' 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer. AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both cobr coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. ' b. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturers standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6 mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D4397. B. Self-Adhering, High Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of sly-resisting ' polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphaR adhesive, wig release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stabiliiy: ASTM D1970; stable after testing at 240 degrees F. ' 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970; passes after testing at minus 20 degrees F. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-pound per 100 square feet minimum, rosin sized. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing ' and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self~lrilling screws, gasketed, with hex~vasher head. ' a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching cobr of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless~teel rNets suitable for metal being fastened. ' c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter, with spike with ferrule matching irrtemal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanzed) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel per ' ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc Sheet: Hot~lip galvanized steel per ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 076200 - 3 OF 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Solder For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent ' lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure~ensitive, 100 percent solids, gray poyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. ' E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant; law modulus; of type, grade, class, and use class cations required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. 2.5 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and oounterflashing p'~eces, aril compatible with flashing indicated with interlodking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. 2. Finish: With manufacturers standard color coating. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thidkness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to Itne and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within •- joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal wRh elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 2.7 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4 inch wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick B. Splash Pans: Fabricate from zinc, 0.032 inch thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.8 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external ' leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the foikniving materials: 1. Width of Coping Top of 12 inches: Galvanized steel, 0.028 inch thick. ' 2. Width of Coping Top of 13 inches to 18 inches: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick. B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from galvanized steel, 0.028 inch thick. C. Counterflashing and Fishing Receivers: Fabricate from galvan¢ed steel, 0.022 inch thick. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from galvanized steel, 0.028 inch thick. E. Roof-0rain Flashing: Fabricate from zinc-tin alkry-coated stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick. 2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 inch long, but not exceeding ' 12-foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 inch high end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from zinc, 0.032 inch thick. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of Work. ' 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerences of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by installer, listing conditions detrimental to ' performance of Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION -- A. Generel: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. ' B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorege to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches. C. Self,Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install selF,adhering sheet underiayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at 1 low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. n 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, PHASE THREE - BID PACKAGES 076200 - 5 OF 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER protective coatings, separetors, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete ' sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight perfomnance. ' Verify shapes and d(mensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat witii 2 fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. ' 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. ' 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfacers. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent ' separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of feR underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of , polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not Ins than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate indicated sheathings and substrates ' recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-0ut resistance. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. ' 1. Where .slant filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 degrees F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient , temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 degrees F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 -Joint Sealarrts. F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be sokdered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. ' 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surtaoes to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in zinc where indicated and where necessary for strength. ' 3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system per ' SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where Indicated through parapet. Continuously support ' scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over calls or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with etastomeric sealant to scupper. C. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water fk~uv. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturers written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install ' Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces per recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal ManuaP and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing ' with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 inch centers. C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist upl'dt and outward forks per recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 inch centers. D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces per rewmmendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. ' 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 inch centers. E. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge ' flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless- steel draw band and tighten. F. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fd t~htly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant. ' G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coorclinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of rooflng and other items penetrating roof. SCI with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. ' ~ 3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and excude penetrating moisture per ' SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation ofwall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000 -Unit ' Masonry Assemblies. C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 042000 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. ' 3.7 ~ _. ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indlcated and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 076200 - 7 OF 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clan finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond sucxessful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SHEET METAL WARRANTY Owner. ' Owner's Address: t Projec : ' Project Address: Project No. ' Date of Final Aoaeotance: Sheet Metal Contractor: ' Sheet Metal Contractor's Address: ' Sheet Metai Contractor's Phone No.: Roofins~ Contractor: This wam~nty stipulates that above-named Contractor(s) shall, during a period of 5 years from date of final acceptance of Work, maintain sheet metal flashing systems and repair defects that result from faulty work- ' manship or defective materials, without further cost to Owner. Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, buildings or buildings contents caused by acts or omissions of Owner; fire, lightning, winds with peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or ' other unusual phenomenon of elements; movement or failure of supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath roof. ' Exclude from this warranty damages to building or contents. Before expiratwn of above warranty penod, Contractor(s) shall inspect sheet metal in presence of Owner and make necessary correction of deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shall remain in force until ' necessary repair Work has been completed. SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR ROOFING CONTRACTOR Sioned: Sioned: ' Title: Tdle: Date: Date: PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 076200 - 9 OF 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBUC SERVICE CENTER t SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. ' 2. Penetratlons in horizontal assemblies between floor levels. 3. Penetratlons in fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design t designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration fora particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with ' modifications marked, approved by penetretion firestopping manufacturers fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturers written recommendations. ' E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 1 A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturers products per specked requirements. Manufacturers willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualfied testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 078413 -1 OF 6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed per specified requiremerrts. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: 1. AID Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. ~7. 3M Fire Protection Products. 8. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 9. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire per requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetn~tion firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01- inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Nat less than fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure d'rlFerential of 0.01 inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm per square foot of penetn~tion opening at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame~pread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM Eti4. F. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the folkwving limits for VOC ' content when cak:ulated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 gIL. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. ' 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 gIL. G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration ' firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent formirtg/damming/backing materials, including the folkyuving: a. Slag-~erool-fiber or rock~nrool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other formirtg/damming/badcing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fillers for sealants. ' 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. ' 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS ' A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. ' B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with ' intumescent material sized to fd specific diameter of penetrant. D. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pilkrivs/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. ' Where exposed, ever openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. E. Silicone Foams: MulGcomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a fle~able, nonshrinking foam. F. Silicone Sealants: Single~omponent, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated bekriv: ' 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surtaxes, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 1 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring muting before app cation, compy with penetration firestopping manufacturers written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 07&113 - 3 OF 6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting perfomnance of the Wbrk. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturers written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agerrts from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturers recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturers written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce crow-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming • •materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratir~s indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner wil! engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Worts progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do ' not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, ' despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediatety cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems comptying with specified requirements. 3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPJNG SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance ' Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems~tested and listed by UL. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. ' 3. W-Rating: Required for floor penetrations. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As requin~i to achieve rating. C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. W-Rating: Required for floor penetrations. ' 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. ' 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. 1lwRating: Required for floor penetrations. ' E. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. Firestopping for Electrical Cables: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. ~ ' 3. ' W Rating: Required for floor penetrations. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. F. Fin stopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables: 1. UL-Classfied Systems: Sys~~ns tested and listed by UL. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. W-Rating: Required for floor penetrations. ' 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes: 1. UL-Classed Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. ' 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. 1II~Rating: Required for floor penetrations. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. ' H. F(restopping for M(sceilaneous Electrical Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. ' 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. W-Rating: Required for floor penetrations. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 078413 - 5 OF 6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve n3ting. J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: Systems tested and listed by UL 2. F-Rating: 1 hour. 3. W Rating: Required for floor penetrations. 4. Type of Fill Materials: As required ~ achieve rating. END OF SECTION PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES I COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 1 I 1 1 1 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Unathane joint sealants. 3. Acoustical joint sealants. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Archidect 7 days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants per Method A, Fieki,P-ppl'red Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Append'a X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately: extend cut abng one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 4. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealarrts not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of nonoompl'rance with requirements, will tie considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color charts consisting of stns of cured sealanrts showing the full range of colors availab~ for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following inforrnation: 1. Joint-slant application. joint location, and designation. 2. Joint~ealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. D. Sealant Schedule: Submit schedule of sealant applications listing joint sealants proposed for this Work and materials to which joint sealants are specified to be applied. Obtain Architect's written approval of this sealant schedule before starting Work of this Section. E. Field~-dhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 079200 -1 OF 7 JOINT SEALANTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Quaycations: An independent testing agency qualified per ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test per SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C820 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in- peel, and indentation hardness. D. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under Sample subm'dtals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specfied by reference to this Section. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installers Warranty: Installers standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements spedfied in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturers Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomer(c joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements speafied in this Section within speafied warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of structure resulting in stresses on sealant exceeding sealant manufacturers written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. D~integration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or ottrer atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 OF 7 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into Work include products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when cak;ulated per 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant speafied, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing per ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will Dome in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Colors of Exposed Joint Scelants: Selected by Arohitect from manufacturers full range. 2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject tD compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Coming Corporation: 790. b. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones: SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecos Corporation: 890. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: SikaSil-0990. e. Tremco Incorporated: Spectrem 1. B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems: Omniseal 50. b. Dow Coming Corporation: 791. c. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones: SilPruf SCS2000. d. Pecos Corporation: 864. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.: PSI-641. f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: SikaSi~C995. g. Tremco Incorporated: Spectrem 3. C. Single-Componerrt, Nonsag, Tn~ffiaGrede, Neutral-Curing Silicone Jant Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Coming Corporation: NS Parking Structure Sealant. b. Pecos Corporation: 311 NS. c. Tremco Incorporated: Spedrem 800. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 079200 - 3 OF 7 JOINT SEAL~INTS COLUAABIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant (SENT 11): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Color: White. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems: Omniplus. b. Dow Coming Corporation: 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones: Sanitary SCS1700. d. Tremco Incorporated: Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultra. b. Bostik, Inc.: Chem-Calk 900. c. Pecos Corporation: Dynatrol I-XL. d. Siva Corporation, Construction Products Division: Sikaflex -1 a. e. Tremoo Incorporated: Vulkem 116. B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffio-Grede, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Buikding Systems: Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultre. b. Ska Corporation, Construction Products Division: Sikafiex -1a. c. Tremco Incorporated: Vulkem 116. C. Multioomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grede NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecore Corporation: Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.: PSI-270. c. Tremoo Incorporated: Dymeric 240. D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joirrt Sealar~ ASTM C920, Type M, Grede NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: .. a. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic NP 2. b. Pecore Corporation: Dynatred. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: Sikaflex - 2c NS. d. Tremco Incorporated: Vuikem 227. 2.5 . POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311. a. Bostic, Inc.: Chem-Calk 300. b. Peoore Corporation: BC-158. c. Tremco Incorporated: Tremco Butyl Sealant. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acousticel Joint Sealant (SENT-41): Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant compying with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound trensmission through perimeter joir<ts and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representatnre assemblies per ASTM E90. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Pecos Corporation: AIS-919. b. Tremoo Incorporated: Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation: SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING ' A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining: are compatible with jdnt substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers: and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. ' B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of s¢e and density to control sealant depth and othennrise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. ' 1. Acceptable Products: a. Nomaco, Inc.: Sof Rod. b. BASF Building Products: Soft Backer Rod. ' C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape n3oommended by sealant rnanuFacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rjgid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of Joint. Provide self-adh~nre tape where applicable. ' 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer. Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant~ubstrate tests and ' field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surtaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming ' ~ joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to jdnt substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to jdrrts. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated fio receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requiremerrts for jdnt configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Jdnts: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply ' with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could intertere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), existing joint sealants, oil, ' grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surtaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of devebping ' optimum bond with joint seaiarrts. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 079200 - 5 OF 7 JOINT SEALANTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER above by vacuuming or blowir~ out joints with oil#r+ee compressed air. Porous joint substrates indude the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfacress of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and fom~-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous jdnt substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of intertering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates indude the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with jointsealant manufacturers written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint~lant bond: do not alkyw spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise wouki be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with jdnt~ealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross~ectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Rernove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant moverent capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants per requirements specfied in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniforn beads of configuration indicated: to eliminate air pockets: and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess slant from surtaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 13A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with continuous bead of acoustical sealant Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and ' through penetrations. Compty with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Field Adhesion Testing: Fiek! test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed, and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. ' b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants per Method A, FiekiApplied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in ' Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately: extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. ' 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and conflgurations comply with specified requirements. ' c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine ff adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field,adhesion hand-pull test criteria. ' 4. Record test results in a field,adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test kx;ations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and ' sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by apptying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest ' failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING ' A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 1 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediatety so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 079200 - 7 OF 7 JOINT SEALANTS ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1 2 1. Hollow Metal Doors and Fremes: MI LS S . UB TTA A. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ' " Design Intent of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. ensure the 1. Section 081416 -Flush Wood Doors. 2. Section 087100 -Door Hardware B. Coorciinate approved Shop Drawings with other trades and manufacturers when used in conjunction with material famished under this Section. ' C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevation, sizes, types, undercuts, special beveling and reinforcement for hardware. Identify locations of cutouts for glass cutouts and louver locations, and metal gage and type. 1. Note glass thickness and setting method to confirm glazing frames, doors, and stops have been coordinated with glass and glazing requirements. ' 2. Famish copy of manufacturer's installation instructions for each approved product assembly to installer for use prior to installation of exterior doors or frames. D. Provide templates, template reference number and/ or physical hardware to the hollow metal door ' and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. E. Provide 1 reproducible copy of proposed hollow metal door and frame schedule and Shop Drawings using same reference number for details and openings as those on Drawings. Include details of ' door construction, door and frame reinforcements and joint connections, and welding profile. 1. When shipping limitations so dictate, indicate which frames require shipping in sections. Inducts areas and intersections for splidng or splining required in the field and required in the ' ' s assembly procedures. field and required manufacturer F. Upon receipt of approved door and frame schedules, make correk~ions noted and submit 6 sets of corrected schedules along with copies of ANSI/ SDI A250.11 "Recommended Erection Instructions ' for Steel Frames". G. Upon request of Architect or for substitution to this Specification, provide 1 copy of manufacturers catalog cut sheets along with physical samples and submit before materials are placed on Project ' s ~be. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ii A. Where items of holkriv metal are not definitely or krorrectly specified and are required for the intended service, report such omission, error, or other discrepancy to Architect prior to Bid dabs for clarification by addendum. Otherwise, provide items in type, quality, and quantify established by this Specification for appropriate service intended. B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers that have been in satisfactory use in similar service for 3 years. Use experienced installers. C. Fire-Rated Door Assembl'~es: Provide units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM E2074 and PHASE THREE -SID PACKAGES 081113 -1 OF 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Wamodt Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Permanently affix metal label to fire door at an authorized facility. 2. Temperature Rise Rating: When required at stainnrell enclosures, provide doors which have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 degrees F above ambient at th8 end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure as well as the required fire rating. D. Provide products manufactured by a member of the Steel Door Institute. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ANSI A250.8. Deliver, handle, and store materials per manufacturers instructions. B. Mark products with Arch'itect's opening number on doors, frames, miscellaneous parts, and cartons. C. Upon delivery, Inspect materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier immediately of damaged goods and provide written documentation of damage reported to Architect and Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable SDI Manufacturers: 1. Amweld Building Products. 2. Ceoo Door; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 3. Curries; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4. Fleming; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 5. Mesker Door, Inc. 6. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 7. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand Security Technologies. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel used to manufacture doors, frames, anchors and accessories shall meet at least one or more of the following requirements: 1. Cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A1008 and A568. 2. Hot dipped zinc coated steel of alloyed type and comply with A653- zinacoated A60 Galvanneal. '~ B. Frames: 1. Exterbr, pair frames over 5 feet wide, frames within detention area or as indicated on Door Schedule to be 0.067 inch.. 1 S G o,p~e 2. Interior frames up to 5 feet wide or as indicated on Door Schedule to be 0.053 inch, void-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008 and A588. / 7 G,r~~ 3. Openings with automatic door operators as indicated in Section 087100 to be 0.093 inch, with full head reinforcement. 4. Ex~rior units, frames leading into and out of garage areas, apparatus bay, hose tower, and frames with in detention area shall be hot-dipped zinc cued steel complying with ASTM designatron A653-97 A60. C. Doors: 1. Grades, as defined by ANSI A250.8. a. Interior Doors: 1~/4 inch thick flush doors, ANSI/SDI A250.8 Level II- Heavy Duty, Model 2: Vertical seam continuously welded, seam dressed smooth; 0.042 inch thick b. Exterior Doors: 1-3/4 inch thick flush doors, ANSI/SDI A250.8 Level III- Extra Heavy Duty, Model 2 Galvanized: Vertical seam continuously welded and dressed smooth; 0.053 inch thick. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER c. Detent~n Area Doors: 1-3/4 inch thick flush doors, ANSI/SDI A250.8 Level IV- Maximum Duty, Model 2 Galvan'¢ed: Vertical seam continuously welded and dressed smooth; 0.053 inch thick. ' 2. Exterior units, doors leading into and out of garage areas, apparatus bay, hose tower, and doors with in detention area shall be hot-dipped zinc coated steel complying with ASTM designation A653-97 A60. ' 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames as shown on Drawings and as recommended in ANSI/SDI A250.8. Make frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Take field measuremerrts as required for coordination with adjoining Work. B. Provide doors and frames receiving electrified hardware as follows. 1. Frames: Provide cover boxes with krwck-outs welded to freme to allow connection of buikfing L electrical system at each location electrified hardware is specified. 2. Doors: Run harness from point of power trensfer to location of electrified hardware connection. ' C. Mortised, reinforced, drilled and tap doors and frames as recommended by ANSI A250.6. D. Design Clearances: Comply with ANSU SDI A250.8. 1 2.4 FRAMES A. Assemble frames at comers with mechanical interlocking joint so that face miter seam and intersection mullions are °closed and tight" with face seam welded at comers and intersecting joints, then grind and dress welded area smooth. Apply zinc-rl;h primer over ground area and finish wfth matching primer paint. ' B. C. Anchors and glazing stops: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. Punch frames to accept 3 silencers on single doors and 2 on double door frames, except those to receive weatherstrip. ' 2.5 DOORS A. Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous inverted channel not less than 0.053 inch, ' extending full width of door and spot-welded to both faces. ' 1. Provide exterior doors with a flush weather tight channel top or top cap full width of door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. 2. Provide doors within detention area with flush metal top and bottom cap extending full width of ' door and spot welded to both faces and ground smooth with out sharp edges or gaps. B. Install vision-life kits with screw fasteners on interior face of door for exterior applications, and opposite keyed (entry) side of interior doors. Provide security torx fasteners at units in detention ' area. Verify special conditions or room functions with Architect before proceeding. C. Exterior Doors: Provide thermally improved doors with maximum U-value of 0.24 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F (ASTM C1363). ' D. Provide doors within detention area with vertical steel stiffeners spanning full thickness of interior space between door faces. Space stiffeners not more than 6 inches apart and attach by spot welds spaced not more than 5 inches on centers. Fill spaces between stiffeners with fiberglass insulation I (minimum density 0.8 pounds per cubic foot). E. Interior Doors: Provide with 1-piece resin-impregnated honeycomb, 1-piece polystyrene, 1-piece polyurethane, or vertical stiffeners filling entire void and securely bonded to both face sheets. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 081113 - 3 OF 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that Project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of fremes. Do not begin , installation until conditions have been properly prepared. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment per ANSI/SDI A250.11 B. Door clearences: 3/32 inch at jambs and head; 1/8 inch at meeting edge of pairs of doors; 1/8 inch above threshold or carpet; 318 inch above hard surface finished floor. Place fire-noted doors with ' clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. C. Install fremes in masonry as laid-up. fill frames in masonry construction sol'~d with mortar. D. Welded Frames: Set frames in place before surrounding construction. Brace with temporary , spreaders. Install floor and jamb anchors. Remove spreaders after wall has been buiR into frame. E. Where grouting or mortar filled frames are specified, or where antifreeze additive are used in fill, ' protect inside throat of each frame with waterproof undercoating type material, minimum 1/8 inch thick. F. Install and fasten doors to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. Adjust doors to maintain perimeter clearances specified. Excessive shimming will not be accepted. G. At each opening, provide a temporary wood spreader at center of door frames while partitions are being constructed. Spreader size shall be taken from head of frame. Leave spreaders in place until wall is set. Check frequency to ensure that frame is plumb and true. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN , A. Final Adjustments: Just prior to final inspection, check and readjust operating hardware. Remove and replace defective Work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Leave steel doors and frames undamaged and in proper operating condition. ' B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris and leave site in a clean condition. 3.4 PROTECTION , A. Protect installed products until completion of Project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion. ~ ' 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this Section. ' END OF SECTION ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors and transom panels with wood veneer. ' 2. Factory fitting wood doors io frames and factory machining for hardware. 3. Factory finishing wood doors. 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevation, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, special beveling, blocking for hardware in mineral core doors, identify locations of cut-0uts for glass lites, ' and louver locations. Indicate thidkness of veneers. B. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure "Design Intent" of system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. 1. Section 081113 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 087100 -Door Hardware. C. Samples for initial Selection: Forfactory-finished doors. ' D. Samples for Verfication: 1. Comer sections of flush doors, approximately 12 inches square, with door faces and edges representing typical renge of cobr and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber. ' a. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finish. 2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. ' E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Wherever possible, obtain wood doors from a single manufacturer to ensure un'dormity in quality of appearance and construction. Provide material for this Project that conforms to WDMA I.S.1A-97 for premium grade wood doors. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1 A, latest edition, " " ' Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive ' pressure and S-label requirements. Cross-reference Specifiks~tions and coordinat with haniware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7 2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1. Permanently affix metal label to fire door at an authorized facility. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 degrees F above ambient after 30 minutes of D. standard fire-test exposure. Provide top of each door with label from manufacturer indicating door construction, face veneer species, cut, and grade. If factory finished, include finishing information. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 081416 -1 OF 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during trensit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Ship doors from manufacturer in individual polybags, and inspect immediately upon arrival at Project site for damage of defects. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and watertight, wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humid'iiy conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. C. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer. Do not remove doors from manufacturers protective packaging until painting or other finishing has been completed. D. Mark products with Architect's opening number on doors, miscellaneous parts, and cartons. E. Upon delivery, inspect materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier immediately of damaged goods and provide written documentation of damage reported to Architect and Owner. F. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable doors, when so determined by Architect, shall be rejected and immediately removed from Project site. 1.5 GUARANTEE! WARRANTY A. Provide warranties in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contrect Documents. B. Comply with provisions of ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A-04 regarding show-through, warp, square tolerence, and de-lamination. C. Duration after date of Substantial Completion: 1. Interior Solid Core Doors: Premium Grade- Lifetime of original Installation. a. Includes refinishing, materials; and labor. D. Replace or refinish doors where Work contributed to rejection or voiding of manufacturer's warranty. E. At Owners expense, one door may be selected at rendom, upon delivery and prior to installation, for destructive testing to determine compliance with this standard. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. WDMA I.S.1-,A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. B. Agrifiber-Core Doors: Agryfiber core with no added urea formaldehyde requirements of I ANSI A208.1. C. Mineral-Core Doors: , 1. Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and Inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide cwnposite blocking with improved screw-holding ~ capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting ' hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw- holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire- protection rating indicated. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Edge Construction: Provide 45, 60 and 90 minute fire-rated doors edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A). Comply with specified requiremerrts for exposed edges. ' 2. Edge Construction: Provide 20 minute fire-rated doors as Category B, with smoke and_ fire seals (provided by seal manufacturer) applied to frame for 20 minute openings. 3. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel. ' 2.2 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance wfth requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham. ' 4: Marshfield Door Systems. B. Irrterior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, wfth Grade A faces. ' 2. Species: Red Oak. 3. Cut: Plain sl'ioed. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. ' 8. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Transom Match: Continuous match. 8. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as fads. I 8. Construction: 5 plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, and then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. ' 2.3 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings: 1. Wood Species: Doors with wood-veneer faces same species as door faces. ' 2. Profile: Doors with wood-veneer faces flush rectangular beads. 2.4 FABRICATION ' A. Factory fd doors to suft frame-opening st¢es indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standani for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply wfth requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. ' B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules. door frame Shop Dn~nrings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coo-dinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire~ated doors. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of trensoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. ' 1. Fabricate door and trensom panels wfth full~nridth, solid-lumber rabbeted meeting reils. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. ' D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 081416 - 3 OF 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS .. . - - - .. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Provide doors receiving electrified hardware with wire raceway, including sufficient number of conductor wires to accommodate the electric function specified. Coordinate installation of mechanical hardware and hook-up of electrified function to avoid voiding of manufacturer's warranty and labeling of opening. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Compete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges of door, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Delete paragraph below if not required. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Effect: Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill wood pores. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 -Door Hardware. B. Install doors to comply with manufacturers wr titian instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames per NFPA 80. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 OF 4 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 f' SECTION 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of acxess door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. 6. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame through 1 source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical fio assemblies fiested for fire-test response characteristics per the folknnring test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 for vertical axess doors and frames. 2. ASTM E119 for horizontal acxess doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturers standani-size units, which may vary slighty from sizes indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine speck locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed Work, and indicate in schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 3. J. L. Industries, inc. 4. Karp Associates, Inc. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Milcor Inc. 7. Nystrom, Inc. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083113 -1 OF 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.2 STEEL MATERIALS ' A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 1. ASTM A723/A123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A153/A153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. ' B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" ' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturers standard shop primer. D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim fomred from 0.0299 inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint ' compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. E. Manufacturers standard finish. ' 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Provide minimum of 6 doors to be located as directed by Architect. ' B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling where indicated or required. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with 1-1/4 inch wide, surtace-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. 5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release. - ' 6. Lock: Cylinder. a. Lock Preparation: Section 087100 Door Hardware. C. Flre-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel ' sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surtaces where indicated. 2. Fine-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 degrees F at the end of 30 minutes. ' 4. Size: 24 inch by 24 inch. 5. Door. Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. ' 8. Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with 1 inch wide, surtace-mounted trim. 7. Hinges: Concealed-pin type. 8. Automatic Closer. Spring type. ' 9. Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release. 10. Lock: Self latching device with cylinder lock as specified in Section 087100. D. Exterior, Insulated Access Panel: ' 1. Door. Fabricate from 0.032 inch think galvanized steel, insulated sandwich type construction. 2. Hinge: Stainless steel continuous piano type. a. Type No. 304 stainless steel -door only. 3. Frame: Fabricate from 6063 T5 extruded aluminum. , 4. Latching/Loclcing device: 1 or 2 dual acting handles, depending on door size. a. Lockable handle for exterior only. 5. Flange: 0.080 6063-T5 extruded aluminum 1.25 inch flange. , 8. Finish: Paint grip. 7. Insulation: 2 inch thick fiberglass. 8. Gasket: Extruuded santoprene. ' 9. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock as specified in Section 087100. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.4 FABRICATION A. Generel: Provide access door and freme assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Fumish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. F~osed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Fumish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish 2 keys per lock and key all kx~cs alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Fumish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with' plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083713-3 0F3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 083436 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work covered by this Section includes detention hollow metal (bullet resistant) products as scheduled in Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Products provided under this Section 1. Detention security hollow metal doors with specified fire rating and/or bullet resistance rating as indicated in door schedule. Provide doors of swinging type or sliding type as scheduled in Contract Drawings and as specfied herein. 2. Detention security hollow metal frames with specified fire rating and/or bullet resistant rating as indicated in door schedule. Provide frames in types and sizes scheduled in Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 3. Detention securfiy hollow metal panels with specified fire rating and/or bullet resistance rating as indicated in door schedule. Provide panels in types and sizes scheduled in Contract Drawings and as specified herein. C. Related products furnished by others, but not specified to this Section. 1. Door hardware, including food pass hardware. 2. Security glass and glazing materials. 3. Intercoms and intercom back boxes. 4. Joint sealants and adhes'nres. 5. Grouting of frames. D. Related Sections 1. Section 087163 -Detention Door Hardware. 2. Section 088100 -Glass Glazing. 3. Section 099000 -Painting and Coating. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer shall provide Shop Drawings for review and approval which include at least the following: 1. Door and frame elevations and sections. 2. Schedule of openings including dimensions, gauges, anchors, and label requirements. 3. Manufacturers standard instructions for frame installation and for material handling and storage. 4. Location and detail of openings in frames or doors. 5. Glazing types and stops. 6. When a fire resistance classification is shown or scheduled for steel doors or frames, provide fire rated doors with recognized testing laboratory labels affixed. During the submittal process, identify openings which may not receive labels due to hardware, dimensional, or other limitations. For such openings, provide certification that door and frame components have been constnkted per requirements of testing laboratory. B. Testing and performance: Performance grades for each opening shall be as indicated on Contract Documents. Performance test requirements for each opening shall be as indicated for individual grade number designations shown in tables in ASTM F1450 and ASTM F1592. Perform test procedures on door and frame designs as described in Sections A, B, C, D, and E. 1. Door Assembly Impact Test: Fabricate two 3 foot by 7 foot doors per Part 2, each with 100 square inch vision panel, 4 inch by 25 inch clear opening positioned generally as shown in PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083438 -1 OF 6 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ASTM F1450, Figure 1. Doors shall have maximum weight of Grades 1 and 2 of 230 pounds and for Grades 3 and 4 of 190 pounds. Fabricate 2 acxompanying frames per Part 2. Equip 1 door and frame assembly with hardware per ASTM F1450, Paragraph 6.1.1.3. Equip the other assembly with hardware per ASTM 6.1.1.4. Install test doors and frames and test per ASTM F1450, Section 6, "Specimen Preparation" and Section 7.2 "Door Assembly Impact Test." Test assemblies shall meet acceptance criteria in Section 7.2 in order to qualify under Qualii)r Assurance of this Specification. 2. Detention Hollow Metal Vision System Impact Test: Comply with ASTM F1592: Fabricate 4 equal light multi-light security hollow metal assembly, overall dimensions of 50 inches width by 50 inches high per Part 2, and impact test per ASTM F1592, Sections 5, 6 and 7.2. Test assembly shall meet acceptance criteria in Section 7.2 in order to qualify under Section 1.05 of this Specification. 3. Static Load Test: Fabricate 2 doors identically to each of test door required for Section 1.05A "Door Assembly Impact Test," 3 foot by 7 foot with 4 inch by 25 inch vision panel, and with hardware preparations tested per ASTM F1450, Section 7.3, "Door Static Load Test." Test doors to meet acceptance criteria to Section 7.3 in order to qualify under Quality Assurance of this Specification. 4. Door Rack Test: Fabricate 2 doors identicelly to each of test doors required in Section 1.05A "Door Assembly Impact Test," 3 foot by 7 foot with 4 inch by 25 inch vision panels, and with hardware preparations tested per ASTM F1450, Section 7.4 in order to qualify under Quality Assurance of this Spec cation. 5. Edge Crush Test: Fabricate 1 door constructed identically to either of test doors required in Section 1.05A "Door Assembly Impact Test," 3 foot by 7 foot with 4 inch by 25 inch vision panel, and with hardware preparations, shall be tested per ASTM F7450, Section 7.7 "Door Edge Crush Test." 6. Bullet Resistance Test: Where specified for individual openings, bullet resistance shall be certified by application of laboratory bullet resistance label on door covering assembly opening indicating compliance with testing procedure described in UL Standard 752m and consistent with ASTM F1450, Section 6, "Specimen Preparation" and Section 7.1, "Bullet Penetration" a. Bullet Resistance Rating: Level 3. 7. Fabricate sample door, frame, and haniware, and test and certify by a qualified independent testing laboratory per test procedure outlined in ASTM F1450, Section 6 "Specimen Preparation" and Section 7.1 "Bullet Penetration " Include with test reports complete descriptions of test procedure and results. Firearms and ammunition used shall be certfied as being correct with respect to bullet caliber, weight, muzzle velocity, and muzzle energy. QUALITY ASSURANCE .. A. Manufacturer Qualfications: A qualfied manufacturer of materials specified in this Section with a minimum of 10 years experience with detention grade hoikwv metal products. B. The folbwing suppliers are approved and to have met standards contained herein: 1. Trussbitt, Inc., St. Paul, MN. 2. Habersham, Cornelia, GA. C. Other manufacturers seeking approval as a hollow metal supplier shall submit the following requested information to Arch'dect at least 21 days prior to Bid date. If approved, notification shall be by addenda: 1. Manufacturers shall be ISO 9001:2000 certfied and shall be required to present their Certificate of Registration upon request. Manufadurers register shall be nationally recogn¢ed and shall provide manufacturer with periodic factory folkyw up audits reaffirming manufacturer's continuing compliance with their written quality program. 2. Manufacturers production welders shall be qualified under AWS D1.3 and upon request shall provide copies of Welders Certfications per AWS D1.3. 3. Evidence that the firm has a minimum of 10 years successful experience in completing projects of similar scope and magnitude with product similar to those specfeed herein. 1.3 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES 083436 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 4. A list of completed projects including not fewer than 5 which have been successfuly (n operation for at least 5 years, including contacts at each facility with addresses and phone numbers. ' 5. A list of all projects in the past 5 years as to which proposed supplier has been involved in litigation with a city, state, or federal government agency, describing status of result of such litigation. 6. Copies of test reports required elsewhere in this Sedtion. ' 7. The following samples: a. Door. 12 inch by 12 inch comer sample with hinge mortise and reinforcement showing construction. ' ' b. 6 inch by 6 inch sample of interior door construction without edge or other reinforcing. c. Frame: 12 inch by 12 inch comer section showing joint of head to jamb. Indude hinge mortise, reinforcement, and grout guard in one rabbet. Apply glazing stop on opposite rabbet including comer joint. ' 1.4 WARRANTY A. Products supplied under this Section shall be warranted by manufacturer to be free of defects in ' material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Doors and frames shall be constructed using new, commercial quality hot or cold rolled steel as identified in the architectural Drawings. Provide steel conforming with this Section. 2.2 GLASS MOLDINGS ' A. Where specified or indicated on Drawings, doors and fremes shall be provides with removable glass moldings. These shall be formed steel angles of 12 gauge minimum. Where dimensional restrictions preclude use of an angle, offset surface mounted stops may be used. Provide stops with ' tightly fitted butted or mitered corners and secure with 1/4 inch 28 tom head security screws no more than 8 inches on center. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION ' A. General: Door face sheets shall be 12 gauge unless specified differently. Manufacturers door reinforcements and fabrication techniques shall be consistent with, or more substantial than, construction employed in doors tested to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements ' herein. B. Specific Additional Reinforcement: The following reinforcement requirements shall also be met: ' 1. Doors shall be internally reinforced with one of the following systems: a. Continuous steel truss design core material, 28 gauge minimum, having truncated triangular sections extending continuously from 1 door face to the other, spot welded to each face 2-3/4 inches on center horizontaly and 3 inches on center verticaly. Core ' material to extend full height and width of door. b. Rolled or formed 1/8 inch steel channels extiending from top to bottom of door and continuous from one door face to the other, spaced not more than 4 inches on center and spot welded to door faces not more than 3 ind~es on center vertically. ' c. Continuous vertical hat sectbrrs, one such hat section welded to each face of door, 16 gauge minimum, with vertical webs no more than 4 inches apart, spot welded to faces no more than 3 ind~es on center vertically. Hat sections shall be welded to each ' other at least every 6 inches on center both sides in order to prevent door separation. An additional full height edge stdFener in the form of a 1/8 inch channel shall be installed and welded to both faces not more than 4 inches on center. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083436 - 3 OF 6 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. Door edges shall be provided with additional reinforoing to prevent prying or compression ' attacks on the door edge. The thickness of the door edge, including this reinforcing, shall be not less than 5/32 inch for 12 and 14 gauge doors and 1/8 inch for 16 gauge doors. This relnforoing must be welded directly to the door edge. 3. Top and bottom of the door shall be closed with a 12 gauge formed channel, 16 gauge for 16 ' gauge doors. Top and bottom closing channels shall be welded to the edge reinforcing. Top and bottom of doors shall be finished flush with inverted channel of not less than 14 gauge, 16 gauge for 16 gauge doors. 4. Hinge reinforcements shall be minimum 3/16 inch thick of the size and shape utilized in ' testing. They shall be projection welded to the door edge, and after installation additionally electrically spot welded to the door edge. In addition, a backup channel stiffener of not less than 14 gauge shall be welded to each hinge reinforcing and to each door face, to prevent ' rocking failure of the hinge reinforcing. 5. Swing door edges shall be beveled 1/8 in 2 inch. Sliding doors shall have square edges. 6. Hardware Preparation: Doors shall be reinforced, drilled, tapped and prepared for templated mortised hardware only, per final approved hardware schedule and templates provided by ' hardware supplier. Where surface hardware is to be applied, doors shall be reinforced only. Reinforcing dimension shall be as follows: a. Surface Mounted Hinges: Minimum 3/8 inch reinforoing. ' b. Mortised Hinges and Pivots: 3/16 inch. c. Internal Reinforcing for Other Hardware: 12 gauge. 7. Louvers: If louvers are specified, provide inverted V type with blades formed from 10 gauge minimum material and positioned so that no rigid flat object can be passed through them. ' Lower design shall meet performance standarcds. 8. Sp~kers: Speaking devu:es shall consist of a rectangular pattern of round holes, not exceeding 1/4 inch in diameter in both face sheets. Hole pattern shall be at least 4 inch by ' 5 inch. Baffle space between hole patterns with steel sections of not less than 18 gauge so that objects cennot be passed through door. 9. Food Pass Openings shall receive a SSCO 262 Food Pass Assembly. C. Doors shall have Architect's mark number permanently stamped on center hinge reinforcement for , swing doors and on top for sliding doors. D. Field Examination: If directed by Arch'dect, erector shall destroy a randomly selected security hollow metal door by sawing it in half. When examination discloses door construction at variance with details shown in performance test reports, door manufacturer shall replace non-conforming doors shipped to Project with doors constructed in conformance with construction of doors tested. Under conditions of non-conformity, door manufacturer shall pay for destroyed door and related labor. When examination proves that door construction is consistent with tested doors, Owner will pay to replace destroyed door and related labor. 2.4 FRAME CONSTRUCTION A. General: All frames shall be 12 gauge, except for 14 gauge for applications with 16 gauge doors. All frames shall be formed of hot or cold roiled steel produced in accordance with ASTM A56g or ASTM A366. Frames scheduled as galvanized shall be in acxordance with ASTM A526 (A60). Frames shall be straight, neat in appearance, and free of warpage and buckling. All frame joints shall be welded, except where overall size of frame precludes shipment, in wh~h case appropriate splices shall be provided for field erection by others. Following fabrication, welded areas of galvanized frames shall be resprayed with a cold galvanizing product complying with mil spec. P.46105. B. Frame Details 1. Jamb, head, and sill profiles shall be as scheduled or shown in Drawings. Stop height for fremes shalt be 1 inch for glass openings and 5/8 inch for door openings. 2. Comer joints shall have contact edges closed tight with faces mitered and stops butted or mitered. Comer joints shall be continuously welded and the use of gussets or splice plates is unacceptable. DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES 083436 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion members which are closed tubular shapes conforming to profiles shown on Drawings and which have no visible seams or joints. 4. Frames shall have the Architect's door number permanently stamped in center hinge reirrforcemem. Where frames do not receive hinge preparation, number shall be stamped in a prominent location, where it will not be visible after installation. 5. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for templated mortised hardware only, per final approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware ' manufacturer. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall be reinforced only with drilling and tapping done by erector. 6. Mortised hinge and pivot reinforcement shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch thick, 1-1/2 inch wide ' and 8 inches long. Reinforcements shall be projection welded to frame and shall be MIG welded to frame at top and bottom of each reinforcing. Top hinge shall be addittonaly reinforced with 3/16 inch thick formed angle welded both to hinge reinforoing and frame face. 7. Drilling and tapping of frames for surface mounted hinges shelf be by field erector, after door is fitted plumb and true into frame. 8. Other Reinforcements: The following applications shall be reinforced as indicated: Lock Bolt Opening Backup 12 gauge minimum ' Surface Mount Closers 12 gauge minimum Concealed Closers 3/16 inch minimum Strike Mounting Clips 3/16 inch minimum ' 9. Floor clips shall be provided of gauge at least as great as frame gauge and shall be welded in place at bottom of each jamb. They shall have 2 holes for anchoring to floor. If so scheduled, adjustable floor clips shall be provided. ' 10. Frames shall be caulked in order to limit leakage of grout Into frame openings. C. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry: Provide a minimum of 3 T-type corrugated masonry anchors for each jamb ' mounted in masonry up to 84 inches in length. Anchors shall have holes in them permitting insertion of reinforcing bar. For longer jambs, provide sufficient anchors to permit maximum spacing of 24 inches. Where dictated by fire rating testing laboratory procedures, supply ' anchors complying with such requirements. 2. Pre-finished Masonry, Concrete Openings: Factory punched and countersunk holes for 3/8 inch diameter expansion bolt anchors, not more than 6 feet from top and bottom of jamb and 24 inches on center. Weld In 12 gauge minimum reinforcing chairs to prevent frame ' de#prmation while tightening anchor bolts. Concrete anchors and bolts shall be provided under Contract. D. Mortar guards of not less than 24 gauge steel shall be welded In place~at hardware mortises on ' frames to beset in masonry or concrete. Guards for closers shall be 18 gauge minimum. E. Provide frames with 2 temporary steel spreaders welded to the feet of Jambs to serve as bracing during shipping and handling only. These shall be removed prior to installation and are not to be ' used for setting of proper frame tolerances. 2.5 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP ' A. Material shall be smooth and free of surface blemishes. Gauge of frame members and door face sheets shall be as indicated in the architectural Drawings. Doors and frames shall be neat in appearance and free from warpage or buckle. Edge bends shall be true and straight. ' 2.6 PRIME PAINTING A. Doors and frames shall receive one coat of the manufacturer's shop primer which shall be ' compatible with topcroats specified in Section 099000. Prior to palming, doors shall be pressure sanded on both faces to minimize welding marks and to remove dirt or grease. After appropriate metal preparation, exposed surfaces of doors and frames shall receive a rust inhibitive primer which PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 063436 - 5 OF 6 DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER meet or exceeds ANSI A250.10, 'Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painting Steel Surfaces For Steel Doors and Frames." For stainless steel finishes refer to ANSI/NAAMM/HMMA- 866. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Frame erector shall receive material at jobsite, uniwd it, note any damage and file any required freight claims, and store the material, all in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation, frame erector shall check frames for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness. Conduit connections shall be checked to assure that they have not loosened during shipment. Screw protection, if provided, shall be chectced to assure that it has not been removed or tampered with. B. Install fremes as set forth in Manufacturer's instnictions with jambs parallel, freme faces in the same plane and parallel with wall surtaces, fremes set squarely in openings. Maximum deviation shall be 1/16 inches in any such dimension as described in Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Clean and touch up scratches or paint damage which has occurred during installation with primer. 3.3 CLEARANCES A. Edge clearences for swinging doors shall provide for the functional operation of the assembly and shall not exceed the following: 1. Between the doors and frames at head and jambs: 3/16 inch. 2. Between edges of pairs of doors: 3/16 inch. • 3. At doorsill where a threshod is used: 3/8 inch. 4. At doorsills where no threshold is used: 3/4 inch. 5. Between door bottom and nominal surface of fbor coverings at fire rated openings as provided in ANSUNFPA 80. END OF SECTION DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES 083436 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLJC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrically operated sectional overhead doors. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Performance Requirements: 1. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet perfomtance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. ' 2. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requiremenrts and design criteria indicated. 3. Structural Performance: Exterwr sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated per ASCE/SEI 7. a. Wind Loads: As indicated on Dnanrings. 1 4. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested per ASTM E283. a. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm per square foot at 15 and 25 mph. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Raged capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. ' B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturers product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, ' method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Door Sections: 6 inches square of each type of door. D. Delegated-0esign Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with perforrnanoe requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualfied professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. E. Maintenance data. F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083613 -1 OF 6 SECTIONAL DOORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Stnrcturel failures including excessive deflection. b. FauNy operation of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interwr facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within speafied warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. . PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specified products or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. 2. DorCraft. 3. Haas Door Company. '4. Industrial Door Co., Inc. 5. Midland Garage Doors. 6. Overhead Door Corporation. 7. Raynor Garage Doors. 8. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 9. ~ Windsor Republic Doors. ~• 10. Approved Substitutions. d ~~- i~ly(eg -~~ Midland _S_ecttonal D oo rs ~rO~trL dr~~i~t~l'_eL.~_~ 2.2 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS (OH1, OH2, OH3, OH4, AND OH8) A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from manufacturers standard zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, steel sheet. 1. Roll hor¢ontal meeting edges to a ooMinuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight sal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom~ec~ion profile and allowing installation of astragal. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in plans. ' E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respedivey, ' per ASTM E84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commeroial steel (CS) sheet. 2. Insulation R Value: Minimum of 16. ' 3. Acceptable Products: Thermo Craft Model 2400 by DorCraft. 2.3 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS (OH5, OH7) ' A. Sections: Construct door sections with 2-1/2 inch thick stiles and rails formed from extruded- aluminum shapes. Fabricate sections with stile and rail dimensions and profiles shown on Drawings. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through ' bolts, full height of door section. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint. 1. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. ' 2. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. B. Full-Vsion Sections: Manufacturers standani, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed with 12 inch thick, clear insulated glazing set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops. 1. Acxeptable Product: Model CA-220 by Haas Door 2.4 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Trecks: Manufactunrs standard, galvanized~teel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight,.designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, brecing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball- ' bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope trecks at proper angle from vertical or design trecks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. ' B. Treck Reinforcement and Supports: GaNan¢ed-steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Weatherseals: Replac~ble, adjustable, continuous, compressible weatherstripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. ' D. Provide dual trolleys at doors over 23 feet wide. Offset trolleys at Room 148. 2.5 HARDWARE ' A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvan¢ed, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per ' manufacturers written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. 1 t C. Rollers: Heavy~luty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3 inch diameter roller tires for 3 inch wide track and 2 inch diameter roller tires for 2 inch wide track. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083613 - 3 OF 6 SECTIONAL DOORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanizedsteel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety irrterlock switch to disengage power supply when door Is locked. 2.7 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B. Cable Drums and Shag for Doors: Cast~aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to n3ceive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount courrterbalance mechanism with manufacturers standard bal{-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. C. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if either Ilfting cable breaks. D. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. E. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.8 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requin:ment specified, with electric motor and factory- prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. . 1. Compy with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-0perator Type: Units consisting of electric motor, gars, pulleys, belts, sprodkets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet requin3d usage classification. 1. Gear Reduced Hoist Units: Provide at Doors p 4,~'OH~, OHS, and OH-7. ~E~d~`~ <<~~~~ 2. Gear Reduced Draw Bar Units: Provide at Doors OH-1, OH-2, and OH-3. D. Electric Motors: Compy with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requin;ments specified in Division 26 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: Verify with electrical Contract Documents. c. Hertz: 60. 2. Motor Type and Controller. Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 3. Motor Size: 1/2 hp typical unless noted otherwise. 3/4 hp at Doors OH-1, OH-2, OH-8, and OH-7. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either din:ctlon from any position, at a speed not less than 8 inches per second and not more than 12 inches per second, wrthout exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. SECTIONAL DOORS 083813 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' E. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping ' mounted to bottom bar. Contact wig sensor activates device. Connect to control cirouit using manufacturers standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. F. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls ' labeled "Open; "'Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarcled, surface-mounted, heavy~luty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. ' G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 pound-force. ' H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-$widch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. ~ I. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator Ijghts in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. J. Radio-Control System: Consisting of 3-channel universal coaxial receiver ~ open, close, and stop door, 8 per operator plus 20 more to be assigned by Owner. K. Acceptable Products: 1. Doors OH-1, OH-2, and OHS: Power Master Model GT by Door Systems, Inc. ' 2. Doors OH-4, OH-5, OH-6, and OH-7: Power Master Model MG by Door Systems, Inc. 2.9 DOOR ASSEMBLY ' A. Steel and Full-Vision Aluminum Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000. C. R Value: 16 degrees F per hour per square foot per Btu. D. Steel Sections: Zino-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, formed into sections 1-3/4 inches thick. 1. Exterior-Face Surface: Flat. ' 2. Interior Faang Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. E.. Aluminum Sections: Full vision with manufacturers standard, nonglazed panels across bottom section of door unless indicated otherwise. ' F. Track Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. G. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom, top, and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination ' bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. H. Windows: Sizes indicated on Drawings, with square comers, and spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Dn~nrings; in 1 and 2 rows at height indicted on Drawings; installed with ' insulated glazing of clear float glass. I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremona type, both jamb sides, locking bars, operable from inside ' with thumbtum and outside with cylinder. J. Manual Door Operator. Chain-hoist operator. 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 083613 - 5 OF 6 SECTIONAL DOORS a,l COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER K. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standani duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Operator Type: Jackshaft, mounted as shown on Drawings. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar. . 6. Remote-Control Station: Where shown on Drawings. 7. Other Equipment: Radio-control system. ' 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Flnish: AAMA 2603. C~nply with coating manufacturer's written ' instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking. 1. Color selected by Architect from manufacturers full Dolor range including beige. 2.11 STEEL ANDGALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturers standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturers written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Beige to match aluminum doors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; per manufacturers written instructions and as specfied. B. Tracks: Provide sway braang, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door~operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks per ASTM A780. C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage afactory-authorized service representative to trein Owners maintenance personnel to ~ adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. ~~ ~'.~ !Section 083613 -Sectional Doors ~~ 1. Cable safety device and chain hoist are only required at high lift doors. . 2. Through scan photo eyes shall be provided at all doors. Provide a second set of photo eyes mounted at 4' above finished floor at all high lift doors. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. ' 2. Exterior and interior manual wing entrance doors and door frame units. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pertormance Requirements: 1. General Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that withstand effects of the following perfomnance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: a. Movemerrts of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. b. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. t c. Failure includes the following: 1) Deflection exceeding specified limits. 2) Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by structural ' movement to glazing. 3) Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. 4) Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, aril other components. ' 5) Failure of operating units. 2. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 3. Deflection of Framing Members: a. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of dear span for spans up do 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing I'ites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. •• b. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in system to exterior. ' C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to compy with performance ' requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 08411 S -1 OF 7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of aluminum, hollow metal, and wood door han~nrare through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturers product line by secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide standard door hardware and electrified hardware as a single sourced package from same qual~ed supplier. B. Installer Qualifrc:ations: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and approved for installaton of un'ds requin~ for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualfied per ASTM E699 for testing indicated. D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. F. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural 8 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. G. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Premed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. H. Mock-ups:, Build mock ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mock-up of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Perform field testing on mock-ups per requirements in Field Qual'dy Control Article. 3. Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless Architect specfically approves such deviations in writing. 4. ~ Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified wam3nty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 OF 7 .PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Baste-of-D~ign Product: Design for glazed aluminum storefront and entrance systems is based on Series 403 Thermal Storefront Framing by EFCO Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named product or comparable product by one of the following: ' 1. Vistawall An:hitectural Products, Inc. 2. Wausau Window and Wail Systems. 2.2 MATERIALS 1 1 A. Aluminum: Alby and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM 8209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM 8221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM 8429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturers standard zin~rrch, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after suface prepan~tion and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods per recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces per applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011 M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturers standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Non thermal and thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on 4 sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Frame front for exterior system, center frame for interior system. 4. Framing Member Profile: 1-3/4 inch by 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension. 5. Member Wall Thidkness: Designed to meet structural performance requirements. 6. Muntins: Non-removable, face applied, aluminum muntins at exterior system. Match finish of framing system. B. Brackets and Reinforcemerrts: Manufacturers standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Akxessori~: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and akxessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads fabrk:ated from stainless steel. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvan¢ed cast-iron, mall~ble-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturers standard, recommended for joint type. 1. Provide sealar>ts for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 gIL or less when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 084113 - 3 OF 7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER G. Thermal Break -Exterior System: Internally connected and locked insulation clips. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088100 -Glass Glazing. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer and in compliance with Section 088100 - Glass Glazing. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). . D. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturers standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturers standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4 inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188 inch thick, extruded- aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: 2-part, high{fensity polyurethane separates aluminum members exposed to exterior from members exposed to interior. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 3-1/2 inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above fbor or ground plane. b. Aaz;ptable Product: Series D300 Medium Stile Doors by EFCO Corporation. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 -Door Hardware. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 1. Pride sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated per40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphait~nastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. C. Sealant Angles: Provide 0.032 inch aluminum angles at rough opening edges as indicated on Drawings. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding o~ddes from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitthd joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connedlon devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. 1 D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. ' F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install 3 silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and 2 silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to greatest extent ' possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes: I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project per Shop Drawings. ' 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying wfth AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with dating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. D. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with iron oxide paint. ' E: Liquid Strippable Coating: Apply in shop to prefinished surfaces to protect finish during fabrication, shipping, and field handling. F. Apply 1 coat of bituminous palm to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials . ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. ' 3. Fit joirrts to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 084113 - 5 OF 7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or apptying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system th exterior. D. Install head and sill flashing per requiremerrts of Section 076200. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specfied in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants to produce weathertight installation. F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. G. Install glaring as specified in Section 088100 -Glass Glazing. H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fd at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fd at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware per entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the folkmring maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at comers, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measuremerrts to 1/8 inch. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Servk~s: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as folkyws. Do not proceed with installation of next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before Installation of interior finishes has begun, test areas designated by Arohitect per AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Test Area: Minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story ofaluminum-framed systems. C. Repair or remove Work ff test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considen:d defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from 70-degree open positron to 3 inches from latch, measured to leading door edge. END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 084113 - 7 OF 7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLJC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1, Puked aluminum-framed windows. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: ' 1. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMANVDMA 101l1.S.2/NAFS. 2. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind 1 speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, per ASCE 7, Section B.S, "Method 2~Analytical Procedure;' based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. ' b. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed per AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. ' 3. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following ma~amum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealaMs,~ failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime~ky heat bss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F material ' surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating Instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. ' 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Thermal-break details. ' 6. Glazing detaik. 7. Window System Operators: Show locations, mounting, and details for installing operator components and controls. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 085113 -1 OF 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qual~ed professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following: a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. C. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Main Framing Member. 12 inch long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangemerrts, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAAAAIWDMA 101/I.S.2/NAPS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Spec cation for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors;' for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. ALUMINUM VNNDOWS 085113 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. ' c. Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: Design for glazed aluminum window systems is based on the following 2 systems. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named products: 1. EFCO Corporation: Series 590 Projected Replacement Windows with Herrtage Trim. 2. Wausau Window and Wall Systems: 2250-E Series Epic Window with Heritage Trim. ' 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Window Type: Fixed. ' B. Comply with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2MAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: HC50. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance ' per AAMA 1503, showing CRF of 47 for frame and 57 for glass when glazed with 1 inch clear insulated glass units. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with whole-window, U factor maximum ' indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperetures when tested per AAMA 1503. 1. U-Factor: 0.49 Btu per square foot by hour by degree F at 15 mph exterior widn or less when ' glazed with 1 inch clear insulated glass units. E. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested per ~ AAMANWMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air InfiRretton Test. ~ ' 1. Maximum Rate: 0.1 cfm per square foot of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 pound- force per square foot. F. Water Resistancee: No water leakage as defined in AAMANVDMA referenced test methods at a ' water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested per AAMAIWDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 pound-force per square foot or more than 10 pound-force per square foot. 2.3 GLAZING 2.4 ' A. B. 1 c Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Section 088100 -Glass Glazing for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. FABRICATION Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. Weather Stripping: Provide fullperimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infikrating water to exterior. D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of nature) water penetration. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 085113 - 3 OF 5 ALUMINUM VIANDOWS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window un'~ts due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum. Miter or Dope comers, and weld and dress smooth witl~ concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. G. Muntins: Non-removable, fac~aapplied aluminum muntins at exterior of window units where indicated on Drawings. Match finish of framing system. H.. Replica Trim: Provide window manufacturers sloped replicant, Heritage Trim. Match finish of framing system. I. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Section 088100 -Glass Glazing and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. _ C. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropdymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. D. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with iron oxide paint. E. Liquid~'~Strippable Coating: Apply in shop to prefinished surfaces to protect finish during fabr~ation, shipping, and field handling. F. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact witty cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, and manufacturers written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertjght constructbn. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ~COL'UMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance per AAMA 502, by applying same test pressun:s required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS in Part 1 "Performance Requiremer>ts"Article. 2. Testing Extent: 3 mock-up windows as selected by Architect and qualfied independent testing and inspecting agency. Test windows immediatey after installation. 3. Test Reports: Prepare per AAMA 502. C. Remove and replace noncomplying aluminum window and retest as specified above. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturers wrdten recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constnx~ion operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances.do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately per manufacturers written recommendations. END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 085113 - 5 OF 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 085619 PASS WINDOWS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Interior bullet resistant transaction frames and glazirl9• 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pertormance Requirements: 1. Protection Level: Provide systems that are rated Level III per UL 725, 9th Editions, Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment, dated 27 January 1985. 2. Frame Quality: Provide frames with protection level equal to or greater than glazing. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on window unit criteria, glass and glazing, frame finish, hardware, and ' anchoring devices. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening elevations and dimensions, configurations, fastening types, welding details, methods of glazing, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work; installation requirements; and termination details. C. Samples: 2 Samples illustrating frame finish and color, and glass. ' D. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation and cleaning instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Keep window crated until time for installation. B. Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that twnd when exposed to sunlight or weather. ' 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and workmanship for 1 year against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-Of-0esign: Drawings and Specifications are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature for products specified below. Other manufacturers shall comply with minimum levels of specified ' materials including detailing and other critical elements. Arch'~ect will be sole judge of acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1. Creative Industries, Inc. ' 2. Nissen and Company, Inc. 3. Quikserv Corp. 4. U. S. Bullet Proofing. ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 085819 -1 OF 3 PASS V1NND01IVS ~i COLUMBIA HEIGHTS , PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.2 MATERIALS t A. Frames and Glass Channels: Extruded aluminum sections, type 6063-T5, 6063-T52, or 6063-T6. B. Provide miscellaneous sectbns including sills, break metal closures, anchorage clips, angles, and other accessories required for a complete installation. ' C. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrip sash at head, jamb, sill, and meeting rails using manufacturers standard materials. Vinyl weatherstripping will not be accepted. D. Hardware: Type recommended by manufacturer for complete installation, including cylinder lock. ' 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS ' A. Bullet Resistant 3-Sided Transaction Window: 1. Frames: Brake-formed, 3-sided commercial grade cold rolled 0.067 inch steel, lined with manufacturer's UL listed bullet resistant fiberglass. Cap top and bottom edges of glazing with ' minimum 0.032 inch stainless steel. a. Provide frames free of scale, pitting, coil breaks, with finish neat and free of defects. Continuously weld comers full length of intersection. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth. Knocked down and mechanical joints are unacceptable. Design frame ' modules that are capable of being joined with other frame modules to foRn a continuous hardline. Design frames to allow replacement of glazing from secure side of window or wall unit that does not require removal of frame from opening. b. Frame UL Level: See Levels required in System Description Article. , 2. Acceptable Product: Model SSTW 27 by Armortex or approved substitution. 2.4 GLASS , A. Provide the following bullet-resistant glass type complying with Protection Level specified in Performance Requirements Article above. 1. Type: Proprietary glass fabricated from multiple layers of laminated polycarbonate. Provide final layer each side with 1/8~glass for scratch resistance -----~ n ,~;) ~0~ ' 2. "'I7-ickness: Minimum l %a inch for entire glass assembly+." Unit must provide level 3 Pro~ion. P~~lrl~ 3. Acceptable product: Product Code TP ~~ rmortex or approved substitution. 2.5 COUNTERS ~ ' A. Set-down Counter: 16 gage stainless steel, reinforced, with finished edges. 1. Sound-deaden counter. 2. Provide support brackets, "T' clamps, and fasteners. 3. Finish: No 3 Satin Brushed. 4. Acceptable Product: Model RMDT-1016 by Armortex or approved substitution. 2.6 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Speaker: 4 inch bullet-resistant speaker system for use in bullet-resistant glazing. Fabricate , speakers from 0.093 inch stainless steel. Install in glazing with 1/4 inch stainless steel screws. On `safe side,` provide protection plate fabricated from prime-painted Level 4 ballistic steel. 1. Acceptable Product Model SSBRS-7 by Armortex or approved substitution. , B. Speaker Controls: Provide speaker controls on `safe side" of window system. C. Shelf: Provide 2 inch thick shelf with recessed dip tray, full width of window, and a minimum of 12 , inches deep centered under glazing. Finish shelf with black high-pressure laminate. 1. Dip Tray: 0.067 inch stainless steel, No. 3 finish, 10 inch by 16 inch from outside edge of flanges with a clear open depth under the glazing of 1 5/8 inch. a. Acceptable product: Model RMDT-1016 by Safeguard Security Services, Inc. ' PASS V1flNDOWS 085619 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.7 FINISH A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating ftnishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Cold-Rolled Steel: Factory prime painted gray. D. Stainless Steel: No. 3 finish unless indicated otherwise. 2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Standard manufacturing tolerances: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for frame opening, diagonal dimensions of frame, overall frame width, height, and depth. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install window frames, glass and glazing, and haniware per manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent Work. D. Install operating hardware. E. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria per Section 079200. 3.2 TOLERANCES A Maximum Variation from Levet or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 feet, whichever is less. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean and adjust Work. B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean cloths. Remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. E. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. END OF SECTION ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 085619 - 3 OF 3 PASS WINDOWS ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Self lashing unit skylights with integral curb. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Performance Requirements: 1. AAMAIWDMA Performance Designation: Provide unit skylights capable of compl in with y g performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size indicated below: a. Size required by AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for optional performance grade. ' 2. Test Performance Criteria: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are representative of those specified. ' a. Structural Performance: Provide unit skylights, including glazing and anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of the following design loads: 1) Positive Pressure or Inward Load: As indicated. ' 2) Negative Pressure or Uplift Load: As indicated. b. Air Infiltration: Provide unit skylights with maximum air leakage through assembly of 0.3 cfrn per square foot when tested per ASTM E283 at a minimum statio-air-pressure ' difference of 6.24 pound-force per square foot. c. Water Penetration: Provide unit skylights that do not evidence water penetration through assembly when tested per ASTM E331 at a zero static-air-pressure d'~fference across unit. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight indicated. Include wnstruction details, material ' ~ descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for unit skylights. B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight Work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining Work. ' C. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Quaycations: Manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by ' labels, test reports, and calculations. B. Installer Quaycations: Installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units ' required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain unit skylights from single source from single manufacturer. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 086200 -1 OF 5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Surface-Buming Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: Provide plastic glazing sheets identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 degrees F or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated when tested per ASTM D1929. 2. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below: a. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D2843 on plastic sheets in thickness indicated for use. 3. Buming Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D635. a. Potycarbonate Glazing: Class CC1, buming extent of 1 Inch or less for nominal thickness of 0.060 inch or thckness indicated for use. E. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Compy with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified unit skylights with an attached label. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate unit skylight flashing requirements with roofing system. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of prefabricated curbs with actual unit skylights provided. C. Provide anchors and inserts to be placed in adjacerrt construction in proper sequence so as not to delay Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail In materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Uncontrolled water leakage or water condensation. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Breakage of potycarbonate glazing. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pyramid Unit by Wasco Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. APC Dayliter, C/S Group. 2. Bristolite Skylights. 3. CPllntemational. 4. Kalwall Corporation. 5. O'Keeffe's Inc. 6. Oldcastle Gfass, Inc. 7. Skyline Sky-Lites, LLC. S. Solar Industries, Inc. 9. VELUX America. UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' .' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.2 MATERIALS A Aluminum Components: ' 1. Sheets: ASTM 8209. alby and temper to suit forming operations and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad Alloy 3005-H25. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM 8221, alby and temper to suit structural and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alby 6063-T52. ' B. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. ' 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. ' 2.3 GLAZING - ~ _ Change glazing types ecified under .3 to be acrylic clear double dome. Acrylic type to meet ail state and local , ;codes. ~~ tt7(~ ---- _ ~ ' 'waa[n"wrrenZester~' S"f101 u156; 1ethOd-A IZO 1. Double-Glazing Profile: Pyramid, 30-degree slope. a. Thickness: Not less than tiiickness required to exceed performance requirements. b. Inner Glazing Color. Selected by Architect from full range of industry cobra. ' c. Outer Glazing Color. Selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard. ' 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. ' B. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigreting sealant. ' D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other adhesive c~rrpatible with roofing system. 2.5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded,aluminum glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements ' indicated. B. integral Curb: Insulated extruded-aluminum, self-flashing type. 1. Height: 12 inches. 2. Construction: Double wall. 3. Insulation: Manufacturers standard rigid or semirigid type. C. Prefabricated Curti: As specified in Section 077200 -Roof Accessories. ' D. Unit Shape and Size: 46-1/4 inch by 46-1/4 inch. E. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to collect and drain condensation to exterbr. F. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterbr and interior metal framing. ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 086200 - S OF 5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply wfth NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Archtecturel and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are wfthin the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply wfth NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Archftectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefaced by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class 11, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 811. D. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with iron oxide paint. E. Liquid strippable coating: Apply in shop to prefinished surfaces to protect finish during fabrication, shipping, and field handling. F. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact wfth cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION ~ 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and condftions, wfth Installer present, for compliance wfth requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Proceed with unit skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION .. ' A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substn~s, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. , B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and wfth manufacturers written instructions for installing unit skylights. C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion. ' D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates. E. Where metal surfaces of unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, ' including preservative~reated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation recommended in writing by unft skylight manufacturer. F. Set unft skylight flanges in thick bed of roofing c~nent to form a seal unless othervvise indicated. ' G. Where cap flashing is indicated, install to produce waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing. Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. ' UNIT SKYLIGHTS 088200 -4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES . ~ .. .. 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks per AAMA 501.2. C. Pertorm test for tiotat area of each unit skylight D. Work will be considered defective ff it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Additional testing and inspectlons, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specked requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces per manufacturers written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 086200 - 5 OF 5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS r COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS PART1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, tubular skylight system consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assemby; configurafron as indicated on Drawings. 2. Accessories. ' 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide completed tubular skylight system assemblies capable of meeting the following ' pertomiance requirements: a. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm per square foal aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 pound-force per square foot across unit when tested per ASTM ' E 283. b. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 16.5 pound-force per square foot pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot when tested per ASTM E 331. ' c. Uniform Load Test: 1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make tubular skylight inoperable or cause pemranent deflection of any section in excess of 1 percent of its span at a Posifive or Negative Load of 35 pound-force ' per square foot. 2) Test units for a safety factor of 3 for positive pressure and 2 for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof per ASTM E 330. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Stonsge and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. ' B. Shop Drawings: For tubuar skylight Work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining Work. 1.4 t]UAUTY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer Quaycations: Engaged in manufacture of tubular skylights for minimum 10 years. ' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturers unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in ' accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 086223 -1 OF 4 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER i.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturers absolute limits. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate tubular skylight flashing requirements with roofing system. B. Provide anchors and inserts to be placed in adjacent construction in proper sequence so as not to delay Work. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Tubular Skylight System: Manufacturers standard warranty for 10 years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SolaTube 290 DS by Solatube International, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Sun Pipe Co., The: SunPipe (Non-Residential). 2. Tubular Skylight, Inc.: Tubular Skylight. 3. VELUX America Inc.: TCR Commercial Sun Tunnel. 4. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 TUBULAR SKYLIGHT SYSTEM A. General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, 14 inch diameter, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunl~ht to interior spaces; complying with ICBO/ICC AC-16. B. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, W and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. 1. Glazing: 0.143 inch minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material and meeting characteristics of DR-101 blend. lo~J ~(c ~ ~3 ~\1'Y~~~ 2. Reflector: Aluminum sheet, 0.015 inch thick. Position rn dome o c tip ew anglb~unl ~t. ~d~. 3. Roof Flashing Base: 1-piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. a. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M, 0.028 inch thick. b. Base Style: Self mounted, 11 inches high. 4. Dome Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. 5. Dome Seal: Polypropylene fiber pile weather strip 0.27 inch by 0.27 inch. 6. Reflective Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch. a. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface. 1) Visible spectrum (400 nm to 780 nm) greater than 99 percent. 2) Total solar spectrum (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 93 percent. 7. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Ceiling-mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting I'rght transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube, with compression seal to minimize condensation and bug or dirt TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 086223 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 infiltration; 23.8 by 23.8 inches square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. a. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classfied as CC2, ' 0.060 inch thick. b. Lens: OpbView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame. ' 1) Visible Light Transmission: >= 90 percent at 0.022 inch thick. c. Seal: Closed cell foam, 3 pounds per cubic foot. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A ~ ~ 11~1og ~t ~4~C ' . . .. B. Flashing Turret Extensions: Provide manufacturers standard extensions for applications requiring additional lengths. C. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. ' D. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. _ ~I~, OptiView diffuser will require custom adapter to mate with 14" skylight. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requiremerrts for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Proceed with tubular skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. ' B. Comply with recommendations In AAMA 1607 and with manufacturers written instructions for installing unit skylights. ' C. Anchor tubular skylights securely to supporting substrates. D. Where metal surfaces of tubular skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, inducting preservative-treated wood. apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation recommended in writing by tubular skylight manufacturer. E. Set tubular skylight flanges in thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal unless otherwise indicated. F. Where cap flashing is indicated, install to produce waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing. Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. ' 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks per AAMA 501.2. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 086223 - 3 OF 4 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Perform test for total arm of each tubular skylight. D. ~ Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed tubular skylight surfaces per manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect tubular skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS END OF SECTION 086223 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES i COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install commercial door hardware for the following: a. Standard steel doors. ' b. Wood doors. c. Aluminum doors. d. Aluminum entrances. e. Other doors to the extent indicated. ' 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrfied door hardware. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section 064023 -Interior Architectural Woodwork. 2. Section 081113 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. Section 084113 -Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. Hardware, including cylinders is specfied in Section 087100 for installation in Section 084113. Aluminum door and frame supplier~shall supply weatherstrip and sweeps. (Supply Aluminum door and frame manufacturers heavy-duty weatherstrip and sweeps.) ' 4. Section 081416 -Flush Wood Doors. 5. Section 087113 -Automatic Door Operators and Accessories. 6. Division 26: Electrical. Electrical boxes, electrical service, final connections. ' 7. Fire Alarm System: Electrical connection to activate and release magnetic wall holders. Refer to Division 26. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "Design Intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. ' 1. Section 081113 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 081416 -Flush Wood Doors. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit a detailed, vertical type hardware schedule conforming to DHI ' publication, "Sequence and Format of the Hardware Schedule". Prepare schedule under the direct supervision of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). Hardware schedules submitted without the AHC's signature will be rejected without review. 1. List and describe each opening separately; include all doors with identical hardware, except ' hand, in a single heading. include door number, room designations, degree of swing, and hand. 2. List all hardware items; include manufacturer's name, quantity, product name, catalog ' number, size, base metal, finish, fasteners and related details where applicable. 3. List related details; include dimensions, door and frame material and other conditions affecting hardware. ' C. Electronic Hardware Systems: 1. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening and all electrified components, gage of wire, and wire run. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ~ 087100 -1 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. Provide complete wiring diagrams except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiring electronic hardware. Indicate detailed interface between electrifed door hardware, fire alarm and security systems. Clarify between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval. 3. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components fisted by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. D. Templates: Submit current manufacturer's templates for hardware scheduled, along with "Approved Hardware Schedule° to door and frame supplier and others as applicable. 1. Templates, wiring schematics, and "Approved Hardware Schedule" of electrical items to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations. E. Keying Schedule: Submit detailed keying Schedule, indicating Owner's instructions from pre- submittal hardware and keying meeting with hardware supplier. 1. Submit 1 copy to architect for information only. F. Contract Close-out Submittals: 1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: 2. Maintenance instructions and warranty information for each item of hardware. 3. Catalog pages for each product . 4. Contact information for supplies of hardware and local representatives of each product manufacturer. 5. Parts list for each product. 6. Copy of final hardware schedule. 7. Copy of final wiring diagrams. Include °As-Built" Drawings, including color of wires at final termination and location of power supplies and junction boxes. 8. Copy of final keying schedule. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and is required for the intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarlficatbn by addendum. Othervvise, furnish such items in the type, quality and quantity established by this Specfication for the appropriate service intended. B. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain each type and variety of aluminum, steel and wood door hardware from the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide electrified door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or thins party source will not be accepted. 3. Provide standard door hardware and electrfied hardware as a single sourced package from the same qualfied manufacturer. C. Supplier Qualifications: 1. Commercial hardware supplier who maintains and operates an office and stocking warehouse in the project area for at least two years and can document experience with projects of similar type and scale. 2. Supplier fio employ Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as recognized by DHI for the purpose of overseeing the scheduling, coordinating hardware, establishing keying schedule, and be available during the course of construction to consult with Contractor, Architect, and OSR about the mechanical and electrical door hardware specified. Persons not in the direct employ of the supplier shall not be considered as meeting this requirement. 3. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared under the direct supervision of and signed by an AHC. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project. 1. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. E. Pre-Submittal Hardware and Keying Meeting: Prior to preparing final submittals, coordinate and hold a meeting including the Owner, Architect, and supplier of hardware to determine the following: 1 1. Lock Function: Demonstrate the function/type of each lockset scheduled and verify function at each door. 2. Electrical Operation: Verify function of all openings requiring electrified hardware. 3. Keying: To be determined between Owner and Mid-West Lock. 4. Submit a letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting was held and who was in attendance, to the Architect, Owner and supplier. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the installation of hardware, coordinate a job site pre-installafron meeting. Include at meeting the supplier, manufacturers representatives for locks, closers, overhead stops, exit devices, and any electrified hardware. General Contractors selected installers for the ' entire project shall be in attendance. Review any electrical hardware items for proper operation and hook up with Low Voltage Technician responsible for hook up. Training shall Include use of installation instructions, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples. 1. Submit a letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting was held and who was in attendance, to the Architect, Owner and supplier. G. Post-Installation Walk Through: After installation of hardware, coordinate with hardware supplier and Manufacturers representative of continuous hinges, locks, closers and exit devices. Inspect ' hardware for proper installation and function. Document compliance. Hardware supplier and Manufacturers representative shall then meet with Owner to explain functions, use and maintenance of all types of hardware installed. ' 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: I 1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage. 3. Mark hardware to correspond with approved Hardware Schedule. 4. Permanent cores and keys (prepared acx:orciing to the accepted keying schedule) shalt be delivered to Owner and installed by Mid-West Lock. 5. Compare delivered hardware to Approved Hardware Schedule. Report any shortages or damaged materials th Architect and Supplier within 24 hours of delivery. Shortages not reported will be the Contractor's responsibility. 6. Store hardware in a secured and dry environment to protect against loss, theft and damage. 1.5 COORDINATION A Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other Work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Dn~wings of other Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security system, and building control system. 1. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference between supplier, installers and related trades to review materials, procedures and coordinating related work. PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 3 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Comply with Division 1 requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer's publicly published warranty must be greater than or equal to: 1. Mechanical Grade One Locksets: 7 Years 2. Electrified locksets: 2 Years 3. Architectural Grade Panic Exit Haniware: 5 Years 4. Panic Exit Hardware Trim: 5 Years 5. Mechanical Door Closer Body: 10 Years 6. Electromechanicalavd Electronic products 2 Years C. Provide written verification of manufacturer's standard published warranty. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Fumish complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owners continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' fuU maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in manufacture and installation of original products. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Door Hardware: 1. 1 Case Closers Bodies 2. 2 Locksets (Classroom Function) 3. Electrical Parts: a. 2 Electrified hinges of each type supplied b. 2 Electric power transfers of each type supplied c. 2 Power Supplies (1-For Exit DevicesN-For Locksets) PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SCREWS AND FASTENERS A. Fasteners: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors. Finish screw heads th match surface of hinges. 2.2 BUTT HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." 1. Hinge Sizes: Provide the following hinges in widths sufficient to minimally clear trim. DOOR HARDWARE ~ 087100 - 4 OF 42 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER Thickness Size 2-1/4 inch Doors 5 inch by 5 inch ' 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch 2. Quantity: a. 1 pair per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. ' b. 1 additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fractions thereof. 3. Applications: a. Exterior out swinging doors: Type 4 x NRP. b. Exterior in swinging doors and vestibule doors: Type 3. c. Interior doors over 36 Inches in width: Type 3. d. Interior doors 36 inches or less: Type 1. e. Exterior and reversed beveled interior lockable doors: Non-removable loose pin (NRP) ' hinges. f. Tips: Flat button unless otherwise indicated in hardware groups. 4. Acxeptable Manufacturers and Products: L Type A~N~ Bommer Haoer McKinney Stanlev~ Type 1 (0.134) A8112 665000 661279 TA2714 FBB179 Type 2 (0.134) A5112 665002 661191 TA2314 FBB191 Type 3 (0.180) A8111 665004 661168 T4A3786 FBB168 Type 4 (0.180) A5111 665006 661199 T4A3386 FBB199 ' 2.3 ELECTRIC HINGES A. Provide electric hinges with plug connectors with sufFcient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric hardware devices and power supplies. If plug connectors are not available, coordinate installation and hook-up of hardware with supplier and a company that is licensed by the Local Electricity Board. Hinges shall be UL fire tested and listed for ' labeled doors up to and including Class °A". B. Where electrified locks and exits are specified, provide wiring harness in 15 foot lorl9 that will plug directly into frame wiring harnesses for connection to power supply. ' 2.4 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES A. Automatic Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge. B. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge. C. Acxeptable Manufacturers and Products: DCI a er Ives McKinney Rockwood Trimco Manual-Metal Door 780E 282D FB458 F601 M 555 3915 Auto-Metal Door 842 292D FB31 P FB06M 1842 3810 Dust Proof Strike 82 280X DP2 DPS3 570 3911 ' Auto- Metal Door- LBB 840 x 8BFB 295M FB32 FB04MFB1 1848 3810x3850 2.5 REMOVABLE MULLIONS ' A. Provide mullions with keyed flop-mounting bracket. B. Provide UL Listed at retied openings. ' C. Provide complete with spacer blocks and brackets as required for frame and floor conditions. D. Provide mullion as same manufacturer as exft devices. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 5 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.6 LOCKSETS/LATCHSETS A. Provide wrought boxes and curved lip strikes with lip length sufficient to minimally clear trim. B. Heavy Duty Morose Type: 1. Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.13 requirements Series 1000 Operational Grade 1 mortise locks. 2. Provide locks and latch sets in the function as specified in function as specified in hardware sets. 3. Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1 accessibility requirements. 4. Provide locks with reversible handing of lock without disassembly of lock. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Corbin-Russwin Sa ent Yale Lock ML2000 8200 8800FL Trim-Sect. LWA LNJ CRR High Security ML2000VR x SST 9200 x SLD 8800FL x LFE 2.7 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM A Access Control System and all necessary equipment to properly operate security door hardware to be provide by Owner. (Division 26) B. Interfacing of this equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsibility of the Access Control System Supplier. 2.8 ROLLER LATCHES: A. Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.16 for E09101. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns DCI Hager Ives McKinney Rockwood Trimco 550 x SP2 4030 x 4030C 1443 RL30A RL1A 591 1159 x 1159 2.9 EXIT DEVICES A. Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.3 requirements for Grade 1. B. Provide exit devices in functions as specified In hardware groups. C. Provide exit devices by single manufacturer. D. Provide vandal resistant outside trim to discourage abuse when door is locked. Provide trim with lever design to match locks. E. Provide cylinder dogging on non-rated devices. F. For doors with namrnr stiles, or as listed in hardware sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2 inch wide stiles. G. Arohitecturai Grade: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Corbin-Russwin Von Du rin Yale Wide Stile ED5000S XP98 Series 7150 Series Narrow Stile ED4000S -- 7250 Series Active Trim 900 Series 996E 600 Series DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 OF 42 PHASE THREE - BiD~ PACKAGES ' 2.10 CYLINDERS AND KEYING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' A. Provide temporary keyed construction cylinders and keys for all doors during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and cores shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or fumished on the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. ' B. Provide locksets, cylinders and cores that will accept Owners existing faed Dore MEDECO keyed cylinders C. Provide permanent cylinders, keys, master keys, change keys and additional key blanks, purchased from Mid-West Lock 612-722-7233 attn: Lisa where facility existing records are held. Permanent cylinders and keys shall not be packed with locks. Should any permanent keys and/or cores be sent anywhere other than previously stated, they shall be required to be replace at no additional cost to the Owner. Mid-West Lock shall install permanent cores when requested by Owner. D. Keys: Provide cut keys that are nickel silver and furnished with a large bow. Provide industry standard visual key control stamping for each permanent cut key. Fumish keys in the following quantities. a. 3 each Change Keys per cylinder. b. 6 each Master Keys per master key group. c. 15 each Construction keys. E. Visual Key Control: 1. Stamped °Duplication Prohibited" 2. Stamp with key symbol -Visual on Keys, Concealed on cylinders. 2.11 KEY CONTROL CABINET A. Key Control Cabinet: Furnish BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, label, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of number of locks. 1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Telkee, a Tri Palm International Company: RWC/AWC Series. b. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS): c. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. (LUN): 1200 Series. d. MMF Industries (MMF): 201-8000-03 Series. 2.12 KEY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A Provide key management software capable of running in Windows 98, 2000, ME, Nt or XP. B. Software shall provide tracking, issuing, and collecting and transferring information regarding keys, doors, and hardware. C. Provide complete bitting list on computer disc for Owner's use. D. Provide $500 allowance for training of Owner's personnel on the proper operation and application of the key management software. 2.13 OPERATING TRIM A Push Plates:.050 in thickness. Beveled edges (B4E). 1. Size: 8 inch by 16 inch. Provide 4 inch by 16 inch where 8 inch by 16 Inch is not applicable due to door conditions. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: u s Haaer Hiawatha Ives McKinney Rockwood Trimco PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 7 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4 inch x 16 inch 54 30S 200E 8200 P053 70C 1001-3 8 inch x 16 inch 57 30S 200K 8200 P055 70F 1001-11 B. Door Pulls: 1-1/4 inch round material, 18 inch screw centers. 1. Provide set screw mounting similar to Rodkuvood type "5HD" for free ends and common ends. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Bums Haoer H'iawa a cl~nne Rockwood Trimco 1 7/.', 18" CTC OS M39G 23Q HG122 OP9017 RM202 1191-5J C. Push/Puli Bars: 1. Push bar 3 inches less than door width. 2. Provide set screw mounting similar to Rockwood type "5HD' for free ends and common ends. 3. Coordinate with door supplier to provide proper blocking for mounting. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Burns Hager Hiawatha McKinney Rockwood Trimco 1 %: ,18" CTC OS M422 x M39G 167 HG114 x HG122 P6820- RM252 1747 OP9017 D. Push/Pull Plates: 1. 4" X 16" .050 B4E Push Plate x 8" CTC'/z RD. Pull. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Bums Hager Hiawatha ~ Ives McKinney Rockwood Trimoo 54216 31G 200E x 581 8305-816 DP1603 126 x 70C 1014-3B 2.14 COORDINATORS A Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.2. B. Provide stop-mounted wordinators as listed in hardware sets. Provide coordinators complete with necessary closer brackets and special strike preparations for vertical rod exit devices as required. C. Provide proper size coordinators for size of door, plus filler piece to complete total length of frame stop. D. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: DCI Haoer Ives MclGnnev Rockwood Trimoo Bar Type Coordinator 600 Series 297D COR7G CSM572 1600 3094 2.15 DOOR CLOSERS A. Fully adjustable type with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 through 6; field adjustable per door size and frequency of use. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 requirements for Grade 1 and shall be B. Provide closers with sweep, latch, and back check features. C. Provide parallel rigid arm for closers mounted on push side of opening. D. Where closers are indicated to be delayed action, provide units designed with an adjustable delay that holds door open before closing cycle begins. Consult with Owner for time of delay. E. Provide closers that complying with ANSI/ICC A117.1 provisions for door opening force for all interior doors. F. Accessories: Mounting brackets, drop plates, special shoes required by door and frames conditions. G. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Corbin-Russwin LCN Norton Saroent Yale DC6000 4041 7500 351 4400 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.16 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS ' A. Low Energy Operator and all necessary equipment to properly operate door to be provided by Section 087113. 2.17 STOPS AND HOLDERS ' A. Ovefiead Stops: 1. Provide ovefiead stop for doors that are capable of swinging more than 145 degrees before striking wall and where door strikes fixed object such as sink, cabinet, and similar obstructions. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Glynn~lohnson Rixson Sager~i ' Heavy Duty Concealed GJ-100 6-Series 690 Heavy Duty Surface GJ-90 9~eries 590 Standard Duty Surface GJ-450 10-Series 1540 ' 2 18 PROTECTION PLATES . A. Kick Plates: 0.050, beveled edges (B4E) and countersunk screw attachment. ' 1. Widths: 2 inches less than door width. 2. Height: 12 inches or 1/2 inch less than height of bottom rail, whichever is less. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bums ' b. Hager. c. Hiawatha. d. Ives. ' e. McKinney. f. Roc~cvvood ' g. Trimco B. Armor Plates: 0.050, beveled edges (B4E) and countersunk screw attachment. 1. Widths: 2 inches less than door width. 2. Height: 38 inches, and complying with door conditions. ' 3. Where indicated for fire-rated doors, protection plates shall be installed in accordance with the listing of the door. Field-installed protection plates shall be labeled and installed in accordance with their listing. ' 4. Provide cut outs as required for attachment of other hardware speaf~ed. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Burns b. Hager. c. Hiawatha. d. Ives. e. McKinney. ' f. Rockwood g. Trimco ' C. Trim Protectors: 3/8" x 1-1/2" solid stainless steel bar with 3-1/4" projection and 14" CTC. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: cKinne Rockwood Trimco ' TPB05 SD1260 1633 ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 9 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.19 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall Stops: Provide wall stops as required for surrounding conditions for interior doors scheduled for "Wall Stop", unless other stops are specified. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Burns DCI H~a er Ives McKinnev Roc Trimco Convex 570 3210 236W WS406CVX WS01 407 1270WX Concave 575 3211 232W WS407CCV WS02 410 1270WV B. Magnetic Wall Holders 1. UL listed, triple voltage, field-selectable units. Provide extension pieces as required to meet wall wnditions. 2. Aaeptable Manufacturers and Products: LCN ixson Sar en Flush-Mount SEM7850 FM998 1561 2.20 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING, AND GASKETING A. Thresholds: Provide full-saddle type threshok! unless floor conditions dictate or detailed othervvise. 1. Provide flat saddles at fire rated doors where combustible material is indicated on both sides. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager MclGnnev National Guard Pemko Reese Thermal Break 421 S MCK252 x 3FG 8425 252 x 3FG S471 B. Sweeps: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Haoer MclUnnev National Guard Pemko Reese Neoprene 750S MCK315N 200N 315N 323 C. Weatherstrip: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: McKinnev ational Guard Pemko Reese Solid Bar MCK2891 PK 770U 2891 PK 755 2. Where solid bar weatherstrip is used, install weather strip prior to other surface hardware such as door closers, exit devices ect. Supplier to ensure proper templating of surface hardware allowing for the thickness of the weatherstrip. D. Rain Drips: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager McKinnev National Guard Pemko Reese 810S MCK346 16 346 R201 E. Automatic Door Bottoms: Units shall be provided with alight-spring action which reduces the operating force to 3-5 pounds required for actuation. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: McKinnev Pemko MCK4131 RL 4131 RL MCK420PKL 420PKL F. Head and Jamb Gasketing: 1. Coordinate with door manufacturer. Comply with UL10C for intumescent fire and smoke material. 2. Provide smoke gasket at each labeled opening similar to McKinney MCKS88 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -10 OF 42 PHASE THREE - BrD PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.21 CLOTHES HOOKS ' A. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: Don~lo Rockwood 302 796 ' 2.22 FIRE DEPARTMENT ACCESS BOX A. Key Lock Boxes: Recess- mounted unit. 1/4 inch plate steel housing, 1/2 inch thick steel door with interior gasket seal and stainless steel door hinge, designed for storage of 2 keys with tamper ' switches to connect to intrusion detection system. 1. Exterior Dimensions: a. Recessed mount - 7 inches H by 7 inches W by 3 1/4 inches D. ' 2. Lock: UL Listed. Doubleaction rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by biased cut key. 1/8 inch thick stainless steel dust cover. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. ' 4. Colors: Dark Bronze. B. Acceptable manufacturers and products: ' 1. Dama R3 2. Knox Box 3200 Series 3. Tru-Lock, Eau Claire, WI ' 2.23 ELECTROMECHANICAL HARDWARE A. The electrical products contained within this Specification represent a complete engineennd system. If alternate electrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing a cemplete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well as power supplies, power transfers and alt required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer and electrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring ' is coordinated to provide a complete and working system. B. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized molex plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door ' wiring harnesses, frame wiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies. C. Where Electrfied functions are specified, provide manufacturer's recommended power supply, with power sufficient to operate electrified function specified. ' 1. Electrical: Electrical boxes in walls, electrical service, conductors and final connections provided under Division 26: D. Electrified Power Transfer: Provide mortised electric power transfer device with sufficient number and gage of conductors to axommodate function of hardware specified. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: r i u wi EL-EPT/EL-EPTL. ' Sargent EL-EPT/EPTL. Securitron EL-EPT/EL-EPTL. ' Von Duprin EPT-2/EPT-10. ' PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 -11 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Door position switches: 1. Verify voltage requirements with electrical engineer. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Locknetics SDC Securitron Saroent Concealed 679-05 MC-4 DPS 3287 2.24 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of quality equal to or greater than that of specfied door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standarcJ. B. Fasteners: Provide screws per commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications. 2.25 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Exposed Metal Finishes: BHMA 626 /US26D =Satin Chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. BHMA 652 /US26D =Satin Chromium plated over nickel, over Steel base metal. BHMA 630 /US32D =Satin Stainless Steel, over stainless- steel base material. Hinges-Exterior: 630 /US32D Hinges-Interior: 652 /US26D Locksets: 626 /US26D Closers: 689 / AL Aluminum painthd over any base material. Exit Devices: 630 /US32D Pushes, Pulls, Kick Plates: 630 /US32D Armor Plates: 630 /US32D Overhead Stops 8 Holders: 630 /US32D Door Stops: 630 /US32D Thresholds: AL -Mill finish aluminum Weatherstrip: AL -Mill finish aluminum Sweep Strips: AL -Mill finish aluminum Automatic Door Bottoms (Conc) AL -Mill finish aluminum Automatic Door Bottoms (Surf) SN -Satin nickel anodized aluminum Rain Drips: AL -Mill finish aluminum Miscellaneous Items: US26D PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -12 OF 42 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrfied door hardware installation. ' C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. 1. Surface-Appii~ Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames per ANSI A250.6. ' B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." ' 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surtace protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surFace-mounted items until ' finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space ' fasteners and anchors acxordfng to industry standards. C. Low Energy Operator Wall Switches: ' 1. Actuating control switches: a. Shall be mounted between 30 inches and 36 inches above the finished floor. b. Shall be located at least 30 inches to 60 inches from the pull arc of the swing of the door but never more than 12 feet. ' c. Must remain accessible from the swing side when the door is opened. d. Not be located in a position where the user would be in the path of the moving door. ' e. Mounted so the user is in full sight of the door when activating the swifich. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. ' E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, ff not indicated, [above accessible ceilings] [in equipment room]. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. ' 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage qualified independent ' Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed Work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether ' door hardware is property installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING ' A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 -13 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and fio comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from latch, measured to leading edge of door. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of Substantial Completion, schedule installer's architectural hardware consultant to examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door haniware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surtaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A Engagefactory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 1. 3.8 HARDWARE GROUPS A. Furnish hardware items in quantities indicated unless additional hardware is required for complete and operable facility. Ensure completeness, proper function, and proper application of hardware for each door. B. Refer to door schedule for hardware sets required at each door opening. Ignore hardware sets not used on door schedule. GROUP-2.1 Priivacy Hinges as specified 1 Privacy Set ML2030 x M34 x M19V 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 10-Series 1 Clothes Hook Rockwood 796 1 Gasket 1 Auto Door Bottom 4131 RL (Semi-Mortised) Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by turning inside thumbtum. Turning inside thumbtum pro- jects deadbolt, secures outside lever and changes occupancy indicator to "OCC" • Outside fever unlocked by emergency tool outside. • Rotating inside lever retracts latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously allowing free egress changes occupancy indicator to "VAC". GROUP~.O Locked -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever acctive unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. DOOR HARDWARE 087700 -14 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 ' GROUP-3.7 Locked -Classroom Function COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2055 ' 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket Functions: ' • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always alwws free egress. ' GROUP-3.12 Locked -Classroom Function Hinges as specfied 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Ovefiead Stop Rixson 10-Series 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-3.2 Locked -Classroom Function Hinges as specified ' 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Weatherstrip 1 Auto Door Bottom 420PKL ' Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. ' • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-3.5 Locked -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Manual Flushbolt (Top Only) 1 Lockset ML2055 2 Stops as required ' 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. ' • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-4.0 Locked -Storeroom Function Hinges as specfied 1 Lockset ML2057 1 Stop as required ' 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. ' • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. I ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 -15 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER GROUP-4.1 Locked -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified . 1 Lockset ML2057 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 10-Series 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-5.0 Locked -Office Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2051 1 Stop as required 1 Clothes Hook Rockwood 796 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally dosed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by pressing toggle actuator in edge of door. • Key in outside cylinder retn3cts latchbolt. • Rotating inside lever allows free egress. • Rotating inside lever does not unlock outside lever until toggle actuator in edge of door is manually pressed to unlock position. GROUP-6.0 Shower Door Hinges Hvy Wt. x °HT' US32D 1 Flush Pull Rockwood 94 x TORX 1 Roller Latch Rockwood 591 x TORX 1 Stop as required 3 Silencers GROUP-72.0 Privacy -Closer Hinges as specified 1 Privacy Set ML2030 x M34 x M19V 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Clothes Hook Rockwood 796 1 Gasket 1 Auto Door Bottom 4131 RL (Semi-Mortised) Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever acctivve unless locked by turning inside thumbtum. Turning inside thumbturn pro- jests deadbok, secures outside lever and changes occupancy indicator to "OCC' • Outside lever unlocked by emergency tool outside. • Rotating inside lever retracts latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously ailow(ng free egress changes occupancy indicator tD "VAC". GROUP-72.1 Privacy -Closer Hinges as specifred 1 Privacy Set ML2030 x M34 x M19V 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 9-Series 1 Clothes Hook Rockwood 796 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -16 OF 42 PHASE THREE - f3_ ID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Gasket 1 Auto Door Bottom 4131 RL (Semi-Mortised) Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by turning inside thumbturn. Turning inside thumbtum pro- ' jests deadbok, secures outside lever and changes occupancy indicator to "OCC" • Outside lever unlocked by emergency tool outside. • Rotating inside lever retracts latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously allowing free egress changes occupancy indicator to "VAC". ' GROUP-12.2 Privacy -Closer Hinges as specified US32D 1 Privacy Set ML2030 x M34 x M19V _ ' 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop ' 1 Clothes Hook Rockwood 796 1 Gasket 1 Auto Door Bottom 4131 RL (Semi-Mortised) Functions: ' • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by taming inside thumbtum. Taming inside thumbtum pro- jests deadbolt, secures outside lever and changes occupancy indicator to °OCC" ' • Outside lever unlocked by emergency tool outside. • Rotating inside lever retracts IatchboR and deadboft simultaneously allowing free egress changes occupancy indicator to °VAC'. GROUP-73.0 Locked -Closer -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket ' Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. ' • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-13.1 Locked -Closer - Ciassroom Function ' Hinges as speafied 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate ' 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket Functions: ' • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 -17 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER GROUP-13.2 Locked -Closer -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2055 1 Closer 1 Armor Plate 1 Wail Holder Rockwood 494 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-13.52 Locked -Closer -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Auto Flush Bolt (Top Only) 1 Lockset ML2055 2 Closers 1 Coordinator w/brkts 2 Armor Plates 1 Wall Holder Rockwood 494 1 Overhead Holder/Stop Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket 1 Center Seal S773 Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-13.54 Locked -Closer -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Auto Flush Bolt 1 Dust Proof Strike 1 Lockset ML2055 2 Closers w/Spring Stop Hold-0pen Arms 1 Coordinator w/brkts 2 Armor Plates 1 Trim Protection Bar Rockwood SD1260 1 Gasket .. 1 Center Seal S773 Functions: • Door normally closed and latched. • Outside lever active unless locked by key in outside cylinder. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-14.0 Locked -Closer -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2057 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -18 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID. PACKAGES ' 1 1 GROUP-14.4 Locked -Closer -Storeroom Function COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ML2057 1 Closer w/Stop Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchboft. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-14.42 Locked -Closer -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified ' 1 Lockset ML2057 1 Closer w/Spring Stop Arm x DA 1 Armor Paate . 1 1 Trim Protection Bar Rockwood SD1260 1 Gasket Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. ' • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts IatchboR. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. ' GROUP-14.5 Locked -Closer -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Auto Flushbolts 1 Dust Proof Strike ' 1 Lockset ML2057 2 Closers x DA ' 1 Coordinator w/brkts 2 Armor Plates 1 Trim Protection Bar Rockwood SD1260 2 Stops as required 1 Gasket ' 1 Center Seal S773 Functions: ' • Door normally closed latched and secured. • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. ' GROUP-14.61 Locked -Closer -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Auto Flushbolts 1 Dust Proof Strike ' 1 Lockset ML2057 2 Closers x DA 1 Coordinator w/brkts ' 2 Armor Plates 1 Trim Protection Bar Rockwood SD7260 2 Overhead Stops Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket ' 1 Center Seal S773 Functions: • Door normally closed latched and secured. ' • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts la~hbolt. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 -19 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER GROUP-14.52 Locksd -Closer -Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Auto Flushbolts (Top Only) 1 Lockset ML2057 2 Closers 1 Coordinator w/brkts 2 Armor Plates 2 Wall Holders Rockwood 494 1 Gasket 1 Center Seal S773 Functlons: • Door normally closed latched and secured. • Outside lever always locked. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchboR. • Rotating inside lever always allows free egress. GROUP-16.0 Push and Pull Hinges as specified 1 Push Plate (B4E) 1 Offset Puil Rockwood BF168 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket GROUP-16A Push and Pull Hinges as specified 1 Push Plate (B4E) 1 Offset Pull Rockwood BF168 1 Closer w/Stop Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Gasket GROUP-77.0 Pull -Deadlock Hinges as specified x HT 1 Deadlock ML2011 1 Flush Pull Rockwood 94DLS GROUP-17.2 Puil -Passage Latch Hinges Hvy Wt. as specfied x HT c/r 1 Latchset MI2010VR x SST 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket (Installer to cut into 10° Strips before installation) GROUP-20.0 Hardware by others All hardware furnished by door manufacturer or specified elsewhere. GROUP-41.0 Access Controlled (Fail-Secure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Juncfion Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (Fail-Secure) 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 20 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID. PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric lock and ' door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: ' Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. ' Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) ' Access Control System shall tog unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. ' SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-41.1 Access Controlled (Fail-Secure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Juncction Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (Fail-Secure) ' 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket ' 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram ' 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections ~ electric power transfer, electric lock and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. " ' 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bil'ity of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: I Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- ' tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) ' Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (progremmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. ' SEE ELEVATION D/A GRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION 1 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 21 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER GROUP~1.2 Access Controlled (Fails®cure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (FaihSecure) 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Threshold 1 Automatic Door Bottom 420PKL 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Acxess Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric lock and door position switch; Electrical Service to power suppty shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (FailSecure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-41.3 Access Controlled (Fall-Secure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (Fail~ecure) 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Weather Strip 1 Automatic Door Bottom 420PKL 1 Power Suppty 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric lock and door position switch; Electrtcal Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 22 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. ' Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). ' Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-41.4 Access Controlled (Fall-Secure) ' Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-16 ' 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (Fail-Secure) 1 Closer w/Spring stop Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Gasket 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, wnductors, and final connections th electric power transfer, electric lock and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Secction shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: ' Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. ' Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchboft for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is lodced~ (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows fare egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-41.51 Access Controlled (FaII,Secure) Hinges as specified ' 1 Electrk: Power Transfer 1 Jurtctlon Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Auto Flushbolt ' 1 Dust Proof Strike 1 Lockset ML20905 x M92 (Fail-Secure) 2 Closers w/Delayed Action 1 Coordinator w/Brkts 1 2 Armor Plates 1 Trim Protection Bar 2 Overhead Stops Rixson 9-Series 1 Gasket 1 Center Seal Pemko 773 1 Power Supply 2 Door Position Switches ' 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 23 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric lock and door position switches; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Doors normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 3 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-42.0 Access Controlled (Fall-Secure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20904 x M92 (Fail-Secure) 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Power Supply 1 Door Positbn Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point wring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric todc and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Both levers always locked preventing passage (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks both levers. Mechanical key from corridor 165 retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked po- sition. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center locks both levers. (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 4 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-65.0 Exit -Single Door -Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA x 955 Cylinders as Required 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 24 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES . .. ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' Function: Door normally closed, latched and secured. ' Outside Lever locked or unlocked by key outside. Depressing touchpad from inside allows free egress at all times. GROUP-65.2 F~cit - Single Door -Classroom Function ' Hinges as specfied 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA x 955 Cylinders as Required ' 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Extended Wall Stop as required ' 1 Gasket Function: Door normaly closed, latched and secun~l. Outside Lever locked or unlocked by key outside. ' Depressing touchpad from inside allows free egress at ail times. GROUP-64.0 Exlt -Single Door -Access Controlled Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-18 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA x M92 x 9905 Cylinders as Required 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch ' 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 28 ' 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric exit and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 28. 1 Intertadng of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. ' Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Med~anical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is ' locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall a9 unsecured violation if door is not dosed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). ' Depressing touchpad inside always allows free egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION D/AGRAAI! # 5 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-64.2 Exit-StngleDoor-Access Controlled 1 Hinges as spedfied 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box - MdGnney MG-18 ' c/r 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA x M92 x 9905 Cylinders as Required PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 25 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Threshold 1 Auk Door Bottom 420PKL 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wir(ng Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections ~ electric power transfer, electric exit and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fall-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Cana Access System software). Depressing touchpad inside always allows free egress and shunts alarm. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 5 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-64.3 Exit -Single Door -Night-Latch Function Hinges as specified 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA x 957 Cylinders as Required 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). -- Mechanical key in outside trim unlocks outside lever. Key can only be removed In locked position. Depressing touchpad Inside always allows free egress and shunts alarm. GROUP-64.9 Exit -Single Door -Access Controlled -Delayed Egress Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Electric Transfer Hinge 1 Junction Box -McKinney MG-16 1 Rim Exit ED5200SA-D x M93 x 9903 (Fail-Safe) Cylinders as Required 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop as required 1 Gasket 1 Power Supply 1 Power Module HES 2005 x (2) 2004 2 Door Position Swishes (1-for Access Control system/1 for delayed egress system) 1 Elevation Diagram DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 26 OF 42 PHASE THREE - Blp PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 ' 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, and final connections to electric power transfer, electric exit and door position switch; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. ' Function: Door is normally closed, latched and secured. Outside lever electriglly locked preventing entry (Fail-Safe). 1 Mechanical key in outside trim retracts IatchboR for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Entry by mechanical key in trim will not affect the alarm. Delayed egress exit device secures door in the locked mode with RED led indicating locked mode status. ' A valid credential will disam~r device and unlock outside lever for entry. Re-Lock and rearm time is set by access control system. Device cannot be armed or reset if the door is not closed. When awned, the device will alarm if the ' door is tampered with or forced open. Depressing the push pad for less than 1 second will sound the device alarm without initiating the alarm status. Depressing the push pad for more than 1 second will initiate an irreversible local audible alam~, the . RED led will change to Amber indicating alarm status, and the person will be held at the door for 15 seconds. After the 15 second delay, the device releases for egress, the led changes to Garen and the alarm changes to a steady tone and will continue until reset. ' Alarm Outputs: Two sets of normally open and normally closed contacts. Contacts change only dur- ing alarm status. One set of contacts changes when device delay cycle has started. One set of con- ~cts changes when device has released. The exit device and lever trim will release upon actuation of automatic fire detection system, loss of ' power and/or signal from Fire Command center Mechanical key on the device is used for resetting after alarm, putting the device into bypass mode (Not Alarmed) and momentary egress (resets after 20 seconds) ' SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # B AT END OF SECTION GROUP 713A F_xterior Classroom Intruder Function Hinges as specified _ ' 1 Electric Transfer Hinge 1 Lockset ML2052VR X M92 1 Closer w/Spring Stop Hold-Open Arm ' 1 Kidc Plate 1 Latch Guard 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip ' 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip 1 Door Position Switch ' 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram Connection by Electrical. Door normally closed, latched and secure. ' Outside lever locked and un-locked by mechanical key from either side. Rotating inside lever allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Card access system shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (pro- ' grammed by card access system manager). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 7 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-778.2 Hose Tower Door ' Hinges McKinney TA3350 1 Pull Rockwood 111 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 27 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER' 1 Surface Boft Rockwood5132-8 1 Padlock Medeco 54K31 F00 w/cha(n & clevis GROUP-118.4 Exterior-Store Door Function -Roof Access Hinges as specified 1 Electric Transfer Hinge 1 Lockset ML2022 x M92 1 Closer w/Spring Stop Hold-Open Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Latch Guard Rockwood 320 US32D 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Drip Sweep Strip 345NB 1 Auto Door Btm 420PKL 1 Rain Drip 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram Connection by Electrical. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always free. Deadboft can be extended or retracted by key either side. Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. Card access system shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limft (pro- grammed by cans access system manager). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 7 A~T END OF SECTION GROUP-141A Electrically Controlled (Fail-Secure) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box --McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905VR x M92 (Fail-Secure) 1 Closer with Spring Stop Arm 1 Kick Piste 1 Latch Guard Rockwood 320 US32D 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Swftch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-PoiM Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 2B 1 Electrical Boxes, Conductors, and Final Connections to electric power transfer, electric lock; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Divisron 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchboft for entry. Key can only be removed in locked position. Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 28 OF 42 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). ' SEE ELEVATION D/AGRAM # 2 AT END OP SECTION GROUP-141.42 Electrically Controlled (Fail-Secure) Hinges as specified ' 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Junction Box - McKinney MG-16 1 Lockset ML20905VR x M92 (Fail-Secure) ' 1 Closer with Spring Stop Hold-0pen Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Latch Guard Rockwood 320 US32D ' 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical Boxes, Conductors, and Final Connections to electric power transfer, electric lock; Electrical Service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. ' 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functions: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked position. Inside lever always alk>ws free egress and shunts alarm. ' Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is kx~ced (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit ' (programmed from Card Access System software). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-164.4 Exit -Single Door - Nijght Latch Function Hinges as specfied 1 Rim Exit ED5200S x K157 Cylinders as Required 1 9 Vandal Pull Rockwood VRT22C 1 Closer with Spring Stop Hold-0pen Arm 1 Kidc Plate 1 Latch Guard Rockwood 320 US32D ' 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip ' 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip . 1 Door Position Switch 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram ' 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical Boxes, Conductors, and final connections to door position switch shall be the responsibility of Division 26. ' 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 29 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER Function: Door is normally closed, latched and secured. Key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt and door can be pulled open. Key can only be removed in locked position. Depressing touchpad inside allows free egress at all times. Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Cana Access Systhm software). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 7 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-200.8 Single -Aluminum -Low Energy Operators Hinges as specified 2 Sets Push/Pull Bars 1 Low Energy Operator by Section 087113 1 Closer 1 Drop Plate 1 Blade Stop Spacer 1 Shoe Support 2 Overhead Stops Rixson 6 Series 1 Threshold 1 Rain Drip (Full width of Frame) Match finish of framing material 1 Set Weatherstrip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 2 Sweep Strips (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, final connections to Low Energy Operathr wall switches and electrical service to Low Energy Operator, shall be the responsibility of Division 26. Function: Pressing either low energy operator switch activates low energy operator and door is powered open at a safe speed as indicated in ANSI A117.1. Door stands open for preset time than closes. Vestibule switch activates low energy operator for exterior door only. SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 8 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-260.0 Single -Exterior -Narrow Style Exit - (Exit Only) Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Rim Exit ED4200S x M92 UDogging 1 Closer 1 Drop Plate 1 Blade Stop Spacer 1 Shoe Support 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 6 Series 1 Door Position Switch 1 Threshold 1 Rain Drip (Full width of Frame) Match finish of framing material 1 Set Weatherstrip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 1 Sweep Strip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, final connections to electric power transfer, electric exit device, door position switch shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Interfacing of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Function: Door normally closed, latched and secured. No outside trim for access. DOOR HARDWARE ~ 087100 - 30 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Depressing touchpad inside allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. P-ccess Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit ' (programmed from Access Control System software). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 9 AT END OF SECTION GROUP-264.0 Exit Night latch Function -Access Control)®d ' Hinges as specified 1 Electric Power Transfer 1 Rim Exit ED4200 x K157 x M92 x M94 ' Cylinders as Required 1 Offset Pull 1 Closer ' 1 Drop Plate 1 Blade Stop Spacer 1 Shoe Support 1 Overhead Stop Rixson 6 Series ' 1 Power Supply 1 Door Position Switch 1 Threshold 1 Rain Drip (Full width of Frame) Match finish of framing material ' 1 Set Weatherstrip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 1 Sweep Strip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 1 Elevation Diagram ' 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 Access Control by Division 26 1 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, final connections to electric power transfer, electric exit device, door position switch, electrical service to power supply shall be the responsibility of Division 26. ' 1 Interfacing of Alrcess Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Function: ' Door normally closed, latched and secured. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt and door can be pulled open. Presenting authorized card energizes solenoid in exit device retractlng latchbolt and Door can be pulled open. ' Depressing touchpad inside allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Access Control System software). ' SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 5 AT END OP SECTION GROUP-264.58 Exit- Night latch Function -Access Control)®d -Low Energy Operator Hinges as specfied _ 2 Electric Power Transfer 1 Rim Exit ED4200S x M92 x M94 1 Rim Exit ED4200S x K157 x M92 x M94 ' 2 Offset Pulls 1 Low Energy Operator by Section 087113 1 Closer 1 Drop Plate ' 1 Blade Stop Spacer 1 Shoe Support 1 Keyed Mullion x Mullion Stabilizers Cylinders as Required 2 Overhead Stop Rixson 6 Series 1 Power Supply 2 Door Position Switches ' 2 Automatic Door Bottoms 420PKL 1 Set Weatherstrip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 087700 - 31 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1 Elevation Diagram 1 Point to-Point Wiring Diagram 1 ~uxess Control by Division 26 4 Electrical boxes in walls, conductors, final connections to electric power transfers, electric exit devices, door position switches, Low Energy Operator wall switches, electrical service to power supply and Low Energy Operator shall be the responsibility of Division 26. 1 Intertaang of Access Control equipment with hardware specified in this Section shall be the responsi- bility of the Access Control System Supplier. Functlon: Doors normally closed, latched and secured. Day Mode: Timed event from Access Control System software energizes relay contact (DPDT -Maintained) activating vestibule low energy operator wall switch and energizes solenoids in both exit devices retracting latchbolts for push pull operation. Pressing either low energy operator switch activates opera~r and powers open door at a safe speed as indicated in ANSI A117.1. Door stands open for preset time than closes. Vestibule switch activates low energy operator for vestibule door only. Night Mode: Timed event from Access Control System software disrupts circult to relay contact (DPDT -- Maintained)disrupting circuit (disables) to vestibule low energy operator wall switch and disrupts cirouit to solenoids in both exit devices releasing (Extending) latchbolts securing doors from the vestibule side. Presenting authorized credential energizes solenoid in exit device retracting fatchbolt and acti- vates outside kwv energy operator wall switch. Door can be pulled open or pressing L.E.O. wall switch will power door open. After preset time set by Access Control System, circuit is disrupted, latchbolt is released and out side L.E.O. switch is deactivated. Pressing Interior wall switch energizes solenoid retracting IatchboR than activates low energy operator and powers door open. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt and door can be pulled open. Depressing touchpad's inside allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if doors are not closed within a preset time Ilmit (programmed from Access Control System software). SEE ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 10 AT END OF SECTION NOTE: The following Elevation Diagrams are for reference only. Exact components, conductor requirements and installation requirements shall be verified with supplier, Owner and Architect prior to final installation and hook-up. Supplier to provide Elevation Diagrems, Point-to-Point Diagrams and Operation narratives based on material supplied. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 32 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ~,1 i~ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 7 2 Cond. 18awg To Access Control Panel PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 33 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE OPERATION: Door monitored by door position switch. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 2 4 Cond.1 i i 120VAC Fire Alarm Input 2 Cond. From Card Access Panel 2 Cond. To A Control Panel To Acxess Control Panel Verify Conductor Requirements with Acxess Control Supplier Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 34 OF 42 PHASE THREE - BID,PACKAGES 1 ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 3 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER OPERATION: ' Doors normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. ' Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) ' Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Inside lever always allows free egress and shunts alarm. 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 35 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE ~:~_~ i 120VAC Input .; Power ~ Fire Alarm Input To Card Access i SuPPIY ' --• 2 Cond. From Card Access System Panel --------~--r--~ -• 2 Cond. To Card 4 Cond.l8awc i VpriW Cenduc~nr COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 4 120VAC Fire Alarm Input 2 Cond. From Card Access Panel 4 Cond. 18awg ~ 2 Cond. To A Control Panel Position Switch ----- ~ ;o C9 -----~ ~ Electrified Lock ii i +~ ~ i Electric Power Transfer To Access Control Panel Verify Conductor Requirements with Access Control Supplier Card Reader OPERATION: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Both levers always locked preventing passage (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks both levers. Mechanical key from corridor 165 retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked po- sition. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center locks both levers. (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 36 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ELEVATION D/AGRAN- # 5 1 1 1 ~® 120VAC In ut Power Suppy Fire Alarm In ut 2 Cond. From Card Axes P nel - i J 8 Cond. To Card --- i Access Panel COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER OPERATION: ' Door normally closed, latched and secure. •• • Outside lever always locked preventing entry (Secured). A valid credential energizes solenoid and unlocks outside trim for entry. ' Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Loss of power, signal from fire alarm system, and signal from fire command center outside lever is ' locked (Secured). (Fail-Secure) Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). Depressing touchpad inside always allows free egress and shunts alarm. 1 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 37 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 6 ?ower ~~ Fire Alarm Input Tram Card Access Panel 2 Cond. to Card Access Panel N ~~ ~f ~a i - ~ Exk Device with Electrified Trim and Delayed Egress Function Electric Power Trensfer To Card Access Panel Verify Conductor Requiremerds with Card Access Supplier. Card Reader OPERATION: Door is normally closed, latched and secured. Outside lever electrically locked preventing entry (Fail-Safe). Mechanical key in outside trim retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked posi- tion. Entry by mechanical key in trim will not affect the alarm. Delayed egress exit device secures door in the locked mode with RED led indicating locked mode status. A valid credential will disarm device and unlock outside lever for entry. Re-Lock and rearm time is set by access control system. Device cannot be armed or reset if the door is not closed. When armed, the device will alarm if the door is tampered with or forced open. Depressing the push pad for less than 1 second will sound the device alarm without initiating the alarm status. Depressing the push pad for more than 1 second will initiate an irreversible local audible alarm, the RED led will change to Amber indicating alarm status, and the person will be held at the door for 15 seconds. After the 15 second delay, the device releases for egress, the led changes to Green and the alarm changes to a steady tone and will continue until reset. Alarm Outputs: Two sets of normally open and normally closed contacts. Contacts change only dur- ing alarm status. One set of contacts changes when device delay cycle has started. One set of con- tacts changes when device has released. The exit device and lever trim will release upon actuation of automatic fire detection system, loss of power and/or signal from Fire Command center Mechanical key on the device is used for resetting after alarm, putting the device into bypass mode (Not Alarmed) and momentary egress (resets after 20 seconds) DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 38 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 7 3 Cond. To Card Access Panel 3 Cond. To Card PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 0877 00 - 39 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE OPERATION: Door normally closed, latched and secure. Outside lever locked and un-locked by mechanical key from either side. Rotating inside lever allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Card access system shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (pro- grammed by card accsess system manager). COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 8 I 120VAC Input p --L---~ Q I I --- 1 ` I II ~ ' " Low Ene O erator 'C 1 II m ~I II W ~1 I1 O OI II \ ... al I I ~ ~C•I II W >,I I I CO OD ~I I I ~ ~ d I I I'O 'O CI IIC C WI IIV V ~1 II I IIN NJI II I II I II I II I II 1 II I I la I 1 W I O L ~ 3 m~ I v- ~ I •y as I c~ ° I a -~ I m 1 i \ I OPERATION: Pressing either low energy operator switch activates low energy operator_and door is powered open at a safe speed as indicated in ANSI A117.1. Door stands open for preset time than closes. Vestibule switch activates low energy operator for exterior door only. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 40 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 1 1 1 '1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION DIAGRAM # 9 2 Cond. To Access Control Panel Door Position Switch .~ i i ii ii Exit Device with °RX" ~ ~ Request-to-Exit Switch i~ ii y ~ Electric ~ ~ Power Transfer 2 Cond. To Access Control Panel OPERATION: Door normally closed, latched and secured. No outside trim for access. Depressing touchpad inside allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Access Control System software). PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087100 - 41 OF 42 DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ELEVATION D/AGRAM # 70 To Card Access Panel Verify Conductor Requiremen is wiBr Gard Acoess Supplier. W Q vl ti I Card ~ Reader ' r°-I 8 Cond Low Energy Power Flre Alann Input Supply 8 Cond. Frain Card s Panel 8 Cond 18awg S Cond. To Card Access Panel ~ Eledfic Power Transfer Exit twice wRh'RX• Request~o-Exft Switch and Lah:h Pull Bads. i Electric Power ' i Transfer Exit Device with 'RX' RequesRto-F~dt Switch and Latch Pull Bads. OPERATION: Doors normally closed, latched and secured. Day Mode: Timed event from Access Control System software energizes relay contact (DPDT -Maintained) co- tivating vestibule low energy operator wall switch and energizes solenoids in both exit devices re- tracting latchbolts for push pull operation. Pressing either low energy operator switch activates operator and powers open door at a safe speed as indicated in ANSI A117.1. Door stands open for preset time than closes. Vestibule switch activates low energy operator for vestibule door only. Night Mode: Timed event from Access Control System software disrupts circuit to relay contact (DPDT - Main- tained)disrupting circuit (disables) to vestibule low energy operator wall switch and disrupts circuit to solenoids in both exit devices releasing (Extending) latchbolts securing doors from the vestibule side. Presenting authorized credential energizes solenoid in exit device retracting latchbolt and activates outside low energy operator wall switch. Door can be pulled open or pressing L.E.O. wall switch will power door open. After preset time set by Access Control System, circuit is disrupted, latchbolt is re- leased and out side L.E.O. switch is deactivated. Pressing Interior wall switch energizes solenoid retracting latchbolt than activates low energy opera- torand powers door open. Rotating key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt and door can be pulled open. Depressing touchpad's inside allows free egress at all times and shunts alarm. Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if doors are not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Access Control System software). END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 42 OF 42 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 A. ' 1.2 A. ' B. C. ' 1.3 A. ' 1.4 A. B. i SECTION 087113 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS SECTION INCLUDES Low energy automatic swing door operators, push plate operators. RELATED V1fbRK Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Refer to Section 084113. Finish Hardware: Refer to Section 087100. Electrical: Refer to Division 26. 1. 115 VAC, single-phase, 15 amp fused circuit to door headers, two 24 VAC Class II wires between door headers and remote activation devices, 1/2 inch conduit and e{ectrical boxes at activators. Law voltage wiring for fire, security, and alarm systems, and for other electrified hardware affecting door operation. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Performance Requirements 1. Open door to 90 degrees by forces trensmitted to drive shaft and maintain a constant engagement throughout opening cycle. 2. Design operator to counteract interior stack pressure without need of additional power assist mechanisms. 3. Function as a manual door closer if power fails. 4. Provide adjustment for opening, closing, and latch speed. 5. Operators to be activated or deactivated by controls as indicated. 6. Comply with ANSI A156.19. SUBMITTALS Manufacturer's Product Data. Shop Drawings showing dimensions of operators, interface with other products, operator construction, mod cations, connections, and anchorage. . Operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists, and wiring diagrems. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM) certification that operator has been installed and inspected to comply with applicable ANSI standards. C. D. 1.5 4UALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Facfiory-treined, with minimum 5 years experience, AAADM certified. Approved by manufacturer. B. Door operators and installation shall conform to ANSI 156.19 "Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors". PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, products: 1. Besam Automatic Entrance systems, Monroe, NC, PowerSwing 2. Horton Automatics, Corpus Christi, TX, 4000 Series. 3. LCN Closures, Princeton, IL, 4600 Series. 4. Stanley Access Technologies, Farmington, CT, Magic Force. 5. Other as approved. 2.2 OPERATION A. Operation: Push button, push plate, switch-activated, or manual opening, with power boost cbsing and holding; comply with ANSI A156.19 and UL 325. 1. Opening: Open to 90 degrees, maintaining engagement of operating mechanism through opening cycle. 2. Cbsing: Close and center door against stop after each cycle and hold against d-afts, winds, and stack pressure. Act as manual loser when not powered. 3. Closing force: As required to close and latch. B. Adjustment: Microprocessor control for. 1. Opening speed. 2. Back check. 3. Hold open, from 5 to 30 seconds. 4. Closing speed. 5. Opening force (torque limiting). 6. Acx:eleration during opening and recycling, for soft start. C. Equipment: 1. Control box and motodgear box: Contained in aluminum housing; precision-machined gears and bearing seats and all-weather lubricant. 2. Terminal strip: In enclosed box above door, indicating connections for fire and security alarm equipment, and other electrified hardware associated with door operation. 3. Motor. DC permanent magnet motor with shielded ball bearings. Stop motor when door stops or is fully open and when break-away is operated. 4. Door operating arm: Forged steel, attached at natural pivot point of door. Exposed arms: Factory polished and finished to match operaf8r encbsure. 5. Control circuits for actuators and safeties: Low voltage, NEC Class II. 8. Service conditions: Minus 30 degrees F to 160 degrees F. 7. Power supply required: 115 VAC. 8. Manual "On-0ff--Hold Open" switches. D. Enclosure: Concealing all operating parts except arms and manual control switches. Access door for access to controls and removable components without removal of door or operator. No exposed fasteners. E. Aluminum: AAMA 611, Class II, AA-M12C22A41, clear anodized. 2.3 OPERATING CONTROLS A. Push plate: Formed stainless steel plate, satin finish; with depressed marking; 2 required per opening. Marking: Handicapped symbol, filled blue. B. Wall-mounted push button switch: 4 inch stainless steel wall-mounted momentary contact pushbutton. Label 'Press to Open' w~h universal handicapped symbol. Provide weather-resistant un'ds at exterior applications 1 1 1 1 1. V1Rkk "AA-3° -Interior locations. 2. Vlfikk °BPS-SM- DARK BRZ x `AA-3 AL and AA-3-AR at vestibule locations . 3. Wikk "BPR-SM-DARK BRZ x 6C3WR" at exterior locations. C. Acceptable Manufacturer's: 1. BEA, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA, 412 782-5150. 2. Laroo Manufacturing; Brainani, Mn 800-523-6996 3. Wkk Industries, Inc; Greendale, WI 877-421-9490 Ext 13 2.4 MARKINGS A. Decals: Visible from either side, instructing the user as to the operation and function of the door. B. Service label: Sticker or plate on operator, showing installer and contact information for service. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Condfions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Comply with ANSI A156.19. B. Install in accorclance with manufacturers approved shop drawings and in compliance with referenced standards. Members shall be level, square, plumb, at proper elevations and in alignment with otherwork. Attach and secure to structure as required to assure stability of system. C. Low Energy Operator Wall Switches: 1. Actuating control switches: a. Shall be mounted between 30 inches and 36 inches above the finished floor. b. Shall be located at Icest 30 inches to 60 inches from the pull arc of the swing of the door but never more than 12 feet. c. Must remain accessible from the swing side when the door is opened. d. Not be located In a position where the user would be in the path of the moving door. e. Mounted so the user is in full sight of the door when activating the switch. D. Provide internal wiring in devices and/or relays as needed for proper operation of work as specified in this Section and as required to operate hardware specified in 08-7100; external wiring, conduit. and final connection to power source provided under Division 16Adjust door operators for proper operation, without binding or scraping and without excessive noise. E. Verify that electrical connections are made correctly, with dedicated grounding. F. Clean glass. G. Furnish AAADM Certified Daily Safety Check. ' 3.2 1 1 1 END OF SECTION 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 087163 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Security hardware and necessary setting and adjustment information/ass'~stance for complete security metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with the requirements of Divisbn 01 Section "Submittals:' ' B. Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for products as required, including locks, hinges, lock mount covers, bolt keepers, wall bumpers, weatherstripping, thresholds, escutctreons, etc. C. Hardware and Keying Schedules: 1. Submit one reproduable and one copy of each schedule type; indicate all products by name and number for each separate opening. Include all other pertinent hardware and keying information. 2. Hardware Supplier is required to coordinate a detention keying meeting with the architect and user so as not to delay the manufacturer and delivery of the required detention ' equipment. 3. Make promptly, any corrections or changes necessary in schedules to comply with requirements; resubmit one reproducible and one copy of revised schedules. 4. Do not group doors with like or similar haniware under a single heading. ' D. Templates for Fabrication: 1. Forward templates for each type of detention equipment hardware required to fabricators of work in Section 083463 -Detention Doors and Frames following final review of hardware and keying schedules. 2. Submit wiring diagrams for all electrical devices provided herein. ' E. Locking Device Shop Drawings: 1. Iridic~te layout plans of each opening at 1/2" =1'-0" minimum scale, show anchorage and accessory items, dimensions and finishes. Note. Complete housing module plans can be drawn at 1/4" =1'-0" minimum, with typical enlarged plans. ' 2. Indicate complete details of internal oomponerrts of sliding door k~dcing mechanisms located in transoms and jambs. ' F. Closeout Submittals - Furnish three copies of Opereting/AAaintenance Manuals including parts lists for security locks and locking devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Throughout the speafications and drawings, types of materials may be specified by the manufacturers name and catalog number in order to estabi'~sh standards of quality and performance. If the bidder elects to substitute any other products, he must request the ArcFritect's approval in writing no later than twenty-one (21) days prior to the bid date, and he must receive written approval by addendum. The following are requirements for approval for each type of product listed. 1. For each facility, list: name and location of installation, value of contract, scope of work provided, date of occupancy by Owner, Owners representative to contact and telephone number, Construction Manager or General Contractor, and Ardritect. Indicate length of delivery after receipt of approved submittals. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087163 -1 OF 7 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. Manufacturers Qualifications: Provide security equipment products from manufacturers who have been actively erfgaged in the production of security equipment for a minimum of ten (10) years in successfully completing projects of equal scope and magnitude with products as herein specified. This evidence shall consist of a list of ten (10) projects that have been complete and operational for a minimum of flue (5). The manufacturer shall now be acfnrely engaged in the design and manufacture of security locks, locking devices, furnishings and miscellaneous security hardware and products. All locks, locking devices and related security hardware shall be manufactured an supplied by the same manufacturer. 3. 5 copies of manufacturer's product specifications and catalog cut sheets and detail and performance data for each type product listed in this Section. 4. Provide data substantiating that products being proposed for this project comply with the requirements stated herein. Provide detailed explanation of the differences of proposed products and the specified products. 5. List of projects under construction 6. List of completed projects 7. List of major suppliers B. Approved Detention Hardware Suppliers: 1. Southern Steel, San Antonio, TX 2. Folger Adam, San Antonio 3. R.R. Brink Locking Systems, Shorewood, IL 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. For products delivered to door manufacturer and for products delivered to project site, package each item of hardware separately in containers, complete with necessary fasteners, installation instructions and installation templates. Mark each container with item numbers, location of installation in accord with corresponding information shown on final hardware schedule. B. Store products at site to prevent damage or loss until installation is made. C. Control handling and installation of hardware products which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. D. Deliver all keys in one shipment by secure carrier (hand carrier or registered mail) from manufacturer directly to authorized representative of the Owner, as directed by the Architect-Engineer. Include transmittal and forward copy of same to the Architect-Engineer. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Provide spares in the quantities listed bel~nr for each hardware type: 1. Locks: Two of each type used (one left hand, one right hand). 2. Hinges - A: Six of each type used. 3. Closer - A: Two of each type used. 4. Pulls: 5. Door Puli: Two of each type used 6. Wall Bumper. Two of each type used 7. Weatherstripping/Smoke Gasketing: Three sets 8. Food Pass hardware: One food pass door sets complete with all hardware: a. 1 ea -Lock b. 2 ea -Hinges c. 1 ea -Pass door with integral pull d. 1 ea -Rubber bumper B. Fasteners and Accessories: 1. Furnish 5 percent installation. DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE extra fasteners and other miscellaneous accessories required for 087163 - 2 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ~~ 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Furnish, for institution use only, 2 complete sets of: 1. Special tools required for locking device and hardware maintenance 2. Lock repair kits PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Catalog numbers of the first manufacturers listed have been used ~ establish the quality required. The only other manufacturers approved are listed. Other manufacturers seeking approval shall do so in writing per General Requirements and shall list exact catalog numbers and description of the items proposed to furnish. ITEM 1 2 Hinges Southern Steel Folger Adam, RR Brink Jamb Locks Southern Steel Folger Adam, RR Brink Snap Locks Southern Steel Folger Adam, RR Brink Exits Corbin/Russwin Yale Closers Norton LCN Stops Rockwood OH Stops, Surface Rixson Glynn~lohnson Gasket Pemko Reese Security Hardware Southern Steel Folger Adam 2.2 SCREWS, FASTENERS AND TOOLS: A. Furnish exposed fasteners to match item fastened. Make fastener of the same metal as item fastened, except use plated brass or stainless steel for all aluminum items. Provide twenty (20) spares of each type of fastener used~for anchoring hardware. B. Provide torx-head (star design with center pin) security fasteners for exposed fasteners on all security hardware, regardless of manufacturer. Furnish six (6) tool holders and six (6) bits for each different size screw. Holders and bits shall be left at project after installation and become property of the user. 2.3 MECHANICAL SECURITY HARDWARE FOR SWINGING DOORS A. Medium Security Mechanical Operation for Food Pass 1. Series/Manufacturer. #262 Food Pass Assembly a. 1017A/Southem Steel b. 17/Folger Adam c. 7017/RR Brink 2. Six-Hea~ry Duty tumbler keyed one side or both sides. 3. Reverse bolt bevel at food pass locations. See details. B. High Security Mechanical Operation Spring Latch with Knob 1. Series/Manufacturer. a. 1070AK.a/Southem Steel b. 60K/Folger Adam c. 7060K/RR Brink 2. Six-Heavy Duty tumbler keyed one side or both sides. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087183 - 3 OF 7 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.4 ELECTRIC SECURITY LOCKS FOR SWINGING DOORS A. Medium Security Electrical Operation for Swing Doors . 1. Series/Manufacturer. a. 10120AM/Southem Steel b. 120M/Folger Adam c. 5020S/RR Brink 2. Frame mounted, 115 VAC motor opereted. 3. Internal switches monitor status of bolt. 4. Lock operates in a fail secure mode. 5. Bolt throw 1"flush when retracted 6. Galvanized case and cover 7. U. L. listed for use on 3 hour fire door. 8. Standard Functions: a. Electric - Remote switch activates a motor which retracts the latchbolt. Latchbolt remains retracted until door is opened approximately 2", then it releases, automatically latches and deadlocks when the door is closed. b. Mechanical - LatchboR is retracted with a mogul key at the door, and remains retracted until door is opened approximately 2", then it releases and automatically latches and deadlocks when the door is closed. 9. Optional Features as specified in the hardware schedule: a. Half Cycle Holdback - Remote two-position maintained contact switch is required for this function. Latchbolt is retrected electrically when switch is in open position. When remote switch is returned to locked position, latch bolt will extend when door is opened approximately 2". Specify "D". U.L. listing is not available with this function. b. No Latchboft - Latchboit remains retrected as bng as control switch is c. activated. LatchboR extends when power is removed. Specify "NL." d. Local Electric Keyswitch -Day key provides local electric operation only e. and may be disabled from remote control point. Master key provides f. both electric and mechanical operation. Specify "LEK". 2.5 HINGE A. Series/Manufacturer: 204FMSS/Southem Steel. B. Description: ~ . 1. 4-1/2x4-1/2, 3/16" thick leaves maximum 2. Stainless steel leaves, stainless steel non-removable pin, two hardened steel bell bearings, three knuckle with HT hospital tips. 3. 1/2" diameter pin to lock hinge in closed position C. Provide quantities as follows: 1. Doors less than 5 ft high -1 pair 2. Doors over 5 ft to 7 ft 6 in -1-1/2 pair 3. Doorsover7ft6into10ft-2pair 4. Doors over 3 ft 8 in wide - 2pair 2.6 PULLS A. Raised Door Pull 1. Series/Manufacturer: 212C/Southem Steel a. Description: Cast brass, US26D, 8-11/16" L x 1-314" W x 2~/8" projection. Fasteners shall be 2-3/8" -16 x 3/4" security screws. DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE 087163 - 4 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.7 FINISHES: ANSI U/S Svmbol Svmbol Description ' Hinges US32D 630 Satin Stnls St1 Locks & Pulls US26D 626 Satin Chrome Exits US32D 630 Satin Stnls St1 Closers AL 689 Aluminum Painted Stops US260 626 Satin Chrome 2.8 CYLINDERS, KEYS AND KEYING: A. The security kx:ks will incorporate Two (2) separate keying systems; one for pin tumbler (mogul ' cylinder) and one for lever tumbler (paracentric). Each keying system's keys shall be dye stamped for identification; corresponding to the hardware suppliers final schematic keying chart. B. Mogul cylinder locks shall be master keyed as directed. Provide cut change keys, and master keys ' as required. C. Paracentric cylinders shall be keyed alike. Provide cut change keys as required. D. For all individual key designations, to each n:quired individual Key Cabinet, there shall be two (2) keys provided. For each master key designation, there shall be three (3) keys for each required individual key cabinet. E. A complete, detailed schematic chart of the keying system will be requin~l. The hardware supplier will also be required to enter the key symbols for all doors on additional floor plans which will be supplied by the Architect. Two (2) copies of the schematic keying chart and architectural floor plans shall be fumed over to the user at the completion of the project. The cost for this service shall be ' included with the cost of materials at the time of bidding. 2.8 KEY CABINET: A. Provide key control with capacity of 1.75 times number of individual key designations. B. Provide separate cabinets for each key system wfth concealed-type hinge and rounded sides. ' C. Panels shall include individual hook and label pockets formed as integral part of panel, for mogul key types, as required. D. Keys shall not leave manufacturers custody without prior arrangements for delivery and ' authorization from Owner. 2.10 SECURITY SPARE LOCKS AND LOCK PARTS: _ ' A. Shall be provided for the Owners' stock as folkyws: B. One complete set of security screw drivers for all sizes of security screws used on this project C. One repair parts list and assembly drawings bound in manual for security products supplied in this Section. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. All shipping of detention equipment hardware and coordination with other detention equipment shall be the responsibility of the Detention Equipment Supplier. 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087183 - 5 OF 7 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.2 SECURITY HARDWARE SETS: A. The hardware group/sets listed below indicate the items of hardware required for each opening. It is the bidders responsibility to accurately furnish the proper sizes, quantities, weights, gage and function as required by these specifications and as recommended by manufacturers involved. SH-1: Doors 134,135A 3 -Hinges 204FMSS x US32D 1- Deadlatch 10120AM-LEK-2 Lock x 120VAC x US26D 2 -Raised Door Pull 212C 1-Closer Norton PR7570 x AL 1-Door Stop Rockwood 467 (Mount at 80° A.F.F. -grout blocks solid) 1-Gasket Pemko S88 (Cut into 10" strips before installation) 1-Auto Door Bottom Pemko 420PKL 1-Door Position Switch 200MRS Function: Presenting authorized credential (Remote switch) or mechanical key activates motor from secure side and mechanical key on opposite side retrects latchbolt. Latchbolt remains retracted until door is opened approximately 2", then releases, automatically latches and deadlocks when door is closed. SH-1A: Doors 1378 3 -Hinges 204FMSS x US32D 1- Deadlatch 10120AM-LEK-2 Lock x 120VAC x US26D 2 -Raised Door Puil 212C 1-Closer Norton PR7570 x AL 1-Overhead Stop - Rixson 8HD Series 1-Gasket Pemko S88 (Cut into 10° strips before installation) 1 -Auto Door Bottom Pemko 420PKL 1 -Door Position Switch 200MRS Function: Presenting authorized credential (Remote switch) or mechanical key activates motor from secure side and mechanical key on opposite side retracts latchbolt. Latchbolt remains retracted until door is opened approximately 2°, then releases, automatically latches and deadlocks when door is closed. SH-1B: Doors 147A 3 -Hinges 204FMSS x US32D 1- Deadlatch 10120AM-LEK-2 Lock x 120VAC x US2BD 2 -Raised Door Pu11212C 1-Closer Norton PR7570 x AL 1-Door Stop Rockwood 467 (Mount at 80" A.F.F. -grout blocks solid) 1-Gasket Pemko S88 (Cut into 10" strips before installation) 1-Auto Door Bottom Pemko 420PKL 1-Door Position Switch 200MRS Function: Presenting authorized credential (Remote switch) from either side activates motor or mechanical key retracts latchbok. Latchbolt remains retracted until door is opened approximately 2", then rel~ses, automatically latches and deadlocks when door is closed. Electrically interlock doors 147A, 1476 & 147C Door Interlocked System: Operation: All doors closed. latched and secured. Opening door # 1 will restrict access to other doors in system. Once door # 1 has closed, latched and secured, then door # 2 can be opened. Any door held open or not properly latched will restrict access to other doors until un-secure violation is corrected. DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE 087163 - 6 OF 7 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SH-9 B: Doors 747C 3 -Hinges 204FMSS x US32D 1- Deadlatch 10120AM-D-NL-2 Lock x 120VAC x US26D 2 -Raised Door Pull 212C ' 1-Exit Device Corbin/Russwin ED5200S-,A x 910 1-Closer Norton PR7570 x AL 1-Door Stop Rockwood 467 (Mount at 80" A.F.F. -grout blocks solid) 1-Gasket Pemko S88 (Cut into 10' strips before installation) 1-Auto Door Bottom Pemko 420PKL 1-Door Position Switch 200MRS Function: Presenting authorized credential (Remote switch) from either side activates motor or " mechanical key retracts latchbolt. LatchboR remains retracted until door is opened approximatey 2 , then releases, automatically latches and deadlocks when door is closed. In event of fire, remote iwo-position switch retracts latchboR and is held retracted. Exit device holds door in closed latched position with passage lever on stair skle. ' Electrically interlock doors 147A, 147B & 147C Door Interiodced System: ' ~ Operation: All doors closed, latched and secured. Opening door # 1 will restrict access to other doors in system. Once door # 1 has cbsed, latched and secured, then door # 2 can be opened. Any door held open or not properly latched will restrict aocess to other doors until un~ecure violation is corrected. ' SH 2: Doors 139, 140, 141, 142,145A 3 -Hinges 204FMSS x US32D 1-Deadlock 1070AK.a-1 x US26D ' 1-Food Pass Door & Latch 262 x 1017A 1 -Raised Door Pull 212C 3 -Silencers Function: Cell unoccupied, door stands open 3 degrees. Closing door will automaticaty snap lock and deadlock latchboft. Knob unlocked by half turn of key. Knob can retract latchbolt. Quarter tum in opposite direction locks knob. END OF SECTION 'J 1 ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 087163 - 7 OF 7 DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 088100 GLASS GLAZING ii PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazing for the following products and applications, including those speafied in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: a. Windows. b. Doors. c. Glazed entrances. d. Interior borrowed lites. e. Storefront framing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters per ASTM C1036. C. Interspace: Space between liter of an insulating-glass unit. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pertomiance Requirements: 1. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the folkwing: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 2. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis per ASTM E1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: a. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Dn~rings. b. Vertical Glazing: For glass surtaces sloped 15 degrees or less nom vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short~luratbn load. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all 4 edges, limit center-oF-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short~ide length or 1 inch, whichever is less. d. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass liter. 3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 degree F, ambient; 180 degree F, material surtaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Glass Types: Provide structural, physical, and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements. 2. Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, and special application requirements. Identify available colors. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 088100 - 7 OF S GLASS GLAZING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass specified; l2 inches square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same - designations indicated on Drawings. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A ' qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated lass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified independent testing agency accredited per NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An Independent testing agency qualified per ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. - F. Source Limidations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply wfth published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturers name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. I. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certfication label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturers name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose~tream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least 1 component life of unfts wfth appropriate certification label of IGCC. K. Modc-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mock ups specified in Section 084113 -Aluminum Entrences and Storefronts and 085113 -Aluminum Windows to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods. 2. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials per manufacturers written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturers written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. GLASS GLAZING 088100 - 2 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel ' substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do nat install glazing sealarrts when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 degrees F. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturers Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made ' out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer, agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined In "Definitions" Article, for nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period Indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. ' B. Manufacturers Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturers standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer, agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, fob nearest shipping point to Project site, within ' specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS OR FABRICATORS ' A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers or fabricators: 1. Advanced Glass Systems. ' 2. Cardinal Glass Industries. 3. Guardian Industries. 4. Interpane Glass Company. ' 5. Monsanto Company, Inc. 6. Nippon Electric Glass Company. 7. Okicastle Glass. ' 8. Pilkington Building Products. 9. PPGArchitecturel Glass. 10. ~~c~~.,~ ~ VETROTECH Saint Gobein ~-_-gig Protection Rated Glazing Q~AroJ(dSula~~U~ 1'~~ t a.a GLASS PRODUCTS -GENERAL _ -' A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-03; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Glualit~r-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass liter and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" ' Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For dated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- ' strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by applicable code. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 088100 - 3 OF 8 GLASS GLAZING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS , PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.3 MONOLITHIC GLASS UNITS ~ ' A. Float Glass (GLASS-01): ASTM C1038, Type 1, transparent flat, Class 1 Clear, quality q3 glazing select. B. Safety Glass (GLASS-01T): ASTM C1048, Kind FT fully tempered Condition A, non-coated, Type 1 ' transparent flat, quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI 297.1. 1. Thickness: 10 mm, unless indicated otherwise. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING ' A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing per NFPA 252 for ' door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5 mm nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products): Standard FireLite. b. Safti First: SuperLite C/P. c. Schott North America, Inc.: Pyran Star. d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain: SGG Keralite FR-R. 2.5 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factoryassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Insulating Glass Units Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 Articles "Performance Requirements" and "Quality Assurance." 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating lass units are nominal and overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 3. Sealing System: Dual seal. 4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the folkyuving requirements: a. Spacer Material: (Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish] [Aluminum with black, color anodic finish] [Aluminum with bronze, color anodic finish] [Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in Dolor selected by Architect] [Galvanized steel] (Stainless steel]. b. Corner Construction: Manufacturers standard comer construction. B. Insulated Low-E Glass Units (GLASS-12): Performance Classif~ation per ASTM E774, Class CBA: 1. Glass Colors and Types: a. Exterior Pane: Clear, annealed fbat glass. b. Interior Pane: Clear, annealed float glass. 2. Transmittance: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent. b. Solar Energy: 33 percent. c. Ultra Violet: 10 percent. 3. Reflectance: a. Visible Light -Exterior: 11 percent. b. Visible Light -Interior: 12 percent. c. Solar Energy: 31 percent. GLASS GLAZING 088100 - 4 OF S PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 4. U Values: a. Winter U Value: 0.29 Btu. b. Summer U-Value: 0.26 Btu. ' 5. Shading Coefficient: 0.44. 6. Relative Heat Gain: 91 Btu per hour per square foot. 7. Solar Factor (SHGC): 0.38. ' 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 9. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 mm and 5.0 mm. 10. Acceptable Product: VE 1 2M by Viracon or approved substitution. ' 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTAND GLAZING TAPES A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealant and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials ' with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. ' 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealant and tapes that have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for type, grade, class and uses. 4. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ' 5. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. ' B. 1-Part Non-,Acid Curing Sitk:one Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to uses indiksited, and O; and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability. 1. Medium Modulus: Tensile. strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 PSI (0.5 M Pa) at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D412 after 14 days at 77 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity. 2. Additional Capability: Test per ASTM C719 for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement, to withstand the maximum 40 percent increase and decrease of jdnt width, as ' measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920. C. Preformed Butyl-Poyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Manufacturer's standard, solvent free butyl- ' polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A-804.1; in extruded tape form; non-,staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on 1 side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by ' manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS ' A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compattbil'rty with surfaces contacted in installation. ' B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. ' D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass Rtes in place for installation indicated. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 088100 - 5 OF 8 GLASS GLAZING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Slant Balking: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance n3ting. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints ofglass-framing members. B. Proka~ed wkh installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not flmiy bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing unRs to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING -GENERAL: A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, incuding those in referenced ' glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, ' with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or ' other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by ' preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, ' unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of cornpatble sealant su'dable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated ~- glass manufacturers for installing glass liter. t G. Provide spacers for glass liter where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to presence required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing , GLASS GLAZING 088100 - 6 OF 8 PHASE THREE - BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' - COLUMBIA.HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and tc compy with system perforrnance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. t With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and per requirements in ' referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass liter in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. ' J. K. Set glass liter with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specfied. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected ' L. to movement. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to pn3vent comers from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with ' sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING: ' A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to ' C make them fit opening. Cover vertical framin joints b l in a ta es to heads and sills fir t d th t b C . g y y g pp p an en s o jam s. over horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. ' D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. ' F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant overexposed edge of tape. ' 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRIB: A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, ' with allowance for stretch during installation. B. insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. ' C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press flrmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work ' toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pn~sure-Glazing Stops: Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press ' firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to prnduoe a ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 088100 - 7 OF 8 GLASS GLAZING I COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLASS GLAZING 088100 - 8 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ~:I 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 092119 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shaft wall enclosures. ' 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Stair enclosures. 4. Hor¢ontal enclosures. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaftwali assembly indicated. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assembl'~es with ' fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by testing and inspecting agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical th those of assemblies tested per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by testing and inspecting agency. 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum Company. 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. ' 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation. ' ~~ GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-na3istance-rated assembl'~es indicated. ' 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary material complying with gypsum board shaftwall assembly manufacturers written recommendations. ' 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preoonsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 90 percent by ' weight. B. Gypsum Liner Panels (GYP.BD-23): Comply with ASTM C442/C442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturers proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092119 -1 OF 4 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Gypsum Base for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specked in Section 092613 -Gypsum Veneer Plastering. D. Gypsum Board: As specked in Section 092900 -Gypsum Board. 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Non-load bearing steel framing is specified in Section 092216. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturers written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in 092900 -Gypsum Board that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturers written recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Base Joint Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Section 092613 -Gypsum Veneer Plastering. D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specified in Section 092613 -Gypsum Veneer Plastering. E. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specked in Section 092900 -Gypsum Board. F. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. G. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I, as specified in Section 092900 -Gypsum Board. I. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hours. C. STC Rating: As indicated. ~~ D. Studs: Manufacturers standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturers standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-noted assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to aarommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Cite, Inc. b. Fire Trek Corp.; Fire Trak. G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturers standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092119 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' H. Room-Side Finish: As indicated. I. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-noted assembly design designation. J. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets where indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install gypsum board shaFtwall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance- rated assemblies indicated, manufacturers written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. As specified in Section 092613 -Gypsum Veneer Plastering and 092900 -Gypsum Boani for ' applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaftwall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. ' C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaftwall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized ' steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face-layer panel. D. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing ' supplementary steel freming around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while ' maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. ' G. Control Joints: Install control joints per ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect or indicated on Drawings, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum boani shaftwall assemblies. H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other Work and at jants and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an ' airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C919 requirements or with manufacturers written instructions, whichever are more stringent. I. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaftwall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches of shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2 or 5/8 inch thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive ' and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches on center with screws fastened to shaftwall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches on ' center and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092119 - 3 OF 4 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER J. Installation Tolerence: Instal{ each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include discoloretion, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Ind~ations that panels are mold damaged include fuzry or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092119 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: ' a. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition wails, framed soffits, furring, etc.). b. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics (STC): For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction methods identical to those tested to ' assembly indicated per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by an Independent testing agency. Provide testing or inspection by qualified independent testing and inspecting organizations ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Interior Metal Framing: Subject~to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. ' 2. Dale/lncor; a Clark Steel Framing Company. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. National Gypsum Company. ' 5. Western Metal Lath, Inc. . 6. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL ' A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preoonsumer recycled content is net less than 25 percent. ' B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Compor~errts: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal, unless indicated otherwise. ' 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless indicated otherwise. ' PHASE THREE - Blb PACKAGES 092216 -1 OF 4 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A841M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch d~meter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with abase-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 inch wide flanges. E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into Work include the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation: 840-0 or 860-C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Interiors, Inc.: Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0:0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated. B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where~indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resuRing from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The): VertiClip SLD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim: Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 3) Approved Substitution. C. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated, in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.: Fire Trak. b. Approved Substitution. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7B inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated. NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092278 - 2 OF 4 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, s¢e, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolafron Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that aikrnr fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Boani Assemblies: Comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing ' installation. 3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS ' A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: ' 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. ' a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or ' equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental -suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. ' 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. ' D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. ' E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. ' 3 ~ 3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES . A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior ' walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, e~acept where partitions are indicated to terminate ' ~ at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092276 - 3 OF 4 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless indicated otherwise. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless indicated otherwise. Install framing bek„nr sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. C. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation) vertically and hold in place with Z furring members spaced 24 inches on center. 2. Except at exterior comers, securey attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder~lriven fasteners spaced 24 inches on center. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond comer, on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fiL D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than ' 1/8 inch from plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING ' PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inductee: 1. Interior portland cement plastennrork on metal lath. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Shaw locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on ' rigid backing. ' 1.3 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. . 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where ind'~cated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by a qualified testing agency. C. Mock-ups: Before plastering, install mock-ups of at least 25 square feet in surtace area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standanis for materials and execution. 1. Install mock-ups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mock-ups. 3. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial 1 Completion. ' 1.4 A PROJECT CONDITIONS t l ith ASTM C926 i C . omp y w requ remen s. B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 degrees F for at least 48 hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application. 1. Avoid conditions that resuR in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating ' plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry. ' C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. i ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092400 -1 OF 5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C847 with ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CEMCO. b. Clark Western Building Systems. c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. d. MarinoWARE. e. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that , postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preoonsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 3. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring. ' a. Weight: 3.4 pounds per square yard. B. Security Metal Lath: 0.053 inch thick galvanized expanded carbon steel lath, ASTM C847 and ASTM A569, wmplying witli the folknroing: ' 1. Mesh Diamonds: Minimum 3/8 inch by 1 inch long for 71 percent open area. 2. Mesh Strands: 0.086 inch thick. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 ' of the following manufacturers: a. AMICO. b. Bailey Metal Products Limited. c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. ' d. Niles Building Products Company. e. SEMCO Southeastern Metals. C. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I. ' 1. Provide paper-backed lath unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster k~ats required. B. Metal Accessories: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. ' b. CEMCO. c. Clark Western Building Systems. d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. e. MarinoWARE. f. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Comerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653JA653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. , 3. External-Comer Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Ctxnerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. , a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Bull nose oomerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. , PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' .ti 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; 1-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging piaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portiand cement plaster. C. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than 3 exposed threads. D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C1063. E. Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475 inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 -Gypsum Board. G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: White. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N. 1. Color for Finish Coats: White. C. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S; or ASTM C207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C897. 1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: In color rri8tching Architect's sample. E. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match Architect's sample. F. Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C35. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base~;oat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturers written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 pound of fiber per cubic yard of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal I..ath: Scratch and brown chats for 3-coat piasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: 1 cubic foot Portland cement, 1 cubic foot masonry cement, 4 cubic feet of sand, and 1 pound or more of fibers. 1) Finish Thickness: 3/8 inch. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092400 - 3 OF 5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER b. Brown Coat: 1 cubic foot Portland cement, 1 cubic foot masonry Dement, 5 to 6 cubic feet of sand, and 1 pound or more of fibers. 1) Finish Thickness: 3/8 inch. C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base eats for 2-c~aat plasterwork as fellows: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-12 parts lime. Use 2-12 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementltious material. 2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry Dement and 2-12 to 4 parts aggregate. 3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-12 to 4 parts aggregate. D. Portland Cement Job-Mbced Finish-Coat Mbces: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1-12 to 2 parts lime. Use 1-12 to 3 Pam aggregate per part of cemerrtitious material (sum of separate volumes of each cromponeM material). 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mbc 1 part portland cement and 1-12th 2 parts lime. Use 1-12 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent Work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have suction capability required to bond with plaster per ASTM C926. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install componerrts per requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side. C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plastennrork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install perASTM C1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh~lath. 3. On Solid Surtaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Installself-furring, diamond-mesh lath. 4. Security Metal Lath: Install per ASTM C1063 in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install per ASTM C063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Comers: 1. Install lath~ype, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install comerbead at interior and exterior locations. C. Control Joints: install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows: 1. As required to delineate plastennrork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 square feet. b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 square feet. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 i 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet on center. 3. As required to delineate plastennrork into areas (panels) with length to-width ratios of not greater than 2-12:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plastennrork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension change. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Generel: Comply with ASTM C926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal fremes and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for 3-coat plastennrork; 3/4 inch thickness. 1. Portland cement mixes. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide smooth trowel-textured finish to match Architect's sample. D. Concealed Interior Plasterwork: 1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat. 2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations, finish coat may be omitted. 3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of the and similar finishes, omit finish Croat. 3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace Wait to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, effloresa;nce, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Remove temporery protection and enclosure of other Work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair~floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092400 - 5 OF 5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Bullet and blast protection panels. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Sound attenuation insulation. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. ' B. Samples: For the following products: 1. 2 sets of 6 inch square acoustical bonded pads for each acoustical panel unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed Work 2. Trim Akx~ssories: Full~,¢e Sample in 12 inch long length for each trim accessory indicated. ' 3. Textured Finishes: Manufacturers standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Workk. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and ' construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mock-ups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockk-ups of at least 100 square feet in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic and sound control effects and set quality standards for ' materials and execution. 1. Install mock-ups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed kx~tions. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mock-ups. 3. Simulate finished I~ghting conditions for review of mock-ups. ' 4. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Gypsum Materials: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. American Gypsum Co. ' 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. I PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092900 -1 OF 6 GYPSUM BOARD COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation. 7. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled c~rrtent constitutes a minimum of 90 percent by weight. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minim¢e joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. C. Fire-Rated, Fiber-Reinforoed, Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board (GYP.BD-10F): ASTM C36; fiberglass reinforced gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of core and surfaced with heavy naturel finish paper on front, back, and long edge. Type X, UL rated. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Square cut, tapered. 3. Locations: Install at corridor walls, cells, and where indicated. 4.. Acceptable Products: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation: ToughRock Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board. b. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard. c. USG Corporation.: SheetRock Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. D. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board (GYP.BD-11F): ASTM C36; gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of core and surfaced with paper on front, back and long edges; Type X, UL rated. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Square cut, tapered. E. Fire-Rated Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board (GYP.BD-12F): ASTM C630; gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of core and water resistance of core. Surface with water repellent paper on front, back, and long edges; Type X, UL rated.. _ _ 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. F. Ceiling y'~pe (G1~P:dt7=1'1): A~S'IlVI-c'~t3; gypsum core ceiling panel resistance of core. Surface with paper on front, back, and long edges. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Square cut, tapered. 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS ~Yilass mat receive tile. walls. 1 ~~i i'~~~°~ A~~i,1~'D~ ariliance sag 1 board shall be used at all toilet anc ;used at all shower file locations:' A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board(GYP.BD-23): Complying with ASTM E7178/C1178M. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShiekj Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. room walls to ~~1 ~11~91o`t; B. Cement Board (GYP.BD-24): Cement board formed in a continuous process of aggregated Portland cement slurry with polymer coated glass fiber mesh completely encompassing edges, back, and front surfaces. Type X, ULfire-rated. 1. Maximum framing spacing is 16 inches on center. 2. Size: 5/8 inch thick by 38 inches wide by 5 feet long. 3. Edges: Cut square. 4. Acceptable Products: a. Custom Building Products: Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.: UtiI-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation: DUROCK Cement Board. I 1 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' w `Clarification to 2.3: "Shower file locations" shall included the showers and their corresponding personal) ' drying/dressing space immediately outside of actual shower. )~#1'3 Ills dos' ' ~ COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.4 BULLET AND BLAST PROTECTION PANELS A. Bullet and Blast Protection Composite Panels. Fiberglass-reinforced-plastic panels (FRP) manufactured using multiple layers of starch-oil woven' roving ballistic grade fiberglass cloth 1 impregnated with thermoset polyester resin and compressed into flat rigid sheets. 1. Panel Type: "Non ricochet type" intended to permit enrapture and retention of attacking projectile lessening potential of random injury or lateral penetration. ' 2. Provide material that complies with ASTM E1191 hour fire resistance when installed in a non- bearing steel stud wall with 5/8 inch GYP.BD-11F on exterior and with 5/8 inch GYP.BD-17F over FRP panel on inside. 3. Panels conforming to UL 752 Rating level as follows: 1 a. UL Level 3: Armortex OF 300. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. ' 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead. b. Expansion (control) joint. ' 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. ' C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type 1 taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim aooessories. 3. ~ Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying~ype, albpurpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For thins coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. ' D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting~ype, _ sandable topping compounds. 2. Cement Board: As recommended by manufacturer. ' 2.7 SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool 1. Provide sound-attenuating materials with a flame spread index of 0 and smoke developed index of 0 when tested per ASTM E84. ' a. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assemby. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer nacycled content plus 1/2 of prBCOnsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 90 percent by ' weight. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 092900 - 3 OF 6 GYPSUM BOARD COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Acceptable Products: a. Knauf: QuietTherm AoousticaUThermal Batt Insulation. b. Johns Manville: Sound Control Batts. c. CertainTeed: CertaPro AcoustaTherrn Batts. d. Therrnafiber. Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets. e. Owens Coming: Fiberglas Unfaced Sound Attenuation Blankets. B. When airborne sound attenuation ratings are required for wall and floor/ceiling assemblies that separate publ'~c spaces such as interior corridors and service areas, provide Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings of not be less than 50 (45 if field tested) when tested per ASTM E90 and ASTM E413. C. When structure-borne sound isolation ratings are required for floor/ceiling assemblies, provide assemblies with Impact Isolation Critieria (IIC) of not less than 50 (45 if field tested) when tested per ASTM E492 and ASTM E1007. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with naferenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recomrrrendations. B. Steel Drfll Screws: ASTM C1002, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 078200 -Joint Sealants. D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation. E. Vapor Retarder. As specified in Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation. F. Provide other materials, not specifically descrbed, but required for complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FlNISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C840. B. Examine panels before installaton. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joirrts of adjacent panels not less than 1 framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. _ E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board bads-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on oppose sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. F. Form control and expansion jdnts with space beMreen edges of adjoining gypsum panels. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, ' coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 square feet in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structurel members projecting bekwv underside of floor/roof slabs • and decks, cut gypsum panels to fd profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide joints to install sealant. N. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 Inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim ' where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. i. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to ' open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 3.2 ACOUSTICALLY RATED PARTITIONS ' A. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily instaAed after panels have been installed on one side. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of ' partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturers written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. ' C. Acoustical sealant shall close gaps between service outlets (electrical, telephone, and data) and wallboard. 1. Appy acoustical sealant to back of electrical J-boxes for power, telephone and data prior to ' installation of gypsum wallboard. D. Partitions shall be cut and seated around structural elements. ' E. No wallboard layers shall be continuous between 2 adjacent rooms. F. Gaps around penetrations (ducts, pipes and conduit) shall be sealed as follows: • 1. Tightly fill gaps 1 inch or less with attenuation batt insulation. ' 2. Fill gaps larger than 1 inch with heavy-density putty such as 3M Moldable Putty. G. Provide materials as required by gypsum board system manufacturers to achieve laboratory Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings indicated. G PANELS YIN TI 3.3 APPL G LE BACKIN A. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install ' with 1/4lnch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at showers, tubs, and where indicated and locations indicated to receive tile. 1. Install cement board as backing for first 12 inches above finish floor behind concrete curbs, tile, and fiberglass reinforced plastic panels, and other similar wet locations where moisture- • resistant gypsum board is used. Install moisture-resistant gypsum board on remainder of wall. ' C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations Indicated to receive water-resistant panels. ' D. Where file backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surtaces. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 082900 - 5 OF 8 GYPSUM BOARD COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES , A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim per manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints per ASTM CI340 and GA-216, and In specific locations approved ' by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: ' 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless indicated otherwise. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. ' C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. ~ D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated beknnr, per ASTM C840, for bc~tions indicated: 1. Base Level: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. a. Use above suspended ceilings and within other concealed spaces, unless assembly is fire rated, sound rated, sound or smoke controlled, or unless space senres as an air plenum. 2. Level l: Embed tape in joint compound at joints. Leave surface free of excress joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Use above suspended ceilings and within other concealed spaces where gypsum board assembly is fire rated, sound rated, sound or smoke controlled, or space serves as an air plenum. 3. Level 2: Embed tape in joint compound at joints and apply 1 separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, trim flanges, and accessories. Provide Level 2 finish at the folk~nring conditions: a. Moisture-resistant gypsum board indicated for use as substrate for ceramic tile. 4. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at joints and apply 3 separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, trim flanges, and accessories. Apply joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Provide Level 4 finish at the following conditions: a. Gypsum board indicated to be exposed to view except where indicated for other finish levels. b. Gypsum board indicated for finish with flat finish coat. E. Moisture-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish per manufacturers written instructions. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 093000 TILING ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inductee: 1. Porcelain tile. ' ~ 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Credo isolation membrane. ' 5. Tile backing panels. 6. Metal edge strips. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: ' 1. Provide 2 of each type and composition of file for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of file and for each color and finish required. ' 3. Provide 2 of each type of stone thresholds in 6 inch lengths. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Mods-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mock-up of each type of floor the installation. 2. Build mods-up of each type of wall file installation. ' 3. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to "Americans with Disabilities Act Acxessibility Guidelines" (ADAAG) criteria for the following: a. Static Coefficient of Friction: Appendix to ADAAG, in Section A4.5 defines slip-resistant ' as a static coefficient of ficton of 0.6 for floor areas and 0.8 for ramps. Use ASTM C1028 (The Slip Meter), test procedures for both wet and dry readings. 1) Manufacturers: Certify that products meet or exceed these requirements. ' C. SingleSource Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type composition, and variety of file from a single source with resources to pnrride products of consistent quality in appearance and physical propertes without delaying progress of Work. Obtain ingredients for setting and grouting materials of a uniform qualify from 1 manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component, ' and from 1 source or producer for each aggregate. D. Salient Features: Dn~nrings and Specifications are based on proprietary literature from manufacturer ' specified for ties and accessories. Material was selected based on specified manufacturers' colors and patterns, which are considered among salient features of specified materials. Other manufacturers shall comply with the following requirerrtents in order to be considered for substitution: 1. Provide products in full compliance with materials, colors, textures, patterns, and other ' features indicated. 2. Products are submitted to Architect for review and consideration for written prior approval. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 093000 -1 OF 6 TILING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE•CENTER 3. Understand that mater~ls, cokxs, textures, patterns, and other features ind'~cated have been selected to establish a cohesive design element of Project, therefore Arohitect is sole judge of compliance of substitutions with specified salient features. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Replacement Materials: After completion of Work, deliver not less than 2 ,percent of each type, color, and pattern of the and base, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Provide accessory components as required, and replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective coverings, ident~ed with appropr~te labels. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade the that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Speafications for Ceramic Tile;' for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Paver Floor Tile: Flat the as follows: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Tile Facial Dimensions: 18 inch by 18 inch. 3. Base Facial Dimensions: 4 Inch by 12 inch non-cove typicel. 6 inch by 12 inch cove base cut to 4 inch by 12 inch at toilet rooms, locker rooms, and showers. 4. Thickness: 5H6 inch. 5. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 6. For latex-Portland cement-mortared and -grouted paver tile, pn~oat with temporary protective coating. 7. Color (PT1): Indian Red CS51. 8. Acceptable Products: Dal-Tile Colorboby Porcelain Tile, Continental Slate Series; or Colortile Gables Mill. C. Paver Wall Tile: Flat the as follows: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Tile Facial Dimensions: 12 inch by 12 inch and 4 inch by 12 inch. a. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose. b. External Comers: Stainless steel comer, QUADEC by Schluter Systems L.P. c. Internal Comers: Field-butted square comers. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Faoe: Plain with square or cushion edges. 5. For latex-Portland cement mortared and -grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective coating. 6. Colors: a. PT2: Egyptian Beige CS50. b. PT3: Asian Black CS53. 7. Acceptable Products: Dal--Tile Colorboby Porcelain Tile, Continental Slate Series; or Colortile Gables Miil. 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Tile Backer Units: Speafied in Section 092900 -Gypsum Board. TILING 093000 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturers standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and •continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Boiardi Products, a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing and Anti- Frecture/Creck Suppression Membrane. b. Bonsai American, an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrene with Glass Fabric. c. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210. d. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Frecture Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic L (PRP M19). g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS ' A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of Tile Council of America (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturers standard acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water ' emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: ' 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid- ' latex additive. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F~i.B.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. Provide one of the following types: ' 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. ' 3. Grout Colors: Colors will differ between walls and fboNbases. B. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to approval of Architect. ' 2.6 THRESHOLDS 1 A. Generel: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 093000 - 3 OF 8 TILING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503 with minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining unless indicated otherwise. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: latex-modified, Portland cement~ased formulation provided or approved by manufacturer oftile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Resilient Reducer Strips: 1. Transition Between Ceramic Tile and Carpet: Roppe, Inc. #182 or approved substitutions. 2. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match the and settings thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specfically for flooring applications, nickel silver or stainless steel; ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. D. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated beksnr that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of file against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. E. Tile Cleaner. Neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming file and grout surfaces, spec~cally approved for materials and installations indicated by file and grout manufacturers. F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joirrts that does not change color or appearance of grout. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instnK;tions. B. Add materials, water, and additives inaccurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mi~ang time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding Work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. level existing surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. E. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelabie leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material manufacturer's written instructions. F. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. TILING 093000 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' G. Blending: For the exhibiting color variations, use factory blended the or blend tiles at Project site before installing. H. Field-Applied Temporery Protective Coating:. Where indicated under the type or needed to prevent ' grout from staining or adhering to exposed the surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed the surfaces. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Compy with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that appy to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods ' indicated in ceremic the installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for ceremic Tile installation." Compy with TCA installation methods indicted in ceramic the installation schedules. C. Extend the Work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without Interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate Work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. . ' D. Accuretely form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit the closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. ' E. Jointing Pattern: Lay the in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out the Work and center tale fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting. Provide uniform joint ' widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Lay out the wainscots to next full the beyond dimensions indicated. ' G. Grout the to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, compy with ANSI A108.6. H. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. 1. Install waterproofing per ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securey to substrate. ' 1. Do not install the over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 2. Install in shower rooms only. J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series the installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 1. Tile floors in wet areas. 2. Tile floors in laundries. ' 3. The floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 4. Tile floors composed of rib~acked tiles. K. Install tale on floors with the following joint widths: 1. ceremic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. ' L. Thresholds: Install thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 093000 - 5 OF 6 TILING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER M. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of file flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. N. Install file on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. O. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in file floors per grout-sealer manufacturers written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joirrts, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on file fads by wiping with soft cloth. END OF SECTION TILING 093000 - 6 OF 6 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 095100 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. ~ I c(~q r'c~ 1. Acoustical Panel: ~(2) g Of G inch square Samples of each type, colo_r~_patt~,~and texture:' 1 ' 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch bng Samples of each type, finish, and color. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualfications: Independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with experience and capability to conduct testing indicated. NVI.AP-accredited ' laboratories shall document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system ' through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those ' of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another ' testing and inspecting agency. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. a. Smoke-Devebped Index: 450 or less. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, Work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for Project when ' occupied for its intended use. 1. Install acousticel ceilings after carpeting and other interior materials that off-gas have been installed and odors and VOC fumes have dissipated. ' 2. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 095100 -1 OF 4 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including I~ht fixtures, HVAC equipment, fin3-suppression system, and partifion assemblies. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and;identifled with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturers standard moldings for edges and penetrations formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. B. Exposed Grid Suspension Systems -General: Doubleanreb, steel suspension system, with main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot~lip galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished metal caps on flanges in widths indicated below. 1. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 2. Cap Finish: Manufacturers baked polyester finish in color indicated bekniv. C. Exposed Grid Suspension System (SUSP-1): 1. System: 9/16 inch exposed T-grid. 2. Rating: Non-fire-rated. 3. Color. White. 4. Acceptable Products: a. Armstrong World Industries: Suprafine 9/16°. b. USG Interiors, Inc.: Centricdee. D. Exposed Grid Suspension System (SUSP-2): 1. System: 15/16 inch exposed T-grid. 2. Rating: Non-fire-rated. 3. Color. White. 4. Aa:eptable Products: a. Armstrong World industries: Prelude 15/16°. b. USG Interiors, Inc.: Donn DX. c. Chicago Metallic, Inc.: 200 Snap-Grid. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL SYSTEMS 1 1 A. "Typical Acoustical Panel Ceil' ACP-1" ~1 1 , 1. Suspension System: SUSP-1 2. Acoustical Panels: Type III, wet-formed mineral fiber panel with factory-applied vinyl latex paint finish. - ~ ' a. Size: 24 inch by 24 inch by 3/4 inch. b. Edges: Square Tegular. c. NRC:0.70. ' . d. CAC: 38. ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 095100 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 1 1 1 r COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER e. Light Reflectance: 0.83. f. Class A per ASTM E1264. g. Color: White. h. Pattem: Frost ClimaPlus. i. Approved Manufacturers: USG Interiors, Inc. or approved Substitution. g, ~"Clean Room/Lab Panel Ceiling (ACP-2_):'~ ~~~ 11,`~q~~y~ 1. Suspension System: S~P=~ ~ • 2. Acoustical- Panels: Type III, wet formed mineral fiber panel with factory-applied vinyl latex paint finish. a. S¢e: 24 inch by 24 inch by 5/8 inch. b. Edges: Square. c. NRC: 0.55. d. CAC: 35. e. Light Reflectance: 0.83. f. Class A per ASTM E1264. g. Color: White. h. Pattern: 56099 Clean Room ClimaPlus. i. Approved Manufacturers: USG Interiors, Inc. or approved Substitution. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: S¢e for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc~coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire. C. Hold Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches on center on cross tees. D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C636, per manufacturers written instructions, and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using Ins-than-half-width tiles at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's stnictural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 095100 - 3 OF 4 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches on center and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerence of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panda with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before installing acoustical ceilings, Architect will conduct an above- ceiling observation and report deficiencies in Work observed. Do not proceed with installafan of acoustical ceiling support freming until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before•notifying Architect, complete the~following in areas to receive acoustical ceilings: a. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. b. Installation of air-duct systems. c. Installation of air devices. d. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust sags or twists that develop in ceiling systems and replace materials which are damaged or faulty. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surtaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 095100 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: Submit 2 of each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches bng, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W per square cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS ~ . A. Maintain ambient temperetures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. ~ Burke Mercer Fboring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Flexco, Inc. d. Johnsonite. e. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. f. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. g. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. h. Roppe Corporation, USA. i. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe) at hard surface flooring; straight (flat or toeless) at carpet flooring. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096513 -1 OF 3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES COLUM BIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER , C. D Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. H i i di i ht 4 i h t d D ' . es or as raw e g n e on ngs. : nc ca E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturers standard length. F. Outside Comers: Job formed. ' G. Inside Comers: Job formed. H. Finish: Satin. ' I. Colors and Patterns: Selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY ' A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. ' b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. .. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. ' e. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Description: Where indicated on Drawings, provide the following types of transition pi~:es. 1. Carpet bar for tackless installations. , 2. Nosing for carpet. 3. Nosing for resilient floor covering. 4. Resilient Flooring and Carpet. ' 5. Resilient Flooring and Sled Concrete. ' 6. Transition Between Glue-Down Carpet and Concrete. 7. Transition Between Glue-Down Carpet and Vinyl Tile. 8. Transition Between Glue-Down Carpet and Ceramic Tile. ' 9. Transition at fire rated doors with carpet on both sides. C. Material: Vinyl. ' D. Colors and Pattems: Selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS •• ' A. Trnwelable Luling and Patching Compounds: Latex~nodified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications Indicated. ' B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated per , 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. ' C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: 2-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect ' exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. ' RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 OF 3 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES .. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ~' ~ - - - -- - ~ ~ ~ - ~ - ~ - ~ - -- - ~~ - - - -COLUMBIA-HEIGHTS-- - - PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. 3.2 A B. C. D. E. 3.3 A. 3.4 A. B. 3.5 A. B. PREPARATION Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare per ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with tnrnrelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in wntinuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. MILLVI~RK BASE INSTALLATION Resilient Millwork Base: Cut material with millwork type tools. Install wfth manufacturer's recommended adhesive. RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturers written instnxtions for installing resilient accessories. Resil'~ent Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096513 - 3 OF 3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 096566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Rubber floor tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Floor patterns. ' C. Samples for Verification: Submit 2 of each type, color, and pattern of floor covering indicated, 61nch square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. D. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING .3 , , A. Del'Ner materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturers labels indicating brand name and directions for storing. B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Adhes'nrely Applied Products: ' 1. Maintain temperatures within range reoommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: a. 48 hours before installation, unless longer period is n~ommended in writing by ' ., manufacturer. b. During installation. c. 48 hours after installation, unless longer period is recommended in writing by ' manufacturer. 2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. 3. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. ' 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation, unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. B. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish no fewer than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of floor the installed. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096566 -1 OF 4 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. American Fbor Products Company, Inc. 2. Connor Sports Flooring, inc. 3. Dodge-Regupol, Inc. 4. Expanko, Inc. 5. Freudenberg Building Systems Inc., Nore Rubber Flooring. 6. Johnsonite. 7. Mondo. 8. R. C. Musson Rubber Co. 9. Robbins Sports Surfaces. 10. Surface America Incorporated. 11. Tufiex Rubber Products, Inc. B. Material (RT-1 ): Minimum 5 percent SBR and maximum 95 percent EPDM rubber with non- yellowing urethane binder, color throughout the with fade-resistant pigments. C. installation Method: D. Traffio-Surface Texture: Textured. E. Size: 36 inches square. F. Thickness: 4 mm. G. Color and Pattern: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. H. Acceptable Product: ECOnights Rubber Tiles by ECOsurfaoes Commercial Flooring or approved substitution. I. Accessories: 1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by floor covering manufacturer. 2. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerences and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,. depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates per manufacturers written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare per ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 096566 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended in writing by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended in writing by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. ' E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. ' F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. ' B. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, fbor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surtace. ' C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings, unless otherwise indicated. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on floor coverings. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply wfth adhesive and floor covering manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, ' adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION .. A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal ' less than one-half the at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless Indicated otherwise. I B. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, ff so numbered. 1. Lay tiles with grain running to one direction unless indicated otherwise. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surtaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughy. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 098566 - 3 OF 4 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Protect floor coverings from mars, merits, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of oonstnrction period. Use pnrtection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Protect floor coverings with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over floor coverings. f RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING END OF SECTION 096566 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 096700 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid-applied flooring as indicated on Drawings and specified herein including related accessories. a. Seamless, trowel-applied, slip-nrsistant, decorative epoxy resin composition flooring and integral cove base. '` 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pertormance Requirements: 11 1. Provide fluid-applied flooring system that demonstrates the following minimum performance characteristics: a. Compressive Strength: Minimum of 10,000 psi when tested per ASTM C579 . b. Tensile Strength: Minimum of 1,160 psi (unfilled resin) when tested per ASTM D638. II c. Hardness, Shore D: 80 per ASTM D2290. d. Impact Resistance: No dripping, cracking, or delamination when tested per MIL 024613. I e. Flexural Strength: 4,500 when tested per ASTM D790. ~ f. Adhesion: 400 psi when tested per ASTM D4541. g. Slip Resistance: Greater than 0.6 when tested per ASTM D2047. ~~ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate room layout, specific details for coved base, and control and expansion joint treatment. B. Product Data: Provide Manufacture's product literature covering components used in Work in addition to color options. ' C. Samples: 24 Inch by 24 inch Sample on plywood of finished floor for approval of final texture and color prior to commencement of Work. 1. Where scheduled, incorporate full height section of integral base. ' D. installation Instructions: Manufacture's instructions covering aspects of product installation. E. Maintenance Data: Manufacture's product maintenance literature. ' F. Applicator Approval: Provide written documentation indicating Manufacture's approval of Applicator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 3 years experience in manufacturing of products similar in complexity to those required for this Project. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm trained and approved by flooring manufacturer with not less than 3 ri ' years expe ence in installation of products similar in complexity to those required for this Project, Includlttg specific requirements indicated. 1. Successfully completed not less than 10 jobs of comparable scale projects. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096700 -1 OF 3 FLUID•APPLIED FLOORING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Mock-Up: 1. Construct separate mock-up panels for each type texture, and color of epoxy floor finish material required. a. Mock-up panels size: Minimum 5 foot square. 2. Locate mods-up panels where designated by Architect. Do not commence general installation of flooring until mock-up panels have been reviewed and approved by Owner and Architect. Notdy Owner and Architect 7 days in advance of date that mods-ups will be erected. 3. Approved mock-up panels will be used as standard by which acceptability of general installation will be judged. Do not alter or remove approved mock-up panels until directed by Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels cleariy identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store materials per manufacturer's instructions. 1. Store materials in dry, enclosed area with adequate protection from moisture. 2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 3. Storage Temperature: 65 degrees F and 80 degrees F . 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain substrate temperature at a minimum of 55 degrees F for 48 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of Work. 2. Provide adequate ventilation during application of epoxy flooring. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and woricmanshlp for 2 years against defects after completion and final acceptance aF Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 1 of the following fluid-applied epoxy systems: B. Milcor Company, Inc.: 1. Primer. 103. 2. Base Coat: 1882. 3. Top Coat: 6-23. _ _ NeoFlake for 20 mill systems ~ _ . ----S ~ _~-~~-~-,,-, ~~ b C. Tennant Companies: S u , NeoQuartz for 1/8" systems ~ ~ pfa~.t~ ""*'6'~ ll~ Ch 4~ i l ~ 1. Primer: ECO MPE. l em ca ~ l resistant urethane top ~,d. 2. Base Coat: ECO MPE. ~ coat at each type. _..__. __ _ ___ ___; 3. Top Coat: ECO HTS. D. Tenemc, Inc.: 1. Primer: 237 Power Tread. 2. Base Coat: 237 Power Tread. 3. Top Coat: 281 CRU. FLUID,APPLIED FLOORING 096700 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ~. L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .'~ . 11. Clarification to Part 2 -Products: The materials listed in "2.1 Materials" are to be use for the 20 rnil.epoxy flooring.described in alternate 7. For rooms noted .to have the "EF":epoxy.floor.system on the Finish Schedule, use thc following matcrial for a l/8" system instead of specified: ' A. Milcor: Milcorox Decorative Flooring for Quartz Epoxy flooring Micorthane 6-23 urethane top coat . B. Tennant: ~ ECO DQF for Quartz Epoxy flooring f ~ I ~~ ~0~ ~ ECO HTS urethane top coat ~ C. Tnemec: • 22 Deco-TYead with Part C Decorator Quartz 291 CRU urethane top coat D. Valspar•: EC-l 3 Decorative Flooring for Quartz Epoxy flooring CRU-400 urethane topcoat ~ E. Dur-A-flex: Dur A Quartz for Quartz Epoxy flooring ~ Dur-A Glaze urethane top coat i F. Key Resin Company: Color Quartz )3-125 for Quartz Epoxy flooring 450 urethane top coat . The above epoxy flooring shall be a non-sl'ip epoxy floor consisting of an•1/8" thick quartz epoxy .double coat i system and a clear urethane top coat with broadcast white silica sand. i .. ,~ ': i ,fib,` ' ~ V 1 l!/ ! ~ l: 4~1~ 14Y1,(Kt X~fC•','1 ff t' •~6ls~.t.1 ~. • ~ . 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER J E. Valspar oring: p, ~ 1. rimer: -7. \~ l~ B oat: E ' 3. Coat: C U-400. F. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturers full standard color range. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare surface per manufacturers instructions. 1. Cleaning: Scrub with detergent and rinse with clean water to remove surface dirt, grease, and ' oil. 2. Removing: Remove coatings and curing membranes with one of the following methods: 3. Mechanical: Wall mounted coat hooks. a. Sand floors. b. Chemical: Remove curing membranes with cleaner/remover. 4. Conditioning: Apply cleaner and ensure solution reacts with concxete in a general and equal fashion over all areas. ' S. Do not use unbuffered muriatic acid to condition concrete. B. Prefill surface irregularities, holes, and cracks per manufacturers installation instructions. ' C. Commencement of Work signifies acceptance of existing surfaces. D. Protect adjacent surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during application of special flooring. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cove per manufacturers instructions and approved Shop Dn~nrings. B. Apply bonding coat by trowel per manufacture's installation instructions. ' C. Apply aggregate and resin body coat to 1/4 inch nominal overell thickness per manufacture's recommendations. ' D... Apply grout coat as required to fill voids. E. Apply slip resistant finish coat in color and texture as selected by Architect and per manufacturers installation instructions and approved mock-ups. ' 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect flooring and base against damage for a period of 24 hours after coating application to comply ' with flooring manufacturers directions. 1. Protect against damage from rolling loads for initial perbd folkniving installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. Do not move heavy loads across new floor areas for a minimum period of 72 hours. 2. Cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. Provide final cleaning for floor and components. ' END OF SECTION PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 096700 - 3 OF 3 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING ~~ ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Modular, tufted carpet tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each product ind'~cated. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet the type, color, and dye lot. ' 2. Pattern of installation. 3. Edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 4. Transition details to other flooring materials. ' C. Samples: Submit 2 of each color and texture required. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-s¢e Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch long Samples. ' D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance data. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer certified by Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification progrem requirements. ' B. Mock-ups: Before installing carpet tile, build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. C. Salient Features: Drawings and Specifications are based on proprietary literature from manufacturer specified for carpet and acxessories. Material was selected based on specified manufacturers' colors and patterns, which are considered among salient features of specified materials. Other manufacturers shall comply with the following requirements in order to be considered for substitution: ' 1. Provide products in full compliance with materials, colors, textures, patterns, and other features indicated. 2. Products are submitted to Architect for review and consideration for written prior approval. 1 3. Understand that materials, colors, textures, patterns, and other features indicated have been selected to establish a cohesive design element of Project, therefore Architect is sole judge of compliance of substitutions with specified salient features. 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Ston3ge and Handling." ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096813 -1 OF 4 TILE CARPETING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Secction 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation:' B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet the manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet the installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specked warranty period. Failures include more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount Installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 square yards. B. Maintenance Service: 1. Submit manufacturer's complete maintenance data. 2. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturers printed instructions for maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Collins and Aikman. 2. Mannington Commercial. 3. Milliken Contrect Carpets. 4. Bigelow Commercial by Mohawk Industries. 5. Patcraft Commercial Carpet. 6. Approved Substitutions. See Salient Features Paragraph above. Substitutions will only be considered if proper and complete product information on specfied carpet and proposed carpet is submitted to Architect prbr to Bid Due Date. 2.2 MATERIALS A. CPT-2: 1. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. 2. Fiber Type: Solution Dyed. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER t 3. Pile Characteristic: Tuftedltextured patbem loop. 4. Density: 4500 ounces per cubic yard. 5. Pile Thickness: 0.146 inch minimum for finished carpet per ASTM D6859. ' 6. Stitches: 9.7 minimum. 7. Gage: 1/10 inch. 8. Surface Weight: 24 ounces per square yard. 9. Total Weight: 98 ounces per square yard for finished carpet. 10. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Reinforced synthetic. 11. Secondary Backing: Fiberglass reinforced. ' 12. 13. Size: 24 by 24 inches. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 14. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 15. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 16. Acceptable Product: Bigelow 24/7 AdapUBuzz/Connect Textured Patterned Loop or approved ' substitution with Architect's prior written approval. ' 2.3 A. ACCESSORIES Carpet Edge Guard, Non-Metallic: 1. Transition Between Carpet and Concrete: Roppe #174. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2. Transition Between Carpet and Vinyl Tile: Roppe #177. a. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 3. Transition Between Carpet and Ceremic Tile: Roppe, Inc. #56. ' a. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 4. Transition at fire rated doors with carpet on both sides: Mercer carpet edge #360 Snap-In-T with #970 carpet edge. ' a. Cobr. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full cobr rer19e. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydreulio-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet the manufacturer. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION . ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer preser>t, for cornpliance with requirements far maximum moisture content, alkalin'riy renge, installation tolerenoes, and other conditions affecting ' carpet tie performance. Examine carpet the for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hanieners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet the manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specfied in Section 033000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet tile. ' 3. Subfbors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Generel: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet the manufacturer's written installation instructons for preparing substrates indicated to rece'nre carpet the ' installation. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096813 - 3 OF 4 TILE CARPETING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, per manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 Inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet the manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhes'we. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet the manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Free lay; install carpet tiles without adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye late in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet the ~ butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture ' including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet the manufacturer. E. Extend carpet the into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove yarns that protrude from cerpet the surface. 2. Vacuum cerpet the using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet the to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet the against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet the manufacturer. END OF SECTION TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ~, ~ ~ .. ~ '~ r' '~ .•'1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 d COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLJC SERVICE CENTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.9 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tufted carpet. 2. Adhesives and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Seam locations. 3. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 4. Pile direction. 5. Edge, trensition, and other accessory strips. 6. Transition details to other flooring materials. 7. Carpet cushion. C. Samples: Submit 2 of each color and texture required. 1. Carpet: 12 inch square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12 inch long Samples. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualfied installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrete compliance with its cert~cation program requirements. B. Mock-ups: Before installing carpet, build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Salient Features: Drawings and Specifications are based on proprietary litereture from manufacturer specified for carpet and accessories. Material was selected based on specified manufacturers' colors and patterns, which are considered among salient features of specfied materials. Other manufacturers shall comply with the following requirements in osier to be considered for substitution: 1. Provide products in full compliance with materials, colors, textures, patterns, and other features indicated. 2. Products are submitted to Architect for review and consideration for written prior approval. 3. Understand that materials, colors, textures, patterns, and other features indicated have been selected to establish a cohesive design element of Project, therefore Architect is sole judge of compliance of substitutions with specified salient features. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SECTION 096816 SHEET CARPETING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 098878 -1 OF 4 SHEET CARPETING ~'.', COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.5 PROJECT CONDITfONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet Work in spaces is cornpiete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH renge recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Carpet Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet from unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures Include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Replacement Materials: After completion of Work, deliver not less than 2 percent of each type, Dolor, and pattern of carpet, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Provide accessory components as required, and replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective coverings, identified with appropriate labels. B. Maintenance Service: 1. Submit manufacturer's complete maintenance data. 2. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the folkrnring manufacturers: 1. Collins and Aikman. 2. Mannington Commercial. 3. Milliken Contract Carpets. 4. Bigelow Commercial by Mohawk Industries. 5. Patcraft Commercial Carpet. 6. Approved Substitutions. See Salient Features Paragraph above. Substitutions will only be considered if proper and complete product information on specified carpet and proposed carpet is submitted to Architect prior to Bid Due Date. 2.2 MATERIALS A. CPT 1: 1. Pile Characteristic: Tufted/textured pattern loop. 2. Densigl: 4500 ounces per cubic yard. 3. Pile Thickness: 0.146 inch minimum for finished carpet per ASTM D6859. 4. Stitches: 10.7 minimum. 5. Gage: 1/10 inch. SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 6. Surface Weight: 24 ounces per square yard. 7. Total Weight: 98 ounces per square yard for finished carpet. S. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Woven polypropylene. 9. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene. 10. Backing System: Single primary. 11. Dye Method: Solution dyed. 12. Width: 12 feet. 13. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color renge. 14. Installatron: Direct-glue. 15. Acceptable Product: Bigekriv 24x7 Connect Textured Patterned Loop or approved substitution with Architect's prior written approval. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Base: 4 inch high carpet base to match floor material. Provide carpet base with bound top edge. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-mod~ed, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-Metallic: 1. Transition Between Carpet and Concrete: Roppe #174. a. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2. Transifion Belween Carpet and Concrete: Roppe #164. a. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 3. Transition BeMreen Carpet and Vinyl Tile: Roppe #177. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 4. Transition Between Carpet and Ceramic Tile: Roppe, Inc. #56. a. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 5. ~ Transition at fire rated doors with carpet on both sides: Men~r carpet edge ~ki60 Snap-In-T with #970 carpet edge. a. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturers full color range. E. Provide other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to the approval of Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surtaces are smooth and flat with maximum variatbn of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of Work means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparetion," and with carpet manufacturers written installation instructions for preparing substrates. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 096816 - 3 OF 4 SHEET CARPETING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Immediately prior to installation of Work of this Section, thoroughly clean substrates and remove oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other foreign matter that would adversely affect the bond of adhesive. C. Make substrates level and free of irregularities. Assure 1 constant floor height after carpet is installed, filling low spots and grinding high spots as required. D. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or bcal low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. E. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. F. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturers' written installation instructions for the folkywing: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES t 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A Section Includes: 1. Surtace preparation and application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: a. Concxete masonry units (CMU). b. Steel. c. Galvanized metal. ' d. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). e. Wood. f. Gypsum board. g. Plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each Dolor and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. ' 3. Labe[ each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. ' C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the folkriving: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of cun+ent "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specfied in Part 2, with ' the proposed product highlighted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List" 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting ' ' Specification ManuaP for products and paint systems indicated. B. Modc-ups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system Indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and ' set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select 1 surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specked in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 square feet. ' b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent I'rAhting and other environmental services have been activated. ' 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary Dolor selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 099000 -1 OF 9 PAINTING AND COATING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers inwell-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in awell-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. B. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F. C. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above dew point; or to damp'or wet surfaces. D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: a. Interior, Paint: 1 gallon of each color applied. b. Exterior, Paint: 1 gallon of each color applied. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. National Manufacturers: '' 1. ICI Paints ~ 2. Valspar 3. Benjamin Moore 4. PPG Industries 5. Shervvin-Williams 2.2 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish oat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field~experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturers best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identfication will not be acceptable. 1. Products specified are by ICI Paints, unless otherwise indicated, similar quality products of acceptable manufacturers may be furnished. 2. Refer to Painting and Finishing Schedule at end of this Section for paint systems. a. Colors (PT#): Refer to Material Identification List for Dolor and sheen selections. PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 2 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES T ,. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' C. Sheen: When one of follow(ng terms is used to denote specific sheen for coating listed, following index shall apply: 1. Flat: Less than 15 units based on 85 degrees of sheen. ' 2. Eggshell: 5 to 20 units based on 60 degrees of sheen. 3. Satin/Low Lustre: 15 to 35 units based on 60 degrees of sheen. 4. Semi-glass: 30 to 65 units based on 60 degrees of sheen. 5. Gloss: Above 65 units based on 60 degrees of sheen. D. Chemical Components oFField-,Applied Interior Paints and Coating: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC corrtent of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. ' 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: ' a. Acrolein. b. Acrytonitrile. c. Antimony. ' d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2~thylhexyl) phthalate. ' h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dish lorobenzene. ' k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. ' o. He~xavalerrt chromium. p. Isophaone. q. Lead. . r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. 1 u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1 trichloroethane. ' y. Vinyl chloride. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES ' A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in aocordance~with paint manufacturers instructions and as specified, for each particular substrate condition. 1. Remove mildew, by scrubbing with solution of detergent, bleach and warm water. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry completely. 2. ~ Remove surface contamination from aluminum surfaces requiring paint finish by steam, high pressure water or solvent washing. Apply etching primer or acid etch. Apply paint immediately if acid etching. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 099000 - 3 OF 9 PAINTING AND COATING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Remove contamination from copper surtaces n~uiring paint finish by steam, high pressure water or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer or aad etch. Apply paint immediately if acid etching. 4. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using specified coating systems with substrate primed by others. B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in-place and not to be finish painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items by workmen skilled in trades involved. C. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatment. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminarrts from cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surtaces. 1. Remove dirt, oil, grease and sand if necessary to provide adhesion key, when asphalt, creosote or bituminous surfaces require paint finish. Apply o~mpatible sealer or primer. 2. Remove dirt, grease and oil from canvas and cotton insulated coverings. D. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block and cement plasterto be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by perfoRning appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. 1. Remove contamination, acid etch and rinse new concrete floors with Clearwater. Ensure required acid alkali balance is achieved. Allow to thoroughly dry. Repeat procedure if necessary to achieve a medium sandpaper-like profile. 2. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter from concrete and concrete block surfaces which are to be painted or to receive clear seal. Remove oil and grease with solution of trisodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to thoroughly dry. 3. Remove stains from concrete and concrete biodc surfacers caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after being thoroughly wetted wfth water. Allow to thoroughly dry. E. Gypsum Wallboard: Remove contamination from gypsum wallboard surfaces and prime to show defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied. F. Plaster Surtaces: Fill hairiine cracks, small holes and imperfections on plaster surfaces with patching plaster. Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they occur. G. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminates with acceptable non-petroleum based solvent. H. Ferrous Metals: Clean non-galvan'izsd, ferrous surfaces that have not been shop-coated of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning, complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)-SP3. 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats which have damaged or bare areas. Wiresbrush, sobent- clean, and touch-up with same primer as shop coat. 2. Clean unprimed steel surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces to indicate defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied. 3. Sand and scrape shop primed steel surfaces to remove loose primer and. rust. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. (Prime steel including shop primed steels.) PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -4 OF 9 PHASE THREE- BID PACKAGES 3.12 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE ~ P~l~ ~ l A. Finish Carpentry Substrates: I j I ~q ~0~ 1. Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3E. • -_ - a•. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent). _ ~ b. 2 Finish_Coats: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane (satin). COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ___. __._ ~ PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. ' 1. Prime or seal wood required to be job painted immediatey upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood. 2. When transparent finish is required, back-prime with one k~at of same material as used for surface. ' 3. Seal tops, bottoms and cut-outs of wood doors with coat of surface finish immediately upon delivery to job for field painted doors only. • 4. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply thin coat of white shellac or other ' recommended knot sealer, before appliks~tion of priming coat. 5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in frnish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 6. Remove dust, grit and foreign matter from exterwr wood siding which is to receive paint finish. ' Seal knots, pitch streak and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 7. Prior to finishing glue laminated beams, wash down surfaces with solvent and remove grease and ' dirt. 3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION ' A. Mix and prepare painting materials and transparent finish materials per manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce mixture~oF uniform density, and as required during application of materials. Do not stir any film that may form on surface into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. ' 3.3 APPLICATION A Application Procedures: Apply pairrts and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators per manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. ' 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with or~ce size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture requinerl. 1 4. Apply each coat at proper consistency. 5. Each coat of paint shall be slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by Arohfted. ' 6. Provide finish k:oats which are compatible with prime pairrts used. B. Do not apply succeeding eats until previous coat has completely dried. Sand between each enamel or varnish coat application with fine sandpaper, or nrb surfaces with pumice stone where required to ' produce even, smooth surface in accordance with coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. ' C. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions showthrough final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. ' D. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces, unless othewise indicated. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 089000 - 5 OF 9 PAINTING AND COATING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Film Thickness: Apply materials in accordance to paint manufacturers recommendations and spreading ' rates to provide total dry film thickness as recommended. 1. Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated , 2. Use precsion instruments designed for measuring and evaluation wet and dry films of paints and coatings. 3. ResuRs m~surirlg Ins than recommended thickness wiU require additional material application. 4. Use of poor hiding colors may require application of additional coats in order to achieve proper , coverage and hiding. F. Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cloned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioretion. ' G. Allow sufficient time between successnre coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat. , H. Prime Coats: Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure finish coatwith no bum through or otherdefects due to insufficient sealing. , I. Transparent Finish: On exposed portions, use muwple coats to produce glass~mooth surface film continuity of even luster. Provide finish free of laps, cloudiness, cobr irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final eats, unless , otherwise indicated. J. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment or furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. ' K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for cobr, texture, and ooverege. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not k~rrrplying with requirements. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ' 3.4 A. Refer to mechanical and electrical documents with respect to field painting and finishing requirements. Painting of mechanical and electrical Work is not required in pipe chases, tunnels, and mechanical rooms ' with unpainted walls. B. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location and paint separately. ' C. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected. D. Paint exposed piping, insulated piping and conduit occurring in finished areas. Colorand texture to match adjacent surfaces. ' 1. Do not paint exposed piping or spiral ductwork in Club Room. E. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. ' 3.5 A. CLEANING As Work prokx:eds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or spattered. , Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted areas. B. During progress of WodC keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation oftools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. Remove at end of each workday. ' C. Upon completion of Work clean window glass and other paint pattered surfaces and leave premises neat and clean, to satisfaction of Architect. PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 6 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ,~ ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3.6 PROTECTION A. Adequately cover or otherwise protect finished Work of other trades and other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as result of inadequate or unsu~able protection as acceptable to Architect. ' 1. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. B. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute fire hazard inclosed metal containers and ' remove daily from site. C. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items shall be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of Work in each area. Do not use ' solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective ' wrappings provided by others for protection of their Work after completion of painting operations. 3.7 PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE (EXTERIOR) A. Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces (Galvanized, Aluminum): ' 1. Surfaces Included: a. Steel lintels, lirrtel plates, relieving angles. ' b. Hollow metal doors and frames( painting on both sides). c. Exterior handrails d. Metal handrails, guardrails, ladders. 2. Waterborne System (low-VOC): (WaterbomeAcryl'~c Gloss Enamel over Watert~ome Metal Primer) a. Primer. 1 coat ICI/ Devfiex Waterborne Aquacrylic DTM Primer#4020 (or 1 coat touchup if ' preprimed). b. Finish: 2 eats ICI/Devfliex Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel #4216 Series. ' B. Ferrous Metal Surfaces (Steel, Iron): 1. Surfaces Included: a. Roof ventilators, roof verrts. ' b. Exterior ferrous metal. c. Steel handrails, guardrails, and infill mesh. 2. Waterborne System (Law VOC): (Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel over Waterborne Metal Primer) ° ' a. Primer. 1 coat ICI/Devfiex Waterborne Aquacrylic DTM Primer #4020 (or 1 coat touch-up if preprimed). b. Finish: 2 chats ICI/Devfiex Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel #4216 Series. ' 3.8 PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE (INTERIOR) A Unft Masonry Surfaces: 1. Surfaces included: a. Walls where indicated to be painted. 2. Waterborne Low VOC, Low Odor System: (Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Finish over Latex Block Filler -not more than 50 grams VOC's per liter, not less than 35 percent solids, ammonia free ' Ong) a. Block Filler. 1 coat ICI/Bloxfil Heavy Duty Acrylic Block /Filler #4000. b. Finish: 2 coats ICI/Lifemaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Eggshell Finish #LM9300 ' Series. 1 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 098000 - 7 OF 9 PAINTING AND COATING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Surtaces Included: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. b. Steel stairs c. Metal access panels. d. Metal louvers and grilles indicated to be painted. e. Exposed and miscellaneous metals. f. Other exposed to view interior ferrous metals not factory finished. 2. Waterborne Low VOC, Low Odor System: (Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic over Waterbome Metal Primer -not more than 40 grams VOC's per liter, not less than 35 percent solids, ammonia free coating). a. Primer. 1 coat ICUDevflex Waterbome Aquacrylic DTM Primer #4020 Series. b. Finish: 2 coats ICI/Lifemaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish #LM9200 Series. C. Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Included: a. Gypsum wallboard, including over skim coat of joint compound. b. Apply additional coat of primer under deep tone finish paint. c. Sheens: Refer to Material Iderrtfication Code and Room Finish Schedule for finish types. 2. Waterbome Low VOC, Low Odor System: (Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Finish over Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Primer -not more than 40 grams VOCs per liter, not less than 35 percent solids, ammonia free coating). a. Primer: 1 coat ICI/ Prep & Prime Odor-Less Primer Sealer #LM9116. b. Finish: 1) 2 coats ICI/Lifemaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Eggshell Finish #LM9300 Series. 2) 2 coats ICI/L'demaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Flat Finish #LM9100 Series. 3) 2 coats ICI/Lifemaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish #LM9200 Series. D. Plaster Surfaces: 1. Waterbome Law VOC, Low Odor System: (Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic over Waterbome Metal Primer -not more than 40 grams VOC's per liter, not less than 35 percent sobs, ammonia free coating). a. Primer: 1 coat ICUDevflex Waterbome Aquacrylic DTM Primer #4020 Series. b. Finish: 2 coats ICI/Lifemaster Low VOC, Low Odor Acrylic Semi-Gloss Flnlsh #LM9200 Series. 3.9 SPECIAL SURFACES A. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces (Ceilings): 1. Surfaces Included: a. Bar joist, decking and supports. b. Galvanized ductwork, piping, conduits. c. Exposed metal at ceiling. 2. Waterborne Systems: (Waterbome Dryfall over Waterbome Metal Primer). a. Primer (touch-up if pn3-primed): ICI/Devflex Waterbome DTM Primer #4020 Series. b. Finish: 2 coat ICI/Spraymaster Uni-Grip WB Waterbome Eggshell Dryfall #14821). 3.10 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substn~tes: 1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior), MPI #115. PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 8 OF 9 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior), MPI #115. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #i50. b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior), MPI #115. c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior), MPI #115. 3.11 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Architect will provide Color Schedule after award of Contn~ct, and paint manufacturer has been established COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER END OF SECTION PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 099000 - 9 OF 9 PAINTING AND COATING COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: ' 1. Steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material ' descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Wortc. 1 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show ceiling grid and overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples for Verification: Submit 2 of the following products, in manufacture's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6 inch square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. D. E. Product Certficates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requiremerrts in GSA's CID-,A,A~0003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84, or another standard acceptable to aut#~orities having jurisdiction, by qual~ed testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural 8 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 7.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 142113 -1 OF 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphataed and selected for smoothness. 1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A879/A879M, 01Z 2. Hot-0ip Galvanized: ASTM A653/A653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standani of flatness. C. Stainless~teel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. 2.2 STEEL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partition Corporation. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation. 5. Global Steel Products Corporation. 6. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 7. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 8. Metpar Corp. ~~110~ 9. Sanymetal Partitions Corporation. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: In 2.2.B, change toilet enclosure style to "overhead braced', ~~ 1~\~ C. Urinal-Screen Style: Overhead braced. D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and formed edge closures; comers secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, disoolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. 2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. E. Urinal-Screen Construction: 1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses as follows: 1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036 inch. 2. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.048 inch. 3. Panels: 0.036 inch. 4. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thtckness, but not less than 0.030 inch. 5. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels. 6. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 7. Wedge-Shaped, WalNiung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036 inch. ' G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless~teel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. H. Urinal-Scn~n Post: Manufacturers standard post design of material matching thickness and ' construction of pilasters or 1-3/4-inch square, aluminum tube with satin finish; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on pilaster. I. Brackets (Fittings): ' 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel. J. Steel-Sheet Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturers standard baked-on finish, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings. Comply with ' coating manufacturers written instructions for applying and baking. Apply 1 color in each room. 1. Color: As Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturers standard design, heavy-duty operating haniware and accessories. ' 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturers standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors _ ~ open at any angle up to 90 degrees. -. S.. ~ Latch and Keeper. Manufacturers standard surtace-mounted latch unit designed for ' -.emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door stake and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturers standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to ' prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper. Manufacturers standard rubber-tipped bumper at out winging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturers standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory ' requtremer~ts for accessbility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or ' chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant Type heads. Provide sex~ype bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resisthnt, protective-coated sfieel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Floor-and-Ceiling-,Anchored Units: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to ' conceal anchorage. C. Door Slze and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-Inch wide, ' clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102113 - 3 OF 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Generel: Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, ' level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearences: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. ' b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than 2 brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or the joirrts. ' b. Align brackets at pilasters with breckets at walls. B. Floor-and-Ceiling Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed , position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware per hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 102213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. ' C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specked. D. Maintenance data. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aoom wre 8~ Iron Works, Inc. 2. American Woven Wire Corporation. 3. California Wire Products Corporation. 4. Centre) Wire and Iron. 5. Donaldson, R. J., Inc. 6. Folding Guard Corporation. ' 7. G-S Company (The). 8. Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 9. 10. Jesco Industries, Inc. Kenco Wire and Iron Products Inc. 11. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 12. King Wire Partitions, Inc. 13. Lakeside Wire and Iron Company. 14. Miller Wire Works, Inc. 15. Newark Wire Works Inc. 16. Standard Wire & Steel Works. ' 17. Wire Crafters, LLC. 2.2 MATERIALS ' A. Steel Wire: ASTM A510. B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. ' C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008~IA1008M, Commercial Steel ACS), Type B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is indicated or required by structure) loads. E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold-formed structure)-steel tubing. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102213 -1 OF 4 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 zinc ' (galvanized) orA60 zin~iron~alby (galvannealed) dating designation. G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standani steel bolts, nuffi, and washers. H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 -Painting and Coating. 2.3 STANDARD-0UTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: 0.135 inch diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2 inch diamond mesh. B. Vertical Panel Framing: 1-1/4by-0/8-by-0.097 inch cold-rolled, C-shaped steel channels with 1/4 inch diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches on center along center of framing. C. Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-by-1/2-by-1/8 inch cold-rolled steel channels. D. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 cold-rolled steel channels, not less than 1 by 3/8 by 1/8 inch, bolted or riveted tce to toe through mesh or 1-by-1/2-by-1/8 inch cold-rolled steel channels with wire woven through. E. Top Capping Bars: 2-1/4-by-1 inch cold-roiled steel channels. F. Posts for 90-Degree Comers: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8 inch steel angles with 1/4 inch diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with floor anchor clips. G. Posffi for Other-Than-0O-Degree Comers: Manufacturer's standard steel pipe or tubing with 1/4 inch diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing. 1. Partitions up to 12 Feet High: 1-1/4 inch OD. 2. Partitions up to 20 Feet High: 2-1/2 inch OD. H. Adjustable Comer Posffi: 2, manufacturer's standard steel pipe or tubing posts connected by steel hinges at 36 inches on center attached to posts; with 1/4 inch diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing. I. Line Posffi: 3 inch by 4.1 pound or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4by-0:127 inch steel channels; with 5-by-18-by-1/4 inch steel base plates punched for attachment to floor. J. Intersection Posts: 1-1/4by-1-1/4 inch tubular steel, with 1/4 inch diameter boR holes aligned for boking to adjacent panels. K Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment. L. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4by- 1/2-by-1/8 inch steel channels or C-channels, banded with 1-1/4-by-1/8 inch flat steel bar ever plates on 4 sides, and with 1/8 inch thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb. 1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-by-3 inch steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 2. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with cylinder specified in Section 087100 -Door Haniware; operated by key ouffiide and recessed turn knob ins(de. M. Accessories: As required to provide a complete system. N. Finish for Undated Ferrous Steel: Baked-enamel finish unless otherwise indicated. .1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1MRE MESH PARTITIONS 102213 - 2 OF 4 PHASETHREE -BID PACKAGES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes. not less than those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh Item manufacturer. As required for ' complete installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and finish sand. B. Standard-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. a. Provide hor¢ontal stiffeners as indicated or, iF not indicated, as required by panel height ' and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld hor¢ontal stiffeners to vertical framing. b. Fabricate intersections using intersection posts. c. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. ' 3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. 4. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, ' fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels. 5. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install hardware. 6. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES ' A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A123/A123M, for galvanizing steel and iron components. 2. ASTM A153/A153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 3. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean wire mesh componenrts of ' grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to compy with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental ' exposure cgnditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Appy shop primer to undated surfaces of metal fabricetions, except those with ' galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Compy with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1 D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish, suitable for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat ' 1. Color and Gloss: Black. PART 3 - F~CECUTION 3.1 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8 inch diameter, anchors at 12 inches on center through ' floor shoes located at each post and comer. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102213 - 3 OF 4 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches on center through bads comer panel framing with fasteners appropriate to substrate. C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels. with 1/4 inch diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches on center. D. Provide Ilne posts at locations indicated. E. install doors complete with door hardware. F. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions anc~ doors where indicated. G. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 102213 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY 1 1 1 1 SECTION 102226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS '~ A. Section Includes: 1. Manualy operated, acoustical panel partitions. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Performance Requirements: 1. Delegated Design: Design operable panel partitions including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Acoustical Performance: ~ Provide operable panel partitions tested by qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties per test methods indicated: a. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound transmission loss performance per ASTM E90, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. b. Acoustical Performance Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC per ASTM E336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for 10 dB less than STC value indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate bcation and installation requirements for harclware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Chanacteristics: Provide panels with finishes rs3eting one of the folkyuving as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E t34. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested per NFPA 265. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form (n which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specfied warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 902226 -1 OF 4 OPERABLE PARTITIONS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~~ . 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturers standard thickness. B. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturers standard thickness. C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Series 641 by Hufcor or comparable product by one of the following: a. Advanced Equipment Corporation. b. Moderco Inc. c. Modemfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group Company. d. Panelfold Inc. B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual panels. C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joirrts and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surtace and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. E. STC: Not less than 52. F. Panel Weight: Approximately 8 pounds per square foot. G. Panel Thickness: Not less than 4 inches. H. Panel Closure: Manufacturers standard. 1. Han~ware: Manufacturers standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard seals of types indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following: 1. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 2. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. 1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bot~m seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 1-1/2 inches beMreen retracted seal and floor finish. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 2 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.4 FINISH FACING A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response ' characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildevwres nt nonstaining adhesive ~ recommended by facing manufacturers written A l J ~( ~ l instructions. Add to 2.4.A: "All operable partitions shall have carpet wall covering:' ` H'~!u ~ l~ q~~g 1. Color/Pattern: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. ~ I l ' B. Carpet Wall Covering: Manufacturers standard nonwoven, needle-punched carpet with fibers fused to backing, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains. C. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturers standard 100 percent polyolefin woven fabric, from same dye ' lot, treated to resist stains. D. Pairrt: Manufacturers custom factory-painted finish in Dolor selected by Architect. ' E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints. ' 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted as indicated on Drawings, designed for type of ' operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout ' indicated for partition operation and storage. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. ' C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum. ' 1. Multidirectional SlnritcAies: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or X intersections and allowing panels to be moved in all pass-through, 90-degree change, and cross-over travel direction combinations. ' D. Steel Finish: Manufacturers standard, factory,applied, corrosion-resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. ' 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Storage Pocket Door. Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating ' hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. PART 3 -EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition ' manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including palming, ' have been completed. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 10'1226 - 3 OF 4 OPERABLE PARTITIONS COWMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, crecked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accuratey and securely without forcing or binding. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. NIC Testing: Engage qualfied testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation per ASTM E336, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements. C. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select 1 operable panel partition installation(s) for testing. D. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compl'~ance of repaired, replaced, or additional Work with specked requirements. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION OPERABLE PARTITIONS 102226 - 4 OF 4 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 102613 CORNER GUARDS PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Corner guards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptbns, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Comer Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, comers, top caps, and field splices. ' C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer. ' C. Fire Test-Response Characterist'~cs: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities ' having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' .. A. Store plastic wall-protection oomponents for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F. ' 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall~rotection units that fail in materials or workmanship within ' specfied warranty period. 1. Warranty Perbd: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the specified manufacturers: 1. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. ' 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. 5. Pawling Corporation. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102613 -1 OF 2 CORNER GUARDS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: High-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 8221. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal; security-type where exposed to view. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Comer Guanis: Assemby consisting of snap-0n plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Cover. Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078 inch wall thickness; as follows: a. Profile: Nominal 3 inch long leg and 1/4 inch comer redius. b. Helght: 4 feet, unless indicated otherwise. c. Color and Texture: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Retainer. Minimum 0.060-inch thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum. 3. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; f'iekl adjustable for close alignment with snap-0n cover. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Generel: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that mjght be viable in finished Work. 1. Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in corridors and locker rooms on gypsum board wall comers. Install from 6 inches above finish floor to 60 inches above finish floor Do not install at the outside corners. 2. Provide mounting ~ hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devk~s to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust top caps as required to ensure tight seams. 3.3 CLEANING A. immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. END OF SECTION CORNER GUARDS 102613 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Bath accessories. 3. Building accessories. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. 1.5 A. B. COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other Work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act, ANSI 117.1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturers recommendations. 1. Protect from elements and damage. .d~I~1:~~11-IS1CIri Coordinate accessory locations with other Work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabil'~ies, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying Work. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102813 -1 OF 5 TOILET ACCESSORIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and workmanship for 1 year against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. B. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specked warrenty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer. 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. A & J Washroom Accessories 3. American Infant Care Products Inc. 4. American Specialties, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporetion. 6. Brocar Products. 7. Koala Corporation. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Drawings and Specifications are based on manufacturers proprietary literature from Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Other manufacturers shall comply with minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on Drawings or specified herein. B. Toilet Paper Holder, Multi-Roll (TPD): Surface mounted, dual roll type; cast aluminum or stainless steel, satin finish. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Specialties, inc.: No. 02641 a. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B 2740. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 5234. C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal (SND): Recessed mounted feminine napkin disposal; 18 gage door and disposal panel, 22 gage cabinet, 304 stainless steel, satin finish all exposed surfaces; full length stainless steel piano hinge'on self closing door and disposal panel, 4 inches deep. Hem exposed edges. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0473. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, inc.: No. 31 X53. c. Bradley Corporetion: No. 4731-15. D. Large Capacity Waste Receptacle (WPR): Semi-recessed stainless steel waste container with removable liner; satin finish, for mounting in 4 inch wall with 4 inch to 5 inch projection. Provide vinyl liner for waste and equip steel waste container with hanger hooks for vinyl liner. 1. Waste Container Capacity: 12 gallons. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0458. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-3644. c. Bredley Corporation: No. 344. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' 2.3 GENERAL ACCESSORIES 1 '.1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Soap Dish (S.DISH-1): Recessed, heavy{luty, 304 stainless steel, satin finish soap dish: 1. Size: 7-3/16 inch by 5 inch. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0398. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-4390. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 940 and No. 9402. 3. Mounting: Recessed, with clamp or lugs appropriate for securing to wall construction indicated. ' . n„~ n~ l.g 4. Locations: Provide 1 at each shower. One soap dish shall be provided at each shower, i~,p. NN B. Mirror With Frame -Without Shelf (MIRROR): 1/4 inch float or plate glass, electr~o-copper plated mirror guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. 304 stainless steel with satin finish angle frame, 22 gage, approximately 5/8 by 5/8 inch with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 20 gage galvanized steel back, concealed mounting devices. 1. Mirror sizes: a. MIR-2A: 24 inches wide by 36 inches high unless indicated otherwise. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B 290 Series. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS TOILET AN TH~,ICCESSORIES ~~,,',~~ II~ A. Diaper Changing Station ~ or¢ontal, 1i lased-mounted design, 35 inches by 20 inches by 4 inches deep in closed position, 20 inches wide when opened. Made of 18 Gage 304 Satin Stainless Steel. . 1. Size: 35-1/4 inches long by 20 inches wide by 4 inches deep. 2. Provide complete with safety straps and sanitary bed liner dispenser. 3. Acceptable Manufacturen3 and Product: Clarification to 2.4A: The diaper changing station is fully '~ a. Koala Corporation: KB110SSRE. recessed and~has a stainless steel exterior as specified 1 glDg b. Approved Substitutions. and high impact polyethylene interior. 1 ~ `~' B. Underlavatory Guard (ULG-1): Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and bums from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 1. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic. 2. Minimum wall th'~ckness: 1/8 inch. 3. Color: White. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. American Graby Inc.: HC500R Trap Wrap Standard. b. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.: Pro-Extreme. c. TCI Products: Skal+Gard. d. Truebro, Inc.: Lav-Guam. C. Shower Curtain: Vinyl Shower Curtain, minimum 0.006 inch thick, opaque, white, matte vinyl with hemmed edges and corrosion-resistant grommets at minimum 6 inches on center through top hem. 1. Size: 42 inches wide by 72 inches high. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. 204-2. . 3. Antibacterial Shower Curtain: Minimum 10-ounce, nylon-reinforced vinyl or 0.008 inch- thick vinyl material with integral antibacterial agent and corrosion-resistant grommets at minimum 6 inches on center through top hem. a. Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. b. Color: White. 4. Locations: Provide at each shower location. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102813 - 3 OF 5 TOILET ACCESSORIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Shower Curtain Rod and Hooks: Concealed mounting, 304 stainless steel, 18 gage,1 inch diameter curtain rod; 304 stainless steel, 20 gage, 1-piece die formed mounting flanges, satin fihish exposed surfaces. 1. Provide complete with stainless steel curtain hooks (4 per foot, plus 2 extra per rod) or as required for proper installation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Speciaties, Inc.: No. 1224 Series with No. 1200-SHU hooks. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. 8-207 Series with No. 204-1 hooks. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 9538 Series with No. 9536 hooks. 3. Locations: Provide at each shower location with shower curtain. E. Heavy-0uty Ckrthes Hook (CH): Solid cast aluminum, concealed mounting coat hook. Provide complete with stainless steel mounting screws designed for specific substrate (include plugs or expansion shields where required). 1. Size: 3-7/16 inch total projection. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.: B-2116. b. Comparable products are limited to the following specified manufacturers. 1) American Speciakies, Inc. 2) Bradley Corporation. F. Mop and Broom Holder. Combination unit with 18 gage, 304 stainless steel shelf with 1-1/2 inch return edge for rigidity, mounting brackets welded to shelf, rag hooks riveted to shelf, and drying rod, with satin finish on exposed surfaces: 1. Mop/Broom Holders: Spring-loaded rubber cams with anti-slip coating. 2. Size: 30 Inches minimum. 3. Locations: Provide 1 at each mop or slop sink. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. American Speciaties, Inc.: 1315-3. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Ina: B-224x30. c. Bradley Corporation: Bradex Model 9983. _ nn,,,,~3"t,`0~ 2.5 GRAB BARS AND TOWEL BARS ~ Clarification project has_grab bars, but on towef6ars. j ~` ~~~?*' A. Grab Bars: Concealed mounting, 1-1/2 inch diameter, stainless steel, satin finish. Complete with proper type of anchor for construction conditions and normally anticipated loads. Provide grab bar manufacturer's standard concealed anchor plate for stud wall construction. •• 1. Length: As indicated on Dnsuvings. 2. Where grab bars are mounted on dissimilar adjacent surfaces that do not meet on an equal plane, modify end post lengths as required to mount grab bars plumb and true. 3. Provide special norr~lip finish on grab bars where indicated. 4. Locations: Provide where indicated on Drawings, and at each accessible toilet stall and shower. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 3200 Series. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-6806 Series with No. 256 series Anchor Plate. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 812 Series with 899-015 Series anchor plates. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Generel: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER B. Mirror Frame Filler. 1. Where framed mirrors are mounted on walls having ceramic the wainscots not flush with wall above, provide fillers at void between back of mirror and wall surface. ' 2. Fabricate fillers from same material and finish as mirror frame, contoured to conceal void behind mirror at sides and top. C. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. ' Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner. 1. Key accessories alike. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 ~ INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install accessories in locations indicated with anchor devices of types specified or required for given substrates. Fasten securely, true, plumb, and level. Drill holes to correct site and at locations that are concealed by accessory. ' 1. Install recessed accessories into wall openings with wood screws through cabinet side into wood blocking or studs, or sheet metal screws into metal backing or studs. 2. Install surface mounted accessories to hollow back up using toggle bolts and to metal or wood ' backing using proper type screws. C. Install grab bars to wRhstand downward load of at least 250 pound-force, when tested per method in ASTM F446. ' 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. ' B: • Clean and polish exposed surfaces per manufacturers written recommendations. 3.4 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered,_smooth opera_ lion. Replace dammed or defective items. . " terns are approved with the Columbia Accessori ~ The following i following modifications. ~l~~ II~ d ~ p IOdQ . • ~~ivu~ yr ~~C~:I"~IUN~ ~ ~ ~ 1. Baby Changing-18 gauge hinge and 304 Stainless Steel 2. Grab Bars 3. Framed Mirror - 20 gauge steel back ' 4. Mop and Broom Holder - must be 18 gauge 5. Sanitary Napkins Disposal 6. Robe Hook - to match B-2l 1~6 7. Toilet Paper Holder 8. Waste Receptacle - must be 1~8 gauge and ' provide vinyl liner. 9. Shower Curtain Hooks 10. Vinyl Shower Curtain 11. Soap Dish fasteners 12. Shower Curtian Rod - concealed ' - PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102813 - 5 OF 5 and 18 gauge ____ __ ___ 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 102815 DETENTION TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Stainless-steel mirrors. 2. Grab bars. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for detention toilet accessories. Fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in adjoining construction. ' B. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to dimensions required for recessed detention toilet accessories. 1.4 MAINTENANCE TOOLS A. Tool Kit: Provide 1 set of tools for use with security fasteners, each packaged in a compartmented kit configured for easy handling and storage. ' 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering ' for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Security Fasteners: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes •or fraction thereof, of each type and size of security fastener installed. ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, CS (Commeroial Steel), Type B. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304; Type 430 for mirrors. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. ' D. Concealed Bolts: ASTM A307, Grede A unless otherwise indicated. E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select per AWS specfications. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102815 -1 OF 3 DETENTION TOILET ACCESSORIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-Of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide detention toilet accessories from Norix Group, Inc., as specifies, or comparable products from the following manufacturers: 1. American Specialties Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. PSI LLC. 4. Approved substitutions. 2.3 DETENTION MIRRORS (DM) A. Large, Integrally Fremed Detention Mirror with Round Comers: Minimum 11 inches wide by 17 inches high; with mirror and integrel frame formed from 0.050 inch thick, stainless-steel sheet; with round corners. 1. Mounting: Front mounting with security fasteners to 0.168 inch nominal-thickness, metallic- coated steel mounting plate. 2. Finish: No. 8 with highly polished finish for mirror. 3. Axeptable Products: a. American Speciaties Inc.: Model No. 107. b. Bradley Corporation: Model SA05. c. Nomc Group, Inc.: Model No. R565-411. d. PSI LLC: M-620. 2.4 DETENTION GRAB BARS A. Detention Grab Bars: 1-1/2 inches in diameter; formed from 0.050 inch thick, stainless~teel tubing, with 3 inch diameter flanges formed from 0.125 inch thick, stainless steel. Closure plate welded ~ tube to close gap between tube and wall formed from 0.125 Inch thick, stainless steel. All welded construction. Front mounting. 1. Length: 24 inches long, Model No. IGS-24. 2. Length: 36 inches long, Model No. IGS-36. 3. Length: 42 inches long, Model No. IGS-42. 4. Mounting: Front mounting with security fasteners. 5. Finish: No. 4. 6. Acceptable Products: a. American Specialties Inc.: Model No. 162. b. Bradley Corporation: Model SA05. c. Norix Group, Inc.: Detention Grab Bar. d. PSI LLC: GB-600. 2.5 SECURITY FASTENERS A. Provide corrosion resistant fasteners and attachment devices, and other fittings necessary to assure function and operation of accessories. B. Fasteners that are operable only by tools produced by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator for use on specific type of fastener. C. Provide drive-system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength, and as follows: 1. Drive-System Types: Pinned Torx Plus. 2. Fastener Strength: 120,000 psi. 3. Socket Button Head Fasteners: a. Heat~reated alloy steel, ASTM F835. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F879, Group 1 CW. DETENTION TOILET ACCESSORIES 102815 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 2.6 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 4. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners: a. Heat treated alloy steel, ASTM F835. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F879, Group 1 CW. 5. Socket Head Cap Fasteners: a. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM A574. b. Stainless steel, ASTM F837, Group 1 CW. 6. Protective Coatings for Heat-Treated Alloy Steel: a. Zinc and clear trivalent chromium, where indicated. b. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F1137, Grade I, or black oxide unless otherwise indicated. STEEL FINISHES A. Steel Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled-, pressed-, and forged~teel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to oompiy with ASTM A123/A123M. 2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surtaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scretches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. B. Intermediate Polish Finish: No. 4 unless otherwise indicated. C. Grind and polish mirrored surfaces to produce uniform, mirror-polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAL-L-ATION A. Install accessories per manufacturer's instructions. Install plumb, level, and rigidly anchored to substrates. B. Where Drawings or schedule require barrier-free accessibility, install accessories per applicable regulations. C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing detention toilet accessories to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for masonry inserts, security fasteners, and other connectors. D. Security Fasteners: Install detention toilet accessories using security fasteners with head style appropriate for installation requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials. Provide stainless~teel security fasteners in stainless-steel materials. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 102815 - 3 OF 3 DETENTION TOILET ACCESSORIES 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. ' 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. ' B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. ' 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate s'¢e of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. ' B. Coordinate s'~zes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.4 SEQUENCING ' A. Appy vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete. ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel {CS), Type B. B. Transparent Acryl'~c Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type (FEC-1): Su'dable for fire extinguisher. ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Design for fire extinguisher cabinets is based on Architectural Series FS 240~R3 by Larsen's Manufacturing Corr any. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named product or comparable product by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. I b. Modem Metal Products, Division of Technico Inca c. Potter Roemer - A Division of Acorn Engineering Company. 2. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated. a. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428 inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8 inch thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory~rilled mounting holes. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 104413 -1 OF 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS .. .... COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 4. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with 1-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to acxommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation. a. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/2 inch backbend depth. 5. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet or extrusions. 6. Door Material: Steel sheet. 7. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. 8. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. a. Acrylic Sheet Color. Clear transparent acrylic sheet. 8. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. a. Provide manufacturers standard. b. Provide manufacturers standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 10. Accessories: a. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 11. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. c. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturers standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Providefactory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors per manufacturers standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and holkriv-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter doorframes. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on e~osed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. ' Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gbss: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAAAINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and bbcking where semi-recessed cabinets ' B will be installed. b c rected ti f t diti h h i ll l ft P d i t tb . ave een or . er unsa s ac ory con ons n on y a rocree w t ns a a ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fin: protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. I 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fine protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdictbn. ' 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet unless indicated otherwise. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. E G 3.4 ANIN ADJUSTING AND CL A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless indicated otherwise in manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking ' C. devices operate properly. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. . D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- ' finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful ' repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. ~' END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 104413 - 3 OF 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 1 Q4416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inductee: 1. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers ' 2. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS t A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and fin(shes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. t B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to kromply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire 1 ~ Extinguishers:' B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing . agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. ' 1.5 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ' 1. Failures include the following: . a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: 6 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capadty for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bradket indicated. ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance wtih requirements, provide Mode{ MP5 by Larsen's Manufacturing Company or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. ' b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Ktdde company. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 104416 -1 OF 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. ' e. J. L Industries: Model FE05. f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. g. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. h. Potter Roemer LLC. ' i. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel. ' 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. ' B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4A:60-B:C, 5-pound nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled~teel container. C. TBD. ' 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturers standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with baked-enamel finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of f re extinguisher. ' B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 105113 METAL LOCKERS PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Athletic metal lockers. 2. Locker benches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sectlons, details, and attachments to ' other Work. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. . ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: B. Where metal lockers and benches are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. ' 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver combination control charts to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1 5 WARRANTY . A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within spedfied warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Structural failures. ' b. Faulty operation of latches and other door haniware. 2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is exduded. 3. Warrenty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lodkers: 2 years from date of Substantial ' Completion. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, su'dable for exposed applications. B. Expanded Metal: ASTM F1267, Type II (flattened), Class I, 3/4-inch steel mesh, with at least 70 ' percent open area. C. Steel Tube: ASTM A500, cold rolled. ' PHASE THREE -BID' PACKAGES 105113 -1 OF 5 METAL LOCKERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Fasteners: Zino- or nickel-plated steel, slatless--type, exposed bo{t heads; with self-locking nuts or , lock washers for nuts on moving parts. E. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrete. 1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls for corrosion resistance. 2. Providetoothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.2 ATHLETIC METAL LOCKERS A. Basis-0f-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Invincible II Lockers by Penco Products, or a comparable product of one of the foiknnring: 1. Knocked-Down, Athletic Metal Lockers: a. Art Metal Products: HDV Lockers. b. ASI Storage Solutions Inc.: Competitor Collection. c. General Storage Systems Ltd.: Mod-U Vent II Ventilated Locker. d. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.: Gladiator Lockers. e. List Industries Inc.: HDV Lockers. f. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC: Expanded Metal Lockers. g. r ~uQUC aZOre~ystems ~vm~arr~-. ne~avy u vern~a~ Pinnacle Storage Metal Vickers ~?Q~ - . _ (~ f ~h Aid ~ ~ ~~ lest' B. Locker Arrangement: Single tier and Double tier where indicated on Drawings. C. Material: Cold-rolled or Metallio-coated steel sheet. D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with 0.042 inch nominal thickness balks and 0.061 inch nominal-thickness tops, bottoms, and shelves. E. Perforated Sides and Tops: Fabricated from 0.061 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet with manufacturer's standard diamond perforations. 1. Provide units with perforated tops, shelves between stacked un'ds, and as indicated. F. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.053 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet or 0.097 inch nominal-thidcn~s steel angles; lapped and factory welded at comers; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. G. Perforated Doors: 1 piece; fabricated from minimum 0.075 inch nominal thickness steel sheet with manufacturer's standard diamond perforations; formed into channel shape with double bend. 1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforoing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. H. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than 2factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, 5 knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches high. Provide no fewer than 3 hinges for each door more than 42 inches high. I. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond face of door, pry and vandal resistant. 1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-I'~t latch control designed for use with built-in combination locks, built-in cylinder locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelodking. a. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturers standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal krontact, and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locoed while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism. METAL LOCKERS 105113 - 2 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' J. Combination Padlocks: Key-controlled, 3-number dialing combination locks; capable of 5 combination changes with master key. K. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless othervvlse ' Indicated: 1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, 1 double-prong ceiling hook, and 2 single-prong wall hooks. 2. Double-Tier Units: 1double-prong ceiling hook and 2 single-prong wall hooks. ' 3. Coat Rods: For each compartment of single-tier and double-tier metal lockers. L. Accessories: 1. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.042 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet, with a ' pitch of approximately 20 degrees. a. Closures: Vertical-end type. 2. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.042 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 3. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.042 inch nominal thickness steel sheet. ' 4. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.061 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. M. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. ' 1. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 LOCKER BENCHES ' A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches. B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard 1-piece units, with rounded comers and' edges. 1. Size: Minimum 9-12 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick. 2. Laminated clear hardwood with 1 coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and 1 coat of clear lacquer on top and sides. ' C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and one the following: 1. Tubular Steel: 1-12-inch diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners. ~ ' a. Color. Selected by Arohitect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Tubular Steel: 1-1/4-inch diameter steel tubing, with 0.1265-inch thick steel flanges welded at ' top and base; with baked-enamel or powder coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from 1-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation. B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, l -piece assembly. ' C. Knocked-0own Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for nominal assembly at Project site and preassembly at plant prior to shipping. D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: ' 1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches above floor. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 105113 - 3 OF 5 METAL LOCKERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER E. Hooks: Manufacturers standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. F. Identif'~cation Plates: Manufacturers standard, etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high. G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers. 1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered. H. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers. I. Filler Panels: Fabricated In an unequal leg angle shape; finished to math lockers. Provide slip~oint filler angle formed to receive filler panel. J. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 1. Provide 1-piece panels for double-raw (back-to-back) locker ends. K. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers. 2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediatey after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturers standard themnosetting baked~namel finish. Comply with paint manufacturers written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturers standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturers written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches on center. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing .. plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. 2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers. 3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor. B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accuratey together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. Attach hooks with at least 2 fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 aluminum rivets. 4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockere with concealed clips. 5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. 6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lodkers, with closures at exposed ends. 7. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. METAL LOCKERS ~ 105113 - 4 OF 5 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than 2 pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 72 inches apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES END OF SECTION 105113-5 0F5 METAL LOCKERS 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 105116 WOOD LOCKERS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Single- and double-tier wood lockers with solid wood doors. B. Related Section: 1. Section 105113 -Metal Lockers for locker benches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material ' descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood lockers. B. Shop Drawings: For wood lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, Including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in wood lockers. ' 4. Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, and accessories. 5. Show wood locker numbering sequence. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: ' 1. Solid wood with transparent finch, not less than 50 square inches, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1 1 1 'members and 8 by 1 in~q~, Weis. ~or ea Ofi~nish system a I~with 1/2 of expos ce finished. ~Y 3. Vinyl-surfs s, not les n 8 inch c type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Thermoset decorafnie-overt panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and su rnrsh. 5. Comer pi wood locker front frame jo n stiles and rail, as well as exposed e s, not less than 18 inches wide by 18 inches high b 'q~hes deep. xposed cabinet hardware and accessories, l unit for each type . ,~.dd,~') ~~~~~ob F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. G. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork." 1. Provide Wl~ertified k~mmpliance labels and certificates for woodwork. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 105116 -1 OF 8 WOOD LOCKERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood lockers and accessories from single source from single ' manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Where wood lockers are indicated to comply with aocessibiliiy requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." and ICC/ANSI A117.1. E. Modk-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mock-up of typical corner, including 1 wood Ixker on each side of corner and comer filler and 1 door panel with specified door hardware as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless Arohitect spec~caily approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mods-ups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood lockers have been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in other-than-installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final installation location and comply with requiremerrts specified in "Project Conditions" Article. B. Deliver combination control charts to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F and humidify conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood lockers by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed wood support bases. 1. Requirements are specified in Section 061000 -Rough Carpentry. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood lodkers can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wood lodkers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of lodks or hardware. c. Deterioration of wood, wood finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. WOOD LOCKERS 105116 - 2 OF B PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. ' 1. Full-size wood locker doors, complete with specified door hardware. Fumish no fewer than 5 doors of each type and color Installed. 2. Full~ize units of the folkriving wood locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount ' installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than 5 un'ds: a. Hinges. b. Pulls. ' c. Shell rests. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2 1 MANUFACTURERS . A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Imperial 2000 Lockers ' by Ideal Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Classic Woodworking, LLC. . 2. Famous Lockers, Inc. 3. Holtman, Inc. ' 4. Legacy Lockers. 5. Multispace Locker Systems; a dnnsion of Club Resource Group. ' 6. Treeforms. L 2.2 MATERIA S ' A. B Solid Wood (Raised Panel): Clear hardwood lumber, selected for compatible grain and color. P ANSI A208 1 G ti l b d d M 2 . . , ar e oar : ra e - . c C. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1 for application over particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. D. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Specfied in Section 061000 -Rough Carpentry. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. ' 1. Provide nonferrous-meta! or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. ' F. 2. Provide toothed-steel orlead-expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. Wood Support Base: 2-by-4 inch nominal-size lumber treated with manufacturer's standard preservative-treatment process. ' 2.3 WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standani wood locker hardware complying with the requirements in ' this Section. B. Frameless Hinges (European Type): Fully concealed, self-closing, nickel-plated steel, with not Ins than 125 degrees of opening. Nickel plated finish. ' 1. Provide 2 hinges for doors 42 inches high and less. 2. Provide 3 hinges for doors more than 42 inches high. C. Knobs: Metal; back mounted; l inch diameter, ball shape. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 705716 - 3 OF 6 WOOD LOCKERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 632 for steel base; BHMA 605 for brass base, or, 2. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2.4 DOOR LOCKS A. General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide 1 locking device for each wood locker door unless otherwise indicated. B. Built-in Combination Locks: Key-controlled, 3-number dialing combination locks; capabie of at least 5 combination changes made automaticaly with a control key. 2.5 WOOD-FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. Construction Style: Flush overlay. B. Locker Body: Fabricated from particleboard-Dore panels covered on both sides with thermoset decoratve overlay. 1. Side Panels: 5/8 inch thick. 2. Back Panel: 1/4 inch (thick. 3. Top Panel: 3/4 inch thick. 4. Bottom Panel: 3/4 inch thick. 5. Exposed Panel Edges: Thermoset decorative overlay to match panel. C. Flush, Solid Wood Doors: 3/4 inch thick solid wood, end and edge glued; red oak, plain sawn. D. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of wood-faced wood doors. E. Shelves: Fabricated from particleboani-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative overlay; fixed unless otherwise indicated. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Exposed Edges: Thermoset decorative overlay to match panels. F. Corners and Filler Panels: 3/4 inch thick panel. Match style, material, construction, and finish of wood faced wood doors. G. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for doors and fixed panels. 2.6 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Hooks: Manufacturers standard, ball-pointed aluminum or steel; brass or chrome finished. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 1. Provide 2 single-prong wall hooks for each compartment of single-tier wood lockers and 1 double-prong ceiling hook for double-tiered locker. B. Coat Rods: 1 inch diameter steel; brass or chrome finished. 1. Provide coat rod for each compartment of single-tier wood lockers. 2. Provide coat rod in lieu of ceiling hook for wood lockers 24 inches high or taller. C. Door Trays: Fabricated from solid wood, of same species as wood-faced wood doors. D. Number Plates: 1-1/4 inch diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped plates with black numbers and letters at least 12 inch high. Identify wood tickers in sequence indicated on Drawings. Finish plates to match other wood locker hardware. E. Continuous Finish Base: Wood-faced, 3/4 inch thick panel that matches door faces; fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of wood lockers. WOOD LOCKERS 105116 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate each wood locker with shelves, an individual door and frame, an individual top, a bottom, and a bads, and with common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 1. Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 2. Ease edges of comers of solid wood members to 1/16 inch radius. B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches ' and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory. Make joints tight and true. 1. Fabricate wood lockers using manufacturers standard construction with joints made with dowels, dados, or rabbets. ' C. Number Plates: Inlay number plates flush In each wood locker door, near top, centered. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment ' and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, and similar items. Locate ' openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. ' 2.8 FACTORY FINISHES FOR WOOD-FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. General: Finish wood lockers at factory as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, B. cleaning, and polishing until after installation. Preparations for Finishing: Sand, fill countersunk fasteners, seal concealed surfaces, and perform similar preparations for finishing wood lockers, as applicable to each unit of Work. 1. Backpriming: Apply 1 coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood lockers. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastio-laminate-clad wood lockers do not require backpriming when surfaced with thermoset decorative overlay or plastic laminate. ' C. Transparent Finish: Manufacturers standard 2-coat, clear, catalyzed lacquer finish with sanding between coats. Seal with moisture-resistant topcoat. 1. Stain: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for B installation tolerances and other conditions affecting wood locker installation. walls that are to receive wood lockers is attached to concrete and mason rin Ve if th t fu . . ry r y r g a ' 3.2 A. PREPARATION Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. ' B. Before installing wood lockers, examine factory-fabricated Work for completeness and complete Work as required, including removal of packing. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 105116 - 5 OF 6 WOOD LOCKERS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wood support base with 1/2 inch thick plywood top. B. Install wood lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims. C. Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacturers standard fasteners, through predrilled holes, with no e~osed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood kx~cers accurately together to form flush, tight, hairline joints. D. Install wood lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aljgned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings, providing unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch In 96 inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight Ilne. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of wood faced wood lockers. 3. Fasten wood lockers through back, nor top and bottom, at ends w(th fasteners appropriate for anchoring to structure spaced not more than 16 inches on center. 4. Fasten wood lockers through wood locker base, at ends, and not more than ' on center with wood screws sized for 1 inch penetration into wood base. E. Scribe and cut comer and filler panels to fit adjoining Work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Install number plates after wood lockers are in place. 1. Attach number plate on each wood locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 screws with finish matching number plate. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Clean, lubricaite, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. B. Protect wood lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction. C. Touch up rr~rred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or famished by wood locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION V1100D LOCKERS 105116 - B OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER SECTION 105700 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Prefabricated hat and coat racks for storage of clothing including fasteners, braces, clips, and accessories. 2. Wall mounted coat hooks. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturers product description literature covering components of system. ' B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions as well as assembly instructions that may be required. 1.3 WARRANTY ' A. Warrant materials and workmanship for 1 year against defects after completion and final acx:eptance of Work. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Desjgn: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide R1 Coat Rack by EMCO ' Specialty Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Magnuson Group. 2. Raymond Engineering, Inc. 3. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS _ _____ ___ _ __._ A. Mounting Brackets: Solid cast aluminum ~I ~I B. Wall Strips: 1/Z inch extruded aluminum. ~'' ~~ C. Hanger Rod 1 inch aluminum tube capped at each end. ~`I~ D. Shelf Slats: Hardwood in species and fmish selected by Architect from manufacturer's full wood options. E. Metal Finishes: Provide powder coat fmish of metal components in i ma ~ ~ ~t~ rpr's fill wood beige, silver, dark bronze, or black as selected by Architect. ' 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting screws: Provide brecket screws to allow for height adjustment. Size and length as required by shelving manufacturer. ' B. Accessories: Manufacturers hangers spaced 4 per foot. C. Wall Hooks: Wall mounted aluminum wall hooks in style to be selected by Architect from manufacturers full product options. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 105700 -1 OF 2 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. Provide 5 at each coat rack. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions will allow for installatwn of pre-fabricated shelving. B. Verify that wood blocking is installed and ready to receive units. 3.2 INSTALLATION/ERECTION/APPLICATION A. Erect and install shelving units as per Manufacturers recommendations. B. Install un'ds plumb. C. Screw units back to balk or to wall, depending on location. D. Install wall hooks in locations indicated on Drawings for accessbility 3.3 CLEANING/ADJUSTING A. Clean units prior to final inspection. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage that may be caused by Work of others. END OF SECTION WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES 105700 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER i SECTION 107500 FLAGPOLES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ground-mounted flagpoles made from aluminum. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: ' 1. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchoreges and supports, shall withstand effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated per the following design criteria: ' a. Wind Loads: Indicated on Drawings. b. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is•more stringent. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, ' accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground-mounted flagpoles. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and ' anchorege devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose In a hard fiber tube or other protective container. 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flagpoles: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Flagpole; a ICeamey-National Inc. company. 2. Atlantic Fiberglass Products, Inc. 3. Baartol Company. 4. Concord Industries, Inc. 5. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Ewing Flagpoles. 7. Lingo Inc.; Acme Flagpole Company Division. 8. Millerbemd Manufacturing Company. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 107500 -1 OF 3 FLAGPOLES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 9. Morgan-Frencis; Division of Original Trector Cab Co., Inc. 10. Pole-Tech Company Inc. 11. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP. 12. USS Manufacturing Inc. 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Flagpole Construction, Generel: Construct flagpoles in 1 piece if possible. If more than 1 piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-al'~gnin9~ snug fitting, internal sleeves. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet and 35 feet.; 2 each height for a total of 4 units. C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide entasis-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B241/B241 M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass or PVC pipe foundation sleeve, made to fd flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturers standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063 inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. B. Internal Hayard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless-steel cable hayard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. 1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 2 stainless-steel swivel snap hooks per halyard. a. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2.4 FLAGS A. Flags: By Owner. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. B. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. C. Sand: ASTM C33, flue aggregate. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Comply with requirements in Section 079200 -Joint Sealants for Use NT (nontreffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use 0. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion compying with ASTM D1187. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearence of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrest. FLAGPOLES 107500 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mrn or thicker. ' PART 3 - F~CECUTION ' 3.1 F_XAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern, orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting performance of the Wor1c. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. ' D. Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days or use nonstaining curing compound. ' E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.3 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION . ' A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and per approved Shop Dn~wings and manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Ground Set: Place sleeve, center, and brace to prevent displacement during. concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level sleeve and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole, plumb, in sleeve. 1. Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation ' tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2 inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and ever with flashing collar. ' END OF SECTION ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 107500 - 3 OF 3 FLAGPOLES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY 1 ii A. Section Includes: 1. Gun lockers. 2. Evidence lockers. 3. Trensaction drawers. 4. Package receivers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS SECTION 111900 DETENTION EQUIPMENT COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for detention equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Indicate locations, dimensions, and profiles of wall and floor reinforcements. 2. Indicate Iocatiohs and installation details of built-in anchors. 3. Show elevations of detention equipment and indicate dimensions of equipment, preparations for receiving anchors, and locations of anchorage. 4. Shaw details of attachment of detention equipment to built-in anchors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Member in good standing of The American Jail Association. 2. Member in good standing of The American Correctional Association. 3. Member in good standing of The National Correctional Industries Association. B. Source Limitations for Detention Equipment: Obtain each type of detention equipment from single source from single manufacturer to greatest extent possible. C. Welding Qualifccations: Qualify procedures and personnel per the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structurel Welding Code -Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.t3, "Structural Welding Code -Stainless Steel " 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings for recessed detention equipment by field measurements before fabrication. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for detention equipment. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in adjacent construction. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions and blocking correspond to dimensions required for recessed detention equipment. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 111900 -1 OF 8 DETENTION EQUIPMENT COLUMBIA HEIGHTS ' PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1.6 WARRANTY A. Fumish manufacturer's standard warranty document in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within specfied warranty period. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights Owner has under Contract. 1. Warranty Period: 4 years parts and labor from date of installation. 2. Failures include the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. b. Failure of welds. c. Excessive air leakage. d. Faulty operation of transaction drawers. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and ident~ed with labels describing contents. 1. Security Fasteners: Fumish not less than 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type and size of security fastener installed. 2. Tools: Provide 2 sets of tools for installing and removing security fasteners. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Colo-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008IA1008M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A513, Type B unless otherwise indicated; thickness indicated or required by structural loads. E. Concealed Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select perAWS specifications. 2.2 PISTOL LOCKERS A. Tilt-Out, Pistol Locker. Fully assembled, individually keyed drop-off locker units fabricated from cold rolled steel. Provide instruction and number tags on front of each door. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FL 708-6 Pistol Locker by Fasoo Securely Products., or a comparable product by one of the folk„nring: b. American Jail Products, LLC: Pistol Locker (Tilt Out), No. 326-6. o. American Locker Security Systems, Inc. d. Chief Industries, Inc., Custom Products Division: 6 Compartment (Teel Door), PL106TR. e. DDS Group, Detent'ron Products Division: Pistol Locker, Tilt-0ut Style, Model 7405- 2x3. f. Tiffin Metal Products: 0192S Sidearm Locker. 2. Cabinet: 6-compartment units, minimum 35 inches wide by 29-1/2 inches hjgh by 6 inches deep; formed from 0.123 inch nominal thickness steel sheet. Line each compartment with 1/8 inch thick mothproofed felt. DETENTION EQUIPMENT 111900 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 3. Doors: Formed from same material as cebinet, supported by heavy~fuly continuous bottom piano hinge, with attached tilt-out compartment with formed metal sides. a. Door Size: 15-1/2 inches wide by 8-1/2 inches high. ' 4. locks: Cylinder type, keyed differently and master keyed; provide 1 lock for each compartment. 5. Mounting: Recessed, with mounting flange formed from same material as body. ' 6. Finish: Factory primed for field painting. B. Evidence Lockers: Fully assembled, unattended, key-less drop off evidence locker units fabricated from 0.067 inch cold rolled steel, welded construction. Provide instruction and number tags on front ' of each door. 1. Basis-of-D~ign Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ED3-P-01 by DSM Law Enforcement Products, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American Locker Security Systems, Inc.: Statesman Evidence Lockers. ' b. Chief Industries, Inc., Custom Products Division. c. DeBourgh Mfg. Co. d. Fasco Security Products. ' e. PSI LLC. f. Tiffin Metal Products. 2. Doors: Self-closing, formed from 0.042 inch nominal~hickness steel sheet, supported by ' heavy-duty stainless steel continuous hinge. Provide doors with rubber door stops and flush mounted nickel pull handles and multi-point locking. a. Rear Door: 33 inches wide by 75 inches high with keyed handle. 3. Mounting: Recessed, with mounting flange formed from same material as body. ' 4. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 5. Size: 82 inches high in the folkriving door configurations: a. 1 B-type door. 14-9/16 inches wide by 74-3/4 inches high. ' b. 1 D Type door. 14-9/16 inches wide by 37-1/4 inches high. c. 2 E type door: 149/16 inches wide by 18-5/8 inches high. C. Transaction Drawers: Bullet-resistant sliding transaction drawer with dip tray and drawer cover. ' fabricated from 0.053 inch steel with 0.093 inch stainless steel drawer front, 0.093 inch stainless steel top and front, stainless steel drawer, and 0.053 inch stainless steel flange frame, stainless dip tray, and stainless steel sliding drawer cover with UL Listed non-ricochet bullet n~sistant fiberglass offering the specfied level of protection. Provide drawer with sl'~ding tracks and stainless steel ' actuating hgndle. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model 6003 by Armortex Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Quikserv Corp. b. Pacific Bulletproof Co. c. Shure Manufacturing Company. 2. Finish: Wo. 3 stainless steel. 3. Size: 24 inches wide by 11-3/4 inches high by 28 inches deep with a 10-1/2 inches maximum travel drawer opening projection. 4. Opening Security Level: Withstand bullet resistance Level 3, per UL 752. ' D. Transparent Package Receiver: Laminated polycerbonate, minimum 1-1/4 inch thick with polished edges, conforms to offering specked level of protection. Provide doors with interlocking mechanism, automatic door closer on threat side door, threat side door lockout controlled from safe side, key locking on safe side door, and installation flanges as standard features. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model SSPRVP- 2424 by Amwrtex Inc. or approved substitution. a. Advanced Protection Products, Inc. ' b. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. c. Pacific Bulletproof Co. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 111900 - 3 OF 8 DETENTION EQUIPMENT COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 2. Size: 24 inches wide by 24 inches high by 24 inches deep. 3. Opening Security Level: Wdhstand bullet resistance Level 3, per UL 752. 2.3 SECURITY SEALANTS A. Manufacturer's standard, high-modulus, nonsag, 2-part, pick-proof, epoxy slant, with VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated per 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing nonmoving interior joints in security applications. 1. Producfts: Subject to compl~nce with requirements, provide one of the following: ' a. BASF Building Systems: Epolith-G. b. Pecos Corporation: DynaPoxy EP-1200. 4 SECURITY FASTENERS ' 2. A. Fasteners operebie only by tools produced by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator for use on specific type of fastener. ' B. Provide drive-system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength, and as follows: FABRICATION ' 2.5 A. Shop Assemby: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use ' connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Cleariy mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of detention equipment with those of adjoining ' construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indksrted. C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. ' D. Form and grind edges and comers to be free of sharp edges or rough areas. 1. Fabricate detention equipment with no more than 1/32 inch gap between component ~ materials. Weld edges that cannot be crimped to meet tiolerance so as to provide a stemless ' joint with no place for concealment of contraband. E. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing Work. ' F. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with referenced AWS standard and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. ' 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overiap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended at exposed connections so that no , roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. ' G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure detention equipment rigidly in place and to support expected loads. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining ' construction. Reinforce formed-metal units as needed to attach and support other construction. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap detention equipment as indicated to receive hardware, security fasteners, and similar items. ' DETENTION EQUIPMENT 111900 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , 1 1 COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces, and straight sharp edges. J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed security fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, flat-head (countersunk) security fasteners. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturers standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturers standard 2-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and themnosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturers written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gbss: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. B. Intermediate Polish Finish: No. 4 unless otherwise indicated. C. When polishing is completed, passiva~ and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of detention equipment. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of detention equipment before detention equipment installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of detention equipment. D. Verify locations of detention equipment with those indicated on Shop Drawings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing detention equipment to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, security fasteners, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Obtain manufacturers written approval for.cuttirlg, drilling, and fitting required for installing detention equipment. Set detention equipment accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured _ from established lines and levels. PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 111900 - 5 OF 6 DETENTION EQUIPMENT COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concr~ or masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joir>ts but cannot be shop welded because of shipping s¢e limitations. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosan resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Fillet Welds: Minimum size of 1/8 inch by 1-1/2 inches long, spaced not greater than 12 inches on center. Fill spaces between welds with securely sealant where weld is exposed. 6. Fillet Welds: Continuous. F. Adjust doors and latches of gun lockers and key cabinets to operate easiy without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. G. Assemble detention equipment requiring field assembly with security fasteners with no exposed fasteners on exposed faces and frames. H. Anchor equipment with security fasteners or as indicated on Drawings to floors and walls at intervals required by expected loads, but not more than 12 inches on center. 1. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion. 2. Use security fasteners with head styles appropriate for installation requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials, except that a maximum of 2 different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project 3. Weld nuts onto cast-in-place anchors after installation so as to be nonr~novable. I. Apply security sealant at exposed gaps between detention equipment and adjacent construction greater than 1/16 inch. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed products to verify compliance with requirements. Prepare inspection reports and indicate compliance with and deviations from Contract Documents. B. Prepare field quality-control certification that states installed products and their installation comply with requirements in Contract Documents. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching upshop-painted surtaces. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of boned connections and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000 -Painting and Coating ' END OF SECTION ' DETENTION EQUIPMENT 111900 - 6 OF 8 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS ' At moms to receive blinds provide blinds at the arches in windows. Blinds need not retract up into arch, however they shall articulate. ~/.~-~ /,~~~ PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Hor¢ontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. B Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D i Sh Sh f b i ti d i t ll ti d t il f h i t l l bli d . raw ow r on n op ngs: a ca on an ns a a e a s or or zon ouver s. a C. Samples: For each exposed finish. ' D. Maintenance data. ' 1.3 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics Indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identdy materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Basis-of-0esign Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Riviera by Levelor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company, or a comparable product by one of the following: ' 1. Hunter Douglas. 2. Spring Window Fashions Division, Inc. B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; ' with crowned profile and rediused comers. 1. 111Adth: 1 inch. 2. Finish: One color. ' a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. b. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing refbction of solar energy on outside-facing slat surface. ' C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fuly enclosing operating mechanisms on 3 sides and end plugs. ' D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded,aluminum tube, with plastic ormetal-capped ends. E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string. t a. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. F. Lift Cords: Manufacturers standard. ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 122113 -1 OF 2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER G. Tilt Control: Enclosed womt-gear mechanism and linkage rod. H. Lift Operation: Manual. I. Valance: Manufacturers standard. J. Mounting: Selected by Architect. K. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturers standard. L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOWER BLIND FABRICATION A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: Wdh permanently lubricated moving parts. B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows: 1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headreil, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and acxa3ssories under conditions of normal use. E. Color-Coated Metal Finish: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturers standard baked finish. F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal buver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units per manufacturers written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearences between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. B. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. C. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation per manufacturers written instructions. END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 2 OF 2 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES ' 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Recessed foot grilles and frames. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: ' 1. Structural Performance: Provide foot grilles and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses: a. Uniform floor load of 300 pound-force per square foot. b. Wheel load of 350 pounds per wheel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for foot grilles and frames. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: ' 1. Items penetrating foot grilles and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions betureen grille sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. ' C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated. 1. Foot Grille: 12 inch square assembled sections. 2. Frame Members: 12 inch long Sample of each type and oobr. ' D. Maintenance Data: For foot grilles and frames to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' ~ A. Souroe Limitations: Obtain foot grilles and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed foot grilles that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural 8 Transportation Barriers Compliance Boani's "Americans w(th Disabilities Act (ADA), ' Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive foot grilles and frames. ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Basis-of-0esign Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pedigrid G1 by C/S Group, or a comparable product by one of the following: ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 124816 -1 OF 3 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 1. ARDEN Architecturel Specialties, Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. Kadee Industries. 4. Mats, Inc. 5. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division. 6. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM 6221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52 as standard with manufacturer. Coat surface of freme in contact with cementitious materials with manufacturer's standard protective coating. B. Grout: Concrete grout and fill equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recs~ssed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than 1/3 fill thickness. 2.3 FOOT GRILLES A. Generel: Provide manufacturers standard foot-grille assemblies consisting of treads of type and profile indicated, interlocked or joined together by cross members, and with support legs (if any) and other components needed to produce a complete installation. B. Aluminum Foot Grilles: Provide manufacturers standard foot grilles with extruded members, top- surfaced tread rails, and as follows: 1. Tread Rails: Factruded-aluminum tread rails with extruded aluminum frame. 2. Tread Rail Spacing: 1-1/2 inches on center with 1/8 to 3/18 inch wide openings between treads. 3. Aluminum Finish: Milt. a. Colors: Cl~r natural aluminum. 4. Top Surface: Fusion-bonded, leve~cut-pile nybn carpet insert 1/4 inch high, 28 ounces per square yard. a Colors: Selected by Arohited from manufacturers full range. 5. Grille S¢e: As indicated on Drawings. C. Lodcdown: Manufacturers standard, hidden. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide manufacturers standard fn~mes of size and style for grille iype, for permanent recessed ' installation in subfloor, complete with installation anchorages and accessories. Unless othenMSe indicated, fabricate frame of same material and finish as grilles. 2.5 SUPPORT SYSTEM , A. Level Bed Applications: Provide manufacturers standani, vinyl cushion support system. B. Drainage Pit Applications: Provide manufacturers special deep-pit frame and support extrusion ' system with intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for indicated spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions. 2.6 DRAIN PANS ' A. Provide manufacturers standard, 0.060 inch thick, aluminum or stainless~teel sheet drain pan with NPS 2 drein outlet for each floor grille unit. Coat bottom of pan with protective coating , recommended by manufacturer. ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 124816 - 2 OF 3 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES , I COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' 2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate foot grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum ' saes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available ' lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. 1 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Arcli~tectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designat(ons prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. ' B. MIII Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated); grind and buff as required to remove scratches, welding, or abrasions produced in fabrication process. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.7 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compl'~ance with requirements for location, size, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of foot grilles and frames. B. Examine roughing-in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before foot grille and frame and drain pan installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install recessed foot grilles and frames and drain pans to comply with manufacturers written instructions at bcatlons indicated and with top of foot grilles and frames in relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring as recommended by manufacturer. Set foot-grille tops at height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of foot-grille surfaces with doors that swing ' across grilles to provide clearance under door. 3.3 PROTECTION ' A. After completing frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in foot-grille recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ~~ PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 124818 - 3 OF 3 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 1 ' COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' SECTION 142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART1-GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hydraulic passenger elevators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and ' similar infom~ration. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other ' construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specfed requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. ' C. Samples: For exposed finishes. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoisiway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and ' specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for nomtal, unrestricted elevator use. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation ' Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ' 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturers Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator Work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completron. 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 1 years full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity - _, A ' 1+Tote, at both elevator locations provide equipment, cylinders length, controls and all other required systems for l t l h ~ IDa a ever a . . ower e a stop at a future upper level. Provide systems and controls to facilitate card access to t I~'~ elevator B. _ _--- - --- ' PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 142400 -1 OF 6 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-0f-D~ign Product: Design for hydraulic elevators is based on Seville 35 by ThyssenKrupp Elevator. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. KONE Corporation. 2. Minnesota Elevator, Inc. 3. Otis Elevator Company. 4. Schindler Elevator Corp. 2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, inGuding standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation befinreen no load and fu11 load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1 inch thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Submersible pump, suspended inside oii tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with wye-delta or solid-state starting. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout- proof housing at pump unit. D. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturers standard fluid wRh additives as needed to prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects. E. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily b'wdegradable made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, ant'K;orrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc. F. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1 inch clearance from cylinder and extending above fit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1. G. Guides: Provide e'dher roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or poymer-coated, nonlubricated guides. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation system indicated. B. Auxiliary Operations: 1. Battery-Powered Lowering: When power fails, car is lowered to lowest floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system. 2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor- controlied, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of 1 or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 2 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES fl ' COLUAABIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER ' B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from dosing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin th close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.5 FINISH MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, commerolal steel, Type B, exposed. ' B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304. C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304. ' D. Stainless~teel Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304. E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 8221, Alloy 6063. F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL. ' 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide steehframed car enclosuna3 with nonremovable enameled-steel car enclosures to ' receive removable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. 2. Plastio-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard core with manufacturers standard protective edge trim. Plastic-laminate Dolor, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastio-laminate manufacturer's full renge, side and rear car enclosure. ' 3. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface,1/4 inch thick. 5. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of trenslucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. ' 2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturers standard horizontal-sliding, .door~and-frame hoistway entrences complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. ' 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self~upporting frames with reinforoed head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturers standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless~teel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface,1/4 inch thick. ' 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. 2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hail-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-I'~fe incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs. ' B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturers standard car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated. ' C. ~ Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural 8 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials ,~ PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 14?A00 - 3 OF 6 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides 2 way voice communication without using handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Firefighters' 2-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' 2way telephone communication serv'~ce specified in Section 283100 -Fire Detection and Alarm. E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. F. Hall Lanterns: Units wfth illuminated arrows. 1. Manufacturer's standard wall~rrounted units, for mounting above entrance fremes. 2. Units mounted in bath jambs of entrance frame of each elevator. G. Hall Annunciator. Wdh each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. H. Corridor Call Station Pictogreph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. ELEVATORS A. ELEVATORS A and B: 1. Type: Conventional, under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 3500 pound. 3. Rated Speed: 100 fpm. 4. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 5. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. 6. Car Endosures: a. Inside Width: 80 inches clear from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 65 inches clear from back wall to front wall (n:tum panels). c. Inside Height 96 inches to underside of ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Door Faces (Interior): Enameled steel. h. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides and rear of car. i. Floor prepared to receive resilient the (specified in Section 093000 Tiling). 7. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches. b. Height: 84 inches. c. Type: Single peed center sliding. d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 8. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 9. Addftional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under aaylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. b. Provide blanket hooks and 2 complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets. 2.9 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 4 OF 6 PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER I ' j PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verily critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator Work is to be installed. ' 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in elevator pit to acxommodate installation of cylinder; comply ' with applicable requirements in Section 312000 -Earth Moving. B. Provide waterproof well casing as necessary to retain walls of well hole. C. Install cylinder in protective casing within well hole. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole. 1. Align cylinders and fill space around protective casing with fine sand. D. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. E. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spaang needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. F. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator Work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of wom parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. G. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure- ' home noise from elevator system. .. H. Install piping above floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cemented fittings. ' I. Install piping above floor, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrepping before backFilling. ' J. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. K. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where passible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearences to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. L. Leveling Tolerence: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. M. Set sills flush with finished floor surtace at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. i N. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: .~ 1. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 2. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 1 ~ PHASE THREE -BID PACKAGES 142400 - 5 OF 6 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS COLUMBIA HEIGHTS PUBLIC SERVICE CENTER 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL , A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform axeptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Comply with the folknnring requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of flnlshed car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 3. Engage elevator installer to provide full maintenance service. 4. Engage elevator installer to restore damaged Work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required repairs and ' reFnish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION ' A. Engage a factory,authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Section 017900 -Demonstration and Training. B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning propery. C. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than 1 month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 6 OF 6 PHASE.THREE -BID PACKAGES